Disclaimer

The following online version of the Owner’s Man-

ual describes all models as well as all the stand-
ard and optional equipment of your vehicle. Coun-
try-specific differences in the language variants
are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be
fitted with all features described. This is also the
case for safety-relevant systems and functions.
Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz
dealer if you would like to have a printed Owner’s
Manual for other vehicle models and vehicle
model years. The online version is the current
valid Owner’s Manual version. Possible variations
to your vehicle may not be taken into account as
Mercedes-Benz constantly updates their vehicles
and equipment to the state of the art and introdu-
ces changes in design and equipment.
Please also read the printed Owner’s Manual, any
supplementary documents and the digital Own-
er’s Manual in the vehicle.

Copyright
All Rights Reserved. All texts, images, graphics,
are subject to Copyright and other laws for the
protection of intellectual property. They may not
be copied for commercial purposes or for trans-
mission, nor changed and used on other websites.
 GLK-Class
Owner's Manual

É2045844283Z102ZËÍ
2045844283Z102
GLK-Class

Order no. 65150801 02 Part no. 2045844283Z102 Edition ÄJ 2013-Ka

Symbols Publication details
In this manual, you will find the following sym- Internet
bols:
G WARNING Further information about Mercedes-Benz
vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
Warning notes make you aware dangers
on the following websites:
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others. http://www.mercedes-benz.com
http://www.daimler.com
H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or Editorial office
disposal.
You are welcome to forward any queries or
! Notes on material damage alert you to suggestions you may have regarding this
dangers that could lead to damage to your Owner's Manual to the technical documenta-
vehicle. tion team at the following address:
Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,
i These symbols indicate useful instruc-
70546 Stuttgart, Germany
tions or further information that could be ©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated
helpful to you.
or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
X This symbol designates an instruc- without written permission from Daimler AG.
tion you must follow.
X Several consecutive symbols indi-
cate an instruction with several Vehicle manufacturer
steps.
(Y page) This symbol tells you where you Daimler AG
can find further information on a Mercedesstraße 137
topic. 70327 Stuttgart
YY This symbol indicates a warning or Germany
an instruction that is continued on
the next page.
Display This text indicates a message on
the multifunction/COMAND dis-
play.
Parts of the software in the vehicle are pro-
tected by copyright © 2005
The FreeType Project
http://www.freetype.org. All rights
reserved.

As at 31.10.2012
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz The technical documentation team at
Before you first drive off, read this Owner's Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
Manual carefully and familiarise yourself with motoring.
your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer
vehicle life, follow the instructions and warn-
ing notices in this manual. Disregarding them
may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal
injury.
The equipment or model designation of your
vehicle may vary according to:
RModel
ROrder
RCountry variant
RAvailability

The illustrations in this manual show a left-

hand-drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehi-
cles, the layout of components and controls
differs accordingly.
Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its
vehicles to the state of the art.
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right
to introduce changes in the following areas:
RDesign
REquipment
RTechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
ROwner's Manual
RService Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements

Keep printed copies of the documents in the

vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle,
always pass the documents on to the new
owner.
i You can get to know the important fea-
tures of your vehicle in the interactive Own-
er's Manual on the Internet at:
http://www.mercedes-benz.de/
betriebsanleitung

2045844283Z102 É2045844283Z102ZËÍ
 Contents 3

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 31

Introduction ......................................... 25 Safety ................................................... 43

Opening and closing ........................... 79

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors . . 101

Lights and windscreen wipers ......... 115

Climate control ................................. 133

Driving and parking .......................... 153

On-board computer and displays .... 235

Stowing and features ....................... 309

Maintenance and care ...................... 325

Breakdown assistance ..................... 339

Wheels and tyres .............................. 357

Technical data ................................... 379

4 Index

1, 2, 3 ... Active light function ......................... 120

Active Park Assist
12-button multifunction steering Display message ............................ 285
wheel Active Parking Assist
Operating the on-board computer . 240 Cancelling ...................................... 205
Overview .......................................... 38 Detecting parking spaces .............. 202
12 V socket Exiting a parking space .................. 204
see Socket Important safety notes .................. 201
360° camera Parking .......................................... 203
Function/notes ............................. 210 Towing a trailer .............................. 205
4-button multifunction steering Adaptive brake lamps ......................... 71
wheel Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Operating the on-board computer . 237 Display message (12-button mul-
Overview .......................................... 37 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 275
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel Function/notes ............................. 122
drive) .................................................. 225 Switching on/off ........................... 122
Adaptive Main-beam Assist
A Switching on/off (on-board com-
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) puter) ............................................. 252
Display message (12-button mul- AdBlue®
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 264 Display message (12-button mul-
Display message (4-button multi- tifunction steering wheel) .............. 281
function steering wheel) ................ 259 Display message (4-button multi-
Function/notes ................................ 69 function steering wheel) ................ 277
Important safety notes .................... 69 Filling capacity ............................... 387
Warning lamp ................................. 299 Important safety notes .................. 386
Activating/deactivating air-recir- Service indicator ............................ 327
culation mode .................................... 144 AdBlue® service indicator ................ 327
Activating/deactivating cooling Additional speedometer ................... 250
with air dehumidification ................. 138 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 388
Active Blind Spot Assist Adjusting the headlamp range ......... 118
Display message (12-button mul- Airbags
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 284 Front airbag (driver, front
Function/notes ............................. 220 passenger) ....................................... 48
Switching on/off (on-board com- Important safety guidelines ............. 46
puter, 12-button multifunction Kneebag ........................................... 48
steering wheel) .............................. 249 Pelvis airbag .................................... 49
Towing a trailer .............................. 222 Sidebag ............................................ 49
Active Driving Assistance package . 220 Triggering ......................................... 45
Active Lane Keeping Assist Windowbag ...................................... 50
Display message (12-button mul- Air-conditioning system
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 284 see Climate control
Function/notes ............................. 222 Air filter
Switching on/off (on-board com- Display message (12-button mul-
puter, 12-button multifunction tifunction steering wheel) .............. 281
steering wheel) .............................. 249 Display message (4-button multi-
Towing a trailer ...................... 220, 225 function steering wheel) ................ 277
 Index 5

AIR FLOW ........................................... 140 Audio menu (on-board computer,

Air pressure 12-button multifunction steering
see Tyre pressure wheel) ................................................. 245
Air vents Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 245
Glove compartment ....................... 151 Authorised workshop
Important safety notes .................. 150 see Qualified specialist workshop
Rear ............................................... 152 AUTO lights
Setting ........................................... 150 Display message (12-button mul-
Setting the centre air vents ........... 151 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 275
Setting the side air vents ............... 151 Display message (4-button multi-
Alarm system function steering wheel) ................ 272
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) see Lights
Anti-glare film .................................... 324 Automatic engine start (ECO start/
Anti-lock braking system stop function) .................................... 160
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
Anti-Theft Alarm system start/stop function) .......................... 159
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Automatic headlamp mode .............. 117
Approach/departure angle .............. 182 Automatic transmission
Aquaplaning ....................................... 178 Accelerator pedal position ............. 165
Ashtray ............................................... 319 Automatic drive program ............... 167
Assistance graphic (on-board com- Changing gear ............................... 165
puter, 12-button multifunction DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 163
steering wheel) .................................. 248 Display message (4-button multi-
ASSYST PLUS function steering wheel) ................ 291
Displaying a service message ........ 326 Driving tips .................................... 165
Hiding a service message .............. 326 Emergency running mode .............. 170
Notes ..................................... 326, 327 Engaging drive position .................. 165
Resetting the service interval dis- Engaging neutral ............................ 165
play ................................................ 327 Engaging park position automati-
Service message ............................ 326 cally ............................................... 164
Special service requirements ......... 327 Engaging reverse gear ................... 164
ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Engaging the park position ............ 164
Activating/deactivating ................... 75 Kickdown ....................................... 166
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Manual drive program .................... 167
Function ........................................... 75 Manual drive program (vehicles
Interior motion sensor ..................... 76 with Sports package AMG) ............ 168
Switching off the alarm .................... 75 Overview ........................................ 163
Tow-away protection ........................ 76 Problem (fault) ............................... 170
ATTENTION ASSIST Program selector button ................ 166
Activating/deactivating ................. 249 Pulling away ................................... 158
Display message (12-button mul- Starting the engine ........................ 157
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 283 Steering wheel gearshift paddles ... 167
Function/notes ............................. 214 Trailer towing ................................. 166
Audio DVD (12-button multifunc- Transmission position display ........ 164
tion steering wheel) .......................... 245 Transmission positions .................. 165
Automatic transmission emer-
gency running mode ......................... 170
6 Index

Automatic transmissions Belt tensioner

Display message (12-button mul- Activation ......................................... 45
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 293 Function ........................................... 56
Auxiliary heating Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating ................. 146 Activating/deactivating ................. 249
Activating/deactivating (on the Display message (12-button mul-
centre console) .............................. 147 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 284
Display message (12-button mul- Notes/function .............................. 216
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 294 Trailer towing ................................. 218
Important safety notes .................. 146 see Active Blind Spot Assist
Problem (display message) ............ 150 BlueTEC (AdBlue®) ............................. 386
Remote control .............................. 147 Bonnet
Setting (on-board computer, 12- Closing ........................................... 329
button multifunction steering Display message (12-button mul-
wheel) ............................................ 254 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 293
Setting the departure time ............. 148 Display message (4-button multi-
Auxiliary ventilation function steering wheel) ................ 292
Activating/deactivating ................. 146 Important safety notes .................. 328
Activating/deactivating (on the Opening ......................................... 328
centre console) .............................. 147 Brake Assist
Problem (display message) ............ 150 see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Remote control .............................. 147 Brake fluid
Display message (12-button mul-
B tifunction steering wheel) .............. 266
Display message (4-button multi-
Bag hook ............................................ 314
function steering wheel) ................ 261
Ball coupling
Notes ............................................. 388
Fitting ............................................ 230
Brake lamp
Removing ....................................... 233
Display message (12-button mul-
Storing ........................................... 233
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 273
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 69
Display message (4-button multi-
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
function steering wheel) ................ 270
PLUS) .................................................... 70
Brake lamps
Battery (key)
Adaptive ........................................... 71
Checking .......................................... 83
Brakes
Important safety notes .................... 83
ABS .................................................. 69
Replacing ......................................... 83
BAS .................................................. 69
Battery (vehicle)
BAS PLUS ........................................ 70
Charging ........................................ 348
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 388
Display message (12-button mul-
Display message (12-button mul-
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 280
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 264
Display message (4-button multi-
Display message (4-button multi-
function steering wheel) ................ 276
function steering wheel) ................ 259
Important safety notes .................. 345
Driving tips .................................... 177
Jump starting ................................. 349
Important safety notes .................. 177
Belt
Parking brake ........................ 175, 178
see Seat belt
Warning lamp ................................. 299
Belt force limiters (activation) ........... 45
 Index 7

Breakdown Changing bulbs

see Flat tyre Cornering light function ................. 127
see Towing away/tow-starting Dipped-beam headlamps ............... 125
Bulbs Main-beam headlamps ................... 126
see Replacing bulbs Parking lamps (front) ..................... 126
Reversing lamps ............................ 127
C Standing lamps .............................. 126
Turn signals (front) ......................... 126
Calling up a fault
Turn signals (rear) .......................... 127
see Display messages Child-proof locks
Car
Important safety notes .................... 67
see Vehicle Rear doors ....................................... 67
Care Children
Automatic car wash ....................... 333 In the vehicle ................................... 57
Carpets .......................................... 338 Restraint systems ............................ 57
Display ........................................... 337 Child seat
Exterior lighting ............................. 335
Automatic recognition ..................... 59
Gear or selector lever .................... 337
ISOFIX .............................................. 60
High-pressure cleaner .................... 333
On the front-passenger seat ............ 58
Interior ........................................... 337
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 67
Matt paintwork .............................. 334
Recommendations ........................... 65
Notes ............................................. 332
Suitable positions ............................ 63
Paint .............................................. 334
Top Tether ....................................... 61
Plastic trim .................................... 337
Cigarette lighter ................................ 320
Reversing camera .......................... 336
Cleaning
Roof lining ...................................... 338
Mirror turn signal ........................... 335
Seat belt ........................................ 338
Trailer tow hitch ............................. 336
Seat cover ..................................... 338
Climate control
Sensors ......................................... 336
Adjusting airflow (AIR FLOW) ......... 140
Steering wheel ............................... 337
Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 146
Tail pipes ....................................... 336
Controlling automatically ............... 140
Trim pieces .................................... 338
Convenience opening/closing
Washing by hand ........................... 333
(air-recirculation mode) ................. 144
Wheels ........................................... 334
Cooling with air dehumidification . . 138
Windows ........................................ 335
Demisting the windows .................. 143
Wiper blades .................................. 335
Demisting the windscreen ............. 142
Wooden trim .................................. 338
Important safety notes .................. 134
Car wash (care) ................................. 333
Indicator lamp ................................ 140
CD player/CD changer (12-button
Notes on using THERMATIC auto-
multifunction steering wheel) .......... 245
matic climate control ..................... 135
Central locking
Notes on using THERMOTRONIC
Automatic locking (on-board com-
automatic climate control .............. 138
puter) ............................................. 253
Overview of systems ...................... 134
Locking/unlocking (key) .................. 81
Problems with cooling with air
Centre console
dehumidification ............................ 140
Lower section .................................. 40 Problem with the rear window
Upper section .................................. 39 heating .......................................... 144
Rear control panel ......................... 137
8 Index

Setting the air distribution ............. 141 Temperature gauge (12-button

Setting the airflow ......................... 142 multifunction steering wheel) ........ 239
Setting the air vents ...................... 150 Temperature gauge (4-button
Setting the temperature ................ 141 multifunction steering wheel) ........ 236
Switching air-recirculation mode Warning lamp ................................. 304
on/off ............................................ 144 Cooling
Switching on/off ........................... 138 see Climate control
Switching residual heat on/off ...... 145 Copyright ............................................. 29
Switching the rear window heat- Cornering lamps
ing on/off ...................................... 143 Changing bulbs .............................. 127
Switching the ZONE function on/ Cornering light function
off .................................................. 142 Display message (12-button mul-
THERMATIC automatic climate tifunction steering wheel) .............. 272
control (2-zone) ............................. 135 Display message (4-button multi-
THERMOTRONIC (3-zone) auto- function steering wheel) ................ 269
matic climate control ..................... 137 Function/notes ............................. 121
Clock Cover
Setting (4-button multifunction see Roller sunblind
steering wheel) .............................. 239 Crash-responsive emergency light-
Coat hooks ......................................... 317 ing ....................................................... 124
Cockpit Cruise control
Overview .......................................... 32 Cruise control lever ....................... 183
see Instrument cluster Deactivating ................................... 185
Collapsible emergency spare Display message (12-button mul-
wheel tifunction steering wheel) .............. 287
see Emergency spare wheel Display message (4-button multi-
COMAND Online function steering wheel) ................ 282
see separate operating instructions Driving system ............................... 183
Combination switch .......................... 119 Important safety notes .................. 183
Constant headlamp mode LIM indicator lamp ......................... 183
see Daytime driving lights Selecting ........................................ 184
Consumption statistics Setting a speed .............................. 185
On-board computer (12-button Storing and maintaining current
multifunction steering wheel) ........ 242 speed ............................................. 184
On-board computer (4-button Cup holder
multifunction steering wheel) ........ 238 Centre console .............................. 319
Convenience closing feature .............. 95 Important safety notes .................. 319
Convenience opening/closing (air- Rear compartment ......................... 319
recirculation mode) ........................... 144
Convenience opening feature ............ 95 D
Coolant (engine)
Dashboard lighting
Checking the level ......................... 331
see Instrument cluster lighting
Display message (12-button mul-
Data
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 278
see Technical data
Display message (4-button multi-
Date
function steering wheel) ................ 275
Setting (4-button multifunction
Important safety notes .................. 388
steering wheel) .............................. 239
 Index 9

Daytime driving lamps Tyres .............................................. 289

Switching on/off (on-board com- Vehicle ........................................... 293
puter, 12-button multifunction Display message (4-button multi-
steering wheel) .............................. 251 function steering wheel)
Daytime driving lights ASSYST PLUS ................................ 326
Display message (12-button mul- Calling up ....................................... 257
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 274 Driving systems ............................. 282
Display message (4-button multi- Engine ............................................ 275
function steering wheel) ................ 271 General notes ................................ 257
Switching on/off (on-board com- Hiding ............................................ 257
puter, 4-button multifunction Key ................................................ 295
steering wheel) .............................. 238 KEYLESS-GO .................................. 295
Switching on/off (switch) .............. 117 Lights ............................................. 269
Declarations of conformity ................. 27 Safety systems .............................. 259
Delayed switch-off Tyres .............................................. 288
Exterior lighting (12-button multi- Vehicle ........................................... 291
function steering wheel) ................ 252 Distance recorder
Interior lighting (12-button multi- 12-button multifunction steering
function steering wheel) ................ 253 wheel ............................................. 242
Diagnostics connection ...................... 27 Distance warning signal (warning
Diesel .................................................. 385 lamp) .................................................. 306
Digital speedometer ......................... 243 DISTRONIC PLUS
Dipped beam Activation conditions ..................... 189
Display message (4-button multi- Deactivating ................................... 194
function steering wheel) ................ 269 Display message (12-button mul-
Dipped-beam headlamps tifunction steering wheel) .............. 286
Changing bulbs .............................. 125 Displays in the multifunction dis-
Display message (12-button mul- play ................................................ 193
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 272 Driving tips .................................... 194
Setting for driving abroad (sym- Function/notes ............................. 188
metrical) ........................................ 116 Important safety notes .................. 188
Setting for driving on the right/left 252 Selecting ........................................ 189
Switching on/off ........................... 117 Setting the specified minimum
DIRECT SELECT lever distance ......................................... 192
see Automatic transmission Warning lamp ................................. 306
Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 337 Door
Display message (12-button multi- Automatic door locking feature
function steering wheel) (on-board computer, 12-button
ASSYST PLUS ................................ 326 multifunction steering wheel) ........ 253
Calling up ....................................... 258 Automatic locking (switch) ............... 88
Driving systems ............................. 283 Central locking/unlocking (key) ...... 81
Engine ............................................ 278 Control panel ................................... 42
General notes ................................ 257 Display message (12-button mul-
Hiding ............................................ 257 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 293
Key ................................................ 296 Display message (4-button multi-
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 296 function steering wheel) ................ 292
Lights ............................................. 272 Emergency locking ........................... 89
Safety systems .............................. 264 Emergency unlocking ....................... 88
10 Index

Important safety notes .................... 86 Driving systems

Opening (from the inside) ................ 87 Active Driving Assistance package 220
Downhill Speed Regulation ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 214
see DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) Blind Spot Assist ............................ 216
Drive program Cruise control ................................ 183
Automatic ...................................... 167 Distronic Plus ................................ 188
Display ........................................... 164 HOLD function ............................... 196
Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 164 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 218
Manual ........................................... 167 Lane package ................................ 216
Manual (vehicles with Sports PARKTRONIC ................................. 197
package AMG) ............................... 168 Reversing camera .......................... 205
Driver's door Speed Limit Assist ......................... 215
see Door SPEEDTRONIC ............................... 185
Drive system Driving tips
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 220 Aquaplaning ................................... 178
Driving abroad Automatic transmission ................. 165
Service24h .................................... 327 Brakes ........................................... 177
Symmetrical dipped beam ............. 116 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 194
Driving in mountainous terrain Downhill gradient ........................... 177
Approach/departure angle ............ 182 Driving abroad ............................... 116
Driving off-road Driving in winter ............................. 179
see Off-road driving Driving on flooded roads ................ 178
Driving safety system Driving on sand .............................. 181
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Driving on wet roads ...................... 178
PLUS) ............................................... 70 Driving over obstacles ................... 182
Electronic Brake-force Distribution . . 73 General .......................................... 176
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Icy road surfaces ........................... 179
gram) ......................................... 71, 72 Limited braking efficiency on sal-
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction ted roads ....................................... 177
System) ........................................... 71 New brake pads/linings ................ 178
Important safety guidelines ............. 68 Off-road driving .............................. 180
Driving safety systems Off-road fording ............................. 178
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 69 Running-in tips ............................... 154
Adaptive brake lamps ...................... 71 Snow chains .................................. 361
BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 69 Symmetrical dipped beam ............. 116
Overview .......................................... 68 Towing a trailer .............................. 228
PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 74 Travelling uphill .............................. 182
Driving system Tyre ruts ........................................ 182
360°camera .................................. 210 Wet road surface ........................... 177
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 222 DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
Active Parking Assist ..................... 201 Display message (12-button mul-
Display message (12-button mul- tifunction steering wheel) .............. 283
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 283 Function/notes ............................. 226
Display message (4-button multi-
function steering wheel) ................ 282
 Index 11

E Inflating the collapsible spare

wheel ............................................. 375
EASY-ENTRY feature Storage location ............................ 375
Activating/deactivating (12-but- Stowing .......................................... 376
ton multifunction steering wheel) . . 255 Technical data ............................... 377
Function/notes ............................. 109 Emergency unlocking
EASY-EXIT feature Tailgate ............................................ 93
Activating/deactivating (12-but- Vehicle ............................................. 88
ton multifunction steering wheel) . . 255 Engine
Crash-responsive ........................... 110 ECO start/stop function ................ 158
Function/notes ............................. 109 Engine number ............................... 382
EBD (electronic brake force distri- Jump-starting ................................. 349
bution) Running irregularly ......................... 161
Display message (12 button mul- Starting problems .......................... 161
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 265 Starting the engine with the key .... 157
Function/notes ................................ 73 Starting with KEYLESS GO ............. 157
EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distri- Stopping ........................................ 174
bution) Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 354
Display message (4-button multi- Warning lamp (engine diagnostics) 304
function steering wheel) ................ 260 Engine electronics
ECO display Notes ............................................. 380
Function/notes ............................. 176 Problem (fault) ............................... 161
On-board computer (12-button Engine jump starting
multifunction steering wheel) ........ 242 see Jump starting (engine)
ECO start/stop function Engine oil
Automatic engine start .................. 160 Additives ........................................ 388
Automatic engine switch-off .......... 159 Checking the oil level ..................... 329
Deactivating/activating ................. 160 Checking the oil level using the
General information ....................... 159 dipstick .......................................... 329
Important safety notes .................. 159 Display message (12-button mul-
Introduction ................................... 158 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 280
Electrical fuses Display message (4-button multi-
see Fuses function steering wheel) ................ 277
Electromagnetic compatibility Filling capacity ............................... 388
Declaration of conformity ................ 27 Notes about oil grades ................... 387
Electronic Stability Program Notes on oil level/consumption .... 329
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Topping up ..................................... 330
Emergency key Viscosity ........................................ 388
Unlocking the driver's door .............. 88 Environmental protection
Emergency key element Returning an end-of-life vehicle ....... 25
Function/notes ................................ 82 ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
Locking vehicle ................................ 89 gram)
Emergency release Deactivating/activating ................... 72
Driver's door .................................... 88 Display message (12-button mul-
Emergency spare wheel tifunction steering wheel) .............. 264
General notes ................................ 375 Display message (4-button multi-
Important safety notes .................. 374 function steering wheel) ................ 259
ETS/4ETS ........................................ 71
12 Index

Function/notes ......................... 71, 72 Folding the rear bench seat for-

Important safety guidelines ............. 71 wards/back ....................................... 312
Trailer stabilisation .......................... 73 Fording
Warning lamp ................................. 301 Off-road ......................................... 178
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- On flooded roads ........................... 178
tem) ...................................................... 71 Frequencies
Exhaust tail pipe (cleaning instruc- Mobile phone ................................. 380
tions) .................................................. 336 Two-way radio ................................ 380
Exterior lighting Front foglamp
Settings options ............................. 116 Display message (12-button mul-
see Lights tifunction steering wheel) .............. 274
Exterior mirrors Front foglamps
Adjusting ....................................... 110 Display message (4-button multi-
Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 112 function steering wheel) ................ 271
Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 111 Fuel
Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 111 Additives ........................................ 385
Folding in (12-button multifunc- Consumption information .............. 386
tion steering wheel) ....................... 256 Displaying the range (12-button
Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 112 multifunction steering wheel) ........ 242
Parking position ............................. 112 Displaying the range (4-button
Resetting ....................................... 111 multifunction steering wheel) ........ 238
Storing settings (memory function) 113 E10 ................................................ 384
Grade (petrol) ................................ 384
F Important safety notes .................. 383
Problem (malfunction) ................... 173
Fault message
Quality (diesel) ............................... 385
see Display messages
Refuelling ....................................... 170
Filler cap
Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 383
see Fuel filler flap
Tank content display (12-button
Fire extinguisher ............................... 340
multifunction steering wheel) .......... 35
First-aid kit ......................................... 340
Tank content display (4-button
Fitting a wheel multifunction steering wheel) .......... 33
Removing a wheel .......................... 371 Fuel consumption
Fitting wheels Current (12-button multifunction
Fitting a wheel ............................... 371 steering wheel) .............................. 242
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 372 Fuel filler flap
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 368 Opening/closing ............................ 171
Raising the vehicle ......................... 369 Fuel filter
Securing the vehicle against roll-
Display message (12-button mul-
ing away ........................................ 369
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 281
Flat tyre
Display message (4-button multi-
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 342 function steering wheel) ................ 277
TIREFIT kit ...................................... 342 Fuel reserve
see Emergency spare wheel
Display message (12-button mul-
Floormat ............................................. 323
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 280
Foglamps Display message (4-button multi-
Extended range .............................. 121 function steering wheel) ................ 277
Switching on/off ........................... 118 see Fuel
 Index 13

Fuel tank HOLD function

Capacity ........................................ 383 Deactivating ................................... 197
Problem (malfunction) ................... 173 Display message (12-button mul-
Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool tifunction steering wheel) .............. 283
kit) ...................................................... 341 Display message (4-button multi-
Fuses function steering wheel) ................ 282
Allocation chart ............................. 355 Function/notes ............................. 196
Before changing ............................. 355
Dashboard fuse box ....................... 355 I
Fuse box in the engine compart-
Ignition lock
ment .............................................. 356
see Key positions
Fuse box in the luggage compart-
Immobiliser .......................................... 75
ment .............................................. 356
Indicator and warning lamps
Important safety notes .................. 354
Coolant .......................................... 304
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 306
G
Engine diagnostics ......................... 304
Gear or selector lever (cleaning Overview (12-button multifunc-
instructions) ...................................... 337 tion steering wheel) ......................... 36
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ........... 25 Overview (4-button multifunction
Glove compartment .......................... 311 steering wheel) ................................ 34
Indicator lamps
H see Warning and indicator lamps
Indicators
Handbrake
see Turn signals
see Parking brake
Insect protection on the radiator .... 329
Hazard warning lamps ...................... 120
Instrument cluster (12-button mul-
Headlamp
tifunction steering wheel)
Cleaning system (function) ............ 120
Indicator and warning lamps ............ 36
Cleaning system (notes) ................ 389
Overview .......................................... 35
Headlamps
Settings ......................................... 250
Misting up ...................................... 123 Instrument cluster (4-button mul-
Topping up the cleaning system .... 332 tifunction steering wheel)
see Automatic headlamp mode
Indicator and warning lamps ............ 34
Head restraints
Overview .......................................... 33
Adjusting ....................................... 104 Instrument cluster lighting .............. 251
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 105
Multifunction steering wheel with
Adjusting (manually) ...................... 105
4 buttons ....................................... 236
Adjusting (rear) .............................. 105
Intelligent Light System
Fitting/removing (rear) .................. 106
Activating/deactivating (12-but-
see NECK-PRO head restraints/
ton multifunction steering wheel) . . 251
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
Display message (12-button mul-
Heating
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 274
see Climate control
Overview ........................................ 120
High-pressure cleaners .................... 333
Setting the dipped-beam head-
Hill start assist .................................. 158 lamps for driving on the right/left . 252
Interior lighting ................................. 123
Automatic control system .............. 124
14 Index

Delayed switch-off (12-button Keys

multifunction steering wheel) ........ 253 Display message (12-button mul-
Emergency lighting ........................ 124 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 296
Manual control ............................... 124 Kickdown
Overview ........................................ 123 Driving tips .................................... 166
Reading lamp ................................. 123 Manual drive program .................... 169
Setting brightness for display/ Kneebag ............................................... 48
switches (on-board computer) ....... 251
Interior motion sensor ........................ 76 L
ISOFIX child seat securing system .... 60
Lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
J
Lane Keeping Assist
Jack Activating/deactivating ................. 249
Storage location ............................ 341 Display message (12-button mul-
Using ............................................. 369 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 284
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 349 Function/information .................... 218
Lane package ..................................... 216
K Lashing eyelets ................................. 313
Licence plate lighting
Key
Display message (12-button mul-
Changing the battery ....................... 83
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 273
Checking the battery ....................... 83
Display message (4-button multi-
Convenience closing feature ............ 95
function steering wheel) ................ 271
Convenience opening feature .......... 95
Lights
Display message (4-button multi-
Activating/deactivating the exte-
function steering wheel) ................ 295
rior lighting delayed switch-off
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 81
(12-button multifunction steering
Emergency key element ................... 82
wheel) ............................................ 252
Important safety notes .................... 80
Activating/deactivating the inte-
Loss ................................................. 85
rior lighting delayed switch-off
Modifying the programming ............. 82
(12-button multifunction steering
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 155
wheel) ............................................ 253
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 85
Active light function ....................... 120
Starting the engine ........................ 157
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 117
KEYLESS-GO
Cornering light function ................. 121
Convenience closing ........................ 96
Dipped-beam headlamps ............... 117
Display message (12-button mul-
Driving abroad ............................... 116
tifunction display) .......................... 296
Foglamps ....................................... 118
Display message (4-button multi-
Foglamps (extended range) ........... 121
function display) ............................ 295
Hazard warning lamps ................... 120
Locking ............................................ 81
Headlamp flasher ........................... 119
Start/Stop button .......................... 155
Headlamp range ............................ 118
Starting the engine ........................ 157
Light switch ................................... 117
Unlocking ......................................... 81
Main-beam headlamps ................... 119
Key positions
Motorway mode ............................. 121
Key ................................................ 155
Off-road lights ................................ 121
KEYLESS GO .................................. 155
Parking lamps ................................ 118
 Index 15

Rear foglamp ................................. 118 Luggage compartment floor

Setting brightness for display/ opening/closing ............................ 317
switches (on-board computer) ....... 251 stowage well, under ....................... 317
Side lamps ..................................... 118 Lumbar support
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Adjusting ....................................... 106
Assist on/off ................................. 252 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
Switching the daytime driving port ................................................ 106
lights on/off (12-button multi- Luxury multifunction steering
function steering wheel) ................ 251 wheel
Switching the daytime driving see On-board computer (12-but-
lights on/off (4-button multifunc- ton multifunction steering wheel)
tion steering wheel) ....................... 238
Switching the daytime driving M
lights on/off (switch) ..................... 117
Switching the surround lighting M+S tyres ........................................... 360
on/off (12-button multifunction Main beam
steering wheel) .............................. 252 Display message (4-button multi-
Turn signals ................................... 119 function steering wheel) ................ 270
see Interior lighting Main-beam headlamps
see Replacing bulbs Changing bulbs .............................. 126
Light sensor Display message (12-button mul-
Display message (12-button mul- tifunction steering wheel) .............. 273
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 275 Switching on/off ........................... 119
Display message (4-button multi- Maintenance
function steering wheel) ................ 272 see ASSYST PLUS
LIM indicator lamp Manual transmission
Cruise control ................................ 183 Engaging reverse gear ................... 163
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 189 Gear lever ...................................... 162
Variable SPEEDTRONIC ................. 186 Pulling away ................................... 157
Limiting the speed Shifting to neutral .......................... 163
see SPEEDTRONIC Shift recommendation ................... 163
Loading guidelines ............................ 310 Starting the engine ........................ 157
Locking Matt finish (cleaning instructions) . . 334
see Central locking Memory card (audio) ......................... 245
Locking (doors) Memory function ............................... 113
Automatic ........................................ 88 Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
Emergency locking ........................... 89 see Qualified specialist workshop
From inside (central locking but- Message memory
ton) .................................................. 87 12-button multifunction steering
Locking centrally wheel ............................................. 258
see Central locking 4-button multifunction steering
Locking verification signal (on- wheel ............................................. 257
board computer) ............................... 254 Messages
Luggage compartment cover ........... 314 see Display messages
Luggage compartment enlarge- Mirror
ment ................................................... 312 see Vanity mirror (in sun visor)
16 Index

Mirrors O
see Exterior mirrors
see Rear-view mirror Occupant safety
Mobile phone Children in the vehicle ..................... 57
Frequencies ................................... 380 Important safety notes .................... 44
Installation ..................................... 380 Odometer
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 246 4-button multifunction steering
Notes/placing in the bracket ......... 322 wheel ............................................. 238
Transmission output (maximum) .... 380 see Total distance recorder
Mobile telephone see Trip meter
Pre-installed bracket ...................... 323 Off-road drive program ..................... 227
Modifying the programming (key) ..... 82 Off-road driving
Motorway mode ................................ 121 Approach/departure angle ............ 391
MP3 Checklist after driving off-road ...... 181
Operating ....................................... 245 Checklist before driving off-road .... 181
see Separate operating instructions Fording depth ................................ 391
Multifunction display General information ....................... 180
4-button multifunction steering Important safety notes .................. 180
wheel ............................................. 237 Maximum gradient climbing ability 391
Permanent display (12-button Travelling uphill .............................. 182
multifunction steering wheel) ........ 251 Off-road lights .................................... 121
Multi-function display Off-road system
12-button multifunction steering 4MATIC .......................................... 225
wheel ............................................. 241 DSR ............................................... 226
Multifunction steering wheel (12 Off-road ABS .................................... 69
buttons) Off-road drive program .................. 227
see On-board computer (12-but- Off-road ESP® .................................. 73
ton multifunction steering wheel) Oil
Multifunction steering wheel (4 see Engine oil
buttons) On-board computer
see On-board computer (4-button Light submenu ............................... 251
multifunction steering wheel) Operating the TV ............................ 245
On-board computer (12-button
N multifunction steering wheel)
Assist menu ................................... 247
Navigation Audio menu ................................... 245
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 243 Convenience submenu .................. 255
On-board computer (12-button Important safety notes .................. 236
multifunction steering wheel) ........ 243 Instrument cluster submenu .......... 250
see separate operating instructions Lights submenu ............................. 251
NECK-PRO head restraints Menu overview .............................. 241
Operation ......................................... 51 Navigation menu ............................ 243
Resetting after being triggered ........ 52 Operating ....................................... 240
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Operating the video DVD ............... 246
Operation ......................................... 51 Range ............................................ 242
Resetting after being triggered ........ 52 Service menu ................................. 250
Notes on running in a new vehicle . . 154 Standard display submenu ............ 242
 Index 17

Telephone menu ............................ 246 Override feature

Trip menu ...................................... 242 Rear side windows ........................... 68
On-board computer (12-button
multifunction steering wheel) P
Displaying service messages ......... 326
Paint code .......................................... 382
Display messages .......................... 257
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 334
Heating submenu ........................... 254
Message memory .......................... 258 Panic alarm .......................................... 44
Vehicle submenu ........................... 253 Panorama sliding sunroof
On-board computer (12-button Important safety information ........... 97
multifunction steering wheel)Set- Opening/closing .............................. 98
tings menu ......................................... 250 Opening/closing the roller sun-
On-board computer (12-button blind ................................................. 99
multifunction steering wheel) sub- Problem (malfunction) ................... 100
menu Rain closing feature ......................... 98
Factory setting ............................... 256 Resetting ....................................... 100
On-board computer (4-button mul- Parking ............................................... 174
tifunction steering wheel) Important safety notes .................. 174
Important safety notes .................. 236 Parking brake ................................ 175
Menu overview .............................. 238 Position of exterior mirror, front-
Switching daytime driving lights passenger side ............................... 112
on/off ............................................ 238 Reversing camera .......................... 205
On-board computer (4-button mul- see PARKTRONIC
tifunction steering wheel) Parking aid
Displaying service messages ......... 326 Active Parking Assist ..................... 201
Display messages .......................... 257 see Exterior mirrors
Individual vehicle settings .............. 237 see PARKTRONIC
Message memory .......................... 257 Parking assistance
Operating ....................................... 237 see PARKTRONIC
Range ............................................ 238 Parking brake .................................... 175
Standard display ............................ 238 Display message (12-button mul-
Time/date ..................................... 239 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 265
Trip computer ................................ 238 Display message (4-button multi-
Opening and closing the side trim function steering wheel) ................ 260
panels ................................................. 127 Notes/function .............................. 175
Operating instructions Parking lamp
Vehicle equipment ........................... 26 Display message (12-button mul-
Operating safety tifunction steering wheel) .............. 274
Declaration of conformity ................ 27 Display message (4-button multi-
Important safety note ...................... 26 function steering wheel) ................ 271
Operating system Parking lamps
see On-board computer Changing bulbs .............................. 126
Outside temperature Switching on/off ........................... 118
PARKTRONIC
Display (12-button multifunction
steering wheel) .............................. 239 Deactivating/activating ................. 200
Display (4-button multifunction Driving system ............................... 197
steering wheel) .............................. 237 Function/notes ............................. 197
Overhead control panel ...................... 41 Important safety notes .................. 197
18 Index

Problem (fault) ............................... 201 Radio

Sensor range ................................. 198 Selecting a station (12-button
Trailer towing ................................. 200 multifunction steering wheel) ........ 245
Warning display ............................. 199 see separate operating instructions
PASS AIRBAG OFF Radio-based vehicle components
see PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF Declaration of conformity ................ 27
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF Rain closing feature (panorama
Indicator lamp .................................. 59 sliding sunroof) ................................... 98
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 67 Range (fuel)
Petrol .................................................. 384 Displaying (12-button multifunc-
Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 337 tion steering wheel) ....................... 242
Power windows Displaying (4-button multifunc-
see Side windows tion steering wheel) ....................... 238
PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant Reading lamp ..................................... 123
protection) Rear compartment
Display message (12-button mul- Setting the airflow ......................... 142
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 266 Setting the air vents ...................... 152
Display message (4-button multi- Rear-compartment seat belt sta-
function steering wheel) ................ 261 tus indicator ........................................ 55
PRE-SAFE® (preventive occupant Rear foglamp
safety system) Display message (12-button mul-
Operation ......................................... 50 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 274
PRE-SAFE® Brake Display message (4-button multi-
Activating/deactivating ................. 248 function steering wheel) ................ 271
Display message (12-button mul- Switching on/off ........................... 118
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 267 Rear-view mirror
Function/notes ................................ 74 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 112
Warning lamp ................................. 306 Dipping (manual) ........................... 110
Program selector button .................. 166 Rear window heating
Protection of the environment Problem (fault) ............................... 144
General notes .................................. 25 Switching on/off ........................... 143
Pulling away Rear window wiper
Automatic transmission ................. 158 Replacing the wiper blade .............. 130
Manual transmission ...................... 157 Switching on/off ........................... 129
Refuelling
Q Fuel gauge ....................................... 33
Important safety notes .................. 170
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 28 Refuelling process ......................... 171
see Fuel
R Remote control
Radar sensor system Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 147
Activating/deactivating ................. 254 Changing the batteries (auxiliary
Display message (12-button mul- heating) ......................................... 148
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 284 Replacing bulbs
Radiator cover ................................... 329 Important safety notes .................. 124
Overview of bulb types .................. 125
 Index 19

Replacing the battery (auxiliary Route guidance (navigation) ............ 243

heating remote control) .................... 148
Reserve (fuel tank) S
see Fuel
Safety
Reserve fuel
Children in the vehicle ..................... 57
Display message (12-button mul-
Child restraint systems .................... 57
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 280
Safety net
Display message (4-button multi-
Attaching ....................................... 316
function steering wheel) ................ 277
Important safety information ......... 315
Warning lamp ................................. 304
Safety system
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 145
see Driving safety system
Restraint system
Seat
see SRS (Supplemental Restraint
Folding the backrest (rear com-
System)
partment) forwards/back .............. 313
Rev counter
Seat belt
12-button multifunction steering
Activating/deactivating seat-belt
wheel ............................................. 239
adjustment (12-button multifunc-
4-button multifunction steering
tion steering wheel) ....................... 256
wheel ............................................. 237
Adjusting the driver's and front-
Reverse gear
passenger seat belt ......................... 54
Engaging (manual transmission) .... 163
Adjusting the height ......................... 54
Reversing camera
Belt force limiter .............................. 56
Cleaning instructions ..................... 336
Belt tensioner .................................. 56
Function/notes ............................. 205
Centre rear-compartment seat ........ 55
Switching on/off ........................... 206
Cleaning ......................................... 338
Reversing feature
Display message (12-button mul-
Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 98
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 267
Roller sunblinds ............................... 99
Display message (4-button multi-
Side windows ................................... 94
function steering wheel) ................ 261
Tailgate ............................................ 90
Fastening ......................................... 54
Reversing lamp
Important safety guidelines ............. 52
Changing bulbs .............................. 127
Rear seat belt status indicator ......... 55
Display message (12-button mul-
Releasing ......................................... 55
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 274
Warning lamp ................................. 297
Display message (4-button multi-
Warning lamp (function) ................... 55
function steering wheel) ................ 271
Seats
Roller blind
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 104
see Roller sunblind
Adjusting (manually and electri-
Roller sunblind
cally) .............................................. 104
Opening/closing .............................. 99
Adjusting lumbar support .............. 106
Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 99
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
Roof carrier ........................................ 318
port ................................................ 106
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
Adjusting the head restraint .......... 104
instructions) ...................................... 338
Cleaning the cover ......................... 338
Roof load (maximum) ........................ 390
Correct driver's seat position ........ 102
Route (navigation)
Folding the rear bench seat for-
see Route guidance (navigation) wards/back ................................... 312
20 Index

Important safety notes .................. 103 Sockets

Seat heating problem .................... 108 General notes ................................ 321
Seat ventilation problem ................ 108 Spare wheel
Storing settings (memory function) 113 Storage location ............................ 375
Switching seat heating on/off ....... 107 Storing ........................................... 376
Switching the seat ventilation on/ Specialist workshop ............................ 28
off .................................................. 108 Speed, controlling
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 336 see Cruise control
Service Speed Limit Assist
see ASSYST PLUS Activating/deactivating the warn-
Service menu (12-button multi- ing function .................................... 248
function steering wheel) .................. 250 Displaying ...................................... 248
Service products Display message (12-button mul-
AdBlue® special additives .............. 386 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 283
Brake fluid ..................................... 388 Display message in the multifunc-
Coolant (engine) ............................ 388 tion display .................................... 216
Engine oil ....................................... 387 Important safety notes .................. 215
Fuel ................................................ 382 Speedometer
Important safety notes .................. 382 Activating/deactivating the addi-
Washer fluid ................................... 389 tional speedometer ........................ 250
Settings Digital ............................................ 243
Factory (12-button multifunction In the instrument cluster (12-but-
steering wheel) .............................. 256 ton multifunction steering wheel) .... 35
On-board computer (12-button In the instrument cluster (4-but-
multifunction steering wheel) ........ 250 ton multifunction steering wheel) .... 33
Setting the air distribution ............... 141 Segments ...................................... 239
Setting the airflow ............................ 142 Selecting the unit of measurement 250
Shifting to neutral (manual trans- see Instrument cluster
mission) ............................................. 163 SPEEDTRONIC
Sidebag ................................................ 49 Deactivating variable ..................... 187
Side lamps Display message (12-button mul-
Changing bulbs .............................. 126 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 287
Switching on/off ........................... 118 Display message (4-button multi-
Side windows function steering wheel) ................ 282
Convenience closing ........................ 95 Function/notes ............................. 185
Convenience opening ...................... 95 Important safety notes .................. 185
Important safety notes .................... 94 LIM indicator lamp ......................... 186
Opening/closing .............................. 95 Permanent ..................................... 187
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 97 Selecting ........................................ 186
resetting .......................................... 96 Storing the current speed .............. 186
Sliding sunroof Variable ......................................... 186
see Panorama sliding sunroof SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
Snow chains ...................................... 361 tem)
Socket Display message (12-button mul-
Centre console .............................. 321 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 268
Rear compartment ......................... 322 Display message (4-button multi-
function steering wheel) ................ 262
Introduction ..................................... 45
 Index 21

Warning lamp ................................. 303 T

Warning lamp (function) ................... 45
Start/stop function Tailgate
see ECO start/stop function Display message (12-button mul-
Starting (engine) ................................ 156 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 293
Steering Display message (4-button multi-
Display message (12-button mul- function steering wheel) ................ 292
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 294 Emergency unlocking ....................... 93
Display message (4-button multi- Important safety notes .................... 89
function steering wheel) ................ 292 Limiting the opening angle ............... 93
Steering wheel Opening/closing (automatically
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 109 from inside) ...................................... 92
Adjusting (manually) ...................... 109 Opening/closing (automatically
Buttons (12-button multifunction from outside) ................................... 91
steering wheel) .............................. 240 Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 90
Buttons (4-button multifunction Opening dimensions ...................... 390
steering wheel) .............................. 237 Tail lamp
Cleaning ......................................... 337 Display message (12-button mul-
Gearshift paddles ........................... 167 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 273
Important safety notes .................. 108 Display message (4-button multi-
Storing settings (memory function) 113 function steering wheel) ................ 270
Steering wheel gearshift paddles .... 167 Tank
Stowage areas ................................... 310 see Fuel tank
Stowage compartments Tank content
Armrest (under) ............................. 311 Displaying the range (12-button
Centre console .............................. 311 multifunction steering wheel) ........ 242
Cup holder ..................................... 319 Displaying the range (4-button
Glove compartment ....................... 311 multifunction steering wheel) ........ 238
Important safety information ......... 310 Fuel gauge (12-button multifunc-
Rear ............................................... 312 tion steering wheel) ......................... 35
Under driver's seat/front- Fuel gauge (4-button multifunc-
passenger seat .............................. 312 tion steering wheel) ......................... 33
Stowage net ....................................... 312 Technical data
Stowage space Capacities ...................................... 382
Stowage net ................................... 312 Emergency spare wheel ................. 377
Summer opening Information .................................... 380
see Convenience opening feature Trailer loads ................................... 393
Summer tyres .................................... 360 Tyres/wheels ................................. 372
Vehicle data ................................... 390
Sun visor ............................................ 319
Telephone
Supplemental Restraint System
Accepting a call ............................. 247
see SRS (Supplemental Restraint
Display message (12-button mul-
System)
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 294
Surround lighting (12-button mul-
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 246
tifunction steering wheel) ................ 252
Number from the phone book ........ 247
Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 75
Redialling ....................................... 247
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 247
Telephone compartment ................ 311
22 Index

Temperature Trailer coupling

Coolant (12-button multifunction see Towing a trailer
steering wheel) .............................. 239 Trailer towing
Coolant (4-button multifunction 7-pin connector ............................. 233
steering wheel) .............................. 236 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 218
Outside temperature (12-button Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 336
multifunction steering wheel) ........ 239 Coupling up a trailer ...................... 232
Outside temperature (4-button Decoupling a trailer ....................... 232
multifunction steering wheel) ........ 237 Driving tips .................................... 228
Setting (climate control) ................ 141 Fitting the ball coupling ................. 230
TEMPOMAT Important safety notes .................. 228
Function/notes ............................. 183 Mounting dimensions .................... 391
Theft-deterrent system Parktronic ...................................... 200
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 75 Power supply ................................. 233
Immobiliser ...................................... 75 Removing the ball coupling ............ 233
Time Storing the ball coupling ................ 233
Setting the clock (4-button multi- Trailer loads ................................... 393
function steering wheel) ................ 239 Transmission
see Separate Owner's manual see Automatic transmission
TIREFIT kit .......................................... 342 see Manual transmission
Top Tether ............................................ 61 Transmission position display ......... 164
Total distance recorder Transmission position display
Displaying (12-button multifunc- (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 164
tion steering wheel) ....................... 242 Transporting the vehicle .................. 353
Displaying (4-button multifunc- Travelling uphill
tion steering wheel) ....................... 238 Brow of hill ..................................... 183
Tow-away protection .......................... 76 Driving downhill ............................. 183
Towing Maximum gradient-climbing capa-
Important safety notes .................. 351 bility ............................................... 183
With the rear axle raised ................ 353 Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 338
Towing a trailer Trip computer
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 222 On-board computer (12-button
Active Lane Keeping Assist .... 220, 225 multifunction steering wheel) ........ 242
Active Parking Assist ..................... 205 On-board computer (4-button
Lights display message (12-but- multifunction steering wheel) ........ 238
ton multifunction steering wheel) . . 272 Trip meter
Lights display message (4-button Displaying/resetting (4-button
multifunction steering wheel) ........ 269 multifunction steering wheel) ........ 238
Towing away Displaying (12-button multifunc-
Fitting the towing eye .................... 352 tion steering wheel) ....................... 242
Removing the towing eye ............... 352 Resetting (12-button multifunc-
With both axles on the ground ....... 353 tion steering wheel) ....................... 243
Tow-starting Turn signal
Emergency engine starting ............ 354 Display message (12-button mul-
Fitting the towing eye .................... 352 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 273
Important safety notes .................. 351 Display message (4-button multi-
Removing the towing eye ............... 352 function steering wheel) ................ 270
 Index 23

Turn signals Service life ..................................... 360

Changing bulbs (front) ................... 126 Storing ........................................... 368
Changing bulbs (rear) .................... 127 Summer tyres ................................ 360
Switching on/off ........................... 119 Tyre size (data) .............................. 372
TV Tyre tread ...................................... 359
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 245 see Flat tyre
see Separate operating instructions
Two-way radio U
Frequencies ................................... 380
Unlocking
Installation ..................................... 380
Emergency unlocking ....................... 88
Transmission output (maximum) .... 380
From inside the vehicle (central
Type identification plate
unlocking button) ............................. 87
see Vehicle identification plate
Tyre pressure
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 364
V
Display message (12-button mul- Vanity mirror (in sun visor) .............. 319
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 289 Variable SPEEDTRONIC
Display message (4-button multi- see SPEEDTRONIC
function steering wheel) ................ 288 Vehicle
Important safety notes .................. 364 Correct use ...................................... 28
Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 344 Data acquisition ............................... 28
Pressure loss warning .................... 363 Electronics ..................................... 380
Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 344 Emergency locking ........................... 89
Recommended ............................... 361 Emergency unlocking ....................... 88
Tyre pressure loss warning Equipment ....................................... 26
General notes ................................ 363 Implied warranty .............................. 28
Important safety notes .................. 363 Individual settings .......................... 250
Restarting ...................................... 363 Leaving parked up ......................... 175
Tyre pressure monitor Locking (in an emergency) ............... 89
Checking the tyre pressure elec- Locking (key) ................................... 81
tronically ........................................ 365 Lowering ........................................ 372
Function/notes ............................. 364 Pulling away ................................... 157
General notes ................................ 364 Raising ........................................... 369
Important safety notes .................. 365 Registration ..................................... 28
Restarting ...................................... 366 Securing from rolling away ............ 369
Warning lamp ................................. 307 Towing away .................................. 351
Warning message .......................... 366 Tow-starting ................................... 351
Tyres Transporting .................................. 353
Changing a wheel .......................... 367 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 88
Checking ........................................ 359 Unlocking (key) ................................ 81
Direction of rotation ...................... 368 Vehicle data ................................... 390
Display message (12-button mul- Vehicle data ....................................... 390
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 289 Vehicle data (off-road driving)
Display message (4-button multi- Approach/departure angle ............ 391
function steering wheel) ................ 288 Fording depth ................................ 391
Important safety notes .................. 358 Maximum gradient climbing ability 391
M+S tyres ...................................... 360 Vehicle dimensions ........................... 390
Replacing ....................................... 367
24 Index

Vehicle emergency locking ................ 89 Tightening torque ........................... 372

Vehicle identification number Wheel size/tyre size ...................... 372
see VIN Windowbag
Vehicle identification plate .............. 382 Display message (12-button mul-
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 341 tifunction steering wheel) .............. 269
Video (DVD) ........................................ 246 Display message (4-button multi-
Video DVD (12-button multifunc- function steering wheel) ................ 263
tion steering wheel) .......................... 246 Operation ......................................... 50
VIN ...................................................... 382 Windows
Cleaning ......................................... 335
W see Side windows
Windscreen
Warning and indicator lamps Demisting ...................................... 142
ABS ................................................ 299 see Windscreen
Brakes ........................................... 299 Windscreen washer fluid
Distance warning signal ................. 306 see Windscreen washer system
ESP® .............................................. 301 Windscreen washer system ............. 332
ESP® OFF ....................................... 302 Notes ............................................. 389
Fuel tank ........................................ 304 Windscreen wipers
LIM (cruise control) ........................ 183 Problem (malfunction) ................... 131
LIM (DISTRONIC PLUS) .................. 189 Rear window wiper ........................ 129
LIM (variable SPEEDTRONIC) ......... 186 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 129
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 59 Switching on/off ........................... 128
Reserve fuel ................................... 304 Winter operation
Seat belt ........................................ 297 Important safety notes .................. 360
SRS ................................................ 303 Radiator cover ............................... 329
Tyre pressure monitor ................... 307 Slippery road surfaces ................... 179
Warning triangle ................................ 340 Snow chains .................................. 361
Washer fluid Winter tyres
Display message (12-button mul- Limiting the speed (on-board com-
tifunction steering wheel) .............. 294 puter) ............................................. 253
Display message (4-button multi- M+S tyres ...................................... 360
function steering wheel) ................ 292 Wiper blades
Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 372 Cleaning ......................................... 335
Wheel chock ...................................... 369 Important safety notes .................. 129
Wheels Replacing (on the rear window) ..... 130
Changing/replacing ....................... 367 Replacing (windscreen) .................. 129
Changing a wheel .......................... 367 Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) 338
Checking ........................................ 359 Workshop
Cleaning ......................................... 334 see Qualified specialist workshop
Cleaning (warning) ......................... 368
Emergency spare wheel ................. 374 Z
Fitting a new wheel ........................ 371
Fitting a wheel ............................... 368 ZONE function
Important safety notes .................. 358 Switching on/off ........................... 142
Removing a wheel .......................... 371
Storing ........................................... 368
 Introduction 25

Protection of the environment Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
General notes
Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
H Environmental note Rmonitor the vehicle's fuel consumption.
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre-
hensive environmental protection.
Our objectives are to use the natural resour- Returning an end-of-life vehicle
ces which form the basis of our existence on
EU countries only:
this planet sparingly and in a manner which
takes the requirements of both nature and Mercedes-Benz will take back your old vehicle
humanity into consideration. to dispose of it in an environmentally-respon-
sible manner in accordance with the Euro-
You too can help to protect the environment
pean Union (EU) End of Life Vehicles Direc-
by operating your vehicle in an environmen-
tive.
tally-responsible manner.
There is a network of return points and dis-
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
assembly plants available. You can return
transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on
your vehicle to these plants free of charge.
the following factors:
This makes a valuable contribution to the
Roperating conditions of your vehicle recycling process and the conservation of
Ryour personal driving style resources.
You can influence both factors. Therefore, For further information on recycling old vehi-
please bear the following in mind: cles, recovery and the terms of the policy,
Operating conditions: visit the Mercedes-Benz homepage.
Ravoid short trips, as these increase fuel
consumption. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Robserve the correct tyre pressure.
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight in the
H Environmental note
vehicle. Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned
Rremove the roof rack once you no longer assemblies and parts which are of the same
need it. quality as new parts. For these, the same war-
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute ranty applies as for new parts.
to environmental protection. You should
therefore adhere to the service intervals. ! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well
Rall maintenance work should be carried out as control units and sensors for these
at a qualified specialist workshop. restraint systems, may be installed in the
following areas of your vehicle:
Personal driving style:
Rdoors
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when
Rdoor pillars
starting the engine.
Rdoor sills
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle
is stationary. Rseats

Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance Rdashboard

from the vehicle in front. Rinstrument cluster
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and Rcentre console
braking.

Z
26 Introduction

Do not install accessories such as audio Owner's Manual

systems in these areas. Do not carry out
repairs or welding. You could impair the Vehicle equipment
operating efficiency of the restraint sys- This Owner's Manual describes all models
tems. and all standard and optional equipment
Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified available for your vehicle at the time of pub-
specialist workshop. lication of the Owner's Manual. Country-spe-
You could jeopardise the operating safety of cific differences are possible. Note that your
your vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels vehicle may not be fitted with all features
as well as accessories relevant to safety described. This is also the case for systems
which have not been approved by Mercedes. and functions relevant to safety. Therefore,
This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rel- the equipment on your vehicle may differ from
evant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use that in the descriptions and illustrations.
only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of The original purchase contract documenta-
equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels and tion for your vehicle contains a list of all of the
accessories that have been specifically systems in your vehicle.
approved for your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning
Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and con- equipment and operation, please consult a
version parts and accessories that have been Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
specifically approved for your vehicle for their The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet are
reliability, safety and suitability. Despite important documents and should kept in the
ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is vehicle.
unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz
therefore accepts no responsibility for the
use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, Operating safety
even if they have been officially approved or
independently approved by a testing centre. Important safety notes
In Germany, certain parts are only officially G WARNING
approved for installation or modification if If you do not have the prescribed service/
they comply with legal requirements. This maintenance work or necessary repairs car-
also applies to some other countries. All gen- ried out, this could result in malfunctions or
uine Mercedes-Benz parts meet the approval system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
requirements. The use of non-approved parts
Always have the prescribed service/mainte-
may invalidate the vehicle's general operating
nance work as well as necessary repairs car-
permit.
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
This is the case:
Rif they cause a change of the vehicle type G WARNING
from that for which the vehicle's general If you switch off the ignition while driving,
operating permit was granted safety-relevant functions are only available
Rif other road users could be endangered with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
Rif the emission or noise levels are adversely for example, the power steering and the brake
affected boosting effect. You will require considerably
Always specify the vehicle identification num- more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
ber (VIN) (Y page 382) when ordering genu- of an accident.
ine Mercedes-Benz parts. Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
 Introduction 27

G WARNING such cases, consult a qualified specialist

Modifications to electronic components, their workshop.
software as well as wiring could effect their
function and/or the operation of other net-
worked components. This could in particular Declarations of conformity
also be the case for systems relevant to Wireless vehicle components
safety. They might not function properly any
more and/or jeopardise the operational The following information applies to all com-
safety of the vehicle. There is an increased ponents of the vehicle and the information
risk of an accident and injury. systems and communication devices integra-
Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as ted into the vehicle which receive and/or
electronic components or their software. transmit radio waves:
Always have work on electrical and electronic The components of this vehicle that receive
components carried out at a qualified special- and/or transmit radio waves are compliant
ist workshop. with the basic requirements and all other rel-
evant conditions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: You can obtain further information from any
Rthe Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
vehicle makes contact with the
ground, e.g. on a high kerb or a loose
road surface Electromagnetic compatibility
Ryou drive too quickly over an obstacle, The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehi-
e.g. a kerb or a pothole cle components has been checked and certi-
Ra heavy object hits the underbody or fied according to the currently valid version
chassis component of Regulation ECE-R 10.
In these or similar situations, the vehicle
body, the underbody, chassis components,
wheels or tyres could be damaged even if Diagnostics connection
this is not visible. Components that have The diagnostics connection is only intended
been damaged in this way can unexpect- for the connection of diagnostic equipment at
edly fail or no longer be able to assimilate a qualified specialist workshop.
the loads occurring in the event of an acci-
dent. G WARNING
If the underbody panelling is damaged, If you connect equipment to a diagnostics
flammable material, such as leaves, grass connection in the vehicle, it can affect the
or twigs, could collect between the under- operation of the vehicle systems. This may
body and underbody panelling. These affect the operating safety of the vehicle.
materials could ignite if they remain in con- There is a risk of an accident.
tact with hot components of the exhaust Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-
system for an extended period. tics connection in the vehicle.
Have the vehicle checked and repaired
immediately at a qualified specialist work- G WARNING
shop. If you become aware when continu- Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict
ing the journey that driving safety has been the clearance around the pedals or block a
effected, stop as soon as possible in depressed pedal. This jeopardises the oper-
accordance with the traffic conditions. In ating and road safety of the vehicle. There is
a risk of an accident.

Z
28 Introduction

Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that It is possible that your vehicle has not yet
they do not get into the driver's footwell. been registered in your name in the following
Always fit the floormats securely and as pre- cases:
scribed in order to ensure that there is always Rif your vehicle was not purchased at an
sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use authorised specialist dealer.
loose floormats and do not place several floor- Rif your vehicle has not yet been examined
mats on top of one another. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
! If the engine is switched off and equip- It is advisable to register your vehicle with a
ment on the diagnostics connection is Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
used, the starter battery may discharge. Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible
about any change in address or vehicle own-
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics
ership. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz
connection can lead to emissions monitoring
Service Centre, for example.
information being reset, for example. This
may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the
requirements of the next emissions test dur-
Correct use
ing the main inspection.
If you remove any warning stickers, you or
others could fail to recognise certain dangers.
Qualified specialist workshop Leave warning stickers in position.
A qualified specialist workshop has the nec- Observe the following information when driv-
essary special skills, tools and qualifications ing your vehicle:
to correctly carry out any necessary work on Rthe safety notes in this manual
your vehicle. This particularly applies to work Rthe technical data in this manual
relevant to safety. Rtraffic rules and regulations
Observe the notes in the Service Booklet. Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to
Always have the following work carried out at motor vehicles
a qualified specialist workshop:
Rwork relevant to safety
Rservice and maintenance work Implied warranty
Rrepair work ! Follow the instructions in this manual
Rmodifications, installations and conver- about the proper operation of your vehicle
sions as well as about possible vehicle damage.
Rwork on electronic components Damage to your vehicle that arises from
culpable contraventions against these
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
instructions are not covered either by
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the
New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
Vehicle registration
Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres Data stored in the vehicle
to carry out technical inspections on certain
vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle A wide range of electronic components in
is improved as a result of the inspection. your vehicle contain data memories.
Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about
vehicle checks if it has your registration data.
 Introduction 29

These data memories temporarily or perma- nostic testers. More detailed information is
nently store technical information about: obtained from it, if required.
Rthe vehicle's operating state After a fault has been rectified, the informa-
Revents tion is deleted from the fault memory or is
Rfaults
continually overwritten.
When operating the vehicle, situations are
In general, this technical information docu-
conceivable in which this technical data, in
ments the state of a component, a module, a
connection with other information (if neces-
system or the surroundings.
sary, under consultation with an authorised
These include, for example: expert), could be traced to a person.
Roperating conditions of system compo- Examples include:
nents, e.g. fluid levels Raccident reports
Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of
Rdamage to the vehicle
its individual components, e.g. number of
Rwitness statements
wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in
movement, lateral acceleration, accelera- Further additional functions that have been
tor pedal position contractually agreed upon with the customer
Rmalfunctions and defects in important sys- allow certain vehicle data to be conveyed by
tem components, e.g. lights, brakes the vehicle as well. The additional functions
Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions
include, for example, vehicle location in case
of an emergency.
in special driving situations, e.g. airbag
deployment, intervention of stability con-
trol systems
Copyright information
Rambient conditions, e.g. outside tempera-
ture General notes
This data is of an exclusively technical nature Information on licences for free and open-
and can be used to: source software used in your vehicle and its
Rassist in recognising and rectifying faults electronic components is available on the fol-
and defects lowing website:
Ranalyse vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci- http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
dent opensource
Roptimise vehicle functions

The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's

movements.
When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-
mation can be read from the event data mem-
ory and fault data memory.
Services include, for example:
Rrepair services
Rservice processes
Rwarranties
Rquality assurance

It is read by employees of the service network

(including manufacturers) using special diag-

Z
30
 31

Cockpit ................................................. 32
Instrument cluster (4-button steer-
ing wheel) ............................................ 33

At a glance
Instrument cluster (12-button
steering wheel) ................................... 35
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 37
Centre console .................................... 39
Overhead control panel ...................... 41
Door control panel .............................. 42
 32 Cockpit

Cockpit
At a glance

Function Page Function Page

: Automatic transmission: D Ignition lock 155
steering wheel gearshift Start/Stop button 155
paddles 167
E Adjusts the steering wheel
; Combination switch 119 manually 108
= Instrument cluster (4-but- F Adjusts the steering wheel
ton steering wheel) 33 electrically 108
Instrument cluster (12-but-
G Cruise control lever 183
ton steering wheel) 35
? H Parking brake 175
Horn
A I Diagnostics connection 27
PARKTRONIC warning dis-
play 197 J Opens the bonnet 328
B Overhead control panel 41 K Releases the parking brake 175
C Operates the climate con- L Light switch 117
trol system 134
 Instrument cluster (4-button steering wheel) 33

Instrument cluster (4-button steering wheel)

Displays and controls

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Fuel gauge B Multifunction display 237
; Coolant temperature 236 C Time 239
= Speedometer Automatic transmission:
Outside temperature (vehi-
? Rev counter 237 cles for the United King-
A ECO start/stop function 159 dom: speed in km/h) 237
Rear window wiper 129 HOLD function 196
Automatic transmission: Stored limit speed 185
Transmission position and D Instrument cluster lighting 236
drive program 164
Manual transmission:
Gearshift recommendation 163
Outside temperature 237
HOLD function 196
Stored limit speed 185
 34 Instrument cluster (4-button steering wheel)

Warning and indicator lamps

At a glance

Function Page Function Page

: Diesel engine: preglow 157 E ESP® 301
; Reserve fuel 304 F Rear foglamp 118
= Coolant 304 G Side lamps 118
? Seat belts 297 H Dipped-beam headlamps 117
A Turn signals 119 I Main-beam headlamps 119
B SRS 303 J Brakes 299
C Engine diagnostics 304 K ABS 299
D foglamps 118
 Instrument cluster (12-button steering wheel) 35

Instrument cluster (12-button steering wheel)

Displays and controls

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Fuel gauge ? Multifunction display 241
; Coolant temperature 239 A Rev counter 239
= Speedometer with seg-
ments 239

i Setting the instrument cluster lighting via

the on-board computer (Y page 251).
 36 Instrument cluster (12-button steering wheel)

Warning and indicator lamps

At a glance

Function Page Function Page

: ÷ ESP® 301 G % Diesel engine: pre-
glow 157
; · Distance warning 306
H ? Coolant 304
= å ESP® OFF 301
I K Main-beam head-
? J Brakes 299 lamps 119
A #! Turn signals 119 J L Dipped-beam head-
B ! ABS lamps 117
299
K T Side lamps 118
C 6 SRS 303
L R Rear foglamp 118
D ; Engine diagnostics 304
M N Foglamps 118
E h Tyre pressure monitor 307
N 8 Reserve fuel 304
F ü Seat belt 297
 Multifunction steering wheel 37

Multifunction steering wheel

4-button multifunction steering wheel

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Multifunction display 237 B V
; Audio display; see the sep- Press briefly:
arate operating instruc- Selects a menu
tions Press and hold:
= W Selects the standard dis-
play
Increases the volume
? X
Decreases the volume
A C
Scrolls through lists
Resets values
Hides display messages
 38 Multifunction steering wheel

12-button multifunction steering wheel

At a glance

Function Page Function Page

: Multifunction display 241 A =;
; Audio/COMAND display; Selects a menu 240
see the separate operating 9:
instructions Selects a submenu or
scrolls through lists 240
= ?
a
Switches on LINGUA-
Confirms the selection 240
TRONIC; see the separate
operating instructions Hides display messages 257

? ~ B %
Rejects or ends a call 246 Back 240
Exits telephone book/ Switches off LINGUA-
redial memory TRONIC; see the separate
6 operating instructions
Makes or accepts a call
Switches to the redial mem-
ory
WX
Adjusts the volume
8
Mute
 Centre console 39

Centre console
Centre console, upper section

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: £ Hazard warning B c Seat heating 107
lamps 120
C ¤ ECO start/stop func-
; ATA indicator lamp 75 tion 159
= 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG D Ç Off-road program 227
OFF indicator lamp 59
E Ã Downhill Speed Reg-
? å ESP® 71 ulation 226
A Audio system/COMAND F c PARKTRONIC 197
Online; see the separate
G & Auxiliary heating 146
operating instructions
 40 Centre console

Centre console, lower section

At a glance

Function Page Function Page

: Stowage compartment 310 = Stowage compartment 310
Ashtray 319 ? Audio/COMAND control-
Cigarette lighter 320 ler; see the separate oper-
Power socket 321 ating instructions
; Cup holders 319
 Overhead control panel 41

Overhead control panel

At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: u Switches the rear B Rear-view mirror 110
interior lighting on/off 124
C ê Deactivates the inte-
; | Switches the auto- rior motion sensor 76
matic interior lighting con-
D p Switches the left-
trol on/off 124
hand reading lamp on/off 123
= p Switches the right-
E c Switches the front
hand reading lamp on/off 123
interior lighting on/off 124
? ë Deactivates tow-
away protection 76
A 3 Opens/closes the
panorama sliding sunroof
with roller sunblinds 98
 42 Door control panel

Door control panel

At a glance

Function Page Function Page

: Opens the door 87 D 7 Adjusts the exterior
mirrors 110
; %& Unlocks/locks
the vehicle 87 E W Opens/closes the
front side windows 95
= Adjusts the seats electri-
cally 104 F W Opens/closes the
? rear side windows 95
r45=
Stores settings for the seat, G n Activates/deacti-
exterior mirrors and steer- vates the override feature
ing wheel 113 for the side windows in the
A rear compartment 68
Z Selects the left exte-
rior mirror 110 H q Opens/closes the
B ö Folds the exterior mir- tailgate 92
rors in/out 111
C \ Selects the right exte-
rior mirror 110
 43

Useful information .............................. 44

Panic alarm .......................................... 44
Occupant safety .................................. 44
Children in the vehicle ........................ 57
Driving safety systems ....................... 68

Safety
Anti-theft systems .............................. 75
44 Occupant safety

Useful information Occupant safety

i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Important safety notes

els, series and optional equipment for your G WARNING
vehicle that were available at the time of Modifications to the restraint systems could
Safety

going to press. National variations are pos- result in them not functioning properly any
sible. Note that your vehicle may not be more. The restraint systems could then no
equipped with all of the functions descri- longer protect vehicle occupants as they are
bed. This is also the case for systems and designed to do and could fail in the event of
functions relevant to safety. an accident or activate unexpectedly, for
i Read the information on qualified special- example. There is an increased risk of injury.
ist workshops: (Y page 28). Never modify parts of the restraint systems.
Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as
electronic components or their software.
Panic alarm
The airbag system can be adapted for a per-
son with disabilities. For further information,
consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
The seat belts, together with SRS (Supple-
mental Restraint System), are complemen-
tary, co-ordinated restraint systems
(Y page 45). They reduce the risk of injury
in specific, pre-defined types of accident sit-
uations and thereby increase occupant
safety. However, seat belts and airbags gen-
erally do not protect against objects pene-
trating the vehicle from the outside.
X To activate: press ! button : for at To ensure that the restraint systems can
least one second. deliver their full potential protection, make
An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting sure that:
flashes.
Rthe seat and head restraint are adjusted
X To deactivate: press ! button :
properly (Y page 102)
again. Rthe seat belt has been fastened properly
or (Y page 54)
X Insert the key into the ignition lock. Rthe airbags can inflate unrestricted if
or deployed (Y page 46)
X Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button. Rthe steering wheel is adjusted properly
The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehi- (Y page 102)
cle. Rthe restraint systems have not been modi-
fied
i The panic alarm function is only available
in certain countries. i An airbag increases the protection of
vehicle occupants wearing a seat belt.
However, airbags are only an additional
restraint system that complements, but
does not replace, the seat belt. All vehicle
 Occupant safety 45

occupants must wear their seat belt cor- deceleration. There is an increased risk of
rectly at all times, even if the vehicle is injury, possibly even fatal.
equipped with airbags. The airbags are not Have SRS checked and repaired immediately
deployed in all types of accidents. For at a qualified specialist workshop.
example, if the protective capacity of cor-
rectly fastened seat belts is not increased SRS functions are checked regularly when

Safety
by deploying the airbags, the airbags will you switch on the ignition and when the
not deploy. Airbag deployment only pro- engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions
vides increased protection if the seat belt can be detected in good time.
is worn correctly because: The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument
Rthe seat belt helps to keep the vehicle
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
occupant in the best position in relation on. It goes out no later than a few seconds
to the airbag. after the engine is started.
Rin a head-on collision, for example, the
The SRS components are in operational read-
seat belt prevents the vehicle occupant iness when the 6 SRS warning lamp goes
from being propelled towards the point out while the engine is running.
of impact. It can thus reduce the risk of
A malfunction has occurred if:
injury.
Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp does not light
In accidents in which an airbag is deployed,
it provides increased protection only if the up when the ignition is switched on
seat belt is worn correctly. Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS
warning lamp does not go out after a few
seconds
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS
warning lamp lights up again
Introduction
SRS consists of: Triggering of belt tensioners and air-
Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp bags
Rairbags During the first stage of a collision, the airbag
Rairbag control unit (with crash sensors) control unit evaluates important physical
Rbelt tensioners data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-
Rbelt force limiters
eration, such as:
Rduration
SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming
into contact with the vehicle's interior in the Rdirection

event of an accident. It can also reduce the Rmagnitude

forces to which occupants are subjected dur- Based on the evaluation of this data, the air-
ing an accident. bag control unit pre-emptively triggers the
belt tensioners in the first stage.
SRS warning lamp
i The front belt tensioners can only be trig-
G WARNING gered if the seat belt tongues on the front
If SRS is malfunctioning, child restraint sys- seats are correctly engaged in the seat belt
tem components may be triggered uninten- buckles.
tionally or might not be triggered at all in the If there is an even higher rate of vehicle decel-
event of an accident with a high rate of vehicle eration or acceleration in a longitudinal direc-
tion, the front airbags are also deployed.
Z
46 Occupant safety

Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air- The vehicle may be deformed significantly,
bags. The airbag control unit evaluates vehi- e.g. the bonnet or the wing, without an airbag
cle deceleration or acceleration in the event being deployed. This is the case if only parts
of a collision. In the first deployment stage, which are relatively easily deformed are affec-
the front airbag is filled with enough propel- ted and the rate of deceleration is not high.
lant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The Conversely, airbags may be deployed even
Safety

front airbag is fully deployed if a second though the vehicle suffers only minor defor-
deployment threshold is exceeded within a mation. This is the case if, for example, very
few milliseconds. rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body
The belt tensioner and airbag triggering members are hit, and sufficient deceleration
thresholds are variable and are adapted to the occurs as a result.
rate of deceleration or acceleration of the
vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature.
The triggering process must take place in Airbags
good time at the start of the collision.
Important safety notes
i Airbags are not deployed in all types of
accidents. Also, not all airbags are G WARNING
deployed together in an accident. The dif- Airbags provide additional protection; they
ferent airbag systems work independently are not, however, a substitute for seat belts.
of each other. Observe the following notes to reduce the risk
How the airbag system works is deter- of serious or even fatal injury caused by airbag
mined by the severity of the collision detec- deployment:
ted, especially the vehicle deceleration or Rall vehicle occupants – in particular, preg-
acceleration, and the apparent type of acci- nant women – must wear their seat belt
dent: correctly at all times and lean back against
Rhead-on collision the backrest, which should be positioned
Rsideimpact as close to the vertical as possible. The
head restraint must support the back of the
Roverturn
head at about eye level.
The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera- Ralways secure children less than
tion and the direction of the force are essen- 1.50 m tall or under 12 years of age in suit-
tially determined by: able child restraint systems.
Rthe distribution of forces during the colli- Rall vehicle occupants must select a seat
sion position that is as far away from the airbag
Rthe collision angle as possible. The driver's seat position must
Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehi- allow the vehicle to be driven safely. The
cle driver's chest should be as far away from
Rthe characteristics of the object with which
the centre of the driver's airbag cover as
possible.
the vehicle has collided
Rmove the front-passenger seat as far back
Factors which can only be seen and measured
as possible. This is especially important if
after a collision has occurred do not play a
you have secured a child in a child restraint
decisive role in the deployment of an airbag,
system on the front-passenger seat.
nor do they provide an indication of airbag
Rvehicle occupants – in particular, children
deployment.
– must not lean their head into the area of
 Occupant safety 47

the window in which the sidebag/window- Rdo not hang any hard objects, e.g. coat
bag is deployed. hangers, on the grab handles or coat hooks.
Rrearward-facing child restraint systems Rdo not attach accessories, e.g. cup holders,
must not be fitted to the front-passenger to the doors.
seat unless the front-passenger airbag has It is not possible to rule out a risk of injury

Safety
been disabled. On the front-passenger being caused by an airbag, due to the high
seat, the front-passenger airbag is disabled speed at which the airbag must be deployed.
if a child restraint system with a trans-
ponder for automatic child seat recognition Airbag deployment slows down and restricts
is fitted to the front-passenger seat in a the movement of the vehicle occupant.
vehicle equipped with automatic child seat If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a
recognition. The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG bang and a small amount of powder may also
OFF indicator lamp must be continuously be released. Only in rare cases will the bang
lit. affect your hearing. The powder that is
If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle released generally does not constitute a
does not have automatic child seat recog- health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp
nition, or your rearward-facing child lights up.
restraint system does not have a trans- The airbag installation locations are identified
ponder for automatic child seat recogni- by the AIRBAG symbol.
tion, children must be secured in a child
restraint system on a suitable seat in the G WARNING
rear. If you secure a forward-facing child If you modify the airbag covers or affix
restraint system to the front-passenger objects, e.g. stickers to them, the airbags may
seat, you must move the front-passenger no longer function as intended. There is an
seat as far back as possible. increased risk of injury.
Rmake sure there are no heavy or sharp- Never modify the airbag covers and do not
edged objects in the pockets of clothing. affix any objects to them.
Rdo not lean forwards, e.g. over the cover of
the driver's/front-passenger front airbag, G WARNING
particularly when the vehicle is in motion. Unsuitable seat covers may obstruct or even
Rdo not put your feet on the dashboard. prevent deployment of the airbags integrated
Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside.
into the seats. The airbags may then fail to
protect the vehicle occupants as intended.
This allows the airbag to be fully deployed.
Operation of the automatic child seat recog-
You could be injured if the airbag is
nition may also be impaired. There is an
deployed and you are holding the inside of
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
the steering wheel.
Rdo not lean on the doors from inside the
Use only seat covers which have been specif-
ically approved for the respective seat by
vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz.
Rmake sure that there are no people, ani-
mals or objects between the vehicle occu-
G WARNING
pants and the area where the airbags are
After the driver's airbag has been deployed,
deployed.
the airbag parts are hot. There is a risk of
Rdo not place any objects between the seat
injury.
backrest and the door.

Z
48 Occupant safety

Do not touch the airbag parts. Have deployed Vehicles with automatic child seat recog-
airbags replaced immediately at a qualified nition in the front-passenger seat: the
specialist workshop. front-passenger front airbag is only activated
if the system determines that the front-
The airbag installation locations are identified passenger seat is occupied. The PASSENGER
by the AIRBAG symbol. AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp on the centre
Safety

i After an airbag has been deployed, have console does not light up (Y page 59).
the vehicle towed to the nearest qualified If a child restraint system is fitted to the front-
specialist workshop, even if your vehicle passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIRBAG
can still be driven. OFF indicator lamp on the centre console is
not on:
Front airbags Ra child restraint system without a trans-
ponder for automatic child seat recognition
The front airbags increase protection for the
has been fitted or
driver's and front-passenger's head and
Ra child restraint system with a transponder
chest.
has been fitted incorrectly
! Do not place heavy objects on the front-
passenger seat. This could cause the sys-
tem to identify the seat as being occupied.
In the event of an accident, the restraint
systems on the front-passenger side may
be triggered and have to be replaced.

Driver's kneebag
i The driver's kneebag is only available in
certain countries.
Driver's airbag : deploys in front of the
steering wheel; front-passenger front air- The driver's kneebag increases protection of
bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove the driver against:
compartment. Rknee injuries
They are deployed: Rthighinjuries
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate Rlower leg injuries

of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a

longitudinal direction.
Rif the system determines that airbag
deployment can offer additional protection
to that provided by the seat belt.
Rindependently of other airbags in the vehi-
cle.
The release time of the front airbags is
dependant upon the use of the seat belt.
If the vehicle overturns, the front airbags are
generally not deployed. The front airbags are
deployed if the system detects high vehicle
deceleration in a longitudinal direction.
 Occupant safety 49

Driver's kneebag : is always deployed along When deployed, the sidebags offer additional
with the driver's airbag and inflates under- protection for the thorax of the vehicle occu-
neath the steering column. pants on the side of the vehicle on which the
impact occurs. However, they do not protect
Sidebags the:

Safety
Rhead
G WARNING
Rneck
Unsuitable seat covers may obstruct or even
Rarms
prevent deployment of the airbags integrated
into the seats. The airbags may then fail to
protect the vehicle occupants as intended.
Operation of the automatic child seat recog-
nition may also be impaired. There is an
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Use only seat covers which have been specif-
ically approved for the respective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.

G WARNING
Sensors to control the airbags are located in
the doors. Modifications or work not per- Front sidebags : and rear sidebags ;
formed correctly to the doors or door panel- deploy next to the outer seat cushions.
ling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to The sidebags are deployed:
the function of the sensors being impaired. Ron the side on which an impact occurs
The airbags might therefore not function Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
properly any more. Consequently, the airbags
of lateral vehicle deceleration or accelera-
cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are
tion, e.g. in a side impact
designed to do. This poses an increased risk
Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
of injury.
Rindependently of the front airbags
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
Rindependently of the belt tensioners
Always have work on the doors or door pan-
elling carried out at a qualified specialist If the vehicle overturns, the sidebags are gen-
workshop. erally not deployed. Sidebags are deployed if
the system detects high vehicle deceleration
You should only use seat cover that have been or acceleration in a lateral direction and
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. determines that sidebag deployment can
The seat covers must have a special tear offer additional protection to that provided by
seam for sidebags. Otherwise, the sidebags the seat belt.
cannot deploy correctly and therefore cannot
provide the intended protection in the event Pelvisbags
of an accident.
i Pelvisbags are only available in certain
countries.
G WARNING
If you wish to use seat covers, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that, for safety reasons, you

Z
50 Occupant safety

only use seat covers that have been approved the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehi-
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. cle on which the impact occurs.
The seat covers must have a special tear seam The windowbags are integrated into the side
for sidebags/pelvisbags. Otherwise, the side- of the roof frame and deployed in the area
bag/pelvisbag cannot deploy correctly and from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
Safety

would fail to provide the intended protection

in the event of an accident. Appropriate seat
covers can be obtained, for example, from a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Pelvisbag deployment enhances the level of

protection of the vehicle occupants on the
side of the vehicle on which the impact
occurs.

Windowbags : are deployed:

Ron the side on which an impact occurs
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
of lateral vehicle deceleration or accelera-
tion, e.g. in a side impact
Rregardless of whether the front-passenger
seat is occupied
Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
Pelvisbags : deploy next to and below the Rif the vehicle overturns and the system
outer seat cushions. They are deployed: determines that windowbag deployment
Ron the side on which an impact occurs can offer additional protection to that pro-
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate vided by the seat belt
of lateral vehicle deceleration or accelera- Rindependently of the front airbags
tion, e.g. in a side impact
Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
Rindependently of the front airbags PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
Rindependently of the belt tensioners
protection)
If the vehicle overturns, the pelvisbags are PRE-SAFE® takes pre-emptive measures to
generally not deployed. Exception: if the sys- protect occupants in certain hazardous sit-
tem detects high vehicle deceleration or uations.
acceleration in a lateral direction and deter-
mines that deployment can offer additional
protection to that provided by the seat belt.

Windowbags
The windowbags enhance the level of protec-
tion for the head (but not chest or arms), of
 Occupant safety 51

PRE-SAFE® intervenes: NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-

Rwhen BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully on PRO luxury head restraints
vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS G WARNING
Rif, on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, the
The function of the head restraint may be
radar sensor system detects an imminent impaired if you:

Safety
danger of collision in certain situations
Rattach objects such as coat hangers to the
Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys-
head restraints, for example
ical limits are exceeded and the vehicle
Ruse head restraint covers
understeers or oversteers severely
If you are driving faster than approximately If you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfil
30 km/h, PRE-SAFE® may take the following their intended protective function in the event
measures in these situations: of an accident. In addition, objects attached
to the head restraints could endanger other
Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned. vehicle occupants. This poses an increased
Rvehicles with the memory function: the risk of injury.
front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an Do not attach any objects to the head
unfavourable position. restraints and do not use head restraint cov-
Rif the vehicle skids, the panorama sliding ers.
sunroof and the side windows are closed so
that only a small gap remains. NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury
If the hazardous situation passes without head restraints increase protection of the
resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens driver's and front-passenger's head and
the belt pretensioning. All settings made by neck. In the event of a rear collision of a cer-
PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed. tain severity, the NECK-PRO head restraints/
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driv-
If the seat belts are not released: er's and front-passenger seats are moved for-
X Move the backrest or seat back slightly, but wards and upwards. This provides better
only when the vehicle is stationary. head support.
Seat belt pretensioning is reduced and the If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO
locking mechanism is released. luxury head restraints have been triggered in
an accident, reset the NECK-PRO head
G WARNING restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
When adjusting the seat, make sure that on the driver's and front-passenger seats
nobody can become trapped. (Y page 52). Otherwise, the additional pro-
tection will not be available in the event of
! Make sure that there are no objects in the another rear-end collision. NECK-PRO head
footwell or behind the seats when moving restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
the seat back. There is a risk that the seats that have been triggered are moved forwards
and/or the objects could be damaged. and can no longer be adjusted.
More information about seat belt adjustment, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
a convenience function integrated into PRE- the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO
SAFE®, can be found in the "Seat belt adjust- luxury head restraints checked at a qualified
ment" section (Y page 54). specialist workshop after a rear-end collision.

Z
52 Occupant safety

Resetting a triggered NECK-PRO head NECK-PRO luxury head restraints

restraint/NECK-PRO luxury head i If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-
restraint PRO luxury head restraints, have this work
Important safety notes carried out at a qualified specialist work-
shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service
Safety

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have Centre.

NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury
head restraints checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre, if your vehicle is involved in a
rear-end collision.

NECK-PRO head restraints

i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints
requires a lot of strength. If you have diffi-
culty resetting the NECK-PRO head
restraints, have this work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a X Remove resetting tool : from the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. document wallet.
X Slide resetting tool : into guide ;
between the NECK-PRO luxury head
restraint and the rear cover of the head
restraint.
X Push resetting tool : downwards until you
hear the head restraint deployment mech-
anism engage.
X Pull out resetting tool :.
X Firmly press the NECK-PRO luxury head
restraint cushion back = until it engages.
X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint X Repeat this procedure for the second
cushion forwards in the direction of NECK-PRO luxury head restraint.
arrow :. X Put resetting tool : back into the vehicle
X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion document wallet.
down in the direction of arrow ; as far as
it will go.
X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint Seat belts
cushion back in the direction of arrow =
Important safety notes
until the cushion engages.
X Repeat this procedure for the second Seat belts are the most effective means of
NECK-PRO head restraint. restraining the movement of vehicle occu-
pants in the event of an accident. This
reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming
into contact with parts of the vehicle interior.
 Occupant safety 53

G WARNING tems installed on a suitable seat. Additional

A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or information can be found in the Operating
which has not been engaged in the seat belt Instructions in the chapter "Safety", "Chil-
buckle correctly, cannot provide the intended dren in the Vehicle". Observe the installa-
level of protection. Under certain circumstan- tion instructions of the child restraint sys-

Safety
ces, this could cause severe or even fatal inju- tem manufacturer.
ries in the event of an accident. RDo not secure an object with a seat belt if

Therefore, make sure that all occupants — in the seat belt is also being used by one of
particular, pregnant women — wear their seat the vehicle's occupants.
belts correctly at all times.
RThe
G WARNING
seat belt must fit snugly on your body
and must not be twisted.Therefore, avoid The seat belt does not offer the intended level
wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. of protection if the backrest is not in the
The shoulder section of the belt must be upright position. When braking or in the event
routed across the centre of your shoulder of an accident, you could slide underneath the
— on no account across your neck or under seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck inju-
your arm — and pulled tight against your ries, for example. This poses an increased risk
upper body. The lap belt must always pass of injury or even fatal injury.
across your lap as low down as possible, i.e. Adjust the seat properly before beginning
over your hip joints — not across your abdo- your journey. Always make sure that the seat
men. If necessary, push the seat belt is in the upright position.
slightly downwards and adjust it by pulling
it in the direction the seat belt retracts. G WARNING
RDo not route the seat belt strap over sharp Seat belts cannot perform their intended pro-
or fragile objects. Please make sure that tective function if:
such objects are not on or in your clothing, Rthey are damaged, modified, bleached or
e.g. spectacles, pens or keys etc. The seat coloured, or are very dirty
belt strap could become damaged and tear Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or very
during an accident and you or other vehicle dirty
occupants could be injured.
Rmodifications have been made to the seat
ROnly one person should use each seat belt
belt tensioners or belt anchorages
at any one time. Children must never travel
In the event of an accident, seat belts can
sitting on the lap of another occupant. The
sustain damage that is not visible to the naked
child will not be secured in the event of an
eye, e. g. due to glass splinters. Modified or
accident, heavy braking or sudden change
damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the
of direction. This may result in the child or
event of an accident, for example. Modified
other occupants being seriously or fatally
belt tensioners could deploy unexpectedly or
injured.
fail. There is an increased risk of serious or
RPersons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the
even fatal injuries.
seat belts correctly. For this reason secure
Never make modifications to seat belts, belt
persons less than 1.50 m tall in specially
tensioners, belt anchorages or seat belt
designed, suitable restraint systems.
retractors. Make sure that the seat belts are
RChildren under 1.50 m tall and younger
undamaged, are not worn and are clean.
than twelve years of age cannot wear the
seat belts correctly. For this reason secure Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
them in special suitable child restraint sys- use seat belts which have been approved

Z
54 Occupant safety

specifically for your vehicle by Mercedes- For more information about releasing the seat
Benz. belt with release button ?, see "Releasing
Seat belts are the most effective means of seat belts" (Y page 55).
restraining the movement of vehicle occu-
pants in the event of an accident. This Seat belt adjustment
reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming
Safety

The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts the

into contact with parts of the vehicle interior.
driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the
upper body of the occupants.
Fastening seat belts
The belt strap is tightened slightly when:
Ryou engage the belt tongue in the belt
buckle and you then turn the key to position
2 in the ignition lock.
Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition lock
and you then engage the belt tongue in the
buckle.
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. More
information about PRE-SAFE® can be found
in the "PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
protection)" section (Y page 50).

Belt height adjustment

You can adjust the seat belt height on the
driver's seat and the front-passenger seat.
X Adjust the seat and move the backrest to
an almost vertical position (Y page 102).
X Pull the seat belt smoothly through belt
sash guide :.
X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder sec-
tion of the seat belt across the middle of
your shoulder and the lap section across
your pelvis.
X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =.
Seat belt adjustment: if necessary, the driv-
er's and front-passenger seat belts auto-
matically adjust to the upper body Adjust the height so that the upper part of the
(Y page 54). seat belt is routed across the centre of your
X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the shoulder.
appropriate height (Y page 54). X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.
X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder The belt sash guide engages in various posi-
section of the seat belt to tighten the belt tions.
across your body. X To lower: press and hold belt sash guide
release :.
 Occupant safety 55

X Slide the belt sash guide downwards. Belt warning for the driver and front
X Let go of belt sash guide release : and passenger
make sure that the belt sash guide has The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-
engaged. ment cluster is a reminder for all occupants
to fasten their seat belts. It may light up con-

Safety
Wearing the rear centre seat belt tinuously or flash. In addition, a warning tone
may sound.
If the left-hand rear seat backrest is folded
down and back up again, the rear centre seat The 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out and
belt may lock. The seat belt can then not be the warning tone ceases when the driver and
pulled out. the front passenger have fastened their seat
belt.
X To release the rear centre seat belt: pull
the seat belt out approximately 20 mm at For certain countries only: regardless of
the belt outlet on the backrest and then whether the driver and the front passenger
release it again. have fastened their seat belts, the 7 seat
The seat belt is retracted and released. belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds
after the engine is started. It then goes out if
the driver and the front passenger have fas-
Releasing the seat belts tened their seat belts.
i For more information on the 7 seat
belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi-
cator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat
belt" (Y page 297).

Rear seat belt status indicator

Rear seat belt status indicator (illustrated example:

vehicle with 12-button multifunction steering
wheel)
X Press release button ? on belt buckle =.
The rear-compartment seat belt status indi-
X Guide belt tongue ; back to belt sash
cator tells you if the rear passengers have
guide :. their seat belts fastened. The rear-compart-
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled ment seat belt status indicator indicates the
up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue rear seat on which the belt is fastened. In the
will be trapped in the door or in the seat example, the passengers on the left and right
mechanism. This could damage the door, rear seats have their seat belts fastened.
the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam-
aged seat belts can no longer fulfil their
protective function and must be replaced.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
56 Occupant safety

The rear-compartment seat belt status indi- Belt tensioners do not pull vehicle occupants
cator appears in the multifunction display for back towards the backrest.
around 30 seconds if: The belt tensioners can only be activated
Ryou drive off and reach a speed of approx- when:
imately 10 km/h. Rthe ignition is switched on
Safety

Rthe rear passengers fasten or unfasten Rthe restraint systems are operational; see
their seat belts while the vehicle is in "SRS warning lamp" (Y page 45)
motion. Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
Rsomeone gets in or out of the vehicle and each of the three-point seat belts in front
the vehicle drives off again. The belt tensioners on the outside seats in the
You can also cancel the rear seat belt status rear compartment are triggered independ-
indicator immediately (Y page 257). ently of the lock status of the seat belts.
i The status indicator for the rear-compart- The belt tensioners are triggered depending
ment seat belts is only available for certain on the type and severity of an accident:
countries. Rin certain situations where the vehicle over-
turns and the system determines that it can
Belt tensioners, belt force limiters provide additional protection
Rif, in the event of a head-on or rear-end col-
G WARNING
lision the vehicle decelerates or acceler-
Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have
ates rapidly in a longitudinal direction dur-
been deployed are no longer operational and
ing the initial stages of the impact
are unable to perform their intended protec-
Rif, in the event of a side impact, on the side
tive function. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury. opposite the impact the vehicle deceler-
ates or accelerates rapidly in a lateral direc-
Therefore, have pyrotechnic belt tensioners
tion
which have been triggered immediately
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a
bang, and a small amount of powder may also
! If the front-passenger seat is not occu- be released. Only in rare cases will the bang
pied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in affect your hearing. The powder that is
the buckle on the front-passenger seat. released generally does not constitute a
Otherwise, the belt tensioner could be trig- health hazard and does not indicate that there
gered in the event of an accident. is a fire in the vehicle. The powder may cause
short-term breathing difficulties to persons
i Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: belt tensioners suffering from asthma or other pulmonary
that are triggered by an electric motor can conditions. In order to prevent potential
be deployed as often as desired and do not breathing difficulties, you should leave the
need to be replaced. vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. You can
The front seat belts and the outer seat belts also open the window to allow fresh air to
in the rear are equipped with belt tensioners. enter the vehicle interior. The 6 SRS warn-
The belt tensioners tighten the seat belts in ing lamp lights up.
an accident, pulling them close against the If the seat belt is also fitted with a belt force
body. limiter and this is triggered, the force exerted
Belt tensioners do not correct incorrect seat by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant is
positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts. reduced.
 Children in the vehicle 57

The belt force limiters on the front seats are against parts of the vehicle interior and be
synchronised with the front airbags, which seriously or even fatally injured.
take on a part of the deceleration force. This
results in the load being distributed over a G WARNING
greater area. If the child restraint system is incorrectly fit-

Safety
ted on the seat position suitable for this pur-
pose, it cannot perform its intended protec-
Children in the vehicle tive function. In the event of an accident,
Child restraint systems sharp braking or a sudden change in direction,
the child may not be held securely. There is
Important safety notes an increased risk of serious or even fatal inju-
ries.
G WARNING
Observe the manufacturer's installation
To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal instructions and the correct use for the child
injury to the child in the event of a sudden restraint system. Make sure that the entire
change in direction, braking or an accident: surface of the child restraint system is resting
RChildren less than 1.50 m tall and under on the seat surface. Never place objects
twelve years of age must always be secured under or behind the child restraint system,
in special child restraint systems on a suit- e.g. cushions. Only use child restraint sys-
able vehicle seat. This is necessary tems with the original cover designed for
because the seat belts are not designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with gen-
children. uine covers.
RDo not transport children who are secured
in rearward-facing child restraint systems G WARNING
on the front-passenger seat. Exception: if If the child restraint system is fitted incor-
the vehicle is equipped with automatic child rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in
seat recognition on the front-passenger the event of an accident, heavy braking or a
seat and the child is secured in a child sudden change in direction. The child
restraint system with transponders for restraint system could be thrown about, strik-
automatic child seat recognition ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased
RIf you secure a forward-facing child risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
restraint system to the front-passenger Always fit child restraint systems properly,
seat, you must move the front-passenger even if they are not being used. Make sure
seat as far back as possible. When doing that you observe the child restraint system
so, ensure that the shoulder belt strap from manufacturer's installation instructions.
the belt outlet on the vehicle is routed
towards the front to the shoulder belt guide G WARNING
on the child restraint system. Set the belt Child restraint systems or their securing sys-
height adjustment so that the belt strap is tems that have been damaged or subjected to
routed towards the front along the bottom. a load in an accident cannot perform their
RChildren must never travel sitting on the lap intended protective function. In the event of
of another occupant. Due to the forces an accident, sharp braking or a sudden
which occur in the event of a sudden change in direction, the child may not be held
change of direction, heavy braking or an securely. There is an increased risk of serious
accident, it would not be possible to or even fatal injuries.
restrain the child. The child could be thrown

Z
58 Children in the vehicle

Immediately replace child restraint systems for example. If the child restraint system has
that have been damaged or subjected to a been exposed to direct sunlight, leave it to
load in an accident. Have the child restraint cool down before securing the child in it.
securing systems checked in a qualified spe- Never leave children unattended in the vehi-
cialist workshop before fitting a child restraint cle.
Safety

system again.
If a child is travelling in your vehicle, secure
G WARNING the child using a child restraint system which
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, is appropriate to the size, age and weight of
they could: the child. In order to correctly secure the child
in the child restraint system, always comply
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other with the child restraint system manufactur-
people or road users. er's installation instructions. You should pref-
Rget out and disrupt traffic. erably fit the restraint system to a suitable
Roperate the vehicle's equipment. rear seat. Make sure that the child is secured
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in for the trip.
motion if, for example, they: Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
Rrelease
the listed child restraint systems
the parking brake.
(Y page 65). You can obtain further infor-
Rshift the automatic transmission out of mation about the correct child restraint sys-
parking position P. tem from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Rshift the manual transmission into neutral.
Rstart the engine.
i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care
products to clean child restraint systems.
There is a risk of an accident and injury. You can obtain information about this at
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave
children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Child restraint system on the front-
Always keep the key out of reach of children. passenger seat
G WARNING
If persons (particularly children) are exposed
to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there
is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never
leave persons (particularly children) unatten-
ded in the vehicle.

G WARNING
If the child restraint system is placed in direct
sunlight, the parts could become very hot.
Children could be suffer burns by touching Example: warning notice on the front-passenger
these parts, in particular on the metallic parts sun visor
of the child restraint system. There is a risk of
injury.
If you and your child leave the vehicle, always
make sure that the child restraint system is
not in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket,
 Children in the vehicle 59

the dashboard and on both sides of the sun

visor on the front-passenger side.
Information about recommended child
restraint systems is available at any
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Safety
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in
front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur.
Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child
restraint system Automatic child seat recognition on the
front-passenger seat
G WARNING
If the front-passenger airbag is not disabled:
Ra child secured in a child restraint system
on the front-passenger seat could be seri-
ously and even fatally injured by the front-
passenger airbag deploying. This is espe-
cially a risk if the child is in the immediate
vicinity of the front-passenger airbag when
it deploys.
Rnever secure a child on the front-passenger
seat in a rearward-facing child restraint sys-
tem. Only secure a rearward-facing child If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle
restraint system on a suitable rear seat. does not have automatic child seat recogni-
Ralways move the front-passenger seat to tion, this is indicated by a special sticker. The
the rearmost position if you secure a child sticker is affixed to the side of the dashboard
in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger side. The sticker is
on the front-passenger seat. visible when you open the front-passenger
The front-passenger airbag is not disabled: door.
Vehicles without automatic child seat recog-
Ron vehicles without automatic child seat
nition on the front-passenger seat: if you turn
recognition on the front-passenger seat
the key to position 2 in the ignition lock, the
Rin vehicles with automatic child seat rec-
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
ognition in the front-passenger seat, if no lights up briefly. However, the indicator lamp
special child restraint system with trans- has no function. It does not indicate that there
ponders for automatic child seat recogni- is automatic child seat recognition on the
tion in the front-passenger seat has been front-passenger seat.
fitted
Ron vehicles with automatic child seat rec-
ognition on the front-passenger seat, if the
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
4 is not lit.
To make you aware of this danger, a corre-
sponding warning sticker has been affixed on

Z
60 Children in the vehicle

To ensure that the automatic child seat rec-

ognition on the front-passenger seat func-
tions/communicates correctly, never place
objects, e.g. a cushion, under the child
restraint system. The entire base of the child
Safety

restraint system must always rest on the seat

cushion. An incorrectly fitted child restraint
system cannot perform its intended protec-
tive function in the event of an accident, and
could lead to injuries.
: PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp i If the front-passenger front airbag is dis-
The sensor system for child restraint systems abled by the automatic child seat recogni-
in the front-passenger seat detects whether tion, the following remain enabled on the
a special Mercedes-Benz child seat with a front-passenger side:
transponder for automatic child seat recog- Rthe sidebag
nition has been fitted. In this case, Rthe pelvisbag
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp :
Rthe windowbag
lights up. The front-passenger front airbag is
Rthe belt tensioner
disabled.
G WARNING G WARNING
If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica- Electronic devices on the front-passenger
tor lamp does not light up when the child seat can affect the function of the automatic
restraint system is fitted, the front-passenger child seat recognition, for example:
front airbag has not been disabled. If the front- Rlaptop
passenger front airbag deploys, the child Rmobile phone
could be seriously or even fatally injured. Rtransponder cards such as ski passes or
Proceed as follows: access passes
Rdo not use a rearward-facing child restraint The front-passenger front airbag could deploy
system on the front-passenger seat. unintentionally or not function as intended
Rfit a rearward-facing child restraint system during an accident. This poses an increased
on a suitable rear seat. risk of injury or even fatal injury.
or Do not place any of the devices mentioned
Ronly use a forward-facing child restraint above or similar devices on the front-
system on the front-passenger seat and passenger seat.
move the front-passenger seat as far back
as possible. When doing so, ensure that the ISOFIX child seat securing system for
shoulder belt strap from the belt outlet on the rear seats
the vehicle is routed towards the front to
ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for
the shoulder belt guide on the child
specially designed child restraint systems on
restraint system. Set the belt height adjust-
the rear seats. Securing rings for two ISOFIX
ment so that the belt strap is routed
child restraint systems are fitted on the left
towards the front along the bottom.
and right of the rear seats.
Rhave the automatic child seat recognition
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
 Children in the vehicle 61

G WARNING ries to the secured child in the event of an

A child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX accident, heavy braking or a sudden change
child seat securing system does not provide in direction.
sufficient protection for children weighing For this reason, have child restraint systems
more than 22 kg. For this reason, do not and their anchorages which have been dam-

Safety
secure children weighing more than 22 kg in aged or subjected to a load in an accident
a child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX checked immediately at a qualified specialist
child seat securing system. If the child weighs workshop.
more than 22 kg, secure the child restraint
system with the vehicle seat belt as well. In ! When fitting the child restraint system,
addition, when fitting a child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt for the centre
be sure to observe the manufacturer's instal- seat does not get trapped. Otherwise, the
lation instructions and the instructions for seat belt could be damaged.
correct use of the child restraint system.

G WARNING
The child restraint system cannot perform its
protective function if it is not correctly fitted
to a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot be
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
braking or sudden changes of direction. The
child could be seriously or even fatally injured.
For this reason, when fitting a child restraint
system, be sure to observe the manufactur-
er's installation instructions and the instruc- Installation indicator : shows the installa-
tions for correct use of the child restraint sys- tion location of securing rings 2.
tem. X Install the ISOFIX child restraint system.
For safety reasons, when installing child Comply with the manufacturer's instruc-
restraint systems on the rear seats, only use tions when installing the ISOFIX child
child restraint systems with the ISOFIX child restraint system.
seat securing system, which are specially tes-
ted and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehi-
Top Tether
cles.
An incorrectly fitted child restraint system Top Tether provides an additional connection
could come loose and seriously or even fatally between the child restraint system secured
injure the child or other vehicle occupants. with ISOFIX and the rear seat. It helps reduce
When fitting the child restraint system, always the risk of injury even further.
make sure that it is engaged correctly in the The Top Tether anchorages are located on the
securing rings on both sides. rear side of the rear seat backrests.

G WARNING
Please note that if child restraint systems, or
their retaining systems, are damaged or sub-
jected to a load in an accident, they may not
be able to provide their protective function.
This could result in serious or even fatal inju-

Z
62 Children in the vehicle

ment cover : if luggage compartment

cover : is fitted.
RTop Tether belt B is routed between the
rear seat backrest ; and the safety net
if the safety net is fitted.
Safety

X Move head restraint = back down again

slightly if necessary (Y page 105). Make
sure that you do not interfere with the cor-
rect routing of Top Tether belt B .

X Move head restraint = upwards.

X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with
Top Tether. Comply with the manufactur-
er's installation instructions when doing so.
X Route Top Tether belt B under head
restraint = between the two head restraint
bars.
X Guide Top Tether belt B downwards
between luggage compartment cover :
and rear seat backrest ;.
X Hook Top Tether hook A of Top Tether belt
B into Top Tether anchorage ?.
Ensure that:
RTop Tether hook A is hooked into Top
Tether anchorage ? as shown.
RTop Tether belt B is not twisted.
RTop Tether belt B is routed between rear
seat backrest ; and luggage compart-
 Children in the vehicle 63

Suitable positioning of the child restraint systems

Only child restraint systems which are approved in accordance with the ECE standard ECE
R44 are permitted for use in the vehicle.
Suitability of the seats for attaching belted child restraint systems
Key to the letters used in the following table:

Safety
X Seat which is unsuitable for children in this weight category.
U Suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category that are approved for use
in this weight category.
UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal" category
and are approved for use in this weight category.
L Suitable for child restraint systems as recommended, see the following table of "Recom-
mended child restraint systems" (Y page 65).

Seat positions
Weight catego- Front-passenger seat Rear seat
ries
Front- The front- Left, right Centre
passenger passenger air-
front airbag is bag is disa-
not disabled bled1
Category 0: up X U2, L2 U, L L
to 10 kg
Category 0+: X U2, L2 U, L L
up to 13 kg
Category I: 9 to U2, L2 U2, L2 U, L U, L
18 kg
Category II: 15 U2, 3, L2, 3 U2, 3, L2, 3 U, L U, L
to 25 kg
Category III: U2, 3, L2, 3 U2, 3, L2, 3 U, L U, L
22 to 36 kg

"Universal" category child restraint systems can be recognised by their orange approval label
and the text "Universal".

1 Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat: a child restraint system of the
"Universal" category with a transponder for automatic child seat recognition must be fitted. The PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
2 Adjust the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position and the belt outlet height to the lowest position.
3 All vehicles except AMG

Z
64
Safety Children in the vehicle

Example: approval label on the child restraint system

"Universal" category child restraint systems can be used on the seats indicated with U, UF or
IUF according to the tables "Suitability of the seats for attaching belted child restraint systems"
or "Suitability of the seats for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system".
Semi-universal child restraint systems are indicated by the text "semi-universal" on the
approval label. These can be used if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint
system manufacturer's vehicle model list. For more information, contact the child restraint
system manufacturer or visit their website.
Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems
Key to the letters used in the table:
X ISOFIX position that is not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this weight cat-
egory and/or size category.
IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems that belong to the "Universal"
category which are approved for use in this weight category.
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems as recommended; see the following table of
"Recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 65).

Weight categories Size category Equipment Rear seat, left and

right
Carry-cot F ISO/L1 X
G ISO/L2 X
0: up to 10 kg E ISO/R1 IL
up to approximately
6 months
0+: up to 13 kg E ISO/R1 IL
up to approximately D ISO/R2 IL
15 months
C ISO/R3 IL
I: 9 to 18 kg D ISO/R2 IL
between approx- C ISO/R3 IL
imately 9 months and
4 years B ISO/F2 IUF
 Children in the vehicle 65

Weight categories Size category Equipment Rear seat, left and

right
B1 ISO/F2X IUF
A ISO/F3 IUF

Safety
Recommended child restraint systems
When installing a child restraint system without a transponder for automatic child seat rec-
ognition on the front-passenger seat:
X Move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position.

Weight catego- Manufac- Type Approval Order num- Automatic

ries turer number ber child seat
(E1 ...) (A 000 ...) recognition
Category 0: up Britax BABY 03 301146 970 10 00 Yes
to 10 kg Römer SAFE 04 301146
up to approx- PLUS4
imately
6 months
Group 0+: up Britax BABY 03 301146 970 10 00 Yes
to 13 kg Römer SAFE 04 301146
up to approx- PLUS4
imately
15 months
Category I: 9 to Britax DUO 03 301133 970 11 00 Yes
18 kg Römer PLUS4 04 301133 970 16 00 No
between
approximately
9 months and
4 years
Group II/III: 15 Britax 970 12 00 Yes
to 36 kg Römer
970 17 00 No
between
approximately
4and 12 years

4 Move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost and highest position.

Z
66 Children in the vehicle

Suggested ISOFIX child restraint system from the Universal category

Weight Size cate- Manufac- Type Approval Order Auto-

catego- gory turer number number matic
ries (E1 ...) child seat
recogni-
Safety

tion
Carry-cot F – – – – –
G – – – – –
Group 0: E – – – – –
up to
10 kg
Group 0+: E Britax BABY SAFE 04 301146 B6 6 86 No
up to Römer ISOFIX 8224
13 kg PLUS
D – – – – –
C – – – – –
Group I: D – – – – –
9to 18 kg C – – – – –
B – – – – –
B1 Britax DUO PLUS 03 301133 A000 970 Yes
Römer 04 301133 11 00
A – – – – –
 Children in the vehicle 67

Problems with automatic child seat recognition

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The PASSENGER AIR- A special Mercedes-Benz child seat with a transponder for auto-
BAG OFF indicator matic child seat recognition has been fitted to the front-passenger

Safety
lamp on the centre con- seat. The front-passenger front airbag has therefore been disabled
sole is lit. as desired.
The PASSENGER AIR- G WARNING
BAG OFF indicator
There is no child seat fitted to the front-passenger seat. Automatic
lamp on the centre con-
child seat recognition is malfunctioning.
sole is lit.
There is a risk of injury.
or
X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat,
The 6 SRS warning
lamp lights up and/or e.g.:
Rlaptop
the PASSENGER AIR-
BAG OFF indicator RMobile phone
lamp does not light up Rcards with transponders, such as ski passes or access cards
briefly when you switch
If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is still lit:
the ignition on.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Child-proof locks If a child opens a door, the child or other per-

sons could be injured as a result. They could
Important safety notes get out and injure themselves or be injured by
G WARNING a passing vehicle.
Activate the child-proof locks for the rear Also observe the notes on HOLD. Relevant
doors and the override switch for the rear information can be found in the index.
windows when children are travelling in the
vehicle. Otherwise, the children could open Child-proof locks for the rear doors
doors or side windows while the vehicle is in
You secure each door individually with the
motion and injure themselves or others.
child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door
secured with a child-proof lock cannot be
G WARNING opened from inside the vehicle. When the
Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child from the outside.
restraint system. They could injure them-
selves on parts of the vehicle. They could also
be seriously or even fatally injured by pro-
longed exposure to extreme heat or cold.
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. Parts of the child restraint sys-
tem could heat up and the child could burn
herself/himself on them.

Z
68 Driving safety systems

Driving safety systems

Driving safety systems overview
In this section, you will find information about
the following driving safety systems:
Safety

RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

RBAS (Brake Assist System)
RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus)
RAdaptive brake lamps
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
X To activate: press the child-proof lock
REBD (electronic brake force distribution)
lever up in the direction of arrow :.
RPRE-SAFE® Brake
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are
working properly.
X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock
Important safety notes
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you
Override feature for the rear side win- are inattentive, the driving safety systems can
dows neither reduce the risk of accident nor over-
ride the laws of physics. Driving safety sys-
tems are merely aids designed to assist driv-
ing. You are responsible for the distance to
the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for
braking in good time. Always adapt your driv-
ing style to suit the prevailing road, weather
and traffic conditions and maintain a safe dis-
tance from the vehicle in front. Drive care-
fully.
i The driving safety systems described only
work as effectively as possible when there
X To activate/deactivate: press button ;. is adequate contact between the tyres and
the road surface. Please pay special atten-
If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the
tion to the notes on tyres, recommended
rear side windows is disabled. Operation is
minimum tyre tread depths, etc.
only possible using the switches in the driv-
(Y page 358).
er's door. If indicator lamp : is off, oper-
In wintry driving conditions, always use
ation is possible using the switches in the
winter tyres (M+S tyres) and, if necessary,
rear compartment.
snow chains. Only in this way will the driv-
ing safety systems described in this section
work as effectively as possible.
 Driving safety systems 69

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel
a pulsing in the brake pedal.
General notes The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way tion of hazardous road conditions, and func-
that the wheels do not lock when you brake. tions as a reminder to take extra care while
driving.

Safety
This allows you to continue steering the vehi-
cle when braking.
The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in the Off-road ABS (vehicles with Off-Road
instrument cluster lights up when the ignition Engineering package)
is switched on. It goes out when the engine is An ABS system specifically suited to off-road
running. terrain is activated automatically once the off-
road drive program (Y page 227) is activated.
Important safety notes At speeds below 30 km/h the front wheels
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- lock cyclically during braking. The digging-in
tion (Y page 68). effect achieved in the process reduces the
stopping distance when driving off-road. This
G WARNING limits steering capability.
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
braking. The steerability and braking charac-
teristics may be severely impaired. Addition- BAS (Brake Assist)
ally, further driving safety systems are deac-
tivated. There is an increased danger of skid- General notes
ding and accidents. BAS operates in emergency braking situa-
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme- tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly,
diately at a qualified specialist workshop. BAS automatically boosts the braking force,
thus shortening the stopping distance.
If ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
including driving safety systems, will also Important safety notes
become inoperative. Observe the information
on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 299) and i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
display messages which may be shown in the tion (Y page 68).
instrument cluster (Y page 259) or G WARNING
(Y page 264).
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
ABS works from a speed of about in an emergency braking situation is
8 km/hupwards, regardless of road-surface increased. There is a risk of accident.
conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces,
In an emergency braking situation, depress
even when you only brake gently.
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents
the wheels from locking.
Braking
X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the Braking
brake pedal with force until the braking sit-
uation is over. X Keep the brake pedal depressed firmly until
X To make a full brake application:
the emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
depress the brake pedal with full force.
The brakes will function as usual once you
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

Z
70 Driving safety systems

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus) As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all
critical situations. There is a risk of an acci-
General notes dent.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
tion (Y page 68). uation and be ready to brake.
Safety

BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, recog-
DISTRONIC PLUS.
nition can be impaired.
For BAS PLUS to assist you, the radar sensor
Recognition by the radar sensor system is
system must be operational.
also impaired in the event of:
With the aid of the radar sensor system, BAS
Rdirt on the sensors or the sensors are
PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the
path of your vehicle for an extended period of obscured
Rinterference by other radar sources
time.
Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in
If the radar sensor system is malfunctioning,
BAS PLUS will not be available. The brake multi-storey car parks
system is still available with complete brake Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a
boosting effect and BAS. motorcycle
BAS PLUS can help you to minimise the risk Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different
of a collision with a vehicle or reduce the line
effects of such a collision. If BAS PLUS Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
detects a danger of collision, you are assisted cle, have the radar sensor settings and oper-
when braking. ation checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop. This also applies to collisions at slow
Important safety notes speeds where there is no visible damage to
the front of the vehicle.
G WARNING
BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify Function
objects and complex traffic situations.
In such cases, BAS PLUS may: To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the
brake force necessary if:
Rintervene unnecessarily
Ryou approach an obstacle, and
Rnot intervene
RBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision
There is a risk of an accident.
When driving at a speed under 30 km/h:
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
if you depress the brake pedal, BAS PLUS is
uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
activated. Braking assistance from BAS PLUS
intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
is carried out at the last possible moment.
G WARNING When driving at a speed above 30 km/h:
if you depress the brake pedal sharply, BAS
BAS PLUS does not react:
PLUS automatically increases the brake pres-
Rto people or animals sure to a degree suited to the traffic situation.
Rto oncoming vehicles BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz-
Rto crossing traffic ardous situations with vehicles in front within
Rwhen cornering a speed range between 7 km/h and
250 km/h.
 Driving safety systems 71

At speeds of up to approximately 70 km/h, ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,

BAS PLUS can also detect stationary objects. i.e. power transmission between the tyres
Examples of stationary objects are stopped and the road surface.
or parked vehicles. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating
i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high from the direction desired by the driver, one

Safety
braking force, preventative passenger pro- or more wheels are braked to stabilise the
tection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activa- vehicle. The engine output is also modified to
ted simultaneously. keep the vehicle on the desired course within
physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®
emergency braking situation is over.
can also stabilise the vehicle during braking.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func- ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
tion as usual again, if:
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
Ryou release the brake pedal
tion (Y page 68).
Rthere is no longer a risk of collision
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your
ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®.
vehicle Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-
vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull
away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for
Adaptive brake lamps example if the road surface is slippery on one
side. In addition, more drive torque is trans-
i Adaptive brake lamps are only available in ferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.
certain countries. Traction control remains active if you deacti-
If you brake sharply from a speed of more vate ESP®.
than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS
or BAS PLUS, the brake lamps flash rapidly. Important safety notes
In this way, traffic travelling behind you is
warned in an even more noticeable manner. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
If you brake sharply from a speed of more tion (Y page 68).
than 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warn- G WARNING
ing lamps are activated automatically. If the If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to
brakes are applied again, the brake lamps stabilise the vehicle. In addition, other driving
light up continuously. The hazard warning safety systems are switched off. This increa-
lamps switch off automatically if you travel ses the risk of skidding and an accident.
faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off
the hazard warning lamps using the hazard Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a
warning button (Y page 120). qualified specialist workshop.

! When testing the electric parking brake

on a braking dynamometer, switch off the
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ignition. Application of the brakes by
General notes ESP® may otherwise destroy the brake sys-
tem.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 68). Vehicles without 4MATIC: when towing your
vehicle with the rear axle raised, it is impor-

Z
72 Driving safety systems

tant that you observe the notes on Deactivating/activating ESP®

ESP®(Y page 353).
Important safety notes
ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp
in the instrument cluster lights up continu- i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
ously when the engine is running. tion (Y page 68).
Safety

If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warn- You can select between the following sta-
ing lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not tuses of ESP:
available due to a malfunction. RESP® is activated.
Observe the information on warning lamps RESP® is deactivated.
(Y page 301) and display messages which
may be shown in the instrument cluster G WARNING
(Y page 259) or (Y page 264). If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-
i Only use wheels with the recommended bilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
tyre sizes. Only then will ESP® function
properly. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-
bed in the following.
Characteristics of ESP
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-
General notes lowing situations:
If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before Rwhen using snow chains
beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically Rindeep snow
active. Ron sand or gravel
If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations
lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
described above no longer apply. ESP® will
If ESP® intervenes: otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehi-
X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum- cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel
stances. starts to spin.
X When pulling away, only depress the accel- ! Avoid spinning the drive wheels for an
erator pedal as far as is necessary. extended period when ESP® is switched
X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail- off. You could otherwise damage the driv-
ing road and weather conditions. etrain.

ECO start/stop function Deactivating/activating ESP®

The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically if the vehicle stops
moving. When pulling away again, the engine
starts automatically. ESP® remains in its pre-
viously selected status. Example: if ESP®
was deactivated before the engine was
switched off, ESP® remains deactivated when
the engine is switched on again.
 Driving safety systems 73

X To switch off: press button :. If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to

The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the lurch, you can only stabilise the vehicle/
instrument cluster lights up. trailer combination by depressing the brake
firmly.
X To switch on: press button :.
In this situation, ESP® assists you and can
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the

Safety
detect if the vehicle/trailer combination
instrument cluster goes out.
begins to lurch. ESP® slows the vehicle down
Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated by braking and limiting the engine output until
the vehicle/trailer combination has stabi-
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels lised.
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in Trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of
the instrument cluster flashes. In such situa- about 65 km/h.
tions, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle.
Trailer stabilisation does not work if ESP® is
If you deactivate ESP®: deactivated or disabled because of a mal-
RESP® no longer improves driving stability. function.
Rengine torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin.
EBD (electronic brake force distribu-
The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-
tion)
ting action for better traction on loose sur-
faces. General notes
Rtraction control is still activated.
EBD monitors and controls the brake pres-
RESP® still provides support when you
sure on the rear wheels to improve driving
brake. stability while braking.

Off-road ESP® (vehicles with off-road Important safety notes

engineering package)
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
An ESP® system specifically suited to off-road tion (Y page 68).
terrain is activated automatically once the off-
road drive program (Y page 227) is activated. G WARNING
The off-road ESP® intervenes with a delay if If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can
there is oversteering or understeering, thus still lock, e.g. under full braking. This increa-
improving traction. ses the risk of skidding and an accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style
ESP® trailer stabilisation to the different handling characteristics. Have
the brake system checked at a qualified spe-
G WARNING cialist workshop.
If road and weather conditions are poor,
trailer stabilisation will not be able to prevent Observe the notes on warning and indicator
the vehicle/trailer combination from swerv- lamps (Y page 299) as well as display mes-
ing. Trailers with a high centre of gravity can sages (Y page 260) (4-button multifunction
tip over before ESP® can detect this. There is steering wheel) and (Y page 265) (12-button
a risk of an accident. multifunction steering wheel).
Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-
ing road and weather conditions.

Z
74 Driving safety systems

PRE-SAFE® Brake Always pay particular attention to the traffic

situation and be ready to brake, especially if
General notes PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
tion (Y page 68).
In order to maintain the appropriate distance
Safety

PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available on vehicles to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a col-
with DISTRONIC PLUS. lision, you must apply the brakes yourself.
For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driv-
G WARNING
ing, the radar sensor system must be opera-
tional. PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:
With the help of the radar sensor system, Rto people or animals
PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that Rto oncoming vehicles
are in front of your vehicle for an extended Rto crossing traffic
period of time. Rwhen cornering
PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimise As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neither
the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead, and give warnings nor intervene in all critical sit-
reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE- uations. There is a risk of an accident.
SAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision,
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
you will be warned visually and acoustically
uation and be ready to brake.
as well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE®
Brake cannot prevent a collision without your In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, recog-
intervention. nition can be impaired.
Recognition by the radar sensor system is
Important safety notes also impaired in the event of:
G WARNING Rdirt on the sensors or the sensors are
PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehi- obscured
cle by a partial application of the brakes if a Rinterference by other radar sources
danger of collision is detected. There may be Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in
a collision unless you also brake. Automatic multi-storey car parks
emergency braking cannot prevent a colli- Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a
sion. There is a risk of an accident. motorcycle
Always apply the brakes yourself and try to Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different
take evasive action. line
Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
G WARNING cle, have the radar sensor settings and oper-
PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden- ation checked at a qualified specialist work-
tify objects and complex traffic conditions. shop. This also applies to collisions at slow
In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may: speeds where there is no visible damage to
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then the front of the vehicle.
brake the vehicle
Rneither give a warning nor intervene

There is a risk of an accident.

 Anti-theft systems 75

Function up to the point of full brake application. Auto-

matic emergency braking is not performed
X To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-
until immediately prior to an imminent acci-
tivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board dent.
computer (Y page 248).
You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-
If the PRE-SAFE® Brake is not activated, the

Safety
æ symbol appears in the multifunction SAFE® Brake at any time by:
display. Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further
Ractivating kickdown
This function will issue a warning if:
Rreleasing the brake pedal
Rat a speed of around 30 km/h or more the
distance maintained to the vehicle travel- The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is
ling in front is insufficient for several sec- ended automatically if:
onds. Ryou manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle
The · distance warning lamp then lights Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision
up in the instrument cluster. Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in
Rat a speed of approximately 7 km/h or front of your vehicle
more, you rapidly approach a vehicle in
front.
An intermittent warning tone will then Anti-theft systems
sound and the · distance warning lamp
Immobiliser
will light up in the instrument cluster.
X Brake immediately to defuse the situation. The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from
being started without the correct key.
or
X To activate with the key: remove the key
X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
so. from the ignition lock.
X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the
The PRE-SAFE® Brake function can also brake ignition off and open the driver's door.
the vehicle automatically under the following
X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
conditions:
Rthe driver and front-passenger have their i The immobiliser is always deactivated
seat belts fastened when you start the engine.
and
Rthe vehicle speed is between approx-
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
imately 7 km/h and 200 km/h
At speeds of up to approximately 70 km/h A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect stationary alarm system is primed and you open:
objects. Examples of stationary objects are Ra door
stopped or parked vehicles. Rthe vehicle with the emergency key ele-
i If there is an increased risk of collision, ment
preventive passenger protection measures Rthe tailgate
(PRE-SAFE®) are activated. Rthe bonnet

If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front The alarm is not switched off, even if you
remains and you do not brake, take evasive close the open door that has triggered it, for
action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle example.
may perform automatic emergency braking,
Z
76 Anti-theft systems

X To prime: lock the vehicle with the key or

KEYLESS-GO.
Tow-away protection is primed after
approximately 30 seconds.
X To switch off: unlock the vehicle with the
Safety

key or KEYLESS-GO.
Tow-away protection is switched off auto-
matically.
To prevent a false alarm, deactivate tow-away
protection manually if your vehicle:
X To prime: lock the vehicle with the key or Rit is being transported
KEYLESS-GO. Rit is being loaded onto a ferry or car trans-
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm sys- porter, for example
tem is primed after approximately Ris parked on a movable surface, e.g. in a
15 seconds. split-level garage
X To switch off: unlock the vehicle with the
Deactivating:
key or KEYLESS-GO.
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
X To stop the alarm using the key: insert
the key into the ignition lock.
The alarm is switched off.
or
X Press the % or & button on the key.
The alarm is switched off.
X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outside door handle. The key
must be outside the vehicle.
The alarm is switched off.
or
X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash- X Press button :.
board. The key must be inside the vehicle. Indicator lamp ; lights up briefly.
The alarm is switched off. X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-
GO.
Tow-away protection is deactivated.
Tow-away protection Tow-away protection remains deactivated
An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your until:
vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while Rthe vehicle is unlocked again
tow-away protection is primed. This occurs if Ra door is opened and closed again
the vehicle is jacked up on one side, for exam-
Rthe vehicle is locked again
ple.

Interior motion sensor

When the interior motion sensor is primed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered if move-
 Anti-theft systems 77

ment is detected in the vehicle interior. This X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-
occurs if someone reaches into the vehicle GO.
interior, for example. The interior motion sensor is deactivated.
To prime: The interior motion sensor remains deactiva-
X Make sure that: ted until:

Safety
Rthe side windows are closed. Rthe vehicle is unlocked again
Rthe panorama sliding sunroof is closed. Ra door is opened and closed again
Rthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hang- Rthe vehicle is locked again
ing on the rear-view mirror or on the grab i UK only: your vehicle is equipped with a
handles on the roof trim. double lock function. The doors cannot be
This will prevent false alarms. opened from the inside if the vehicle has
X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS- been locked with the key (Y page 87).
GO. Deactivate the interior motion sensor
The interior motion sensor is primed after before you lock the vehicle with the key.
approximately 30 seconds. The doors can then be opened from the
To switch off: inside after the vehicle has been locked
from the outside with the key. Observe the
X Unlock the vehicle with the key or KEY- "Important safety notes" (Y page 86).
LESS-GO.
The interior motion sensor is switched off
automatically.
To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the inte-
rior motion sensor if you lock your vehicle
and:
Rpeople or animals remain in the vehicle.
Rthe side windows remain open.
Rthe panorama sliding sunroof remains
open.
To deactivate:
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.

X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; flashes briefly.

Z
78
 79

Useful information .............................. 80

Key ....................................................... 80
Doors .................................................... 86
Luggage compartment ....................... 89
Side windows ...................................... 94
Sliding sunroof .................................... 97

Opening and closing

 80 Key

Useful information G WARNING

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- they could:
els, series and optional equipment for your Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
vehicle that were available at the time of
people or road users.
going to press. National variations are pos-
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
sible. Note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all of the functions descri- Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Opening and closing

bed. This is also the case for systems and Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
functions relevant to safety. motion if, for example, they:
i Read the information on qualified special- Rrelease the parking brake.
ist workshops: (Y page 28). Rshift the automatic transmission out of
parking position P.
Rshift the manual transmission into neutral.
Key Rstart the engine.

Important safety notes There is a risk of an accident and injury.

United Kingdom only: When leaving the vehicle, always take the key
with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave
G WARNING children or animals unattended in the vehicle.
When the double locks are activated, the Always keep the key out of reach of children.
doors can no longer be opened from the
inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get G WARNING
out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a If persons (particularly children) are exposed
risk of injury. to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there
Therefore, do not leave any people unsuper- is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never
vised in the vehicle, particularly children, eld- leave persons (particularly children) unatten-
erly people or people in need of special assis- ded in the vehicle.
tance. Do not activate the double lock when
people are in the vehicle. G WARNING
If you attach heavy or large objects to the key,
If the vehicle has been locked from the out- the key could be unintentionally turned in the
side, the double lock function is activated as ignition lock. This could cause the engine to
standard. It is then not possible to open the be switched off. There is a risk of an accident.
doors from inside the vehicle. You can deac-
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to
tivate the double lock function by deactivat-
the key. Remove any bulky keyrings before
ing the interior motion sensor (Y page 76).
inserting the key into the ignition lock.
The doors can then be opened from the inside
after the vehicle has been locked from the ! Keep the key away from strong magnetic
outside. The anti-theft alarm system is trig- fields. Otherwise, the remote control func-
gered if the door is opened from the inside. tion could be affected.
Switch off the alarm (Y page 75).
All countries:
 Key 81

Strong magnetic fields can occur in the If you do not open the vehicle within approx-
vicinity of powerful electrical installations. imately 40 seconds of unlocking:
RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key: Rthe vehicle is locked again.
- with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile Rthe anti-theft system is primed again.
phone or another key X To lock centrally: press the & button.
- with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
film

Opening and closing

- inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case KEYLESS-GO
This can affect the key's functionality.
General notes
Bear in mind that the engine can be started
Key functions by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a
The key centrally locks/unlocks: KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle.
Rthe doors Locking and unlocking centrally
Rthe tailgate
Rthe fuel filler flap You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry
the key with you. You can combine the KEY-
LESS-GO functions with the functions of a
conventional key. Unlock the vehicle by using
KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using
the & button on the key.
When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO,
the distance between the key and the corre-
sponding door handle must not be greater
than 1 m.
KEYLESS-GO checks whether a valid key is in
: & To lock the vehicle the vehicle by periodically establishing a radio
; F To open/close the tailgate connection between the vehicle and the key.
This happens:
= % To unlock the vehicle
Rwhen the external door handles are
When unlocking, the turn signals flash once. touched
When locking, they flash three times.
Rwhen starting the engine
When it is dark, the surround lighting also
Rwhile the vehicle is in motion
comes on if it is activated in the on-board
computer (Y page 252).
You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
signal can be activated and deactivated using
the on-board computer (Y page 254).
X To unlock centrally: press the % but-
ton.

Z
 82 Key

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-
surface of the door handle. lows:
X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur- X To unlock the driver's door: touch the
face :. inner surface of the door handle on the
X Convenience closing feature: touch driver's door.
recessed sensor surface ; for an exten- X To unlock centrally: touch the inner sur-
ded period. face of the door handle on the front-
passenger door or the rear door.
Opening and closing

For further information on the convenience

closing feature (Y page 96). X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor

If you pull on the handle of the tailgate, only surface on one of the door handles
the luggage compartment of the vehicle is (Y page 81).
unlocked. X To restore the factory settings: press
and hold down the % and & buttons
simultaneously for approximately six sec-
Changing the settings of the locking onds until the battery check lamp flashes
system twice.
You can change the settings of the locking
system. This means that only the driver's door
and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the Emergency key element
vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you fre- General notes
quently travel on your own.
X To change the setting: press and hold
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
unlocked with the key or the KEYLESS-GO
down the % and & buttons simulta-
key, use the emergency key element.
neously for approximately six seconds until
the battery check lamp (Y page 83) If you use the emergency key element to
flashes twice. unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-
theft alarm system will be triggered
i If the setting of the locking system is (Y page 75).
changed within the signal range of the vehi- X To switch off the alarm: insert the key
cle, pressing the & or % button: into the ignition lock.
Rlocks or i With KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/
Runlocks the vehicle Stop button from the ignition lock before-
hand.
The key now functions as follows:
If you unlock the vehicle using the emergency
X To unlock the driver's door: press the key element, the fuel filler flap will not be
% button once. unlocked automatically.
X To unlock centrally: press the % but-
ton twice.
X To lock centrally: press the & button.
 Key 83

Removing the emergency key element lection point for used batter-
ies.

Checking the battery

Opening and closing

X Push release catch : in the direction of
the arrow and at the same time, remove
emergency key element ; from the key.
X Press the & or % button.
The battery is working properly if battery
Battery of the key check lamp : lights up briefly.
Important safety notes If battery check lamp : does not light up
briefly during the test, the battery is dis-
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
charged.
the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop. i If the key battery is checked within the
G WARNING signal reception range of the vehicle, press-
ing the & or % button:
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in Rlocks or
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal Runlocks the vehicle
injury.
X Change the battery (Y page 83).
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention i You can get a battery at a qualified spe-
immediately. cialist workshop.

H Environmental note Replacing the battery

Batteries contain pollutants.
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
It is illegal to dispose of them
X Take the emergency key element out of the
with the household rubbish.
They must be collected sep- key (Y page 82).
arately and disposed of in an
environmentally responsible
recycling system.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop or to a col-

Z
 84
Opening and closing Key

X Press emergency key element ; into the

opening in the key in the direction of the
arrow until battery compartment cover :
opens. While doing so, do not hold battery
compartment cover : shut.
X Remove battery compartment cover :.

X Repeatedly tap the key against your palm

until battery = falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-
minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth
to do so.
X Make sure that the surface of the battery is
free from lint, grease and all other forms of
contamination.
X Insert the front tabs of battery compart-
ment cover : into the housing and then
press to close it.
X Insert emergency key element ; into the
key.
X Check the function of all key buttons on the
vehicle.
 Key 85

Problems with the key

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

You cannot lock or The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control
using the key. function of the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door
handle from close range and press the % / & button.

Opening and closing

If this does not work:
X Check the key battery (Y page 83) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 83).
X Lock (Y page 88) or unlock (Y page 89) the vehicle using
the emergency key element.

The key is faulty.

X Lock (Y page 88) or unlock (Y page 89) the vehicle using
the emergency key element.
X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lock KEYLESS-GO is in standby mode because the vehicle has not been
or unlock the vehicle unlocked for an extended period.
using KEYLESS-GO. X Pull the door handle and then turn the key to position 2 in the
ignition lock.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from
close range and press the % / & button.

There is a fault with KEYLESS-GO.

X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from
close range and press the % / & button.
X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

If this does not work:

X Check the key battery (Y page 83) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 83).
X Lock (Y page 88) or unlock (Y page 89) the vehicle using
the emergency key element.

You have lost a key. X Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Z
 86 Doors

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

You have lost the emer- X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
gency key element. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.

started using the key. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
lighting, and try to start the engine again.
Opening and closing

If this does not work:

X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
(Y page 345).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 349).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot be A door is open. Therefore, the key cannot be detected as easily.
started using KEYLESS- X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again.
GO. The key is in the
vehicle. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X Start your vehicle with the key in the ignition lock.

Doors The doors can then be opened from the inside

after the vehicle has been locked from the
Important safety notes outside. The anti-theft alarm system is trig-
United Kingdom only: gered if the door is opened from the inside.
Switch off the alarm (Y page 75).
G WARNING All countries:
When the double locks are activated, the
doors can no longer be opened from the G WARNING
inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a they could:
risk of injury. Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
Therefore, do not leave any people unsuper- people or road users.
vised in the vehicle, particularly children, eld- Rget out and disrupt traffic.
erly people or people in need of special assis- Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
tance. Do not activate the double lock when
people are in the vehicle. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
If the vehicle has been locked from the out- Rrelease the parking brake.
side, the double lock function is activated as Rshift the automatic transmission out of
standard. It is then not possible to open the parking position P.
doors from inside the vehicle. You can deac- Rshift the manual transmission into neutral.
tivate the double lock function by deactivat-
Rstart the engine.
ing the interior motion sensor (Y page 76).
 Doors 87

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the key
with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave
children or animals unattended in the vehicle.
Always keep the key out of reach of children.

G WARNING
If persons (particularly children) are exposed

Opening and closing

to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there
is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never
leave persons (particularly children) unatten- X Pull door handle ;.
ded in the vehicle.
If the door is locked, locking knob : pops
Stow luggage or loads preferably in the lug- up. The door is unlocked and can be
gage compartment. Observe the loading opened.
guidelines (Y page 310).

Centrally locking and unlocking the

Unlocking and opening the doors vehicle from the inside
from the inside You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle
For all countries except the United King- from the inside.
dom: you can open a door from inside the You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from
vehicle even if it has been locked. the inside if the vehicle has been locked with
You can only open the rear doors from inside the key or KEYLESS-GO.
the vehicle if they are not secured by the
child-proof locks (Y page 67).
Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle
has been locked with the key from the out-
side, the double-lock function is activated as
standard. It is then not possible to open the
doors from inside the vehicle. You can deac-
tivate the double lock function by deactivat-
ing the interior motion sensor (Y page 76).
The doors can then be opened from the inside
after the vehicle has been locked from the
outside. The anti-theft alarm system is trig- X To unlock: press button :.
gered if the door is opened from the inside. X To lock: press button ;.
Switch off the alarm (Y page 75). If the front-passenger door is closed, the
You can only open the rear doors from inside vehicle locks.
the vehicle if they are not secured by the
child-proof locks (Y page 67). This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.
For all countries except the United King-
dom: you can open a door from inside the
vehicle even if it locked.

Z
 88 Doors

You can only open the rear doors from inside

the vehicle if they are not secured by the
child-proof locks (Y page 67).
Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle
has been locked with the key from the out-
side, the double-lock function is activated as
standard. It is then not possible to open the
doors from inside the vehicle. You can deac-
Opening and closing

tivate the double lock function by deactivat-

ing the interior motion sensor (Y page 76).
The doors can then be opened from the inside
after the vehicle has been locked from the X To deactivate: press and hold button :
outside. The anti-theft alarm system is trig- for about five seconds until a tone sounds.
gered if the door is opened from the inside. X To activate: press and hold button ; for
Switch off the alarm (Y page 75). about five seconds until a tone sounds.
You can only open the rear doors from inside
the vehicle if they are not secured by the
i If you press one of the two buttons and
child-proof locks (Y page 67). do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has
already been selected.
If the vehicle has been locked using the lock-
ing button for the central locking, or has been On vehicles with a luxury multifunction steer-
locked automatically, and a door is opened ing wheel, you can also activate and deacti-
from the inside: vate the automatic locking via the on-board
computer (Y page 253).
Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had
previously been fully unlocked
Ronly the door which has been opened form
Unlocking the driver's door (emer-
the inside is unlocked if only the driver's gency key element)
door had been previously unlocked
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with
the key, use the emergency key element.
Automatic locking feature If you use the emergency key element to
unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-
The vehicle is locked automatically when the theft alarm system will be triggered
ignition is switched on and the wheels are (Y page 75).
turning.
X Take the emergency key element out of the
You could therefore be locked out if:
key (Y page 82).
Rthe vehicle is being pushed. X Insert the emergency key element into the
Rthe vehicle is being towed. lock of the driver's door as far as it will go.
Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamom-
eter.
 Luggage compartment 89

Opening and closing

XTurn the emergency key element anti- X Turn the emergency key element clockwise
clockwise to position 1. as far as it will go to position 1.
The door is unlocked. i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the
i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element anti-clockwise.
emergency key element clockwise. X Turn the emergency key element back and
X Turn the emergency key element back and remove it.
remove it. X Make sure that the doors and the tailgate
X Insert the emergency key element into the are locked.
key. X Insert the emergency key element into the
key.

Locking the vehicle (emergency key i If you lock the vehicle as described above,
element) the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-
theft alarm system is not primed.
If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the
key, use the emergency key element.
X Open the driver's door. Luggage compartment
X Close the front-passenger door, the rear
Important safety notes
doors and the tailgate.
X Press the locking button (Y page 87). G WARNING
X Check whether the locking knobs on the If persons (particularly children) are exposed
front-passenger door and the rear doors to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there
are still visible. Press down the locking is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never
knobs manually, if necessary (Y page 87). leave persons (particularly children) unatten-
X Close the driver's door. ded in the vehicle.
X Take the emergency key element out of the
G WARNING
key (Y page 82).
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
X Insert the emergency key element into the
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
lock of the driver's door as far as it will go.
is open when the engine is running, particu-
larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes
could enter the passenger compartment.
There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the tail-
gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

Z
 90 Luggage compartment

! The tailgate swings upwards and to the G WARNING

rear when opened. Therefore, make sure The reversing function does not react:
that there is sufficient clearance above and
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
behind the tailgate.
gers
i Tailgate opening dimensions Rover the last 8 mm of the closing path
(Y page 390)
This means that the reversing feature cannot
Stow luggage or loads preferably in the lug- prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
Opening and closing

gage compartment. Observe the loading uations. There is a risk of injury.

guidelines (Y page 310). When closing make sure that no parts of the
Do not leave the key in the luggage compart- body are in the closing area.
ment. You could otherwise lock yourself out. If someone is trapped:
Vehicles without the EASY-PACK tail-
Rpress the F button on the key, or
gate: the tailgate can be:
Rpress the remote operating switch on the
Ropened and closed manually from outside driver’s door, or
Runlocked from the inside with the emer-
Rpress the closing or locking button on the
gency key element tailgate or
For vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate Rpull the handle on the tailgate.
you can:
Ropen and close the tailgate manually from
outside Opening/closing from the outside
Ropen and close the tailgate automatically
from outside Opening
Ropen and close the tailgate automatically X Press the % button on the key.
from inside
Rlimit the opening angle of the tailgate
Runlock the tailgate from inside with the
emergency key element

Tailgate reversing feature

The tailgate is equipped with an automatic
reversing function. It reacts if a solid object
obstructs or restricts the tailgate during the
closing procedure. The tailgate opens again
automatically. The automatic reversing fea- X Pull handle :.
ture is however only an aid and is not a sub- X Raise the tailgate.
stitute for your attentiveness when closing Vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate: if
the luggage compartment. you pull handle : and keep it in this position,
you can open the tailgate manually. If you
release the handle, the tailgate opens auto-
matically.
 Luggage compartment 91

Closing The doors can then be opened from the inside

after the vehicle has been locked from the
outside. The anti-theft alarm system is trig-
gered if the door is opened from the inside.
Switch off the alarm (Y page 75).
All countries:
G WARNING

Opening and closing

Parts of the body could become trapped dur-
ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More-
over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in
the closing area or may enter the closing area
during the closing process. There is a risk of
X Pull the tailgate down using recess :. injury.
X Push the tailgate closed from outside the Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
vehicle. closing area during the closing process.
X If necessary, lock the vehicle with
Use one of the following options to stop the
the & button on the key (Y page 81) or closing process:
with KEYLESS-GO (Y page 81).
Rpress the F button on the key.
i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the
Rpress the remote operating switch on the
luggage compartment, the tailgate will not
lock. driver's door.
Rpress the closing or locking button on the
tailgate.
Opening/closing automatically from Rpull the handle on the tailgate.
the outside
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the
Important safety notes rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
United Kingdom only: that there is sufficient clearance above and
behind the tailgate.
G WARNING
i Tailgate opening dimensions
When the double locks are activated, the
(Y page 390)
doors can no longer be opened from the
inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get
out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a Opening
risk of injury. You can open the tailgate automatically with
Therefore, do not leave any people unsuper- the key or the handle in the tailgate.
vised in the vehicle, particularly children, eld- Open or close the tailgate fully using the auto-
erly people or people in need of special assis- matic door function if you have stopped the
tance. Do not activate the double lock when tailgate in an intermediate position.
people are in the vehicle. X Press and hold the F button on the key

If the vehicle has been locked from the out- until the tailgate opens.
side, the double lock function is activated as or
standard. It is then not possible to open the X When the tailgate is unlocked, pull the han-
doors from inside the vehicle. You can deac- dle and let it go again immediately.
tivate the double lock function by deactivat-
ing the interior motion sensor (Y page 76).
Z
 92 Luggage compartment

i You can also close the tailgate manually Opening/closing automatically from
if it is fully opened. the inside
! If you have opened the tailgate automat- G WARNING
ically, you should wait a moment before
Parts of the body could become trapped dur-
closing the tailgate manually.
ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More-
over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in
Closing the closing area or may enter the closing area
Opening and closing

You can close the tailgate automatically using during the closing process. There is a risk of
the key, the closing button5 or the locking injury.
button6. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
Rpress the F button on the key.
Rpress the remote operating switch on the
driver's door.
Rpress the closing or locking button on the
tailgate.
Rpull the handle on the tailgate.

Closing button and locking button (example: vehi- G WARNING

cle with the EASY-PACK tailgate and KEYLESS-GO) Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
X To close: press closing button : on the gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
tailgate. is open when the engine is running, particu-
or larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes
could enter the passenger compartment.
X Press and hold the F button on the key
There is a risk of poisoning.
until the tailgate closes.
Turn off the engine before opening the tail-
X To close and lock simultaneously:
gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
Press locking button ; on the tailgate.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the
i The tailgate can only be opened and rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
closed with the key if there is no key in the that there is sufficient clearance above and
ignition lock. behind the tailgate.
If the tailgate touches an object while clos-
ing, the closing procedure is interrupted i Tailgate opening dimensions
and the tailgate reopens. (Y page 390)

i If you leave a KEYLESS-GO key in the lug- You can open and close the tailgate from the
gage compartment, the tailgate will not driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary
lock. and unlocked.
The tailgate is not closed unless a KEY-
LESS-GO key is detected.

5 For vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate only.

6 For vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate and KEYLESS-GO only.
 Luggage compartment 93

(Y page 91) in the tailgate or pull the handle

on the outside of the tailgate again.
X To store the position: press and hold the
closing button in the tailgate until you hear
a short tone.
The opening angle limiter is activated. The
tailgate then stops in the stored position
when opened.

Opening and closing

i To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle
on the outside of the tailgate again after it
has stopped automatically. This does not
X To open: pull remote operating switch :
delete the stored position.
for the tailgate until the tailgate opens.
X To close: turn the key to position 1 or 2 in Deactivating
the ignition lock.
X Press and hold the closing button
X Press remote operating switch for tail-
(Y page 91) in the tailgate until you hear
gate : until the tailgate is closed. two short tones.

Limiting the opening angle of the tail- Tailgate emergency release

gate
Important safety notes
Important safety notes
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the
You can limit the opening angle of the tail- rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
gate. This is possible in the top half of its that there is sufficient clearance above and
opening range, up to approximately 20 cm behind the tailgate.
before the stop.
If the tailgate can no longer be opened from
This could be useful, for example, if there is
outside the vehicle, use the emergency
insufficient space above the tailgate.
release on the inside of the tailgate.
! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to
i Tailgate opening dimensions
open the tailgate fully when setting the
(Y page 390).
opening angle. The tailgate could otherwise
be damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle
outside. Opening

Activating
X To open the tailgate: pull the handle on
the tailgate.
X To stop the opening procedure at the
desired position: press the closing button

Z
 94 Side windows

X Take the emergency key element out of the G WARNING

key (Y page 82). If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
X Insert emergency key element ; into the they could:
opening in trim :. Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
X Turn emergency key element ;90° clock- people or road users.
wise. Rget out and disrupt traffic.
X Push emergency key element ; in the Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Opening and closing

direction of the arrow and open the tail- Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
gate. motion if, for example, they:
i When you lock the vehicle (Y page 89), Rrelease the parking brake.
the luggage compartment is also locked. Rshift the automatic transmission out of
parking position P.
Rshift the manual transmission into neutral.
Side windows
Rstart the engine.
Important safety notes There is a risk of an accident and injury.
G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, always take the key
with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave
While opening the side windows, body parts
children or animals unattended in the vehicle.
could become trapped between the side win-
Always keep the key out of reach of children.
dow and the door frame as the side window
moves. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody touches the side win-
Side window reversing feature
dow during the opening procedure. If some-
body becomes trapped, release the switch or The side windows are equipped with an auto-
pull the switch to close the side window again. matic reversing feature. If a solid object
blocks or restricts a side window during the
G WARNING closing process, the side window opens again
When a side window is closed, body parts may automatically. The automatic reversing fea-
become trapped in the closing range. There is ture is however only an aid and is no substi-
a risk of injury. tute for your attention when closing a side
Ensure that there are no body parts in the window.
closing range of the window when closing it. G WARNING
If somebody becomes trapped, release the The reversing function does not react:
button immediately or press the lower section
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
of the button to open the side window again.
gers
G WARNING Rover the last 4 mm of the closing movement

If children operate the side windows they Rduring resetting

could become trapped, particularly if they are Rwhen closing the side window again man-
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. ually immediately after automatic reversing
Activate the override feature for the rear side This means that the reversing function cannot
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
take the key with you and lock the vehicle. uations. There is a risk of injury.
Never leave children unattended in the vehi-
cle.
 Side windows 95

When closing make sure that no parts of the active for five minutes or until the driver's
body are in the closing area. If someone or front-passenger door is opened.
becomes trapped, press the switch to open
the side window again.
Convenience opening feature
You can ventilate the vehicle before you start
Opening and closing the side win- driving. To do this, the key is used to carry out
dows the following functions simultaneously:

Opening and closing

Runlock the vehicle
Ropen the side windows
Ropen the panorama sliding sunroof and the
roller sunblinds
i The convenience opening feature can
only be operated using the key. The key
must be close to the driver's door handle.
X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door
handle.
X Press and hold the % button until the
: Front left
; Front right
side windows and the panorama sunroof
are in the desired position.
= Rear right
If the roller sunblinds of the panorama sliding
? Rear left
sunroof are closed, the roller sunblinds are
The switches for all side windows are located opened first.
on the driver's door. There is also a switch on X Press and hold the % button again until
each door for the corresponding side window. the panorama sliding sunroof is in the
The switches on the driver's door take prec- desired position.
edence. X To interrupt convenience opening:
i The side windows cannot be operated release the % button.
from the rear when the override feature for
the side windows is activated (Y page 68).
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition Convenience closing feature
lock. General notes
X To open: press the corresponding switch.
X To close: pull the corresponding switch.
When you lock the vehicle, you can simulta-
neously:
i If you press the switch beyond the point
Rclose the side windows
of resistance, an automatic opening/clos-
ing process is started in the corresponding Rclose the panorama sliding sunroof
direction. You can stop automatic opera- On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof,
tion by pressing again. you can then close the roller sunblinds.
i You can continue to operate the side win- G WARNING
dows after switching off the engine or When the convenience closing feature is oper-
removing the key. This function remains ating, parts of the body could become trapped

Z
 96 Side windows

in the closing area of the side window and the

sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Observe the complete closing procedure
when the convenience closing feature is oper-
ating. When closing make sure that no parts
of the body are in the closing area.

Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:

Opening and closing

With the key:

Rrelease the & button.
Rpress and hold the % button until the XTouch recessed sensor surface : on the
side windows and the sliding sunroof or the door handle until the side windows and the
panorama sliding sunroof open again. panorama sliding sunroof are fully closed.
With KEYLESS-GO: i Make sure you only touch recessed sen-
Rrelease the sensor surface on the door han- sor surface :.
dle. X Make sure that all the side windows and the
Rpull the door handle immediately and hold panorama sliding sunroof are closed.
it. On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof:
The side windows and the sliding sunroof
or the panorama sliding sunroof open.
X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle again until the roller sunblinds
Using the key of the panorama sliding sunroof close.
X To interrupt convenience closing:
i The key must be close to the driver's door
release recessed sensor surface : on the
handle.
door handle.
X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door
handle.
X Press and hold the & button until the Resetting the side windows
side windows and the panorama sliding
sunroof are fully closed. You must reset each side window if a side
window can no longer be closed fully.
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
X Close all doors.
panorama sliding sunroof are closed.
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: lock.
X Press and hold the & button again until X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
the roller sunblinds of the panorama sliding control panel until the side window is com-
sunroof close. pletely closed (Y page 95).
X To interrupt convenience closing: X Hold the switch for an additional second.
release the & button.

Using KEYLESS-GO
The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the
vehicle. All the doors must be closed.
 Sliding sunroof 97

If the side window opens again slightly: If a side window is obstructed again during
X Immediately pull the corresponding switch closing and reopens again slightly:
on the door control panel until the side win- X Immediately after the window blocks, pull
dow is completely closed (Y page 95). the corresponding switch again until the
X Hold the switch for an additional second. side window has closed.
X If the corresponding side window remains The side window is closed without the anti-
closed after the button has been released, entrapment feature.
the side window has been reset correctly.

Opening and closing

If this is not the case, repeat the steps
above again. Sliding sunroof
Important safety notes
Problems with the side windows In the following section, the term "sliding sun-
roof" refers to the panorama sliding sunroof.
Problem: a side window cannot be closed
because it is blocked by objects, e.g. G WARNING
leaves in the window guide. While opening and closing the sliding sunroof,
X Remove the objects. body parts in close proximity could become
trapped. There is a risk of injury.
X Close the side window.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
Problem: a side window cannot be closed proximity during the opening and closing pro-
and you cannot see the cause. cedures.
G WARNING If somebody becomes trapped:
If you close a side window again immediately Rrelease the switch immediately, or
after it has been blocked or reset, the side Rduring automatic operation, push the
window closes with increased or maximum switch briefly in any direction
force. The reversing function is then not
The opening or closing procedure will be stop-
active. Parts of the body could be trapped in
ped.
the closing area in the process. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
G WARNING
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the
If children operate the sliding sunroof they
closing area. To stop the closing process,
could become trapped, particularly if they are
release the switch or push the switch again to
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
reopen the side window.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key
If a side window is obstructed during closing with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave
and reopens again slightly: children unattended in the vehicle.
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull ! Only open the panorama sliding sunroof
the corresponding switch again until the if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, mal-
side window has closed. functions may occur.
The side window is closed with increased
Do not allow anything to protrude from the
force.
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could
be damaged.
i Resonance noises can occur in addition
to the usual airflow noises when the sliding

Z
 98 Sliding sunroof

sunroof is open. They are caused by minor Operating the sliding sunroof
pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.
Change the position of the sliding sunroof Opening and closing
or open a side window slightly to reduce or
eliminate these noises.

Sliding sunroof reversing feature

Opening and closing

The sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-

matic reversing feature. If an object blocks or
restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing
process, the sliding sunroof opens again
automatically. The automatic reversing fea-
ture is however only an aid and is no substi-
tute for your attention when closing the slid- Overhead control panel
ing roof. : To raise
; To open
G WARNING
= To close/lower
The reversing function does not react:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
lock.
gers
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
Rover the last 4 mm of the closing movement
sponding direction.
Rduring resetting
i If you press the 3 switch beyond the
Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again man-
point of resistance, an automatic opening/
ually immediately after automatic reversing
closing process is started in the corre-
This means that the reversing function cannot sponding direction. You can stop automatic
prevent someone being trapped in these sit- operation by pressing again.
uations. There is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the Rain-closing feature
body are in the closing area.
The rain-closing feature is only available for
If someone is trapped:
vehicles with a rain sensor.
Rrelease the switch immediately or When the key is in position 0 in the ignition
Rpress the switch in any direction during the lock or is removed, the sliding sunroof closes
automatic closing process automatically:
The closing process is stopped. Rif it starts to rain
Rat extreme outside temperatures
Rafter six hours
Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply

The sliding sunroof remains raised at the rear

in order to allow ventilation of the vehicle
interior.
i If the sliding sunroof is obstructed when
being closed by the rain-closing feature, it
 Sliding sunroof 99

opens again slightly. The rain-closing fea- G WARNING

ture is then deactivated. The reversing function does not react:
The sliding sunroof does not close if: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
Rit is raised at the rear. gers
Rit is blocked. Rwhen closing the roller sunblind again man-
Rno rain is falling on the area of the wind- ually immediately after automatic reversing
screen being monitored by the rain sensor, This means that the reversing function cannot

Opening and closing

e.g. because the vehicle is under a bridge. prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
uations. There is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the
Operating the roller sunblinds for the body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.
sliding sunroof If someone is trapped:
General notes Rrelease the switch immediately or
Rpress the switch in any direction during the
The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior
from sunlight. The two roller sunblinds can automatic opening/closing process
only be opened and closed together when the The closing process is stopped.
sliding sunroof is closed.
G WARNING Opening and closing
When opening or closing the roller sunblind
parts of the body could be trapped between
the roller sunblind and the frame or sliding
sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
When opening or closing make sure that no
parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller
sunblind.
If someone is trapped:
Rrelease the switch immediately or
Rpress the switch in any direction during the
automatic opening/closing process Overhead control panel
The opening/closing process is stopped. : To open
; To open
Roller sunblinds reversing feature = To close

The roller sunblinds are equipped with an X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
automatic reversing feature. If an object lock.
blocks or restricts the roller sunblind during X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
the closing process, the roller sunblind opens sponding direction.
again automatically.The automatic reversing i If you press the 3 switch beyond the
feature is however only an aid and is no sub- point of resistance, an automatic opening/
stitute for your attention when closing the closing process is started in the corre-
roller sunblind. sponding direction. You can stop automatic
operation by pressing again.

Z
100 Sliding sunroof

Resetting the sliding sunroof and the imum force. The reversing function is then not
roller sunblinds active. Parts of the body could be trapped in
Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sun- the closing area in the process. This poses an
blinds if the sliding sunroof or the roller sun- increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
blinds do not move smoothly. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
closing area.
lock. If someone is trapped:
Opening and closing

X Press the 3 button to the point of resist- Rrelease the switch immediately or
ance in the direction of arrow ; until the Rpress the switch in any direction during the
sliding sunroof is open approximately automatic opening/closing process
10 cm. The closing process is stopped.
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point
of resistance in the direction of arrow = If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during
until the sliding sunroof is fully closed. closing and reopens again slightly:
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an addi- X Immediately after the sliding sunroof
tional second. blocks, pull the 3 switch in the over-
X Press the 3 button to the point of resist- head control panel down to the point of
ance in the direction of arrow ; until the resistance and hold it until the sliding sun-
roof is closed.
roller sunblinds are open approximately
The sliding sunroof is closed with increased
10 cm.
force.
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point
of resistance in the direction of arrow = If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again dur-
until the roller sunblinds are fully closed. ing closing and reopens again slightly:
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an addi- X Immediately after the sliding sunroof
tional second. blocks, pull the 3 switch in the over-
X Make sure that the sliding sunroof and the head control panel down to the point of
roller sunblinds can be fully opened and resistance and hold it until the sliding sun-
closed again (Y page 98). roof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed without the
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps
anti-entrapment feature.
above again.
! If the sliding sunroof and the roller sun-
blinds cannot be fully opened or closed
after resetting, contact a qualified special-
ist workshop.

Problems with the sliding sunroof

Problem: the sunroof cannot be closed
and you cannot see the cause.
G WARNING
If you close the sliding sunroof again immedi-
ately after it has been blocked or reset, the
sliding sunroof closes with increased or max-
 101

Useful information ............................ 102

Correct driver's seat position .......... 102
Seats .................................................. 103
Steering wheel .................................. 108
Mirrors ............................................... 110
Memory function .............................. 113

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

102 Correct driver's seat position

Useful information Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.

Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- vertical position.
els, series and optional equipment for your Ryou have set the seat angle so that your
vehicle that were available at the time of thighs are gently supported.
going to press. National variations are pos- Ryou can depress the pedals properly.
sible. Note that your vehicle may not be
X Check whether the head restraint is adjus-
equipped with all of the functions descri-
ted correctly.
bed. This is also the case for systems and
functions relevant to safety. When doing so, make sure that you have
adjusted the head restraint so that the back
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

i Read the information on qualified special- of your head is supported at eye level by
ist workshops: (Y page 28). the centre of the head restraint.
X Observe the safety guidelines on steering
wheel adjustment (Y page 108).
Correct driver's seat position
X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjus-
ted correctly.
Adjusting the steering wheel manually
(Y page 109)
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
(Y page 109)
When adjusting the steering wheel, make
sure that:
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent.
Ryou can move your legs freely.
Ryou can see all the displays in the instru-
ment cluster clearly.
X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts
(Y page 52).
X Check whether you have fastened seat
belt ; properly (Y page 54).
The seat belt should:
X Observe the safety guidelines on seat Rfit snugly across your body
adjustment (Y page 103). Rbe routed across the middle of your shoul-
X Make sure that seat = is correctly adjus- der
ted. Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip
Manual and electrical seat adjustment joints
(Y page 104) X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mir-
Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 104) ror and the exterior mirrors so that you
When adjusting the seat, make sure that: have a good view of road and traffic condi-
Ryou are as far away from the driver's airbag tions (Y page 110).
as possible. X Vehicles with a memory function: save

Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position. the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror
 Seats 103

settings with the memory function Make sure that no one has any part of their
(Y page 113). body within the sweep of the seat when
adjusting it.

Seats G WARNING
The head restraints cannot provide the inten-
Important safety notes
ded protection unless they are fitted and
G WARNING adjusted correctly. There is an increased risk
If children adjust the seats, they could of injury to the head and neck in the event of
become trapped, especially if they are unat- an accident or sudden braking, for example.

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

tended. There is a risk of injury. Always drive with the head restraints fitted.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key Ensure that the centre of the head restraints
with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave support the back of each vehicle occupant's
children unattended in the vehicle. head at eye level before driving off.

G WARNING G WARNING
You could lose control of the vehicle while The seat belt does not offer the intended level
driving if you: of protection if the backrest is not in the
upright position. When braking or in the event
Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or of an accident, you could slide underneath the
mirrors seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck inju-
Rfasten the seat belt ries, for example. This poses an increased risk
There is a risk of an accident. of injury or even fatal injury.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- Adjust the seat properly before beginning
ing wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat your journey. Always make sure that the seat
belt before starting the engine. is in the upright position.

G WARNING ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat

If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or heating, observe the following information:
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. If
thereby injured. Children in particular could liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
accidentally press the electrical seat adjust- soon as possible.
ment buttons and become trapped. There is Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
a risk of injury. switch on the seat heating. The seat
While moving the seats, make sure that your heating should also not be used to dry
hands or other body parts do not get under the seats.
the lever assembly of the seat adjustment Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
system. see the "Interior care" section.
Rdo not transport heavy loads on the
G WARNING seats. Do not place sharp objects on the
When adjusting a seat, you or another vehicle seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.
occupant could become trapped by the guide The seats should only be occupied by
rail of the seat, for instance. There is a risk of passengers, if possible.
injury. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
not cover the seats with insulating mate-

Z
104 Seats

rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov- Seat cushion angle
ers, child seats or booster seats.
X Turn handwheel = in the desired direction.
! Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell or behind the seats when moving
the seat back. There is a risk that the seats Adjusting the seats electrically
and/or the objects could be damaged.
i The rear-compartment head restraints
can be removed (Y page 106).
For more information, contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

i Further related subjects:

RLuggage compartment enlargement
(folding down the rear bench seat)
(Y page 312)

: Head restraint height

Adjusting the seats manually and ; Seat cushion angle
electrically = Seat height
? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
A Backrest angle

i Vehicles with memory function: if PRE-

SAFE® has been triggered, the front-
passenger seat will be moved to a better
position if it was previously in an unfavour-
able position.
i You can store the seat settings using the
memory function (Y page 113).
: Backrest angle
; Seat height
Adjusting the head restraints
= Seat cushion angle
? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment G WARNING
You could lose control of the vehicle while
i Adjust the seat cushion angle so that your driving if you:
thighs are lightly supported.
Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
X Lift handle ? and slide the seat forwards
There is a risk of an accident.
or rearwards.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
X Release lever ? again.
ing wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat
Make sure that you hear the seat engage in belt before starting the engine.
position.
 Seats 105

G WARNING Adjusting the angle of the head restraints

The head restraints cannot provide the inten-
ded protection unless they are fitted and
adjusted correctly. There is an increased risk
of injury to the head and neck in the event of
an accident or sudden braking, for example.
Always drive with the head restraints fitted.
Ensure that the centre of the head restraints
support the back of each vehicle occupant's
head at eye level before driving off.

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

General notes X Push or pull the lower edge of the head
Pay attention to the important safety notes restraint in the direction of the arrow.
(Y page 103).
Do not interchange the head restraints of the Adjusting the head restraints electri-
front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot cally
adjust the height and angle of the head
restraints to the correct position.
X To adjust the head restraint height: slide
the switch for head restraint adjustment
(Y page 104) up or down in the direction of
Adjusting the head restraints manually
the arrow.
Adjusting the head restraint height
Rear seat head restraints
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
height

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the

desired position.
X To lower: press release catch : in the
direction of the arrow and push the head
If the head restraint is fully lowered, it is nec-
restraint down to the desired position.
essary to press release catch :.
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
X To lower: press release catch : and push
the head restraint down until it is in the
desired position.

Z
106 Seats

Adjusting the rear seat head restraint Adjusting the lumbar support
angle
You can adjust the contour of the driver's seat
Adjust the head restraints so that they are as
so as to provide optimum support for your
close as possible to your head.
back.
You can only adjust the two outer head
restraints.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

X Move adjustment lever : in the direction

of the arrow until the desired backrest con-
X Pull or push the top of the head restraint tour is achieved.
until it is in the desired position.

Fitting/removing the rear seat head

restraints Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
You can adjust the contour of the front seat
backrests individually to provide optimum
support for your back.

X To remove: pull the head restraint up to

the stop.
X Press release catch : and pull the head
restraint out of the guides. : To raise the backrest contour
X To refit: insert the head restraint so that ; To soften the backrest contour
the notches on the bar are on the left when = To lower the backrest contour
viewed in the direction of travel. ? To harden the backrest contour
X Push the head restraint down until you hear
it engage in position.
 Seats 107

Switching the seat heating on/off X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or
2 in the ignition lock.
Switching on/off X To switch on: press button : repeatedly

G WARNING until the desired heating level is set.

If you repeatedly switch on seat heating, the X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
seat cushion and backrest padding may until all the indicator lamps go out.
become very hot. The health of vehicle occu-
pants with limited temperature sensitivity or
a limited ability to react to excessively high
temperatures may be affected or they may

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk
of injury.
Therefore, do not switch on the seat heating
repeatedly.

The three red indicator lamps in the button

indicate the heating level you have selected.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
heating may switch off.

Driver's and front-passenger seat

The system automatically switches down
from level 3 to level 2 after approximately
eight minutes.
The system automatically switches down
from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
The system automatically switches off
approximately 20 minutes after it is set to
level 1.

Z
108 Steering wheel

Problems with the seat heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The seat heating has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-
switched off prema- sumers are switched on.
turely or cannot be X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
switched on. the rear window heating or interior lighting.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off Problems with the seat ventilation
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Switching on/off The seat ventilation has switched off prema-

turely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's
The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons electrical system voltage is too low because
indicate the ventilation level you have selec- too many electrical consumers are switched
ted. on.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat X Switch off electrical consumers that you do
ventilation may switch off. not need, such as the rear window heating
or interior lighting.

Steering wheel
Important safety notes
G WARNING
You could lose control of the vehicle while
driving if you:
Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or mirrors
2 in the ignition lock. Rfasten the seat belt

X To switch on: press button : repeatedly There is a risk of an accident.

until the desired ventilation level is set. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirrors and fasten your seat
i You can open the side windows and the belt before starting the engine.
sliding sunroof using the "Convenience
opening" feature (Y page 95). The seat ven- G WARNING
tilation of the driver's seat automatically
Children could become trapped by the steer-
switches to the highest level.
ing wheel if they adjust it. There is a risk of
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly injury.
until all the indicator lamps go out. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key
with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave
children unattended in the vehicle.
 Steering wheel 109

Adjusting the steering wheel man- Adjusting the steering wheel electri-
ually cally
G WARNING
The steering wheel may move unexpectedly if
you adjust it while driving. This could cause
you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a
risk of an accident.
Make sure that the steering wheel is locked
before driving off. Never unlock the steering
wheel when the vehicle is in motion.

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

: To adjust the steering wheel height
; To adjust the steering wheel position
(fore-and-aft adjustment)
The steering wheel can also be adjusted when
the key is removed from the ignition lock.
i Further related subjects:
REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
(Y page 109)
: Release lever RStoring settings (Y page 113)
; To adjust the steering wheel height
= To adjust the steering wheel position
(fore-and-aft adjustment) EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
X Push release lever : down completely. Important safety notes
The steering column is unlocked.
X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
G WARNING
position. When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
X Push release lever : up completely.
occupants – particularly children – could
The steering column is locked.
become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
X Check if the steering column is locked.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-
When doing so, try to push the steering
ing adjustments, make sure that no one has
wheel up or down or try to move it in the
any body parts in the sweep of the steering
fore-and-aft direction.
wheel.
If someone is trapped:
Rpress one of the memory function position
buttons, or
Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-
ment in the opposite direction to that in
which the steering wheel is moving.
The adjustment process is stopped.

Z
110 Mirrors

G WARNING Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature

If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
feature is making adjustments, you could lose triggered in an accident, the steering column
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an will move upwards when the driver's door is
accident. opened. This occurs irrespective of the posi-
Always wait until the adjustment process is tion of the key in the ignition lock. This makes
complete before driving off. it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the
occupants.
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
in and out of your vehicle easier. only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY fea-
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

You can activate and deactivate the EASY- ture is activated in the on-board computer.
ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board com-
puter (Y page 255).
Mirrors
Position of the steering wheel when the
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active Rear-view mirror

The steering wheel tilts upwards if you:

Rremove the key from the ignition lock
Ropen the driver's door and KEYLESS-GO is
in position 1
Ropen the driver's door and the key is in
position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock
i The steering wheel only moves upwards if
it has not already reached the upper end
stop.
X Anti-dazzle mode: flick anti-dazzle
Position of the steering wheel for driv- switch : forwards or back.
ing
The steering wheel is moved to the previously
set position if: Exterior mirrors
Rthe driver's door is closed and Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Ryou insert the key into the ignition lock

or G WARNING
Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the
vehicles with KEYLESS-GO. image. Objects visible in the mirrors are
closer than they appear. You could misjudge
If you close the driver's door with the key the distance from road users driving behind
inserted into the ignition lock, the steering you when changing lanes, for instance. There
wheel is automatically moved to the previ- is a risk of an accident.
ously set position.
You should therefore always look over your
The last position of the steering wheel is shoulder to determine the actual distance
stored when you switch off the ignition or from road users driving behind you.
when you store the setting with the memory
function (Y page 113).
 Mirrors 111

The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger Folding the exterior mirrors in/out elec-
field of vision. trically
After the engine has been started, the exte-
rior mirrors are automatically heated if the
rear window heating is switched on and the
outside temperature is low. Heating takes a
maximum of 10 minutes.
i The exterior mirrors can also be heated
manually by switching on the rear window
heating.

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or
2 in the ignition lock.
X Briefly press button :.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
always folded out fully while driving. They
could otherwise vibrate.
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or
Setting the exterior mirrors
2 in the ignition lock.
X Press button : for the left-hand exterior If the battery has been disconnected or com-
mirror or button ; for the right-hand exte- pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must
rior mirror. be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise
The indicator lamp in the corresponding not fold in when you select the "Fold in mir-
button lights up in red. rors when locking" function in the on-board
computer (Y page 256).
The indicator lamp goes out again after
some time. You can adjust the selected X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in

mirror using adjustment button = as long the ignition lock.

as the indicator lamp is lit. X Briefly press button :.

X Press adjustment button = up, down, or

to the left or right until you have adjusted Folding the exterior mirrors in/out
the exterior mirror to the correct position. automatically
You should have a good overview of traffic
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function
conditions.
is activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 256):
Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
soon as you lock the vehicle from the out-
side.
Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automat-
ically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and
then open the driver's or front-passenger
door.

Z
112 Mirrors

i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in

manually, they do not fold out.

Exterior mirror pushed out of position

If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows.
X Vehicles without electrically folding
exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror
into the correct position manually.
X Vehicles with electrically folding exte-
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

rior mirrors: press and hold the mirror- X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
folding button until you hear a click and that the key is in position 2 in the ignition
then the mirror engage in position lock.
(Y page 111). X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on
The mirror housing is engaged again and the front-passenger side.
you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual X Engage reverse gear.
(Y page 110). The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the preset parking position.
X Use adjustment button = to adjust the
Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors exterior mirror to a position that allows you
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror to see the rear wheel and the kerb.
on the driver's side automatically go into anti- The parking position is stored.
dazzle mode if the following conditions are i If you shift the transmission to another
met simultaneously: position, the exterior mirror on the front-
Rthe ignition is switched on and passenger side returns to the driving posi-
Rincident light from headlamps strikes the tion.
sensor in the rear-view mirror Using the memory button
The mirrors do not go into anti-dazzle mode if You can set the front-passenger side exterior
reverse gear is engaged or if the interior light- mirror so that you can see the rear wheel on
ing is switched on. that side as soon as you engage reverse gear.
This setting can be stored using memory but-
ton M ?.
Parking position of the exterior mirror
on the front-passenger side X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
the ignition lock.
Setting and storing the parking position X With the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side activated, use adjustment
Using reverse gear button = to adjust the exterior mirror. In
You can set the front-passenger side exterior the exterior mirror, the rear wheel and the
mirror so that you can see the rear wheel on kerb should be visible.
that side as soon as you engage reverse gear.
You can store this position.
 Memory function 113

X Press memory button M ? and one of the wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-
arrows on adjustment button = within diately release the memory function position
three seconds. button. The adjustment process is stopped.
The parking position is stored if the exterior
mirror does not move. G WARNING
X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat If children activate the memory function, they
the steps. could become trapped, especially if they are
unattended. There is a risk of injury.
Calling up a stored parking position set- When leaving the vehicle, always take the key
ting with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

children unattended in the vehicle.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock. With the memory function, you can store up
X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front- to three different settings, e.g. for three dif-
passenger side using button ;. ferent people.
X Engage reverse gear. The following settings are stored as a single
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger memory preset:
side moves to the stored parking position. Rposition of the seat, backrest and head

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger restraint

side moves back to its original position: Rdriver's side: steering wheel position

Ras Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mir-

soon as you exceed a speed of
15 km/h rors on the driver's and front-passenger
Rif you press button : for the exterior mir- sides
ror on the driver's side

Memory function
Storing settings
G WARNING
If you use the memory function on the driver's
side while driving, the adjustments could
cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There
is a risk of an accident. X Adjust the seat (Y page 104).
Only use the memory function on the driver's X On the driver's side, adjust the steering
side while the vehicle is stationary. wheel (Y page 109) and the exterior mirrors
(Y page 110).
G WARNING X Briefly press the M memory button and
When the memory function adjusts the seat then press storage position button 1, 2 or
or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occu- 3 within three seconds.
pants – particularly children – could become The settings are stored in the selected pre-
trapped. There is a risk of injury. set position. A tone sounds when the set-
While the memory function is making adjust- tings have been completed.
ments, make sure that no one has any body
parts in the sweep of the seat or steering

Z
114 Memory function

Calling up a stored setting

! If you want to move the seat from the fully
reclined position to a stored seat position,
first raise the backrest. The seat could oth-
erwise be damaged.
X Press and hold the relevant storage posi-
tion button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering
wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored
position.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

i The setting procedure is interrupted as

soon as you release the storage position
button.
 115

Useful information ............................ 116

Exterior lighting ................................ 116
Interior lighting ................................. 123
Replacing bulbs ................................. 124
Windscreen wipers ........................... 128

Lights and windscreen wipers

116 Exterior lighting

Useful information Vehicles with halogen headlamps

i This Owner's Manual describes all mod-

els, series and optional equipment for your
vehicle that were available at the time of
going to press. National variations are pos-
sible. Note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all of the functions descri-
bed. This is also the case for systems and
functions relevant to safety.
i Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops: (Y page 28).
X Setting the symmetrical dipped beam:
Lights and windscreen wipers

Turn the adjustment screw 180° anti-

Exterior lighting clockwise in recess :.

General notes Convert the headlamps back to asymmetrical

dipped beam as soon as possible after return-
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom- ing across the border.
mends that you drive with the lights switched X Turn the adjustment screw 180° clockwise
on even during the daytime. In some coun- back to the original position in recess :.
tries, operation of the headlamps varies due
to legal requirements and self-imposed obli-
gations. Vehicles with bi-xenon headlamps
X Before crossing the border, set the head-
lamps to symmetrical dipped beam and
Notes on driving abroad when returning to asymmetrical dipped-
General notes beam using the "Dipped-beam headlamps
for driving on the right or left" function on
If your journey takes you to countries where the on-board computer .
vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the
If the headlamps are converted to symmetri-
road to the country in which the vehicle is
cal dipped beam, the "motorway mode" and
registered, your headlamps must be switched
"extended range foglamps" functions are not
to symmetrical dipped beam as soon as pos-
available.
sible after crossing the border. This prevents
oncoming traffic from being dazzled. Sym-
metrical lights do not illuminate as large an
Setting the exterior lighting
area of the edge of the carriageway.
Setting options
Exterior lighting can be set using the:
Rlightswitch
Rheadlamp range control (vehicles with hal-
ogen headlamps only) (Y page 118)
Rcombination switch (Y page 119)
Ron-board computer (Y page 238) (vehicles
with a 4-button multifunction steering
 Exterior lighting 117

wheel) or (Y page 251) (vehicles with a 12- conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
button multifunction steering wheel) accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
Light switch L.
Operation The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle
lighting at all times.
à is the preferred light switch setting. The
light setting is automatically selected accord-
ing to the brightness of the ambient light
(exception: poor visibility due to weather con-
ditions such as fog, snow or spray):

Lights and windscreen wipers

RKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the
side lamps are switched on or off automat-
ically depending on the brightness of the
1W Left-hand parking lamps ambient light.
RWith the engine running: if you have
2X Right-hand parking lamps
switched on the daytime driving lights func-
3T Side lamps, licence plate and instru-
tion in the on-board computer, the daytime
ment cluster lighting
driving lights or the side lamps and dipped-
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control- beam headlamps are switched on or off
led by the light sensor automatically depending on the brightness
5L Dipped-beam/main-beam head- of the ambient light.
lamps X To switch on automatic headlamp
BR Rear fog lamp mode: turn the light switch to Ã.
CN Foglamp (vehicles with front fog-
The daytime driving lights improve the detect-
lamps only)
ability of your vehicle during the day. The
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the "daytime driving lights" function must be
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. switched on via the on-board computer
X Turn the light switch to Ã. (Y page 238) (vehicles with 4-button multi-
function steering wheel) or (Y page 251)
The exterior lighting (except the side lamps/ (vehicles with 12-button multifunction steer-
parking lamps) switches off automatically if ing wheel).
you:
When the dipped-beam headlamps are
Rremove the key from the ignition lock switched on, the L indicator lamp in the
Ropen the driver's door with the key in posi- instrument cluster lights up and the daytime
tion 0 driving lights switch off.
Automatic headlamp mode Dipped-beam headlamps
G WARNING G WARNING
When the light switch is set to Ã, the When the light switch is set to Ã, the
dipped-beam headlamps may not be switched dipped-beam headlamps may not be switched
on automatically if there is fog, snow or other on automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather causes of poor visibility due to the weather

Z
118 Exterior lighting

conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an X To switch on the rear foglamp: turn the
accident. key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start
In such situations, turn the light switch to the engine.
L. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
X Press the R button.
When the ignition is switched on and the light The yellow R indicator lamp in the
switch is in position L, the side lamps and instrument cluster lights up.
dipped-beam headlamps are switched on X To switch off the rear foglamp: press the
even if the light sensor does not sense dark
R button.
ambient light conditions. This is advanta-
The yellow R indicator lamp in the
geous when there is fog or rain.
instrument cluster goes out.
X To switch on the dipped-beam head-
lamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to Side lamps
Lights and windscreen wipers

position 2 or start the engine. ! If the battery has been excessively dis-
X Turn the light switch to L. charged, the side lamps or parking lamps
The green L indicator lamp in the instru- are automatically switched off to enable
ment cluster lights up. the next engine start. Always park your
vehicle safely and sufficiently lit according
Foglamps to legal standards. Avoid the continuous
In conditions where visibility is poor due to use of the T side lamps for several
fog, snow or rain, the foglamps improve visi- hours. If possible, switch on the X right
bility as well as making it easier for other road or the W left parking lamp.
users to see you. They can be operated
X To switch on: turn the light switch to
together with the side lamps or together with
T.
the side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps.
The green indicator lamp in the instrument
X To switch on the foglamps: turn the key
cluster lights up.
in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the
engine. Parking lamps
X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. Switching on the parking lamps ensures that
X Press the N button. the corresponding side of the vehicle is illu-
The green N indicator lamp in the instru- minated.
ment cluster lights up. X To switch on the parking lamps: the key
X To switch off the front foglamps: press is not in the ignition lock or it is in posi-
the N button. tion 0.
The green N indicator lamp in the instru- X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side
ment cluster goes out. of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of
Only vehicles with front foglamps are equip- the vehicle).
ped with the "Foglamp" function; for how to
operate the foglamps on vehicles with the Adjusting the headlamp range (halogen
Intelligent Light System (Y page 121). headlamps)
Rear fog lamp The headlamp range control allows you to
The rear foglamp improves the visibility of adjust the cone of light from the headlamps
your vehicle in heavy fog for the following to suit the vehicle load.
traffic. Please observe the country-specific
laws on the use of rear foglamps.
 Exterior lighting 119

X To indicate briefly: press the combination

switch briefly to the pressure point in the
direction of arrow ; or ?.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three
times.
X To indicate: press the combination switch
beyond the pressure point in the direction
of arrow ; or ?.

Main-beam headlamps
Headlamp range control X To switch on the main-beam head-
g Driver's seat and front-passenger seat
lamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to
occupied

Lights and windscreen wipers

position 2 or start the engine.
1 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and
X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
rear seats occupied, luggage compart-
X Press the combination switch beyond the
ment laden
pressure point in the direction of
2 Driver's and front-passenger seats occu-
arrow :.
pied and maximum permissible rear axle
load utilised, e.g. when towing a trailer In the à position, the main-beam head-
lamps are only switched on when it is dark
3 Not required
and the engine is running.
X Start the engine. The K indicator lamp in the instrument
X Turn the headlamp range control to the cluster lights up when the main-beam head-
position which corresponds to the load in lamps are switched on.
your vehicle. X To switch off the main-beam head-
lamps: move the combination switch back
to its normal position.
Combination switch The K indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.
Turn signals

Headlamp flasher
X To switch on: turn the key in the ignition
lock to position 1 or 2, or start the engine.
X Pull the combination switch in the direction
of arrow =.

: Main-beam headlamps
; Turn signal, right
= Headlamp flasher
? Turn signal, left

Z
120 Exterior lighting

Hazard warning lamps Intelligent Light System

General notes
The Intelligent Light System is a system that
adjusts the headlamps automatically to suit
the prevailing driving and weather conditions.
It offers advanced functions for improved illu-
mination of the road surface, e.g. depending
on the vehicle speed or weather conditions.
The system includes the active light function,
cornering light function, motorway mode and
extended range foglamps. The system is only
The hazard warning lamps switch on auto- active when it is dark.
Lights and windscreen wipers

matically if: You can activate or deactivate the "Intelligent

Ran airbag is deployed or Light System" function using the on-board
computer (Y page 251).
Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a
speed of more than 70 km/h and comes to
Active light function
a standstill
X To switch on the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on
a turn signal using the combination switch,
only the turn signal lamp on the corre-
sponding side of the vehicle will flash.
X To switch off the hazard warning
lamps: press button :.
The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-
matically if the vehicle reaches a speed of
over 10 km/h again after a full brake appli- The active light function is a system that
cation. moves the headlamps according to the steer-
ing movements of the front wheels. In this
i The hazard warning lamps still operate if
way, relevant areas remain illuminated while
the ignition is switched off.
driving. This allows you to recognise pedes-
trians, cyclists and animals.
Headlamp cleaning system Active: when the lights are switched on.

The headlamps are cleaned automatically if

the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is oper-
ated five times while the lights are on and the
engine is running (Y page 128). When you
switch off the ignition, the automatic head-
lamp cleaning system is reset and counting is
resumed from 0.
 Exterior lighting 121

Cornering light function Motorway mode increases the range of the

beam.
Active:
Rif you are driving at speeds above
110 km/h and do not make any large steer-
ing movements for 1,000 m.
Rif you are driving at speeds above
130 km/h.
Not active: if you are driving at speeds below
80 km/h following activation.

The cornering light function improves the illu-

Extended range foglamps

Lights and windscreen wipers

mination of the road over a wide angle in the
direction you are turning, enabling better vis-
ibility in tight bends, for example. The corner-
ing light function can only be activated when
the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on.
Active:
Rif you are driving at speeds below
40 km/h and the turn signal is activated or
the steering wheel is turned.
Rif you are driving at speeds between
40 km/h and 70 km/h and turn the steer- The extended range foglamps reduce the
ing wheel. glare experienced by the driver and improve
Not active: if you are driving at speeds above the illumination of the edge of the carriage-
40 km/h or switch off the turn signal or turn way.
the steering wheel to the straight-ahead posi- Active: if you are driving at speeds below
tion. 70 km/h and you switch on the rear foglamp.
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short Not active: if, following activation, you are
time, but is automatically switched off after driving at speeds above 100 km/h or if you
no more than three minutes. switch off the rear foglamp.

Motorway mode Off-road lights

The off-road lights facilitate the early recog-
nition of objects/obstacles when driving off-
road thanks to a symmetrical, wider and
brighter distribution of light from the dipped-
beam headlamps.
Active: when driving at speeds below
50 km/h and the Off-road program is
switched on (Y page 227).
Not active: when driving at speeds above
50 km/h.

Z
122 Exterior lighting

When the Off-road-Lights are switched on, quently switches the headlamps from main
the active light function is deactivated and beam to dipped beam.
the headlamp range adjustment is set to the The system automatically adapts the dipped-
static mode. beam headlamp range depending on the dis-
tance to the other vehicle. Once the system
no longer detects any other vehicles, it reac-
Adaptive Highbeam Assist tivates the main-beam headlamps.
Important safety notes The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windscreen near the overhead control
G WARNING panel.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognise
road users:
Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
Lights and windscreen wipers

Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists

Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier

In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist

recognises road users too late or not at all. In
this, or in similar situations, the automatic
main-beam headlamps will not be deactivated
or activated regardless. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions
and switch off the main-beam headlamps in
good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into

account road, weather or traffic conditions. Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You on/off
are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's
lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and X To switch on: switch on the Adaptive High-
traffic conditions. beam Assist function using the on-board
computer (Y page 252).
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
X Turn the light switch to Ã.
be restricted if there is:
X Press the combination switch beyond the
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
pressure point in the direction of arrow :
snow
Rdirt
(Y page 119).
on the sensors or the sensors are
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc-
obscured
tion display lights up when it is dark and the
light sensor activates the dipped-beam
General notes headlamps.
You can use this function to set the head- If you are driving at speeds above approx-
lamps to change between dipped beam and imately 45 km/h:
main beam automatically. The system recog- The headlamp range is set automatically
nises vehicles with their lights on, either depending on the distance between the
approaching from the opposite direction or vehicle and other road users.
travelling in front of your vehicle, and conse-
 Interior lighting 123

If you are driving at speeds above approx- Interior lighting

imately 55 km/h and no other road users
are detected: Overview of interior lighting
The main-beam headlamps are switched on
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster also lights up.
If you are driving at speeds below
45 km/h or other road users are detected
or the roads are adequately lit:
The main-beam headlamps are switched off
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster goes out. The _
indicator lamp in the multifunction display

Lights and windscreen wipers

remains lit. Front overhead control panel
X To deactivate: move the combination : u Switches the rear interior lighting
switch back to its normal position. on/off
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc- ; | Switches the automatic interior
tion display goes out. lighting control on/off
= p Switches the right-hand front read-
ing lamp on/off
Headlamps misted up on the inside
? c Switches the front interior lighting
The headlamps may mist up on the inside if on/off
there is high atmospheric humidity. A p Switches the left-hand front reading
X Switch on the lights and drive off. lamp on/off
The level of moisture diminishes, depend-
ing on the length of the journey and the
weather conditions (humidity and temper-
ature).
If the level of moisture does not diminish:
X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.

Rear-compartment overhead control panel

: p Switches the right-hand reading
lamp on/off
; p Switches the left-hand reading lamp
on/off

Z
124 Replacing bulbs

Interior lighting control Replacing bulbs

General notes Important safety notes
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from Xenon bulbs
discharging, the interior lighting functions are
automatically deactivated after some time G DANGER
except for when the key is in position 2 in the Xenon bulbs are under high voltage. You can
ignition lock. get an electric shock if you remove the cover
of the xenon bulb and touch the electrical
Automatic interior lighting control contacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.
Never touch the parts or the electrical con-
X To switch on/off: press the | button.
tacts of the xenon bulb. Always have work on
When the automatic interior lighting con-
the xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified spe-
Lights and windscreen wipers

trol is activated, the button is flush with the

cialist workshop.
overhead control panel.
The interior lighting automatically switches If your vehicle is equipped with xenon bulbs,
on if you: you can recognise this by the following: the
Runlock the vehicle cone of light from the xenon bulbs moves
from the top to the bottom and back again
Ropen a door when you start the engine. For this to be
Rremove the key from the ignition lock
observed, the lights must be switched on
The interior lighting is activated for a short before starting the engine.
time when the key is removed from the igni- Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
tion lock. You can activate this delayed vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
switch-off using the on-board computer that these function correctly at all times.
(Y page 253). Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Manual interior lighting control Other bulbs

X To switch the front interior lighting on/
G WARNING
off: press the c button.
Bulbs, lamps and plug connectors can
X To switch the rear interior lighting on/
become very hot during use. When replacing
off: press the u button. a bulb, you could burn yourself on these com-
X To switch the reading lamps on/off: ponents. There is a risk of injury.
press the p button. Allow these components to cool down before
replacing the bulb.

Crash-responsive emergency lighting Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if
its glass tube has been scratched.
The interior lighting is activated automatically
if the vehicle is involved in an accident. The bulb may explode if:
Ryou touch it
X To switch off the crash-responsive
emergency lighting: press the hazard Rit is hot
warning lamp button. Ryou drop it

or Ryou scratch it
X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps
key. designed for that purpose. Only fit spare
 Replacing bulbs 125

bulbs of the same type and the specified volt-

age.
Marks on the glass tube reduce the service
life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube
with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the
glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and
rub it off with a lint-free cloth.
Protect bulbs from moisture during opera-
tion. Do not allow bulbs to come into contact
with liquids.
There are bulbs other than the xenon bulbs Vehicles with Intelligent Light System
that you cannot replace yourself. Replace : Cornering lamp: H7 55 W
only the bulbs listed (Y page 125). Have the

Lights and windscreen wipers

bulbs that you cannot replace yourself
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
If you require assistance replacing bulbs, con-
sult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult
a qualified specialist workshop.
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Tail lamps
: Reversing lamp: W 16 W
Overview of bulb replacement – bulbs ; Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
You can replace the following bulbs. The
details for the bulb type can be found in the
legend. Replacing the front bulbs
Dipped-beam headlamps (halogen
headlamps)

Halogen headlamps
: Dipped-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
; Main-beam headlamp/side lamp/park-
X Switch off the lights.
ing lamp: H15 55 W/15 W
= Turn signal lamp: PWY 24 W
X Open the bonnet.

Z
126 Replacing bulbs

X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and Turn signal lamp (halogen headlamps)
pull it out.
X At the bulb holder, push the bulb upwards,
disconnect it and pull it out of bulb
holder ;.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;,
push it down and secure it in place.
X Attach housing cover : and turn it clock-
wise until it engages.

Main-beam headlamps and parking/

side lamps (halogen headlamps) X Switch off the lights.
Lights and windscreen wipers

X Open the bonnet.

X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and
pull it out.
X Grip the back of lever extension ; and pull
it out in a straight line.
X Take the bulb out of lever extension ;.
X Insert the new bulb into lever exten-
sion ;.

X Switch off the lights.

X Open the bonnet.
X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and
pull it out.
X Turn bulb anti-clockwise and pull it out.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ; and
turn it clockwise.
X Align housing cover : and turn it clock-
wise until it engages. X Re-insert lever extension ; downwards
(swelling) with guide rail =.
 Replacing bulbs 127

Cornering lamps (Intelligent Light Sys-

tem)

Left-hand side trim panel

Lights and windscreen wipers

X Switch off the lights.
X Open the bonnet.
X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and
pull it out.
X Push the handle of bulb holder ; up until
bulb holder ; is released.
X Pull out bulb holder ;.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. Right-hand side trim panel
X Insert bulb holder ; at the top and push X To open: turn release knob : 90° in the
until it engages. direction of the arrow and remove side trim
X Align housing cover : and turn it clock-
panel ;.
wise until it engages. X To close: insert side trim panel ; and turn
release knob : 90° in the opposite direc-
tion to the arrow.
Replacing the rear bulbs
Tail lamps
Opening and closing the side trim pan-
els X Switch off the lights.
You must open the side trim panel in the lug-
X Open the luggage compartment.
gage compartment before you can replace X Open the side trim panel (Y page 127).
the bulbs in the tail lamps.

Z
128 Windscreen wipers

X Pull out connector :. windscreen with washer fluid after an auto-

X Turn wing nut ; 90° anti-clockwise and matic car wash.
pull out the bulb holder.
Lights and windscreen wipers

Combination switch
1 $ Windscreen wipers off
X Turn signal lamp :: lightly press the bulb
2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low7
into the bulb holder, turn it anti-clockwise
and remove it from the bulb holder. 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high8
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow
turn it clockwise. 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast
X Reversing lamp ;: remove the bulb from B í Single wipe/ î to wipe the wind-
the bulb holder. screen using washer fluid
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
X Insert the bulb holder again. lock.
X Turn the wing nut 90° clockwise. X Turn the combination switch to the corre-
X Insert the connector. sponding position.
X Close the side trim panel (Y page 127).
! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the wind-
screen becomes dirty in dry weather con-
ditions, the windscreen wipers may be acti-
Windscreen wipers vated inadvertently. This could damage the
windscreen wiper blades or scratch the
Switching the windscreen wipers on/
windscreen.
off
For this reason, you should always switch
! Do not operate the windscreen wipers off the windscreen wipers in dry weather.
when the windscreen is dry, as this could
damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust If the wiper blades are worn, the windscreen
that has collected on the windscreen can will no longer be wiped properly. This could
scratch the glass if wiping takes place when prevent you from observing the traffic condi-
the windscreen is dry. tions. Replace the wiper blades twice a year,
ideally in spring and autumn.
! If the windscreen wipers leave smears on
the windscreen after the vehicle has been
washed in an automatic car wash, this may
be due to wax or other residue. Clean the

7 Rain sensor set to low sensitivity.

8 Rain sensor set to high sensitivity.
 Windscreen wipers 129

Switching the rear window wiper on/ Hold the windscreen wiper arm firmly when
off you change the wiper blade. If you release
the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it
falls onto the windscreen/rear window, the
windscreen/rear window may be damaged
by the force of the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the wiper blades changed at a qualified
specialist workshop.
! To avoid damaging the windscreen wiper
blades, make sure that you touch only the
wiper arm of the windscreen wiper.

Lights and windscreen wipers

Combination switch
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
: è Switch
2 ô To wipe with washer fluid Moving the wiper blades to a vertical posi-
3 I To switch on intermittent wiping tion
4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping ! Before changing the wiper blades, always
set the wiper arms to a vertical position
5 ô To wipe with washer fluid
using the combination switch. There is oth-
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition erwise a risk of damaging the bonnet.
lock.
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO
X Turn switch : on the combination switch
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
to the corresponding position.
When the rear window wiper is switched on, lock.
the symbol appears in the instrument clus- X Set the windscreen wipers to posi-

ter. tion °.
X When the wiper arms have reached a ver-
tical position, turn the key to position 0 and
Replacing the wiper blades remove it from the ignition lock.

Important safety notes Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO

X Switch off the engine.
G WARNING
X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
If the windscreen wipers begin to move while
X Set the windscreen wipers to posi-
you are changing the wiper blades, you can be
trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of tion °.
injury. X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly

Always switch off the windscreen wipers and until the windscreen wipers start.
ignition before changing the wiper blades. X When the wiper arms have reached a ver-
tical position, press the Start/Stop button.
! Never open the bonnet/tailgate if a wiper
arm is folded away from the windscreen/ Removing the wiper blades
rear window. X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-
Never fold a windscreen wiper arm without screen until it engages.
a wiper blade back onto the windscreen/ X Set the wiper blade at right angles to the
rear window. wiper arm.
Z
130 Windscreen wipers

X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper

blade ; in the direction of the arrow until
it releases.
X Remove wiper blade ;.

Fitting the wiper blade

X Place new wiper blade ; onto wiper
arm :.
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper
blade ; in the opposite direction to the
X Remove the wiper blade from the retaining arrow until it engages.
pin on the wiper arm in the direction of the X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated
Lights and windscreen wipers

arrow. correctly.
X Position wiper blade ; parallel to wiper
Fitting the wiper blades
X Push the new wiper blade onto the retain-
arm :.
ing pin on the wiper arm in the opposite X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear win-
direction to the arrow. dow.
Make sure that the wiper blade slides fully
onto the retaining pin on the wiper arm.
X Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiper
arm.
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-
screen.

Replacing the rear window wiper blade

Removing the wiper blade

X Remove the key from the ignition lock.

X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear win-
dow until it engages.
X Position wiper blade ; at a right angle to
wiper arm :.
 Windscreen wipers 131

Problems with the windscreen wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The windscreen wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windscreen
are jammed. wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition
lock.
or
X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windscreen wipers back on.

Lights and windscreen wipers

The windscreen wipers The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning.
fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.

The windscreen washer The spray nozzles are misaligned.

fluid from the spray X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist work-
nozzles no longer hits shop.
the centre of the wind-
screen.

Z
132
 133

Useful information ............................ 134

Overview of climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 134
Operating the climate control sys-
tem ..................................................... 138
Adjusting the air vents ..................... 150

Climate control
134 Overview of climate control systems

Useful information i The integrated filter filters out most par-

ticles of dust and soot and completely fil-
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- ters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pol-
els, series and optional equipment for your lutants and odours. A clogged filter reduces
vehicle that were available at the time of the amount of air supplied to the vehicle
going to press. National variations are pos- interior. For this reason, you should always
sible. Note that your vehicle may not be observe the interval for replacing the filter,
equipped with all of the functions descri- which is specified in the Service Booklet.
bed. This is also the case for systems and As it depends on environmental conditions,
functions relevant to safety. e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be
shorter than stated in the Service Booklet.
i Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops: (Y page 28). i It is possible that the residual heat func-
tion may be activated automatically an hour
after the key has been removed in order to
Overview of climate control systems dry the air-conditioning system. The vehicle
Climate control

is then ventilated for 30 minutes.

Important safety notes
Observe the settings recommended on the
following pages. The windows could other-
wise mist up.
To prevent the windows from misting up:
Rswitch off climate control only briefly
Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only
briefly
Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifi-
cation function
Rswitch on the defrost windscreen function
briefly, if required
Climate control regulates the temperature
and the humidity in the vehicle interior and
filters undesirable substances out of the air.
Climate control is only operational when the
engine is running. Optimum operation is only
achieved when the side windows and the roof
are closed.
The residual heat function can only be acti-
vated or deactivated with the ignition
switched off (Y page 145).
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period
during warm weather, e.g. using the con-
venience opening feature (Y page 95). This
will speed up the cooling process and the
desired vehicle interior temperature will be
reached more quickly.
 Overview of climate control systems 135

Control panel for THERMATIC automatic climate control (2-zone)

Climate control
: To set the temperature, left (Y page 141)
; To demist the windscreen (Y page 142)
= To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 142)
? To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 138)
A To switch the rear window heating on/off (Y page 143)
B To set the temperature, right (Y page 141)
C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 144)
D To set the air distribution (Y page 141)
E To increase the airflow (Y page 142)
F To reduce the airflow (Y page 142)
G To switch climate control on/off (Y page 138)
H To set climate control to automatic mode (Y page 140)

Notes on using THERMATIC automatic ROnly use the "windscreen demisting" func-
climate control tion briefly until the windscreen is clear
again.
Automatic climate control ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.

The following contains notes and recommen- if there are unpleasant outside odours or
dations on optimum use of THERMATIC auto- when in a tunnel. The windows could oth-
matic climate control. erwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn into
RActivate climate control using the à and the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem-
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the
à and ¿ buttons light up. perature settings on the driver's side for
RSet the temperature to 22 †.
the front-passenger side as well. The indi-
cator lamp in the á button goes out.
136 Overview of climate control systems

ECO start/stop function

During automatic engine switch-off in the
ECO start/stop function, the climate control
system only operates at a reduced capacity.
If you require the full climate control output,
you can switch off the ECO start/stop func-
tion by pressing the ECO button
(Y page 160).
Climate control
 Overview of climate control systems 137

Control panel for THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control (3-zone)

Climate control
Front control panel
: To set the temperature, left (Y page 141)
; To demist the windscreen (Y page 142)
= To activate/deactivate the residual heat function (Y page 145)
? To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 138)
A To switch the rear window heating on/off (Y page 143)
B To set the temperature, right (Y page 141)
C To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 142)
D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 138)
E To set the air distribution (Y page 141)
F To increase the airflow (Y page 142)
G To reduce the airflow (Y page 142)
H To adjust airflow (Y page 140)
I To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 144)
J To set climate control to automatic mode (Y page 140)

Rear control panel

K To increase the airflow (Y page 142)
L To reduce the airflow (Y page 142)
M Display
N To reduce the temperature (Y page 141)
O To increase the temperature (Y page 141)
138 Operating the climate control system

Notes on using THERMOTRONIC auto- Operating the climate control system

matic climate control
Switching climate control on/off
Automatic climate control
General notes
The following contains instructions and rec-
ommendations to enable you to get the most When the climate control is switched off, the
out of your THERMOTRONIC automatic cli- air supply and air circulation are also
mate control. switched off. The windows could mist up.
RActivate climate control using the à and
Therefore, only switch off climate control
briefly.
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the
à and ¿ buttons light up. i Switch on climate control primarily using
RIn automatic mode, you can also use the the à button (Y page 140).
ñ button to adjust airflow (FOCUS/
MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The MEDIUM level is Activating/deactivating
recommended. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
Climate control

RSet the temperature to 22 †. lock (Y page 155).

ROnly use the "windscreen demisting" func- X To switch on: press the à button.
tion briefly until the windscreen is clear The indicator lamp in the à button lights
again. up. Airflow and air distribution are set to
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. automatic mode.
if there are unpleasant outside odours or or
when in a tunnel. The windows could oth- X Press the ^ button.
erwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn into The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes
the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
out. The previous settings are reactivated.
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem-
X To switch off: press the ^ button.
perature settings on the driver's side for
The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
the front-passenger side and the rear com-
partment as well. The indicator lamp in the up.
á button goes out.
RUse the residual heat function if you want
to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior
Activating/deactivating the cooling
when the ignition is switched off. The resid-
with air dehumidification function
ual heat function can only be activated or General notes
deactivated with the ignition switched off.
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-
ECO start/stop function midification" function, the air inside the vehi-
cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-
During automatic engine switch-off in the cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-
ECO start/stop function, the climate control dows can mist up more quickly. Therefore,
system only operates at a reduced capacity. only switch off cooling with air dehumidifica-
If you require the full climate control output, tion for a short period.
you can switch off the ECO start/stop func- The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-
tion by pressing the ECO button tion is only available when the engine is run-
(Y page 160). ning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and
dehumidified according to the temperature
selected.
 Operating the climate control system 139

Condensation may drip from the underside of

the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This
is normal and not a sign that there is a mal-
function.

Activating/deactivating
XTo activate: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights
up.
i In vehicles with auxiliary heating, one of
the indicator lamps on the auxiliary heating
button lights up when the "cooling with air
dehumidification" function is activated.
X To deactivate: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes

Climate control
out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification"
function has a delayed switch-off feature.
140 Operating the climate control system

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The indicator lamp in Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a
the ¿ button malfunction.
flashes three times or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
remains off. The cool-
ing with air dehumidifi-
cation system cannot
be switched on.

Setting climate control to automatic X To switch to manual mode: press the

mode _ button.
or
General notes
Climate control

X Press the K or I button.

In automatic mode, the set temperature is The indicator lamp in the à button goes
maintained automatically at a constant level. out. Automatic air distribution and airflow
The system automatically regulates the tem- are deactivated.
perature of the dispensed air, the airflow and
the air distribution.
The automatic mode functions optimally Adjusting airflow
when the "Cooling with air dehumidification"
function is activated. If desired, cooling with This function is only available with the
air dehumidification can be deactivated. THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control.
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu- In automatic mode you can select the follow-
midification" function, the air inside the vehi- ing airflow settings:
cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi- FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly
cle will also not be dehumidified. The win- cooler
dows can mist up more quickly. Therefore, MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting
only switch off cooling with air dehumidifica- DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly
tion for a short period. warmer and with less of a draught
Activating/switching X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 155).
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition X Press the à button.
lock (Y page 155).
X Press the ñ button repeatedly until the
X Set the desired temperature.
required airflow setting appears in the dis-
X To activate: press the à button.
play.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow
are activated.
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control:
when automatic mode is activated, you can
set the airflow (Y page 140).
 Operating the climate control system 141

Setting the temperature X Turn control : clockwise or anti-clockwise

(Y page 137).
THERMATIC automatic climate control Only change the temperature setting in
Different temperatures can be set for the small increments. Start at 22 †.
driver's and front-passenger sides. X To increase/reduce the temperature in
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition the rear compartment using the rear
lock (Y page 155). control panel: press the 9 or :
X To increase/reduce: turn controls : or button on the rear control panel.
B clockwise or anti-clockwise Only change the temperature setting in
(Y page 135). small increments. Start at 22 †.
Only change the temperature setting in i If you leave the vehicle parked for longer
small increments. Start at 22 †. than 30 minutes the temperature setting
for the rear compartment then switches
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate back to 22 †.
control

Climate control
Setting the air distribution
Air distribution settings
THERMATIC automatic climate control: the
air distribution can be set individually for the
driver's and front-passenger sides.
¯ Directs the airflow through the demis-
ter vents
P Directs the airflow through the centre
and side air vents
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control zones O Directs the airflow through the foot-
You can select different temperature settings well air vents
for the driver's and front-passenger sides as S Directs the airflow through the centre,
well as for the rear compartment. side and footwell air vents.9
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition _ Directs the airflow to the entire vehicle
lock (Y page 155). interior.
X To increase/reduce the temperature in b Directs the airflow through the centre
the front: turn controls : and B clock- and side air vents as well as the demis-
wise or anti-clockwise (Y page 137). ter vents9
Only change the temperature setting in a Directs the airflow through the foot-
small increments. Start at 22 †. well and demister vents
X To increase/reduce the temperature in
i Regardless of the air distribution setting,
the rear compartment using the front
airflow is always directed through the side
control panel: press the á button.
air vents. The side air vents can only be
The indicator lamp in the á button goes
closed when the controls on the side air
out.
vents are turned downwards.

9 Certain countries only.

142 Operating the climate control system

Adjusting THERMATIC automatic climate control: the

temperature setting for the driver's side is
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
adopted for the front-passenger side.
lock (Y page 155).
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-
X Press the _ button repeatedly until the
trol: the temperature setting for the driver's
desired symbol appears in the display. side is adopted for the front-passenger side
The indicator lamp in the à button goes and the rear compartment.
out. Automatic control is deactivated and
the air distribution is controlled according
to the selected setting.
Demisting the windscreen
You can use this function to defrost the wind-
Setting the airflow screen or to demist the inside of the wind-
screen and the side windows.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 155). i You should only select the "windscreen
demisting" function until the windscreen is
Climate control

X To increase/reduce: press the K or

I button. clear again.
i You can use THERMOTRONIC automatic X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
climate control to set the airflow in the rear lock (Y page 155).
compartment separately. X To activate: press the ¬ button.

If the battery is not sufficiently charged, The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights
blower output may be reduced. As soon as up.
the battery is sufficiently charged, full blower The climate control system switches to the
output will be available. following functions:
Rhigh airflow
Rhigh temperature
Switching the ZONE function on/off
Rair distribution to the windscreen and
X To switch on: press the á button. front side windows
The indicator lamp in the á button lights Rair-recirculation mode off
up.
If the battery is not sufficiently charged,
THERMATIC automatic climate control: the
blower output may be reduced. As soon as
temperature setting for the driver's side is
the battery is sufficiently charged, full blower
not adopted for the front-passenger side.
output will be available.
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-
X To deactivate: press the ¬ button.
trol: the temperature setting for the driver's
side is not adopted for the front-passenger The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
side and the rear compartment. out. The previous settings are reactivated.
Air-recirculation mode remains deactiva-
When the buttons for temperature, airflow or ted.
air distribution are pressed, the temperature
or
setting on the driver's side is not adopted for
X Press the à button.
the other climate control zones.
X To switch off: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. Airflow and air distribution are set to
The indicator lamp in the á button goes
automatic mode.
out.
or
 Operating the climate control system 143

X Turn temperature control : or B clock- Activating/deactivating

wise or anti-clockwise (Y page 135), X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
(Y page 137).
lock (Y page 155).
or X Press the ¤ button.
X Press the K or I button. The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights
up or goes out.

Demisting the windows

Windows misted up on the inside
X Activate the ¿ cooling with air dehu-
midification function.
X Activate automatic mode Ã.
X Adjust the side air vents so that the heated
air is directed towards the side windows.

Climate control
X If the windows continue to mist up, activate
the ¬ "Windscreen demisting" function.
i You should only select this setting until
the windscreen is clear again.

Windows misted up on the outside

X Activate the windscreen wipers.
X Press the _ button repeatedly until the
O or P symbol appears in the dis-
play.
X Adjust the side air vents so that no air is
directed towards the side windows.

Rear window heating

General notes
The rear window heating has a high current
draw. You should therefore switch it off as
soon as the window is clear. It otherwise
switches off automatically after several
minutes.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win-
dow heating may switch off.
144 Operating the climate control system

Problems with the rear window heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The rear window heat- The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
ing has switched off X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading
prematurely or cannot lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.
be activated. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window heat-
ing can be activated again.

Activating/deactivating air-recircula- X To deactivate: press the g button.

tion mode The indicator lamp in the g button goes
out.
General notes
i Air-recirculation mode is deactivated
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if
Climate control

automatically:
unpleasant odours are entering the vehicle
from outside. The air already inside the vehi- Rafter approximately five minutes at out-
cle will then be recirculated. side temperatures below about 5 †
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the Rafter approximately five minutes if cool-

windows can mist up more quickly, in partic- ing with air dehumidification is deactiva-
ular at low temperatures. Only use air-recir- ted
culation mode briefly to prevent the windows Rafter approximately 30 minutes at out-
misting up. side temperatures above approximately
The operation of air-recirculation mode is the 5 † if the "Cooling with air dehumidifi-
same for all control panels. cation" function is activated

Activating/deactivating
Convenience opening/closing using
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition the air-recirculation button
lock (Y page 155).
X To activate: press the g button. G WARNING
The indicator lamp in the g button lights When the convenience closing feature is oper-
up. ating, parts of the body could become trapped
in the closing area of the side window and the
i In the event of high pollution levels10 or at sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
high outside temperatures, air-recircula- Observe the complete closing procedure
tion mode is automatically activated. When when the convenience closing feature is oper-
air-recirculation mode is activated auto- ating. When closing make sure that no parts
matically, the indicator lamp in the g of the body are in the closing area.
button is not lit.
Outside air is added after about G WARNING
30 minutes. During convenience opening parts of the body
could be drawn in or become trapped

10 THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control only.

 Operating the climate control system 145

between the side window and window frame. panorama sliding sunroof move back to
There is a risk of injury. their original position.
When opening, make sure that nobody is The indicator lamp in the g button goes
touching the side window. If someone out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated.
becomes trapped, press the W switch i If you open the side windows or the pan-
immediately to open/close the side window orama sliding sunroof manually after clos-
in the door. The side window stops. To con- ing with the convenience closing feature,
tinue closing the side window, pull on the they will remain in this position when
W switch. opened using the convenience opening fea-
ture.
X Convenience closing feature: press and
hold the g button until the side win-
dows and the panorama sliding sunroof are Activating/deactivating the residual
closed. heat function
The indicator lamp in the g button lights
up. Air-recirculation mode is activated. General notes

Climate control
If parts of the body are in the closing area The residual heat function is only available
during convenience closing, proceed as fol- with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-
lows: trol.
X Press the W button for opening/closing It is possible to make use of the residual heat
the side windows. of the engine to continue heating the vehicle
The side window stops. for approximately 30 minutes after the engine
X To then open the side window, press the
has been switched off. The heating time
W button again. depends on the temperature that has been
set for the vehicle interior.
X Press the 3 switch for opening/closing
the panorama sliding sunroof. i The blower will run at a low speed regard-
The panorama sliding sunroof stops. less of the airflow setting.
X To then open the panorama sliding sunroof, i If you activate the residual heat function
pull back on the 3 switch. at high temperatures, only the ventilation
i If the sliding sunroof is raised and closes, will be activated. The blower runs at
press the 3 switch, to stop the sliding medium speed.
sunroof. Do not pull back on the 3
switch afterwards. The sliding sunroof Activating/deactivating
closes before it opens. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
i Notes on the automatic reversing func- lock (Y page 155) or remove it .
tion for: X To activate: press the Ì button.

Rtheside window (Y page 94) The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights
Rthepanorama sliding sunroof up.
(Y page 98) i If the residual heat function is activated,
X Convenience opening feature: press and
the windows may mist up on the inside.
hold the g button until the side win- X To deactivate: press the Ì button.
dows and the panorama sliding sunroof The indicator lamp in the Ì button goes
have opened. The side windows and the out.

Z
146 Operating the climate control system

i Residual heat is deactivated automati- i Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly

cally: once a month for about ten minutes.
Rafter approximately 30 minutes The auxiliary heating heats the air in the vehi-
Rwhen the ignition is switched on cle interior to the set temperature. This
Rif the battery voltage drops occurs without using the heat of the running
engine. The auxiliary heating is operated
Rwhen the auxiliary heating is switched on
directly using the vehicle's fuel. For this rea-
son, the tank content must be at least at
reserve fuel level to ensure that the auxiliary
Auxiliary heating
heating functions.
Important safety notes The auxiliary heating/ventilation automati-
cally adjusts to changes in temperature and
G DANGER weather conditions. For this reason, the aux-
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or sufficient iliary heating could switch from ventilation
ventilation is not possible, toxic exhaust mode to heating mode or from heating mode
Climate control

fumes can enter the vehicle, especially car- to ventilation mode.

bon monoxide. This is the case, e.g. in The auxiliary heating switches off automati-
enclosed spaces, or if the vehicle is stuck in cally after 50 minutes. This time limit can be
snow. There is a risk of fatal injuries. altered. To do this, visit a qualified specialist
You should switch off the auxiliary heating in workshop.
enclosed spaces which do not have an extrac- You cannot use the auxiliary ventilation to
tion system, e.g. a garage. If the vehicle is cool the vehicle interior to a temperature
stuck in snow and you must leave the auxiliary lower than the outside temperature.
heating running, keep the exhaust pipe and
the area around the vehicle clear of snow. To Before switching on
guarantee a sufficient supply of fresh air, open
a window on the side of the vehicle away from X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
the wind. lock (Y page 155).
X Set the desired temperature (Y page 141).
G WARNING The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be acti-
When the auxiliary heating is switched on, vated even when climate control is set to
parts of the vehicle can become very hot. manual. Optimum comfort can be attained
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or when the system is set to automatic mode.
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with Set the temperature to 22 †.
hot parts of the exhaust system for extended
The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be acti-
periods. There is a risk of fire.
vated or deactivated using the remote control
When the auxiliary heating is switched on, or the button on the centre console.
make sure that no flammable material can
The on-board computer can be used to spec-
come into contact with hot vehicle compo-
ify up to three departure times, one of which
nents.
may be preselected (Y page 254).
! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila-
tion draws on the vehicle battery. After you
have heated or ventilated the vehicle a
maximum of two times, drive for a longer
distance.
 Operating the climate control system 147

Switching the auxiliary heating/venti- The remote control has a maximum range of
lation on/off using the centre console approximately 300 metres. This range is
button reduced by:
Rsources of radio interference
Rsolid objects between the remote control
and the vehicle
Rthe remote control being in an unfavoura-
ble position in relation to the vehicle
Rtransmitting from an enclosed space

i The optimum range can be achieved if you

hold the remote control vertically, pointing
upwards when you press one of the but-
tons.
The colours of the indicator lamps on the but- i A battery symbol appears in the display
ton have the following meanings:

Climate control
when the battery in the remote control is
Blue Auxiliary ventilation switched on low. Replace the remote control battery
Red Auxiliary heating switched on (Y page 148).
Yellow Departure time preselected Switching the auxiliary heating/ventila-
(Y page 254) tion on/off
Switching on the auxiliary heating/venti-
lation
X Press button :.
The red or blue indicator lamp in but-
ton : lights up.

Switching off the auxiliary heating/venti-

lation
X Press button :.
The red or blue indicator lamp in but-
ton : goes out. Remote control
: Display
Switching the auxiliary heating/venti- ; . To check the status/set the depar-
lation on/off using the remote control ture time
= ^ To switch off the auxiliary heating/
General notes
ventilation
Your vehicle comes with one remote control.
? u To switch on the auxiliary heating/
You may use two additional remote controls
for your vehicle. For more information, please ventilation
contact a qualified specialist workshop. A , To check the status/set the depar-
ture time

Z
148 Operating the climate control system

X To switch on: press the u button. Setting the departure time

ON is shown in the remote control display. X Press the , or . button repeatedly
X To deactivate: press the ^ button. until the time to be changed appears in the
OFF is shown in the remote control display. display.
X Press the u and ^ buttons simulta-
Checking the status of the auxiliary heat- neously.
ing/ventilation The Î symbol in the remote control dis-
X Press the , or . button. play flashes.
The following messages may appear in the X Press the , or . button to set the
display: desired departure time.
Display Meaning i The longer you press the , or .
button, the faster the time changes.
The auxiliary heating/
ventilation is switched X Press the u and ^ buttons simulta-
off. neously.
Climate control

The new departure time is stored.

The auxiliary ventilation
is switched on. The num- Activating the set departure time
ber in the display shows X Press the , or . button repeatedly
the remaining time (in until the desired departure time appears in
minutes) for the auxiliary the display.
ventilation.
X Press the u button.
The auxiliary heating is The Í symbol and the departure time
switched on. The number appear in the display.
in the display shows the
remaining time (in Deactivating a set departure time
minutes) for the auxiliary X Press the , or . button.
heating. The status of the auxiliary heating is shown
in the display.
A departure time has
X Press the . button.
been activated. The
departure time appears The first departure time stored appears in
in the display. the display.
X Press the ^ button.
A departure time has
OFF is shown in the remote control display.
been activated. The aux-
iliary ventilation is cur-
rently activated. The Replacing the remote control battery
departure time appears
G WARNING
in the display.
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
A departure time has ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in
been activated. The aux- severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal
iliary heating is currently injury.
activated. The departure Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
time appears in the dis- a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
play. immediately.
 Operating the climate control system 149

H Environmental note
Batteries contain pollutants.
It is illegal to dispose of them
with the household rubbish.
They must be collected sep-
arately and disposed of in an
environmentally responsible
recycling system.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop or to a col-
lection point for used batter-
ies.

Climate control
One 6 V pin battery, type 2CR11108 is
required.

X Prise apart the side arms of battery

cover ; and pull off battery cover ;.
X Remove old battery :.
X Insert the new battery. Observe the polarity
signs on the back of the remote control
when doing so.
X Slide battery cover ; back onto the
remote control.
X Use the remote control to check the vehi-
cle's auxiliary heating functions.

Z
150 Adjusting the air vents

Problems with the auxiliary heating/ventilation

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

FAIL The starter battery is not charged sufficiently or the system is

faulty.
X Charge the starter battery.
X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using
the remote control.
X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.

$ The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle

is faulty.
FAIL
X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if
necessary.
Climate control

X Make another attempt to switch the auxiliary heating on or off

using the remote control.

© There is insufficient fuel in the fuel tank. This means that the tank
content is below reserve fuel level.
FAIL
X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using
the remote control.

The auxiliary heating is faulty.

X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.

Adjusting the air vents In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air
through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
Important safety notes please observe the following notes:
G WARNING Rkeep the air inlet between the windscreen
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air and the bonnet free of blockages, such as
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in ice, snow or leaves.
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There Rnever cover the vents or ventilation grilles
is a risk of injury. in the vehicle interior.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always i For virtually draught-free ventilation,
maintain a sufficient distance to the air out- adjust the sliders of the air vents to the
lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to centre position.
another area of the vehicle interior.
 Adjusting the air vents 151

Setting the centre air vents Adjusting the glove compartment air
vent
When automatic climate control is activated,
the glove compartment can be ventilated, for
instance to cool its contents. The level of air-
flow depends on the airflow and air distribu-
tion settings.
! Close the air vent when heating the vehi-
cle.
At high outside temperatures, open the air
vent and activate the "cooling with air dehu-
X To open the centre air vent: turn the midification" function. Otherwise, temper-
adjuster in one of centre air vents : anti- ature-sensitive items stored in the glove
clockwise. compartment could be damaged.

Climate control
X To close the centre air vent: turn the
adjuster in one of centre air vents : clock-
wise until it engages.

Adjusting the side air vents

: Air vent thumbwheel

; Air vent
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel :
clockwise or anti-clockwise.

: Side window demister vent

; Side air vent

X To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster

in side air vent ; anti-clockwise.
X To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster
in side air vent ; clockwise until it
engages.

Z
152 Adjusting the air vents

Setting the rear-compartment air

vents

: Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel

; Rear-compartment air vent, right
Climate control

= Rear control panel, only with

THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-
trol
? Rear-compartment air vent, left
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or
down.
 153

Useful information ............................ 154

Running-in notes ............................... 154
Driving ............................................... 154
Manual transmission ........................ 162

Driving and parking

Automatic transmission ................... 163
Refuelling ........................................... 170
Parking ............................................... 174
Driving tips ........................................ 176
Driving systems ................................ 183
Off-road driving systems .................. 225
Towing a trailer ................................. 228
154 Driving

Useful information i You should also observe these notes on

running-in if the engine or parts of the drive
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- train on your vehicle have been replaced.
els, series and optional equipment for your
vehicle that were available at the time of
Driving and parking

going to press. National variations are pos- Driving

sible. Note that your vehicle may not be
Important safety notes
equipped with all of the functions descri-
bed. This is also the case for systems and G WARNING
functions relevant to safety. Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict
i Read the information on qualified special- the clearance around the pedals or block a
ist workshops: (Y page 28). depressed pedal. This jeopardises the oper-
ating and road safety of the vehicle. There is
a risk of an accident.
Running-in notes Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that
they do not get into the driver's footwell.
Important safety notes Always fit the floormats securely and as pre-
New brake pads/linings and discs that have scribed in order to ensure that there is always
been replaced only achieve optimum braking sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use
effect after several hundred kilometres of loose floormats and do not place several floor-
driving. Compensate for the reduced braking mats on top of one another.
effect by applying greater force to the brake
pedal. G WARNING
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
of the pedals, e.g.:
The first 1500 km Rshoes with thick soles
If you treat the engine with sufficient care Rshoes with high heels
from the very start, you will be rewarded with Rslippers
excellent performance for the remainder of
There is a risk of an accident.
the engine's life.
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
RDrive at varying vehicle speeds and engine usage of the pedals.
speeds for the first 1500 km.
RAvoid overstraining the vehicle during this G WARNING
period, e.g. driving at full throttle. If you switch off the ignition while driving,
RChange gear in good time, before the rev safety-relevant functions are only available
counter needle is Ô of the way to the red with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
area of the rev counter. for example, the power steering and the brake
RDo not shift down a gear manually in order boosting effect. You will require considerably
to brake. more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
RVehicles with an automatic transmission: of an accident.
try to avoid depressing the accelerator Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
pedal beyond the point of resistance (kick-
down).
After 1500 km, you may gradually accelerate
the vehicle to full road and engine speeds.
 Driving 155

G WARNING However, the ignition will not be switched

If the parking brake has not been fully on. The engine cannot be started.
released when driving, the parking brake can:
KEYLESS-GO
Roverheat and cause a fire
General notes

Driving and parking

Rlose its hold function.

There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key:
the parking brake fully before driving off. - with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
phone or another key
! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use
- with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
the engine's full performance until it has
film
reached operating temperature.
- inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
Only set the automatic transmission to the
respective drive positions when the vehicle This can affect the function of the key with
is stationary. KEYLESS-GO.
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with
wheels when pulling away on slippery a key featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO
roads. Otherwise, you could damage the function and a detachable Start/Stop button.
drive train. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ignition lock and the key must be in the vehi-
cle.
Key positions Pressing the Start/Stop button several times
in succession corresponds to the different
Key key positions in the ignition lock. This is only
the case if you are not depressing the brake
pedal.
If you depress the brake pedal and press the
Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-
ately.

g To remove the key

1 Power supply for some consumers, such
as the windscreen wipers
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
and drive position
3 To start the engine X Position 0: if Start/Stop button : has not
The steering wheel is locked when the key is yet been pressed, this corresponds to the
removed from the ignition lock. key being removed from the ignition.
X Position 1: press Start/Stop button :.
i If the key does not belong to the vehicle,
You can now activate the windscreen wip-
it can still be turned in the ignition lock.
ers, for example.

Z
156 Driving

i If you then open the driver's door when in Starting the engine
this position, the power supply is deactiva-
ted. Important safety notes
X Position 2: (ignition): press Start/Stop but- G WARNING
ton : twice. If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
Driving and parking

they could:
i The power supply is switched off again if:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
Rthedriver's door is opened and
people or road users.
Ryou press Start/Stop button : once
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
when in this position
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Removing the Start/Stop button Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
You can remove the Start/Stop button from motion if, for example, they:
the ignition lock and start the vehicle as nor- Rrelease the parking brake.
mal using the key. Rshift the automatic transmission out of
i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop parking position P.
button from the ignition lock when you Rshift the manual transmission into neutral.
leave the vehicle. Rstart the engine.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the key
with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave
children or animals unattended in the vehicle.
Always keep the key out of reach of children.

G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
lock ;.
out sufficient ventilation.
i When you insert Start/Stop button :
into ignition lock ;, the system needs G WARNING
approximately two seconds recognition Flammable materials introduced through
time. You can then use Start/Stop but- environmental influence or by animals can
ton :. ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or
parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk
of fire.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that
there are no flammable foreign materials in
the engine compartment or in the exhaust
system.

! Do not depress the accelerator pedal

when starting the engine.
 Driving 157

General notes Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine

i Vehicles with a petrol engine: the cat- You can start the engine if a valid key with the
alytic converter is preheated for up to integrated KEYLESS-GO function is in the
approximately 30 seconds after a cold vehicle. Always take the key with you when
start. The sound of the engine may change leaving the vehicle, even if you only leave it

Driving and parking

during this time. for a short time. Pay attention to the impor-
tant safety notes.
Manual transmission i The Start/Stop button can be used to
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it start the vehicle manually without inserting
depressed. the key into the ignition lock. The key must
X Fully depress the clutch pedal. be in the vehicle and the Start/Stop button
must be inserted in the ignition lock. This
X Shift to neutral N.
mode for starting the engine operates inde-
i You can only start the engine when the pendently of the ECO start/stop automatic
clutch pedal is fully depressed. engine start function.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
Automatic transmission depressed.
X To start a petrol engine: press the Start/
X Shift the transmission to position P.
The transmission position display in the Stop button once (Y page 155).
multifunction display shows P. The engine starts.
X To start a diesel engine: press the Start/
i You can also start the engine when the Stop button once (Y page 155).
transmission is in position N. Preglow is activated and the engine starts.

Starting procedure with the key

i To start the engine using the key instead Pulling away
of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button Manual transmission
out of the ignition lock.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
X To start a petrol engine: turn the key to
depressed.
position 3 in the ignition lock
X Fully depress the clutch pedal.
(Y page 155) and release it as soon as the
engine is running. X Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R.

X To start a diesel engine: turn the key to X Release the parking brake (Y page 175).
position 2 in the ignition lock X Release the brake pedal.
(Y page 155). X Slowly release the clutch pedal and gently
The % preglow indicator lamp in the depress the accelerator pedal.
instrument cluster lights up.
X When the % preglow indicator lamp
! Change gear in good time and avoid spin-
goes out, turn the key to position ning the wheels. Otherwise, you could dam-
3(Y page 155) and release it as soon as the age the vehicle.
engine is running. i Follow the shift recommendations in the
i You can start the engine without preglow multifunction display for an economical
if the engine is warm. driving style (Y page 163).

Z
158 Driving

i The vehicle locks centrally once you have Hill start assist
pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away
drop down.
forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient.
You can open the doors from the inside at It holds the vehicle for a short time after you
any time. have removed your foot from the brake pedal.
Driving and parking

You can also deactivate the automatic door This gives you enough time to move your foot
lock (Y page 253). from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal
and depress it before the vehicle begins to
Automatic transmission roll.
G WARNING G WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed After a short time, hill start assist will no lon-
and you engage transmission position D or ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.
R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There There is a risk of an accident and injury.
is a risk of an accident. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
When engaging transmission position D or R, brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
not simultaneously accelerate. assist.

i It is only possible to shift the transmission X Take your foot off the brake pedal.
from position P to the desired position if The vehicle is then held for about a second.
you depress the brake pedal. Only then is X Pull away.
the parking lock released. If the brake Hill start assist is not active if:
pedal is not depressed, the DIRECT SELECT
Ryou are pulling away on a level road or a
lever can still be moved but the parking lock
remains engaged. downhill gradient.
Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
the transmission is in position N.
depressed.
Rthe parking brake is engaged.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
RESP® is malfunctioning.
X Release the parking brake (Y page 175).
X Release the brake pedal.
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. ECO start/stop function
i The vehicle locks centrally once you have Introduction
pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
drop down. The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically if the vehicle is stop-
You can open the doors from the inside at
ped under certain conditions.
any time.
When pulling away again, the engine starts
You can also deactivate the automatic lock-
automatically. The ECO start/stop function
ing feature (Y page 253).
thereby helps you to reduce the fuel con-
i Upshifts take place at higher engine sumption and emissions of your vehicle.
speeds after a cold start. This helps the
catalytic converter to reach its operating
temperature more quickly.
 Driving 159

Important safety notes If not all conditions for automatic engine

switch-off are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol is
G WARNING shown in yellow.
If the engine is switched off automatically and
you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted i All of the vehicle's systems remain active
when the engine is switched off automati-

Driving and parking

automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.
There is a risk of accident and injury. cally.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off i The engine can be switched off automat-
the ignition and secure the vehicle against ically a maximum of four times (initial stop,
rolling away. then three subsequent stops) in succes-
sion. The ¤ symbol is shown in yellow
General notes in the multifunction display after the engine
has been started automatically for the
If the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the fourth time. When the ¤ symbol is
multifunction display, the ECO start/stop shown in green in the multifunction display,
function switches the engine off automati- automatic engine switch-off is again possi-
cally if the vehicle stops moving. ble.
Every time you switch on the engine using the
key or the Start/Stop button, the ECO start/ Vehicles with manual transmission
stop function is activated. The ECO start/stop function switches off the
If the ECO start/stop function has been man- engine automatically at low speeds.
ually deactivated (Y page 160) or a malfunc-
tion has caused the system to be deactivated,
the ¤ symbol is not displayed.

Automatic engine switch-off

General notes
The ECO start/stop function is operational
and the ¤ symbol is displayed in green in
the multifunction display, if:
Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit X Brake the vehicle.
green
Rthe outside temperature is within the range
X Engage neutral N(Y page 163) (follow
gearshift instruction : to engage neutral
that is suitable for the system
N, if necessary).
Rthe engine is at normal operating temper-
X Release the clutch pedal.
ature
The engine is switched off automatically.
Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior
has been reached Vehicles with automatic transmission
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or
Rthe system detects that the windscreen is N, the ECO start/stop function switches off
not misted up when the air-conditioning the engine automatically.
system is switched on
i The HOLD function can be activated if the
Rthe bonnet is closed
engine has been switched off automati-
Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's
cally. It is then not necessary to continue
seat belt is fastened
Z
160 Driving

applying the brakes during the automatic Deactivating/activating the ECO start/
stop phase. When you depress the accel- stop function
erator pedal, the engine starts automati-
cally and the braking effect of the HOLD
function is deactivated.
Driving and parking

Automatic engine start

General notes
The engine is started automatically if:
Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function
by pressing the ECO button
Ryou engage reverse gear R
ECO button
Rthe vehicle starts to roll
Rthe brake system requires this
X To switch off: press button :.
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-
Indicator lamp ; on button : and the
¤ symbol in the multifunction display go
ates from the set range
out.
Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-
screen when the air-conditioning system is X To switch on: press button :.
switched on Indicator lamp ; lights up.
Rthe battery's charge status is too low If all conditions for automatic engine
Rthe driver's seat belt is released or the driv- switch-off (Y page 159) are fulfilled, the
er's door is opened ¤ symbol is shown in green in the mul-
tifunction display.
Vehicles with manual transmission
If not all conditions for automatic engine
! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal switch-off (Y page 159) are fulfilled, the
is depressed. ¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the mul-
The engine is started automatically if you: tifunction display. If this is the case, the
Rdepress the clutch pedal fully ECO start/stop function is not available.
Rdepress the accelerator pedal i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/
stop function has been deactivated man-
Vehicles with automatic transmission
ually or as the result of a malfunction. The
The engine is started automatically if you: engine will then not be switched off auto-
Rrelease the brake pedal when HOLD is not matically when the vehicle stops.
activated and the transmission is in posi-
tion D or N
Rdepress the accelerator pedal
Rmove the transmission out of position P

i Shifting the transmission to position P

does not start the engine.
i If you shift the transmission from R to D,
the ECO start/stop function is available
again once the ¤ symbol reappears in
green in the multifunction display.
 Driving 161

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The engine does not The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.
start.

Driving and parking

X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 196) or DISTRONIC
PLUS (Y page 188).
X Try to start the engine again.

The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.

start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
can be heard. X Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock before
attempting to start the engine again.
or
X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps
in the instrument cluster go out.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 156). Avoid excessively
long and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this will drain
the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does not The fuel tank is empty.

start. The starter motor X Refuel the vehicle.
can be heard. The
reserve fuel warning
lamp is lit and the fuel
gauge display shows 0.
The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak
start. You cannot hear or discharged.
the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 349).

If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.

If the engine still does not start:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
162 Manual transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Vehicles with a petrol There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical
engine: component of the engine management system.
The engine is not run- X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Driving and parking

ning smoothly and is Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con-
misfiring. verter and damage it.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.

The coolant tempera- The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine
ture display is showing is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
more than 120 †. The X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant
coolant warning lamp to cool down.
may also be on and a X Check the coolant level (Y page 331). Observe the warning
warning tone may
notes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary.
sound.
If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fan may be faulty.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled
sufficiently.
X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue
driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.

Manual transmission ! When shifting between 5th and 6th gear,

you should always push the gear lever all
Gear lever the way to the right. Otherwise, you could
shift unintentionally into 3rd or 4th gear
and damage the transmission.
If you shift down at too high a speed (trans-
mission braking), this can cause the engine
to overrev, leading to engine damage.
Do not use the clutch bite point to keep the
vehicle stationary on uphill gradients.
There is otherwise a risk of damaging the
clutch.
! On long and steep downhill gradients,
Gear lever especially if the vehicle is laden or towing
k Reverse gear a trailer, you must shift into gear 1, 2 or 3
1 to 6 Forward gears in good time. This uses the engine's braking
effect. This relieves the load on the brake
! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal system and prevents the brakes from over-
is depressed. heating and wearing too quickly.
 Automatic transmission 163

Shifting to neutral (N) X Shift gear according to gearshift recom-

mendation : when shown in the multi-
function display of the instrument cluster.

Driving and parking

Automatic transmission
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or
R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There
X Depress the clutch pedal fully. is a risk of an accident.
X Move the gear lever to position N :. When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
Engaging reverse gear
G WARNING
! Only shift into reverse gear R when the
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you could
tral position N when you switch off the engine.
damage the transmission.
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of
i The ECO start/stop function is not avail- an accident.
able when reverse gear is engaged. After switching off the engine, always switch
For further information on the ECO start/ to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
stop function, see (Y page 159). cle from rolling away by applying the parking
X Move the gear lever firmly to the left brake.
beyond the point of resistance and then
forwards.
DIRECT SELECT lever
Overview of transmission positions
Gearshift recommendation
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the
The gearshift recommendations assist you in
steering column.
adopting an economical driving style. The rec-
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction
display.

j Park position with parking lock

k Reverse gear

Z
164 Automatic transmission

i Neutral i The automatic transmission shifts into

h Drive park position P automatically:
Rif you open the driver's door while the
i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns
vehicle is stationary in transmission posi-
to its original position. The current trans-
tion D or R
Driving and parking

mission position P, R, N or D appears in the

Rif you open the door while travelling at
transmission position display
(Y page 164) in the multifunction display. very low speeds in transmission position
D or R
Transmission position and drive pro- i Depressing the brake and pushing the
gram display DIRECT SELECT lever up or down disen-
gages the parking lock. The transmission is
in N neutral.
In order to shift from park position P
directly into R or D:
Rdepress the brake pedal and
Rpush the DIRECT SELECT lever up or
down past the first point of resistance
: Transmission position display
; Drive program display ! If the engine speed is too high, do not shift
the automatic transmission directly from
i The arrows in the transmission position D to R, from R to D or directly to P. Other-
display show how and into which transmis- wise, the automatic transmission could be
sion positions you can change using the damaged.
DIRECT SELECT lever.
! If the transmission position display in the Engaging park position P automatically
multifunction display is not working, you Park position P is automatically engaged if:
should pull away carefully to check whether Ryou switch off the engine using the key and
the desired transmission position is
remove the key
engaged. Ideally, you should select trans-
Ryou switch off the engine using the Start/
mission position D and drive program E or
S. Stop button and open one of the front doors
Rthe HOLD function (Y page 196) or DIS-
The current transmission position and drive
TRONIC PLUS (Y page 188) brake your
program appear in the multifunction display.
vehicle until it is stationary and at least one
of the following conditions is fulfilled:
Engaging park position P
- there is a system malfunction
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direc- - the vehicle is on a steep uphill or downhill
tion of arrow P. gradient. The electric parking brake is
then also engaged

Engaging reverse gear R

! Only shift the automatic transmission to
R when the vehicle is stationary.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the
first point of resistance.
 Automatic transmission 165

Shifting to neutral (N) A Neutral

X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down Do not shift the transmission to N
to the first point of resistance. while driving. Otherwise, the auto-
matic transmission could be dam-
Engaging drive position D aged.

Driving and parking

Releasing the brakes will allow you
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past
to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to
the first point of resistance.
push it or tow it.
If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:
only shift the transmission to posi-
Transmission positions
tion N if the vehicle is in danger of
B Park position skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
This prevents the vehicle from roll- ! Rolling in neutral N can lead to
ing away when stopped. Do not damage to the transmission.
shift the transmission into position
P(Y page 174) unless the vehicle 7 Drive
is stationary. The automatic transmission
The automatic transmission shifts changes gear automatically. All
to P automatically if you: forward gears are available.
Rremove the key
Rswitch off the engine when in R Changing gear
or D and open one of the front
doors The automatic transmission shifts to the indi-
vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-
C Reverse gear mission position D. Gearshifting is deter-
Only shift the transmission to R mined by:
when the vehicle is stationary. Rthe selected drive program
E/S, E/S/M or M(Y page 166)
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe road speed

Driving tips
Accelerator pedal position
Your style of driving influences how the auto-
matic transmission shifts gear:
Rlittle throttle: early upshifts
Rmore throttle: late upshifts

Z
166 Automatic transmission

Kickdown
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.
The transmission shifts to a lower gear
Driving and parking

depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts back up.
Program selector button on vehicles with the
Towing a trailer Sports package
X Drive in the middle of the engine speed
range on uphill gradients.
X Shift down to gear 3 or 2(Y page 167)
depending on the uphill or downhill gradi-
ent, even if cruise control or SPEEDTRONIC
is activated.

Program selector button

General notes
Program selector button on vehicles with the Off-
The program selector button allows you to road Engineering package
choose between different driving character-
istics. E Economy Comfortable, economical
driving
S Sport Sporty driving style
M Manual Manual gearshifting

i The permanent drive program M is avail-

able on the following vehicles:
RVehicles with the Sports package
RVehicles with the Offroad Engineering
package
Program selector button Further information about permanent drive
program M(Y page 168).
As well as this permanent drive program
M, you can also activate temporary drive
program M(Y page 167).
X Press program selector button : repeat-
edly until the letter for the desired drive
 Automatic transmission 167

program appears in the multifunction dis- Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in
play. forward and reverse gears unless the accel-
erator pedal is depressed fully.
i The automatic transmission switches to Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving
automatic drive program E each time the
stability on slippery road surfaces, for
engine is started.

Driving and parking

example.
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up

Steering wheel gearshift paddles sooner. This results in the vehicle being
driven at lower engine speeds and the
wheels being less likely to spin.
Drive program S is characterised by the fol-
lowing:
Rsporty engine and automatic transmission
settings.
Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear.
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
later.
Ras a result of the later automatic transmis-

: Left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle

sion shift points, the fuel consumption pos-
sibly being higher.
; Right-hand steering wheel gearshift pad-
dle
Manual drive program M
In the manual drive program, you can change
gear yourself by using the steering wheel General notes
gearshift paddles (Y page 167). In this drive program, you can briefly change
Further information about permanent drive gear yourself by using the steering wheel
program M(Y page 168). gearshift paddles. The transmission must be
Further information about temporary drive in position D.
program M(Y page 167). You can activate manual drive program M in
the E and S automatic drive programs.
i You can only change gear with the steer-
ing wheel gearshift paddles when the trans- i As well as temporary drive program M,
mission is in position D. you can also activate permanent drive pro-
gram M(Y page 166).
Further information about permanent drive
Automatic drive program program M(Y page 168).
Drive program E is characterised by the fol- Activating
lowing: X Shift the transmission to position D.
Rcomfort-oriented engine and automatic
X Pull the left or right steering wheel gearshift
transmission settings.
paddle (Y page 167).
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from
Manual drive program M is temporarily acti-
the automatic transmission shifting up vated. The selected gear and M appear in
sooner. the multifunction display.

Z
168 Automatic transmission

Shifting gears Deactivating

If you pull on the left or right steering wheel If you have activated manual drive program
gearshift paddle, the automatic transmission M, it will remain active for a certain amount
switches to manual drive program M for a of time. Under certain conditions the mini-
limited amount of time. Depending on which mum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the
Driving and parking

gearshift paddle is pulled, the automatic case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun
transmission immediately shifts into the next phase or when driving on steep terrain.
gear down or up, if permitted. If manual drive program M has been deacti-
X To shift up: pull the right-hand steering vated, the automatic transmission shifts into
wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 167). the automatic drive program that was last
The automatic transmission shifts up to the selected, i.e. E or S.
next gear. You can also deactivate manual drive pro-
i If the maximum engine speed on the cur- gram M yourself:
rently engaged gear is reached and you X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel gear-
continue to accelerate, the automatic shift paddle and hold it in place
transmission automatically shifts up in (Y page 167).
order to prevent engine damage.
or
XTo shift down: pull on the left-hand steer- X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the
ing wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 167). transmission position.
The automatic transmission shifts down to
or
the next gear.
X Use the program selector button to change
i If the engine exceeds the maximum
the drive program (Y page 166).
engine speed when shifting down, the auto-
Manual drive program M is deactivated.
matic transmission protects against engine
The automatic transmission switches into
damage by not shifting down.
the automatic drive program that was last
i Automatic downshifting occurs when selected, i.e. E or S.
coasting.
Gearshift recommendation
Manual drive program
General notes
In this drive program, you can permanently
change gear yourself by using the steering
wheel gearshift paddles. The transmission
must be in position D.

The gearshift recommendations assist you in i As well as this permanent drive program
adopting an economical driving style. The rec- M, you can also activate temporary drive
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction program M(Y page 167).
display.
X Shift to recommended gear ; according
Activating the manual drive program
to gearshift recommendation : when The manual drive program is only available for
shown in the multifunction display of the vehicles with the Sports package or the Off-
instrument cluster. road Engineering package.
 Automatic transmission 169

Manual drive program M differs from drive Downshifting

program S with regard to spontaneity,
X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift
responsiveness and the smoothness of the
paddle (Y page 167).
gear changes.
The automatic transmission shifts down to
Manual drive program M can be selected the next gear.

Driving and parking

using the program selector button. In manual
drive program M, you can change gear using i For maximum acceleration, pull the left-
the steering wheel gearshift paddles if the hand steering wheel gearshift paddle until
transmission is in position D. The gear selec- the transmission selects the optimum gear
ted is shown in the multifunction display. for the current speed.
X Press the program selector button
(Y page 166) repeatedly until M appears in Kickdown
the multifunction display. You can also use kickdown for maximum
acceleration in manual drive program M.
Shifting up X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift pressure point.
paddle (Y page 167). The transmission shifts to a lower gear
The automatic transmission shifts up to the depending on the engine speed.
next gear.
Deactivating the manual drive program
Gearshift recommendation X Vehicles with the Sports package: press
the program selector button (Y page 166)
repeatedly until E or S appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
X Vehicles with the Offroad Engineering
package: press the program selector but-
ton (Y page 166). M is no longer shown in
the multifunction display.
The gearshift recommendations assist you in
adopting an economical driving style. The rec-
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction
display.
X If relevant gearshift recommendation :
appears in the multifunction display on the
instrument cluster, pull on the right-hand
steering wheel gearshift paddle
(Y page 167).
The automatic transmission shifts to rec-
ommended gear ;.

Z
170 Refuelling

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
Driving and parking

shop immediately.

The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.

is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.
The transmission no X Stop.
longer changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Switch off the engine.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is
selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop immediately.

Refuelling If you or others come into contact with fuel,

observe the following:
Important safety notes
RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin
G WARNING with water and soap immediately.
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor-
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- oughly with clean water immediately. Seek
sion. immediate medical attention.
You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medi-
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine cal attention. Do not induce vomiting.
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before RChange any clothing that has come into
refuelling. contact with fuel immediately.

G WARNING G WARNING
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health. Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and
There is a danger of injury. thereby ignite fuel vapours. There is a risk of
Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact fire and explosion.
with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel Always touch the vehicle body before opening
vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of chil- the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
dren. nozzle. This discharges any electrostatic
charge that may have built up.

G WARNING
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
 Refuelling 171

If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash Refuelling

point of this fuel mixture is lower than that of
pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running, Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
components in the exhaust system may over-
heat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire.

Driving and parking

Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol to
diesel fuel.

! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a

diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel
vehicles with a petrol engine. Do not switch
on the ignition if you accidentally refuel
with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will
enter the fuel system. Even small amounts
of the wrong fuel could result in damage to : To open the fuel filler flap
the fuel system and the engine. The repair ; To insert the fuel filler cap
costs are high. Notify a qualified specialist = Tyre pressure table
workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel
? Fuel type to be refuelled
lines drained completely.
The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto-
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
matically when you open or close the vehicle
fuel system. with the key or using KEYLESS-GO.
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted The position of the fuel filler cap 8 is dis-
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the played in the instrument cluster. The arrow
paintwork. next to the filling pump indicates the side of
! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel the vehicle.
can. The fuel lines and/or the diesel injec-
tion system could otherwise be blocked by Opening
particles from the fuel can. X Switch off the engine.
Do not get into the vehicle again during the X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
refuelling process. Otherwise, electrostatic X KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.
charge could build up again. This corresponds to key position 0: "key
If you overfill the fuel tank, some fuel may removed".
spray out when you remove the fuel pump The driver's door can be closed again.
nozzle. X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
For further information on fuel and fuel quality arrow :.
(Y page 382). The fuel filler flap opens slightly.
X Open the fuel filler flap fully.
X Turn the fuel filler flap anti-clockwise and
remove it.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder
bracket on the inside of filler flap ;.

Z
172 Refuelling

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel

pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place
and refuel.
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
Driving and parking

i Do not add any more fuel after the pump

stops filling for the first time. Otherwise,
fuel may leak out.

Closing
X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
X Close the fuel filler flap.

i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the

vehicle.
 Refuelling 173

Problems with the fuel and fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Fuel is leaking from the The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
vehicle.

Driving and parking

G WARNING
There is a risk of fire or explosion.
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock immediately and
remove it (Y page 155).
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does not The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run com-
start. pletely dry.
X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5 litres of diesel.
X Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds
(Y page 155).
X Start the engine continuously for a maximum of ten seconds
until it runs smoothly.
If the engine does not start:
X Turn the ignition on again a maximum of ten seconds
(Y page 155).
X Start the engine again continuously for a maximum of ten sec-
onds until it runs smoothly.
If the engine does not start after three attempts:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap can- The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
not be opened. or
The key battery is discharged.
X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 81).
or
X Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element
(Y page 82).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jam-
med.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
174 Parking

Parking To ensure that the vehicle is secured against

rolling away unintentionally:
Important safety notes Rthe parking brake must be applied.
G WARNING Ron vehicles with manual transmission,
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or engage first gear or reverse gear.
Driving and parking

twigs may ignite if they come into contact with Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust the transmission must be in position P and
gas flow. There is a risk of fire. the key must be removed from the ignition
Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate- lock.
rial can come into contact with hot vehicle Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front
components. In particular, do not park on dry wheels must be turned towards the kerb.
grassland or harvested grain fields.

G WARNING Switching off the engine

If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
Important safety notes
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, G WARNING
for example, the power steering and the brake
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
boosting effect. You will require considerably
tral position N when you switch off the engine.
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of
of an accident.
an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
G WARNING cle from rolling away by applying the parking
If you leave children unattended in the vehi- brake.
cle, they may be able to set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Vehicles with manual transmission
Rrelease the parking brake
Rshift the automatic transmission out of park
X Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R.
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
position P or shift manual transmission into
neutral lock and remove it.
Rstart the engine
The immobiliser is activated.
X Firmly depress the parking brake.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury. Vehicles with automatic transmission
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key X Firmly depress the parking brake.
with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave X Shift the transmission to position P.
children unattended in the vehicle.
Using the key
! Always secure the vehicle correctly X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle lock and remove it.
or its drivetrain could be damaged. The immobiliser is activated.
i The key can only be removed if the trans-
mission is in position P.
 Parking 175

Using KEYLESS-GO The brake lights do not light up when you

XPress the Start/Stop button (Y page 155). brake the vehicle with the parking brake.
The engine stops and all the indicator
lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
i When the driver's door is closed, this cor-

Driving and parking

responds to key position 1. When the driv-
er's door is open, this corresponds to key
position 0: "key removed".
i The engine can be switched off while the
vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding
the Start/Stop button for about three sec-
onds. This function operates independently
of the ECO start/stop automatic engine X To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly.
switch-off function. The J indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up if the engine is running.
X To release: depress the brake pedal and
Parking brake
keep it depressed.
G WARNING X Pull release handle :.
If you must brake the vehicle with the parking The J indicator lamp in the instrument
brake, the braking distance is considerably cluster goes out.
longer and the wheels could lock. This increa-
ses the risk of skidding and an accident.
Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi- Parking up the vehicle
cle when the service brake is faulty. Do not
If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer
apply the parking brake too firmly. If the
than four weeks, the battery may be damaged
wheels lock, release the parking brake until
by exhaustive discharging.
the wheels begin turning again.
X Disconnect the battery or connect it to a

G WARNING trickle charger.

If you leave children unattended in the vehi- i You can obtain information about trickle
cle, they could set the vehicle in motion by, chargers from a qualified specialist work-
for example: shop.
Rreleasing the parking brake If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer
than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer dam-
Rshifting an automatic transmission out of
age as a result of lack of use.
parking position P
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and
Rshifting a manual transmission into neutral
seek advice.
Rstarting the engine

They could also operate vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key
with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave
children unattended in the vehicle.

Z
176 Driving tips

Driving tips In addition to driving style, the consumption

is affected by many other factors, such as:
General driving tips Rload
Important safety notes Rtyre pressure
Rcold start
Driving and parking

G WARNING
Rchoice of route
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
Rthe use of electrical consumers
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, These factors are not included in the ECO dis-
for example, the power steering and the brake play.
boosting effect. You will require considerably The evaluation of your driving style takes the
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk following three categories into consideration:
of an accident. RAcceleration (evaluation of all accelera-
Do not switch off the ignition while driving. tion processes):
- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,
especially at higher speeds
ECO display - The bar empties: sporty acceleration
The ECO display provides feedback on how RConstant (assessment of driving behav-
economical your driving characteristics are. iour at all times):
The ECO display assists you in achieving the - The bar fills up: constant speed and
most economical driving style for the selec- avoidance of unnecessary acceleration
ted settings and prevailing conditions. Con- and deceleration
sumption can be significantly influenced by - The bar empties: fluctuations in speed
your driving style.
RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration
processes):
- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving,
keeping your distance and early release
of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast
without use of the brakes.
- The bar empties: frequent braking

Example: ECO display i An economical driving style involves driv-

The ECO display consists of three bars: ing at a moderate engine speed.
RAcceleration To achieve a higher value in the categories
RConstant Acceleration and Constant:
Robserve the gearshift recommendation.
RCoasting
Rdrive the vehicle in drive program E (vehi-
The percentage count is the mean value of the
three bar values. The three bars and the mean cles with automatic transmission).
value begin at the value of 50%. A higher per- i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g.
centage count indicates a more economical on the motorway, only the bar for Con‐
driving style. stant will change.
The ECO display does not indicate the actual i The ECO display summarises the driving
fuel consumption and a fixed percentage
characteristics from the start of the journey
count in the ECO display does not indicate a
to its completion. Therefore, there are
fixed consumption figure.
 Driving tips 177

dynamic changes in the bars at the start of Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do
a journey. During a prolonged driving time, not simultaneously depress both the brake
these changes are smaller. For more pedal and the accelerator pedal while driving.
dynamic changes, perform a manual reset.
For further information on the ECO display, ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly

Driving and parking

see (Y page 242). results in excessive and premature wear to
the brake pads.
If heavy demands are made on the brakes, do
Braking not park the vehicle immediately. Drive on for
a short while. This allows the airflow to cool
Important safety notes the brakes more quickly.
G WARNING If the brakes have been used only moderately,
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in you should occasionally test their effective-
an attempt to increase the engine's braking ness. To do this, brake more firmly from a
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. higher speed. This improves the grip of the
This increases the risk of skidding and having brakes.
an accident.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak- Wet road surfaces
ing on a slippery road surface. If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
without braking, there may be a delayed reac-
Downhill gradients tion from the brakes when braking for the first
time. This may also occur after the vehicle has
Change into a lower gear in good time on long been washed.
and steep downhill gradients.
You have to depress the brake pedal more
Take particular note of this when driving a firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the
laden vehicle and when towing a trailer. vehicle in front.
i This also applies if you have activated After driving on a wet road or having the vehi-
cruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or DIS- cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten-
TRONIC PLUS. tion to the traffic conditions. This will warm
This will use the braking effect of the engine, up the brake discs, thereby drying them more
so less braking will be required to maintain quickly and protecting them against corro-
vehicle speed. This relieves the load on the sion.
brake system and prevents the brakes from
overheating and wearing too quickly. Limited braking performance on salt-
treated roads
Heavy and light loads If you drive on salt-treated roads, a layer of
salt may form on the brake discs and pads.
G WARNING This can increase the braking distance con-
The braking system can overheat if you leave siderably.
your foot on the brake pedal while driving.
This increases the braking distance and could
even cause the braking system to fail. There
is a risk of an accident.

Z
178 Driving tips

RBrake occasionally to remove any possible In order to prevent corrosion and a reduction
salt residue. Ensure that you do not endan- in the braking power of the parking brake,
ger other road users when doing so. observe the following:
RCarefully depress the brake pedal at the RGently depress the parking brake from time
end of the journey and when starting the to time before beginning the journey.
Driving and parking

next journey. RDrive for approximately 100 mat a maxi-

RMaintain a much greater distance to the mum speed of 20 km/h.
vehicle in front.

New brake pads/linings Driving on wet roads

New brake pads/brake pads and discs that Aquaplaning
have been replaced only achieve optimum
braking effect after several hundred kilome- If water has accumulated to a certain depth
tres of driving. Compensate for the reduced on the road surface, there is a danger of aqua-
braking effect by applying greater force to the planing occurring, even if:
brake pedal. Ryou are driving at low speeds
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- Rthe tyres have adequate tread depth
mends that you only have brake pads/linings For this reason, do not drive in tyre ruts and
fitted to your vehicle which have been brake carefully.
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or
which correspond to an equivalent quality Driving on flooded roads
standard. Brake pads/linings which have not
been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or If you have to drive on stretches of road on
which are not of an equivalent quality could which water has collected, please bear in
affect your vehicle's operating safety. mind that:
Rthe maximum permissible fording depth in
Parking brake still water is 30 cm
Ryou should drive no faster than walking
G WARNING
pace
If you must brake the vehicle with the parking
brake, the braking distance is considerably ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in
longer and the wheels could lock. This increa- front or in the opposite direction create
ses the risk of skidding and an accident. waves. This may cause the maximum per-
Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi- missible water depth to be exceeded.
cle when the service brake is faulty. Do not These notes must be observed under all
apply the parking brake too firmly. If the circumstances. You could otherwise dam-
wheels lock, release the parking brake until age the engine, the electronics or the trans-
the wheels begin turning again. mission.

If you brake the vehicle using the parking Off-road fording

brake, the brake lamps do not light up.
If you drive on wet roads or dirt-covered sur-
! Under no circumstances should you
faces, road salt and/or dirt could get into the accelerate before entering the water. The
parking brake. bow wave could cause water to enter and
damage the engine and neighbouring
assemblies.
 Driving tips 179

! Do not open any of the vehicle's doors such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
while fording. Otherwise, water could get vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
into the vehicle interior and damage the becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of
vehicle's electronics and interior equip- fatal injury.
ment. If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating

Driving and parking

REstablish how deep the water is and the running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
characteristics of the body of water before around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
fording. ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open
RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand a window on the side of the vehicle that is not
steering wheel gearshift paddle. facing into the wind.
RAvoid high engine speeds.
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
REnter and exit the water at a flat place and
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
at a steady walking pace. Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"
RDrive slowly and at a constant speed
section (Y page 360).
through the water.
RDo not stop. Driving with summer tyres
RWater offers a high degree of resistance,
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"
the ground is slippery and, in some cases,
section (Y page 360).
unstable. Therefore, it is difficult and dan-
gerous to pull away in the water.
Slippery road surfaces
REnsure that a bow wave does not form as
you drive. G WARNING
RClean any mud from the tyre tread after If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
fording. an attempt to increase the engine's braking
RApply the brakes to dry them after fording. effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
Always observe the fording depth values This increases the risk of skidding and having
(Y page 391). an accident.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery road surface.
Winter driving
You should drive particularly carefully on slip-
Important safety notes pery road surfaces. Avoid sudden accelera-
tion, steering and braking manoeuvres.
G WARNING
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
stopped when moving at low speed:
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. X Vehicles with manual transmission:
This increases the risk of skidding and having shift to neutral.
an accident. X Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Do not shift down for additional engine brak- shift the transmission to position N.
ing on a slippery road surface. X Try to bring the vehicle under control by
using corrective steering.
G DANGER
i For more information on driving with
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
snow chains, see (Y page 361).
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases

Z
180 Driving tips

The outside temperature indicator is not Drive carefully. Have vehicle damage rectified
designed to serve as an ice-warning device immediately at a qualified specialist work-
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. shop.
Changes in the outside temperature are dis- Do not shift into transmission position N
played after a short delay. when driving off-road. You could lose control
Driving and parking

Indicated temperatures just above the freez- of the vehicle if you attempt to brake the
ing point do not guarantee that the road sur- vehicle using the service brake. If the gradient
face is free of ice. The road may still be icy, is too steep for your vehicle, back up in
especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The reverse gear.
vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your
driving style. Always adapt your driving style General notes
and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing
weather conditions. H Environmental note
You should pay special attention to road con- Protection of the environment is of primary
ditions when temperatures are around the importance. Treat nature with respect.
freezing point. Observe all prohibiting signs.

Read this section before driving your vehicle

Off-road driving off-road. Practise by travelling over more gen-
tle off-road terrain first.
Important safety notes Off-road driving is only possible with the Off-
Road Engineering package (Y page 227).
G WARNING
The following driving systems are specially
If you drive up a steep incline at an angle or
adapted to off-road driving:
turn on a steep incline, the vehicle could slip
sideways, tip and overturn. There is a risk of ROff-road drive program (Y page 227)
an accident. ROff-road ABS (Y page 69)
When driving up an incline, drive into the line ROff-road 4ETS (Y page 71)
of fall (upwards or downwards in a straight ROff-road ESP®(Y page 73)
line) and do not turn. RDSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)

When driving off-road, substances such as (Y page 226)

sand, mud and water or water mixed with oil Observe the following notes:
may get into the brakes. This may lead to a RStop your vehicle and, if necessary, select
reduction in braking performance or total the off-road drive program (Y page 227)
brake failure as a result of increased wear. before driving off-road.
The braking characteristics will vary depend- RTo avoid damaging the vehicle, make sure
ing on the substances that get into the there is always sufficient ground clearance.
brakes. Clean the brakes after driving off- RCheck that items of luggage and loads are
road. If you notice grinding noises or a reduc-
stowed safely and are well secured
tion in braking performance, have the brake
(Y page 313).
system checked at a qualified specialist work-
RAlways keep the engine running and in gear
shop immediately. Adapt your driving style to
the altered braking characteristics. when driving on a downhill gradient. Acti-
vate DSR (Y page 226).
Driving off-road increases the possibility of
RDrive slowly and evenly, if necessary at
damage to the vehicle, which may cause
assemblies or systems to fail. Adapt your walking pace.
driving style to the conditions of the terrain.
 Driving tips 181

REnsure that the wheels are in contact with X Clean the front and rear licence plates.
the ground at all times. X Clean the wheels/tyres with a water jet and
RDrive with extreme care on unknown off- remove any foreign objects.
road routes where visibility is poor. For X Clean the wheels, wheel arches and the
safety reasons, get out of the vehicle first vehicle underside with a water jet; check

Driving and parking

and survey the off-road route. for any foreign objects and damage.
RCheck the depth of water before fording X Check whether twigs or other parts of
rivers and streams. plants have become trapped. These
RLook out for obstacles such as rocks, holes, increase the risk of fire and can damage
tree stumps and furrows. fuel pipes, brake hoses or the rubber bel-
RAlways keep the side windows and the pan- lows of the axle joints and propeller shafts.
orama sliding sunroof closed during the X After the trip, examine without fail the
journey. entire undercarriage, wheels, tyres, brakes,
RDo not stray from marked routes or paths. bodywork structure, steering, chassis and
exhaust system for damage.
i Information about retrofitting special all-
X After driving in sand, mud, gravel, water or
terrain tyres is available from any qualified
similar dirty conditions, have the following
specialist workshop.
checked and cleaned:
Rbrake discs
Checklist before driving off-road
Rwheels
X Engine oil level: check the engine oil and Rbrake pads
top it up if necessary.
Raxle joints
X Tyre-change tool kit: check that the jack
X If you detect strong vibrations after driving
is working and make sure you have the
wheelbrace, a robust tow cable and a fold- off-road, check for foreign objects in the
ing spade in the vehicle. wheels and drive train and remove them if
necessary. Foreign objects can disturb the
X Wheels and tyres: check the tyre tread
balance and cause vibrations.
depth and tyre pressure.
X Check for damage and remove any foreign
Driving on sand
objects, e.g. small stones, from the
wheels/tyres. Observe the following rules when driving on
X Replace any missing valve caps. sand:
X Replace dented or damaged wheels. RUse the left-hand steering wheel gearshift
paddle to shift to a lower gear appropriate
Checklist after driving off-road to the terrain.
RDrive quickly to overcome the rolling resist-
Driving over rough terrain places greater ance. Otherwise, the vehicle could dig itself
demands on your vehicle than driving on nor- into the sand.
mal roads. After driving off-road, check the
RDrive in the tracks of other vehicles if pos-
vehicle. This allows you to detect damage
promptly and reduce the risk of an accident sible. Make sure that:
to yourself and other road users. - the tyre ruts are not too deep
- the sand is firm enough
X Deactivate DSR (Y page 226).
- your vehicle has sufficient ground clear-
X Clean the headlamps and rear lights and
check for damage. ance

Z
182 Driving tips

Tyre ruts and gravel roads Travelling uphill

Observe the following rules when driving Approach/departure angle
along ruts in off-road terrain or on roads with
loose gravel: G WARNING
If you drive up a steep incline at an angle or
Driving and parking

! Check that the ruts are not too deep and

that your vehicle has sufficient clearance. turn on a steep incline, the vehicle could slip
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged sideways, tip and overturn. There is a risk of
or bottom out and get stuck. an accident.
RSelect
When driving up an incline, drive into the line
the off-road drive program
of fall (upwards or downwards in a straight
(Y page 227).
line) and do not turn.
RAvoid high engine speeds.
RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand RObserve the warnings for off-road driving
steering wheel gearshift paddle. (Y page 180).
RDrive slowly. RFollow the line of fall when driving on slopes
RWhere ruts are too deep, drive with the and steep inclines.
wheels on one side on the middle section RBefore driving on extreme uphill and down-
of turf if possible. hill gradients, select the off-road drive pro-
gram (Y page 227).
Driving over obstacles RDrive slowly.
RAccelerate gently and make sure that the
! Obstacles could damage the floor of the
vehicle or components of the chassis. Ask wheels are gripping.
passengers for guidance when driving over RAvoid high engine speeds, except when

large obstacles. Any damage to the vehicle driving on sandy and muddy routes with
always increases the risk of an accident. high driving resistance.
RUse the left-hand steering wheel gearshift
Observe the following rules when driving over
tree stumps, large stones and other obsta- paddle to shift to a lower gear appropriate
cles: to the gradient.
RBefore tackling steep downhill gradients,
RActivate the off-road program
(Y page 227). use the left-hand steering wheel gearshift
RAvoid high engine speeds.
paddle to shift to a lower gear.
RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand i Hill start assist will aid you when pulling
steering wheel gearshift paddle. away on a hill. For further information about
RDrive very slowly. hill start assist, see (Y page 158).
RTry to drive straight over the centre of Do not shift into transmission position N
obstacles: front wheel first, then rear when driving off-road. You could lose control
wheel. of the vehicle if you attempt to brake the
vehicle using the service brake. If the gradient
is too steep for your vehicle, back up in
reverse gear.
Always observe the approach/departure
angle values (Y page 391).
 Driving systems 183

Maximum gradient-climbing capability Driving systems

Always observe the maximum gradient climb- Cruise control
ing ability values (Y page 391).
Important safety notes
Hilltops

Driving and parking

Cruise control maintains a constant road
When driving up an uphill gradient, slightly speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
reduce pressure on the accelerator immedi- to avoid exceeding the set speed. You must
ately before reaching the brow of the hill. select a low gear in good time on long and
Make use of the vehicle's own impetus to steep downhill gradients, especially if the
travel over the brow. vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By doing
This style of driving prevents: so, you will make use of the braking effect of
the engine. This relieves the load on the brake
Rthe vehicle from lifting off the ground on the
system and prevents the brakes from over-
brow of a hill heating and wearing too quickly.
Rthe vehicle from travelling too quickly down
Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-
the other side. ditions make it appropriate to maintain a
steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
Driving downhill store any road speed above 30 km/h.
RDrive slowly. If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise
RDo not drive at an angle down steep control can neither reduce the risk of an acci-
inclines. Steer into the line of fall and drive dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruise
with the front wheels aligned straight. Oth- control cannot take into account road,
erwise, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip weather or traffic conditions. Cruise control
and overturn. is only an aid. You are responsible for the dis-
RBefore tackling steep downhill gradients,
tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,
for braking in good time, and for staying in the
use the left-hand steering wheel gearshift
lane.
paddle to shift to a lower gear.
RActivate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brake
Do not use cruise control:
gently. When doing so, make sure that the Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
vehicle is facing in the direction of the line allow you to maintain a constant speed
of fall. (e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads)
RCheck that the brakes are working normally Ron smooth or slippery roads. Braking or
after a long downhill stretch. accelerating can cause the drive wheels to
lose traction and the vehicle could then
i Off-road ABS is activated when the off- skid
road drive program is selected. Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
At speeds below 30 km/h the front wheels heavy rain or snow
lock cyclically during braking. The digging-
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
in effect achieved in the process reduces
driver of the speed stored.
the stopping distance when driving off-
road. The steerability of the vehicle is con-
siderably reduced if the wheels lock. Cruise control lever
You can operate cruise control and variable
SPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever.

Z
184 Driving systems

The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control Storing and maintaining the current
lever indicates which system you have selec- speed
ted:
You can store the current speed if you are
RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control is driving faster than 30 km/h.
selected. X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired
Driving and parking

RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEED-

speed.
TRONIC is selected. X Briefly press the cruise control lever
up : or down ?.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle
automatically maintains the speed.
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
stored speed on downhill gradients by
: To activate or increase speed automatically braking the vehicle.
; LIM indicator lamp
i Vehicles with manual transmission:
= To activate at the current speed/last
Ralways drive at adequate, but not exces-
stored speed
? To activate or reduce speed
sive, engine speeds.
Rchange gear in good time.
A To switch between cruise control and var-
Rif possible, do not change down several
iable SPEEDTRONIC
B To deactivate cruise control gears at a time.

When you activate cruise control, the stored Storing the current speed and calling up
speed is shown in the multifunction display the last stored speed
for five seconds. Vehicles with the 4-button
multifunction steering wheel: the stored G WARNING
speed is then permanently displayed in the If you call up a stored speed and this is dif-
status indicator together with the ¯ sym- ferent from the current speed, the vehicle
bol. Vehicles with the 12-button multifunc- accelerates or brakes. If you do not know
tion steering wheel: the segments from the what the stored speed is, the vehicle may
stored speed up to the maximum speed light accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a
up in the multifunction display. risk of an accident.
Take the traffic conditions into account
Selecting cruise control before calling up the stored speed. If you do
X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is off. not know what the stored speed is, store the
desired speed again.
If it is off, cruise control is already selected.
If it is not, press the cruise control lever in
the direction of arrow A.
LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control
lever goes out. Cruise control is selected.
 Driving systems 185

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards Deactivating cruise control
you =.
There are several ways to deactivate cruise
X Remove your foot from the accelerator control:
pedal.
The first time cruise control is activated, it
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
wards B.

Driving and parking

stores the current speed or regulates the
speed of the vehicle to the previously or
stored speed. X Brake
or
Setting a speed X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment direction of arrow A.
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM
the set speed. indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
lights up.
higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until Ryou depress the parking brake.
the desired speed is reached. Ryou are driving at less than 30 km/h.
X Release the cruise control lever. RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®.
The new speed is stored. Ryou shift into neutral in a vehicle with man-
X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h incre- ual transmission while driving or depress
ments: briefly press the cruise control the clutch pedal for longer than six sec-
lever up : or down ? to the pressure onds.
point. Ron vehicles with manual transmission, you
The last stored speed increases or decrea- shift to a gear that is too high, and as a
ses in 1 km/h increments. result the engine speed is too low.
X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,
increments: press the cruise control lever you shift into position N while driving.
briefly up : or down ? beyond the pres- If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear
sure point. a warning tone. You will see the Cruise
The last stored speed increases or decrea- control off message in the multifunction
ses in 10 km/h increments. display for approximately five seconds.
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you i The last speed stored is cleared when you
depress the accelerator pedal. For exam- switch off the engine.
ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake,
cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed
to the last speed stored after you have fin- SPEEDTRONIC
ished overtaking.
Important safety notes
SPEEDTRONIC brakes automatically so that
you do not exceed the set speed. You must
select a low gear in good time on long and
steep downhill gradients, especially if the
vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By doing
so, you will make use of the braking effect of

Z
186 Driving systems

the engine. This relieves the load on the brake

system and prevents the brakes from over-
heating and wearing too quickly. If you need
additional braking, depress the brake pedal
repeatedly rather than continuously.
Driving and parking

If you fail to adapt your driving style, SPEED-

TRONIC can neither reduce the risk of an
accident nor override the laws of physics.
SPEEDTRONIC cannot take into account
road, weather or traffic conditions. SPEED-
TRONIC is only an aid. You are responsible for
: To store the current speed or a higher
the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
speed
speed, for braking in good time, and for stay-
ing in the lane. ; LIM indicator lamp
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new = To store the current speed and call up the
driver of the speed stored. last stored speed
You can set a variable or permanent limit ? To store the current speed or a lower
speed: speed
A To switch between cruise control and var-
Rvariable for speed limits, e.g. in built-up
iable SPEEDTRONIC
areas
B To deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC
Rpermanent for long-term speed restric-
tions, e.g. when driving with winter tyres Selecting variable SPEEDTRONIC
fitted (Y page 187) X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is on.
i The speed indicated in the speedometer If it is on, variable SPEEDTRONIC is already
may differ slightly from the limit speed selected.
stored. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in
the direction of arrow A.
Variable SPEEDTRONIC LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control
lever lights up. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is
General notes
selected.
With the cruise control lever, you can operate
cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS and vari- Storing the current speed
able SPEEDTRONIC. You can use the cruise control lever to limit
The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while
lever indicates which system you have selec- the engine is running.
ted: X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the
RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control or pressure point up : or down ?.
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. The current speed is stored. For five sec-
RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEED- onds, the multifunction display shows the
TRONIC is selected. stored speed, e.g. Limit 100 km/h.
You can use the cruise control lever to limit Vehicles with the 4-button multifunction
the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while steering wheel: the stored speed is perma-
the engine is running. nently displayed in the status indicator, e.g.
LIM 100 km/h.
 Driving systems 187

Vehicles with a 12-button multifunction Deactivating variable SPEEDTRONIC

steering wheel: on the speedometer, the It is not possible to deactivate variable
segments from the start of the scale up to SPEEDTRONIC by braking.
the stored speed are lit up.
There are several ways to deactivate variable
Storing the current speed and calling up SPEEDTRONIC:

Driving and parking

the last stored speed X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
G WARNING wards B.
If you call up the stored speed and it is lower or
than the current speed, the vehicle deceler- X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the
ates. If you do not know the stored speed, the direction of arrow A.
vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control
is a risk of an accident. lever goes out. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- deactivated.
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you Cruise control is selected.
do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is automatically
deactivated if:
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards Ryou depress the accelerator pedal beyond
you =. the pressure point (kickdown), but only if
your current speed does not differ by more
Making adjustments in 1 km/h incre- than 20 km/h from the stored speed. You
ments will hear a warning tone if this is the case.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the Ron vehicles with manual transmission, if
pressure point, up : for a higher speed or you shift to a higher gear and as a result,
down ? for a lower speed. the engine speed is too low.
or
i The last speed stored is cleared when you
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed to the
switch off the engine.
pressure point until the desired speed is
set. Press the cruise control lever up : for Permanent SPEEDTRONIC
a higher speed or down ? for a lower You can use the on-board computer to limit
speed. the speed permanently to a value between
160 km/h(e.g. for driving on winter tyres) and
Making adjustments in 10 km/h incre- the maximum speed (Y page 253).
ments Shortly before the stored speed is reached, it
X Briefly press the cruise control lever appears in the multifunction display.
beyond the pressure point, up : for a Permanent SPEEDTRONIC remains active,
higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. even if variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated.
or You cannot exceed the stored limit speed,
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed even if you depress the accelerator pedal
beyond the pressure point until the desired beyond the pressure point (kickdown).
speed is set. Press the cruise control lever
up : for a higher speed or down ? for a
lower speed.

Z
188 Driving systems

DISTRONIC PLUS G WARNING

DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up
Important safety notes
to 40% of the maximum braking force. If this
DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS
automatically helps you maintain the dis- warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk
Driving and parking

tance to the vehicle detected in front. DIS- of an accident.

TRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and
the set speed is not exceeded. try to take evasive action.
You must select a low gear in good time on
long and steep downhill gradients, especially ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By is activated, the vehicle brakes automati-
doing so, you will make use of the braking cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-
effect of the engine. This relieves the load on age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC
the brake system and prevents the brakes PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-
from overheating and wearing too quickly. ing or other similar situations:
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a slower-moving Rwhen towing the vehicle
vehicle in front, your vehicle is braked in order Rin the car wash
to maintain the preset distance to the vehicle
in front. If you fail to adapt your driving style, DIS-
TRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of
G WARNING an accident nor override the laws of physics.
DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to: DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take road and
Rpeople
weather conditions or traffic conditions into
or animals
account. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You
Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-
are responsible for the distance to the vehicle
ped or parked vehicles in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
Roncoming and crossing traffic time, and for staying in the lane.
As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:
warnings nor intervene in such situations.
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
There is a risk of an accident.
allow you to maintain a constant speed
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- (e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads)
uation and be ready to brake.
Ron smooth or slippery roads. Braking or
accelerating can cause the drive wheels to
G WARNING
lose traction and the vehicle could then
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden- skid
tify other road users and complex traffic sit-
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
uations.
heavy rain or snow
In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or
brake the vehicle vehicles driving on a different line.
Rneither give a warning nor intervene In particular, the detection of obstacles can
Raccelerate unexpectedly be impaired in the case of:
There is a risk of an accident. Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensors
Continue to drive carefully and be ready to Rsnow or heavy rain
brake, in particular when warned to do so by
DISTRONIC PLUS.
 Driving systems 189

Rinterference by other radar sources

Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections,
for example, in multi-storey car parks
If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehi-
cle in front, it may unexpectedly accelerate to

Driving and parking

the speed stored.
This speed can:
Rbe too high for a filter lane or a slip road
Rbe so high in the right lane that you pass
vehicles driving on the left
: To store the current speed or a higher
Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass
speed
vehicles driving on the right
; To set the specified minimum distance
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
= LIM indicator lamp
driver of the speed stored.
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC ? To store the current speed and call up the
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise last stored speed
control in the speed range between A To store the current speed or a lower
30 km/h and 200 km/h. If a vehicle is driving speed
in front of you, it operates in the speed range B To switch between DISTRONIC PLUS and
between 0 km/h and 200 km/h. variable SPEEDTRONIC
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS on roads with C To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
steep gradients.
Selecting DISTRONIC PLUS
Cruise control lever X Check whether LIM indicator lamp = is off.
With the cruise control lever, you can operate If it is off, DISTRONIC PLUS is already selec-
DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEED- ted.
TRONIC. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in
The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control the direction of arrow B.
lever indicates which system you have selec- LIM indicator lamp = in the cruise control
ted: lever goes out. DISTRONIC PLUS is selec-
RLIM indicator lamp off: DISTRONIC PLUS ted.
is selected.
RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEED- Activating DISTRONIC PLUS, storing
TRONIC is selected. and maintaining the current speed
Activation conditions
To activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following
conditions must be fulfilled:
Rthe engine must be running. It may take up
to two minutes of driving before DIS-
TRONIC PLUS is ready for use.
Rthe parking brake must be released.
RESP® must be switched on, but not inter-
vening.
Z
190 Driving systems

RActive Parking Assist must not be activa- X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
ted. you ?, or press it up : or down A.
Rthe transmission must be in position D. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.
Rthe bonnet must be closed.
i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated at
Rthe driver's door must be closed when you
under 30 km/h if a vehicle in front has been
Driving and parking

shift from P to D or your seat belt must be detected. For this reason, it is helpful if you
fastened. have the DISTRONIC PLUS distance display
Rthe front-passenger door and the rear shown in the instrument cluster
doors must be closed. (Y page 248).
Rthe vehicle must not be skidding. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed
Activating while driving up : or down A until the desired speed
is set.
When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you
can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehi- i You can use the cruise control lever to set
cle in front has been detected and is shown the stored speed and the control on the
in the multifunction display. If the vehicle in cruise control lever to set the specified
front is no longer detected and displayed, minimum distance (Y page 192).
DISTRONIC PLUS switches off and you will
hear a tone. Pulling away
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards X If the vehicle in front pulls away: remove

you ?, or press it up : or down A. your foot from the brake pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed you ?.
up : or down A until the desired speed or
is set. X Accelerate briefly.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its
pedal. speed to that of the vehicle in front.
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired Driving
stored speed. If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise
i If you do not fully release the accelerator control.
pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS inactive
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle
message appears in the multifunction dis-
in front has slowed down, it brakes your vehi-
play. The set distance to a slower-moving
cle. In this way, the distance you have selec-
vehicle in front will then not be maintained.
ted is maintained.
You will be driving at the speed you deter-
mine by the position of the accelerator If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle
pedal. in front is driving faster, it accelerates your
vehicle, but only up to the speed you have
Activating when driving towards a sta- stored.
tionary vehicle
If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you
can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your
vehicle is stationary as well.
 Driving systems 191

Changing lanes
If you change to the overtaking lane, DIS-
TRONIC PLUS supports you if:
Ryou are driving faster than 60 km/h
RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the dis-

Driving and parking

tance to a vehicle in front
Ryou switch on the respective turn signal
RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger
of collision
If these conditions are met, your vehicle is
Example: roundabout
accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted
if changing lanes takes too long or if the dis- The current speed is maintained:
tance between your vehicle and the vehicle in Rapproximately ten seconds before the
front becomes too small. roundabout/T-junction and for approx-
i When you change lanes, DISTRONIC imately 1.5 seconds when driving on the
PLUS monitors the left lane for left-hand- roundabout
drive vehicles and the right lane for right- Rapproximately twelve seconds before

hand-drive vehicles. reaching a motorway exit and approx-

imately four seconds after the motorway
Vehicles with COMAND Online exit
i The following function is not operational Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back to
in all countries. the set speed you specified.
DISTRONIC PLUS uses additional information Stopping
from your navigation system so that it can
adapt to certain traffic situations. This is the G WARNING
case if, while following a vehicle, DISTRONIC When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked
PLUS is active and you: only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:
Rapproach or drive around a roundabout Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
Rapproach a T-junction the voltage supply.
Rturn off at a motorway exit RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated
with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-
Even if the vehicle in front leaves the detec-
cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.
tion range, DISTRONIC PLUS temporarily
Rthe electrical system in the engine com-
maintains the current driving speed and does
not accelerate. This is based on the current partment, the battery or the fuses have
map data in the navigation system. been tampered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected.
Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,
e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
There is a risk of an accident.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle
against rolling away.

Z
192 Driving systems

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS briefly up : or down ; beyond the pres-

(Y page 194). sure point.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle The last stored speed increases or decrea-
in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until ses in 10 km/h increments.
it is stationary.
i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you
Driving and parking

Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains depress the accelerator pedal. If you accel-
stationary and you do not need to depress the erate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS
brake. adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
i Depending on the specified minimum dis- speed stored after you have finished over-
tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill taking.
at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle
in front. The specified minimum distance is Storing the current speed or calling up
set using the control on the cruise control the stored speed
lever.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the you ?.
transmission is shifted automatically to posi- X Remove your foot from the accelerator
tion P if: pedal.
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first
seat belt is unfastened time it is activated, the current speed is
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise
matically switched off by the ECO start/ speed to the previously stored value.
stop function
Rthe bonnet is opened Setting the specified minimum distance
Ra system fault occurs
You can set the specified minimum distance
Rthe power supply is not sufficient for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
between one and two seconds. With this func-
Setting a speed tion, you can set the minimum distance that
DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can
higher speed or down A for a lower speed. see this distance in the multifunction display
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until (Y page 193).
the desired speed is reached.
i Make sure that you maintain a sufficient
X Release the cruise control lever.
distance to the vehicle in front and comply
The new speed is stored. DISTRONIC PLUS
with the minimum distance as required by
is activated and adjusts the vehicle's speed
law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in
to the new speed stored.
front if necessary.
X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h incre-
ments: briefly press the cruise control
lever up : or down ; to the pressure
point.
The last stored speed increases or decrea-
ses in 1 km/h increments.
X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h
increments: press the cruise control lever
 Driving systems 193

Displaying DISTRONIC PLUS in the mul-

tifunction display
General notes
In the assistance menu (Y page 247) of the

Driving and parking

on-board computer, you can select the assis-
tance display.
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-
vated
X Select the Assist. graphic function
X To increase: turn control = in direc- using the on-board computer
tion ;. (Y page 248).
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you
distance between your vehicle and the will see the following in the multifunction dis-
vehicle in front. play:
X To decrease: turn control = in direc-
tion :.
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front.

Displaying DISTRONIC PLUS in the

speedometer

: Vehicle in front, if detected

; Distance indicator: current distance to
the vehicle in front
= Specified minimum distance to the vehi-
cle in front; adjustable
? Own vehicle

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-

ted
Example: vehicles with automatic transmission
X Select the Assist. graphic function
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or using the on-board computer
two segments ; in the set speed range light (Y page 248).
up.
You will see the stored speed for approx-
i For design reasons, the speed displayed imately five seconds when you activate DIS-
in the speedometer may differ slightly from TRONIC PLUS. After this time, you will see the
the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS. following in the multifunction display while
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS is activated:
segments ; between speed of the vehicle in
front : and stored speed = light up.

Z
194 Driving systems

i The last speed stored remains stored until

you switch off the engine.
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva-
ted if:
Ryou apply the parking brake
Driving and parking

Ryou are driving slower than 25 km/h and

there is no vehicle in front, or if the vehicle
in front is no longer detected
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position
: Vehicle in front, if detected
Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards
; Specified minimum distance to the vehi-
cle in front; adjustable you in order to pull away and the front-
passenger door or one of the rear doors is
= Own vehicle
open
? DISTRONIC PLUS activated Rthe vehicle has skidded

If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS
hear a warning tone. You will see the DIS‐
TRONIC PLUS off message in the multifunc-
tion display for approximately five seconds.
If the vehicle has been stopped by DISTRONIC
PLUS and a fault occurs in the system, the
Brake immediately message appears in the
multifunction display. Depress the brake
pedal immediately so that the vehicle does
not roll away. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deac-
tivated and the message disappears.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivate DIS-
TRONIC PLUS: General notes
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- The following contains descriptions of certain
wards :. road and traffic conditions in which you must
or be particularly attentive. In such situations,
brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then
X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.
deactivated.
or
X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow =.
Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM
indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever
lights up.
When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you
will see the DISTRONIC PLUS off message
in the multifunction display for approximately
five seconds.
 Driving systems 195

Cornering, going into and coming out of a DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehi-
bend cle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle
will be too short.
Narrow vehicles

Driving and parking

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-
cles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle
may brake unexpectedly or late.
DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the
Vehicles which are not driving in the mid- vehicle in front on the edge of the carriage-
dle of their lane way, because of its narrow width. The dis-
tance to the vehicle in front will be too short.
Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles

which are not driving in the middle of their
lane. The distance to the vehicle in front will
be too short. DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-
cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the
Other vehicles changing lane detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals
an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC
PLUS will not brake for these.

Z
196 Driving systems

Crossing vehicles Important safety notes

G WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away
despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
Driving and parking

Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in

the voltage supply
Rthe HOLD function is deactivated by the
accelerator pedal being depressed, e.g. by
a vehicle occupant
Rthe electrical system in the engine com-
partment, the battery or the fuses are tam-
DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect pered with
vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activat- Rthe battery is disconnected
ing DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with
crossing traffic, for example, could cause There is a risk of an accident.
your vehicle to pull away unintentionally. Before leaving the vehicle, always deactivate
the HOLD function and secure the vehicle
from rolling away.
HOLD function
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
General notes is activated, the vehicle brakes automati-
cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the
age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC
following situations:
PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-
Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep ing or other similar situations:
slopes Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rwhen manoeuvring on steep slopes
Rin the car wash
Rwhen waiting in traffic
Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 197).
The vehicle is kept stationary without the
driver having to depress the brake pedal.
Activation conditions
The braking effect is cancelled and the HOLD
function is deactivated when you depress the You can activate the HOLD function if:
accelerator pedal to pull away. Rthe vehicle is stationary.
i Do not use the HOLD function when driv- Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto-
ing off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gra- matically switched off by the ECO start/
dients or on slippery or loose surfaces. The stop function.
HOLD function cannot hold the vehicle on Rthe driver's door is closed or if your seat
such surfaces. belt is fastened.
Rthe parking brake is released.
Rthe bonnet is closed.
Rthe selector lever is in position D, R or N on
vehicles with automatic transmission.
RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
 Driving systems 197

Activating the HOLD function Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's
seat belt is unfastened
X Make sure that the activation conditions
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
are met.
matically switched off by the ECO start/
X Depress the brake pedal.
stop function
X Quickly depress the brake pedal further

Driving and parking

Rthe bonnet is opened
until ë appears in the multifunction dis-
play. Brake immediately
The HOLD function is activated. You can X Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly
release the brake pedal. until the warning message in the multifunc-
tion display goes out. This deactivates the
i If depressing the brake pedal the first HOLD function.
time does not activate the HOLD function,
wait briefly and then try again. A horn will also sound at regular intervals if
the HOLD function is activated and you:
Deactivating the HOLD function Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's
door and take off your seat belt
The HOLD function is deactivated automati- Ropen the bonnet
cally if:
The sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact
Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatic
that the vehicle has been parked while the
transmission: only when the transmission HOLD function is still activated. If you attempt
is in position D or R. to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder.
Rthe transmission is in position P on vehicles The vehicle is not locked until the HOLD func-
with automatic transmission. tion is deactivated.
Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a
i If the engine has been switched off, it
certain amount of pressure until ë dis-
cannot be started again until the HOLD
appears from the multifunction display. function has been deactivated.
Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
If there is a fault in the system or power supply
When the HOLD function is activated, the while the HOLD function is activated, the
automatic transmission is shifted automati- Brake immediately message is shown in
cally to position P if: the multifunction display. Immediately
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's depress the brake firmly until the warning
seat belt is unfastened message in the multifunction display goes
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- out.
matically switched off by the ECO start/ On vehicles with automatic transmission, you
stop function can also shift into position P. This deactivates
Rthe bonnet is opened. the HOLD function.
Ra system fault occurs
Rthe power supply is not sufficient
PARKTRONIC
For vehicles with manual transmission, you
will see a warning message in the multifunc- Important safety notes
tion display if the HOLD function is activated
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with
and:
ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area
around your vehicle using six sensors in the
front bumper and four sensors in the rear
bumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually and
Z
198 Driving systems

audibly the distance between your vehicle Range of the sensors

and an object.
PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substi- General notes
tute for your attention to the immediate sur- PARKTRONIC does not take into account
roundings. The responsibility for safe obstacles located:
Driving and parking

manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Rbelow the detection range, e.g. persons,
Make sure that there are no persons, animals animals or objects
or objects in range while manoeuvring and Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhang-
parking. ing loads, tail sections or loading ramps of
! When parking, pay particular attention to goods vehicles
objects above or below the sensors, such The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and
as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARK- slush. Otherwise, they may not function cor-
TRONIC does not detect such objects when rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking
they are in the immediate vicinity of the care not to scratch or damage them
vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or (Y page 336).
the objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and
objects which absorb ultrasonic sources.
Ultrasonic sources, such as an automatic
car wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakes
or a pneumatic drill, could cause PARK-
TRONIC to malfunction.
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
uneven terrain.
PARKTRONIC is activated automatically if
you: Side view
Rswitch on the ignition
Rshift to position D, R or N on vehicles with
automatic transmission
Rrelease the parking brake

PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above

18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds.

Top view

Front sensors
Centre Approx. 100 cm
Corners Approx. 60 cm

: Example: sensors in the front bumper,

left-hand side
 Driving systems 199

Rear sensors The gear lever position or the transmission

position of the automatic transmission and
Centre Approx. 120 cm
the direction in which the vehicle is rolling
Corners Approx. 80 cm determine which warning display is active
when the engine is running.

Driving and parking

Minimum distance Manual transmission:
Centre Approx. 20 cm Gear lever posi- Warning display
Corners Approx. 15 cm tion
Forwards gear Front area activated
If there is an obstacle within this range, the or
relevant warning displays light up and a warn-
Neutral
ing tone sounds. If the distance falls below
the minimum, the distance may no longer be Reverse gear, or Rear and front areas
shown. the vehicle is rolling activated
backwards
Warning displays
The warning displays show the distance Automatic transmission:
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
Transmission Warning display
warning display for the front area is located
position
on the dashboard above the centre air vents.
The warning display for the rear area is loca- D Front area activated
ted on the roof lining in the rear compart-
ment. R, N or the vehicle Rear and front areas
is rolling back- activated
wards
P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicle

approaches an obstacle, depending on the
vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
From the:
Rsixthsegment onwards, you will hear an
intermittent warning tone for approx-
Warning display for the front area imately two seconds
: Segments on the left-hand side of the Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
vehicle warning tone for approximately two sec-
; Segments on the right-hand side of the onds. This indicates that you have now
vehicle reached the minimum distance.
= Segments showing operational readiness
The warning display for each side of the vehi-
cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg-
ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow
segments showing operational readiness =
light up.
Z
200 Driving systems

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
Driving and parking

: To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC
; Indicator lamp
If indicator lamp ; lights up, PARKTRONIC is
deactivated.
i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated
when you turn the key to position 2 in the
ignition lock.

Towing a trailer
! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow
hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC meas-
ures the minimum detection range to an
obstacle from the bumper, not the ball cou-
pling.
PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area
when you establish an electrical connection
between your vehicle and a trailer.
 Driving systems 201

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.
in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified

Driving and parking

warning displays are lit. specialist workshop.
You also hear a warning
tone for approximately
two seconds.
PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated after approx-
imately five seconds,
and the indicator lamp
in the PARKTRONIC
button lights up.
Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 336).
warning displays are lit. X
Switch the ignition back on.
PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated after approx- The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or
imately five seconds. ultrasound waves.
X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist ! If unavoidable, you should drive over

obstacles such as kerbs slowly and not at
Important safety notes a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking the wheels or tyres.
aid with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a
measure the road on both sides of the vehicle. substitute for your attention to the immediate
A suitable parking space is indicated by the surroundings. The responsibility for safe
parking symbol. Active steering intervention manoeuvring and parking remains with you.
can assist you during parking. You may also Make sure that there are no persons, animals
use PARKTRONIC (Y page 197). When PARK- or objects in range while manoeuvring and
TRONIC is switched off, Active Parking Assist parking.
is also unavailable. Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:
G WARNING Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
The vehicle will veer out when parking and can Rthat are on straight roads, not bends
take you onto sections of the oncoming lane. Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g.
As a result, you may collide with other road not on the pavement
users. There is a risk of an accident.
When parking, pay attention to other road
users. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel
the Active Parking Assist parking procedure.

Z
202 Driving systems

Parking tips: Active Parking Assist is switched on automat-

Ron narrow roads, drive as closely as possi- ically when driving forwards. The system is
ble past the parking space. operational at speeds of up to approximately
Rparking spaces that are littered, overgrown
35 km/h. While in operation, the system inde-
pendently locates and measures parking
or partially occupied by trailer drawbars
Driving and parking

spaces on both sides of the vehicle. When

might be identified incorrectly or not at all.
driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you will see
Rsnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
the parking symbol as a status indicator in the
space being measured inaccurately. instrument cluster. Active Parking Assist only
Rpay attention to the PARKTRONIC displays parking spaces on the front-
(Y page 199) warning messages during the passenger side as standard. Parking spaces
parking procedure. on the driver's side are displayed as soon as
Rat any time, you can intervene in the steer- the turn signal on the driver's side is activa-
ing procedure to correct it. Active Parking ted. To park on the driver's side, you must
Assist will then be cancelled. leave the driver's side turn signal switched
Rwhen transporting a load which protrudes on. This must remain switched on until you
from your vehicle, you should not use acknowledge the use of Active Parking Assist
Active Parking Assist. by pressing the a button on the multi-
Rwhen snow chains or an emergency spare function steering wheel.
wheel are fitted, you should not use Active When a parking space has been detected, an
Parking Assist here either. arrow towards the right or the left also
Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are appears.
always correct. This has a direct influence
on the parking characteristics of the vehi-
cle.

Detecting parking spaces

Objects located above the height range of
Active Parking Assist will not be detected Example: detected parking space
when the parking space is measured. These : Detected parking space on the left
are not taken into account when the parking
; Parking symbol
procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging
loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods = Detected parking space on the right
vehicles. In some circumstances, Active Park- Active Parking Assist will only detect parking
ing Assist may therefore guide you into the spaces:
parking space too early.
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
G WARNING Rthat are at least 1.5 m wide
If objects are located above the detection Rthat are at least 1.3 m longer than your
range, Active Parking Assist may start to steer vehicle
into the parking space too soon. As a result, A parking space is displayed while you are
you could cause a collision. There is a risk of driving past it, and until you are approx-
an accident. imately 15 m away from it.
If objects are located above the detection
range, stop the vehicle and switch Active
Parking Assist off.
 Driving systems 203

Parking X Release the multifunction steering wheel.

X Reverse the vehicle, being ready to brake
G WARNING at all times. When reversing, drive at a
Active Parking Assist merely aids you by inter- speed below 10 km/h. Otherwise, Active
vening actively in the steering. There is a risk Parking Assist will be cancelled.

Driving and parking

of accident if you do not apply the brakes
i In tight parking spaces, you will achieve
yourself.
the best parking results by backing up as
Always apply the brakes yourself when park- far as possible. When doing so, also
ing and manoeuvring. observe the PARKTRONIC messages.
i When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the
Active Parking Assist brakes automatically continuous warning tone, if not before.
during the parking process. You are respon- Manoeuvring may be required in tight park-
sible for braking in good time. ing spaces.
Active Parking Assist does not support you Vehicles with manual transmission: the Park
with parking spaces parallel to the direction Assist active Engage forward gear
of travel if: Observe surroundings message appears in
Rthe
the multifunction display.
parking space is on a kerb stone
Rthe
Vehicles with automatic transmission: the
system reads the parking space as
Park Assist active Select D Observe
being blocked, for example by foliage or
surroundings message appears in the mul-
grass paving blocks
tifunction display.
Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to
X Vehicles with manual transmission: while
manoeuvre into
the vehicle is stationary, shift to first gear.
Rthe parking space is bordered by an obsta-
cle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer Vehicles with automatic transmission:
select transmission position D while the
X Stop the vehicle when the parking symbol
vehicle is stationary.
shows the desired parking space in the Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
instrument cluster. the other direction.
X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to
The Park Assist active Accelerate
reverse gear. and brake Observe surroundings mes-
Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift sage appears in the multifunction display.
into position R. i You will achieve the best results by wait-
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: ing for the steering procedure to complete
% message appears in the multifunction before pulling away.
display.
X To cancel the procedure: press the
X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all
times.
% button on the multifunction steering
X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the
wheel or pull away.
continuous warning tone, if not before.
or
X To park using Active Parking Assist: Vehicles with manual transmission: the Park
press the a button on the multifunction Assist active Engage reverse gear
steering wheel. Observe surroundings message appears in
the multifunction display.
The Park Assist active Accelerate
and brake Observe surroundings mes- Vehicles with automatic transmission: the
sage appears in the multifunction display. Park Assist active Select R Observe

Z
204 Driving systems

surroundings message appears in the mul- starting position as it is manoeuvred into

tifunction display. the parking space.
X Additional transmission shifts may be nec- Ra manoeuvring distance of at least 1.0 m
essary. must be available.
As soon as the parking procedure is com- X Start the engine.
Driving and parking

plete, the Park Assist switched off mes- X Switch on the turn signal on the side facing
sage appears and a warning tone sounds. the street.
Active Parking Assist no longer supports you X Vehicles with manual transmission:
with steering interventions. When Active engage first or reverse gear.
Parking Assist is finished, you must steer Vehicles with automatic transmission:
again yourself. PARKTRONIC is still available. shift the transmission to position D or R.
X Manoeuvre if necessary. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
X Always observe the warning messages dis- % message appears in the multifunction
played by PARKTRONIC (Y page 199). display.
Parking tips: X To cancel the procedure: press the
% button on the multifunction steering
RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the
wheel or pull away.
parking space after parking is dependent
on various factors. These include the posi- or
tion and shape of the vehicles parked in X To exit a parking space using Active
front and behind it and the conditions of the Parking Assist: press the a button on
location. It may be the case that Active the multifunction steering wheel.
Parking Assist guides you too far into a The Park Assist active Accelerate
parking space, or not far enough into it. In and brake Observe surroundings mes-
some cases, it may also lead you across or sage appears in the multifunction display.
onto the kerb. If necessary, you should can- X Release the multifunction steering wheel.
cel the parking procedure with Active Park- X Reverse the vehicle or drive forwards, being
ing Assist. ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed
RYou can also preselect the forward gear. a maximum speed of approximately
The vehicle redirects and does not drive as 10 km/h when exiting a parking space.
far into the parking space. Should a gear be Otherwise, Active Parking Assist will be
changed too early, the parking procedure cancelled.
will be cancelled. A sensible parking posi- X Stop when PARKTRONIC sounds the con-
tion can no longer be achieved from this tinuous warning tone, if not before.
position.
X Vehicles with manual transmission:
shift to first or reverse gear as required
Exiting a parking space while the vehicle is stationary.
In order that Active Parking Assist can sup- Vehicles with automatic transmission:
port you when you exit the parking space: shift to position D or R as required while the
Rthe border of the parking space must be vehicle is stationary.
high enough at the front and the rear. A Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
kerb stone is too small, for example. the other direction. The Park Assist
Rthe border of the parking space must not active Accelerate and brake
be too wide, as the position of the vehicle Observe surroundings message appears
must not exceed an angle of 45° to the in the multifunction display.
 Driving systems 205

i You will achieve the best results by wait- Ryou are driving faster than 10 km/h
ing for the steering procedure to complete Ra wheel spins and ESP® intervenes or fails.
before pulling away. The ÷ warning lamp lights up in the
If you reverse after activation, the steering instrument cluster.
wheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi- A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol

Driving and parking

tion. disappears and the multifunction display
X Drive forwards or reverse the vehicle, being shows the Park Assist cancelled mes-
ready to brake at all times. sage.
X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the When Active Parking Assist is cancelled, you
continuous warning tone, if not before. must steer again yourself.
X Drive forwards and reverse as prompted by If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is
the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the
times if necessary. accelerator again.
Once you have exited the parking space com-
pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the Towing a trailer
straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and For vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the min-
the Park Assist switched off message imum length for parking spaces is slightly
appears in the multifunction display. You will increased.
then have to steer and merge into traffic on If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle,
your own. PARKTRONIC is still available. you should not use Active Parking Assist.
Once the electrical connection is established
Cancelling Active Parking Assist between your vehicle and the trailer, Active
You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any Parking Assist is no longer available. PARK-
time. TRONIC is deactivated for the rear area.
X Stop the movement of the multifunction
steering wheel or steer yourself. Reversing camera
Active Parking Assist will be cancelled at
once. The Park Assist cancelled mes- General notes
sage appears in the multifunction display.
or
X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the
centre console (Y page 200).
PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active
Parking Assist is immediately cancelled.
The Park Assist cancelled message
appears in the multifunction display.
Active Parking Assist is cancelled automati-
cally if:
Rthe electric parking brake is engaged : Reversing camera
Rtransmission position P is selected Reversing camera : is located in the handle
Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no
strip of the tailgate.
longer possible
Reversing camera : is an optical parking
and manoeuvring aid. It uses guide lines to

Z
206 Driving systems

show the area behind your vehicle in the Activating/deactivating the reversing
Audio/COMAND display. camera
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
mirror image, as in the rear-view mirror.
i The text of messages shown in the
Driving and parking

COMAND display depends on the language

setting. The following are examples of
reversing camera messages in the
COMAND display.

Important safety notes

The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not
a substitute for your attention to the imme- X To activate: make sure that the key is in
diate surroundings. The responsibility for safe position 2 in the ignition lock.
manoeuvring and parking remains with you. X Make sure that the "Activation by R gear"
Make sure that there are no persons, animals setting is active in COMAND Online, see the
or objects in range while manoeuvring and separate COMAND Online operating
parking. instructions.
Under the following circumstances, the X Engage reverse gear.
reversing camera will not function, or will The area behind the vehicle is shown with
function in a limited manner: guide lines in the COMAND display.
Rif the tailgate is open X To change the function mode for vehi-
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog cles with trailer tow hitch: using the
Rat night or in very dark places COMAND controller, select symbol : for
Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light the "Reverse parking" function or sym-
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED bol ; for "Coupling up a trailer" (see the
lighting (the display may flicker) separate COMAND Online operating
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,
instructions).
The symbol of the selected function is high-
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in
lighted.
winter
Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed To deactivate: the reversing camera deacti-
Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In
vates in vehicles with an automatic transmis-
sion if you shift the transmission to P or after
this case, have the camera position and
driving forwards a short distance.
setting checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Displays in the Audio/COMAND display
The field of vision and other functions of the
reversing camera may be restricted due to The reversing camera may show a distorted
additional accessories on the rear of the vehi- view of obstacles or show them incorrectly or
cle (e.g. licence plate holder, bicycle rack). not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the
reversing camera in the following locations:
Rvery close to the rear bumper
Runder the rear bumper
Rin the area immediately above the tailgate
handle
 Driving systems 207

! Objects not at ground level may appear to C Bumper

be further away than they actually are, e.g.: D Red guide line at a distance of approx-
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle imately 0.30 mfrom the rear of the vehicle
Rthe drawbar of a trailer The guide lines are shown when the trans-
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch mission is in position R.

Driving and parking

Rthe rear section of an HGV The distance specifications only apply to
Ra slanted post objects that are at ground level.
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bot-
tom-most guideline.

Additional display for vehicles with PARKTRONIC

: Front warning display
; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement
: White guide line without turning the steer- operational readiness indicator
ing wheel, vehicle width including the = Rear warning display
exterior mirrors (static)
Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: when PARK-
; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
TRONIC is operational (Y page 199), addi-
imately 4.0 m from the rear of the vehicle tional measurement operational readiness
= Red guide line for the vehicle width includ- indicator ; appears in the COMAND display.
ing the exterior mirrors, for current steer- If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are
ing wheel angle (dynamic) active or light up, warning displays : and
? Yellow lane marking the course the tyres = are also active or light up correspondingly
will take at the current steering wheel in the COMAND display.
angle (dynamic)
Reverse parking function
X Make sure that the reversing camera is
activated and the "Reverse parking" func-
tion is selected; see the separate operating
instructions for the audio system/
COMAND Online.
The lane and the guide lines are shown.

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle
B Vehicle centre axle (marker assistance)

Z
208 Driving systems

Reversing straight into a parking space Reverse perpendicular parking with the
without turning the steering wheel steering wheel at an angle
Driving and parking

: White guide line without turning the steer- Turning the steering wheel
ing wheel, vehicle width including the : Red guide line for the vehicle width includ-
exterior mirrors (static) ing the exterior mirrors, for current steer-
; Red guide line for the vehicle width includ- ing wheel angle (dynamic)
ing the exterior mirrors, for current steer- ; Parking space marking
ing wheel angle (dynamic)
X Make sure that the reversing camera is
= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
switched on (Y page 206).
imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle The lane and the guide lines are shown.
? Red guide line at a distance of approx-
X Drive past the parking space and bring the
imately 0.30 mfrom the rear of the vehicle
vehicle to a standstill.
X Make sure that the reversing camera is X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the
switched on (Y page 206). steering wheel in the direction of the park-
The lane and the guide lines are shown. ing space until yellow guide line : reaches
X With the help of white guide line :, check parking space marking ;.
whether the vehicle will fit into the parking X Keep the steering wheel in that position
space. and reverse carefully.
X Using white guide line : as a guide, care-
fully reverse until you reach the end posi-
tion.
Red guide line ? is then at the end of the
parking space. The vehicle is almost paral-
lel in the parking space.

Reversing with the steering wheel turned

: Red guide line for the vehicle width includ-
ing the exterior mirrors, for current steer-
ing wheel angle (dynamic)
 Driving systems 209

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly "Coupling up a trailer" function

in front of the parking space.
This function is only available on vehicles with
The white lane should be as close to parallel
a trailer tow hitch and COMAND Online.
with the parking space marking as possi-
ble.

Driving and parking

: Vehicle centre point on the yellow guide
line at a distance of approximately 1.0 m
Driving to the final position from the rear of the vehicle
: White guide line at current steering wheel ; Trailer drawbar
angle
= Ball coupling
; Parking space marking
This function is only available on vehicles with
X Turn the steering wheel to the centre posi-
a trailer tow hitch.
tion while the vehicle is stationary.
X Set the height of trailer drawbar ; so that
it is slightly higher than ball coupling =.
X Position the vehicle centrally in front of
trailer drawbar ;.

: Red guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 0.30 mfrom the rear of the vehicle
; White guide line without turning the steer-
ing wheel
= End of parking space : Ball coupling
X Reverse carefully until you have reached ; Red guide line at a distance of approx-
the end position. imately 0.30 m from the ball coupling
Red guide line : is then at end of parking = Trailer drawbar locating aid
space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in ? Trailer drawbar
the parking space. A Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer"
function

Z
210 Driving systems

X Select symbol A using the COMAND con- Rtop view and trailer view (vehicles with
troller, see COMAND Online. trailer tow hitch)
The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selec- Rtop view and images from the rear-facing
ted. The distance specifications now only mirror cameras (rear wheel view)
apply to objects that are at the same level Rtop view and images from the forward
Driving and parking

as the ball coupling. facing mirror cameras (front wheel view)

X Reverse carefully, making sure that trailer
i The top view and trailer view are available
drawbar locating aid = points approx-
for vehicles equipped with a trailer tow
imately in the direction of trailer draw-
hitch.
bar ?.
X Reverse carefully until trailer drawbar ?
When the function is active and you shift the
transmission from position D or R to N, you
reaches red guide line ;.
see the previous view in the COMAND dis-
X Couple up the trailer (Y page 228). play. The dynamic guide lines are hidden.
When you change between transmission
positions D and R, you see the previously
360° camera selected front or rear view.
General notes
Important safety notes
The 360° camera is a camera system that
consists of four cameras. The 360° camera is only an aid. It is not a
substitute for your attention to the immediate
The system evaluates images from the fol-
surroundings. The responsibility for safe
lowing cameras:
manoeuvring and parking remains with you.
RReversing camera Make sure that there are no persons, animals
RFront camera or objects in range while manoeuvring and
RTwo cameras in the exterior mirrors parking.
The cameras cover the immediate surround- The 360° camera may show a distorted view
ings of the vehicle. The system assists you, of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at
for instance when parking or at exits with all. It cannot show objects in the following
reduced visibility. areas:
Runder the front bumper
You can show pictures from the 360° camera
in full-screen mode or in seven different split- Rvery close to the front bumper
screen views on the COMAND display. A split- Rvery close to the rear bumper
screen view also includes a top view of the Runder the rear bumper
vehicle. This view is calculated from the data Rin close range above the handle on the boot
supplied by the installed cameras (virtual
lid
camera).
Rvery close to the exterior mirrors
The seven split-screen views are:
Rtop view and image from the reversing cam-
You are always responsible for safety, and
must always pay attention to your surround-
era (130° viewing angle)
ings when parking and manoeuvring. This
Rtop view and image from the front camera
applies to the areas behind, in front of and
(without displaying the maximum steering beside the vehicle. You could otherwise
wheel angle) endanger yourself and others.
Rtop view and enlarged rear view
Rtop view and enlarged front view
 Driving systems 211

The 360° camera will not function or will Rfull-screen view with image from the
function only in a limited manner: front camera
Rif the doors are open Rfull-screen view with image from the

Rif the exterior mirrors are folded in reversing camera

Rif the tailgate is open

Driving and parking

Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
Activating the 360° camera using
COMAND Online
Rat night or in very dark places
Rif the cameras are exposed to very bright X Press the W button, see the separate
light COMAND Online operating Instructions.
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED X Select System by turning cVd the

lighting (the display may flicker) COMAND controller and press W to con-
Rif you drive into a heated garage in the win- firm.
ter and the temperature changes very X Select 360° camera and press W to con-
quickly firm.
Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered The following appears depending on
Rif the vehicle components in which the whether transmission position D or R is
cameras are fitted are damaged. In this selected:
event, have the camera position and setting Ra split-screen with top view and the

checked at a qualified specialist workshop image from the front camera or

Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You Ra split-screen with top view and the

could otherwise injure others or damage image from the reversing camera
objects when parking the vehicle. For further information on the COMAND con-
troller; see the separate COMAND Online
Activation conditions operating instructions.
The 360° camera image can be displayed if:
Activating the 360° camera using
Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360° cam- reverse gear
era
RCOMAND Online is switched on; see the You can show images from the 360° camera
separate COMAND Online operating automatically by engaging reverse gear.
instructions X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
Rthe 360° camera function is activated the ignition lock.
X Make sure that the Activation by R
Activating the 360° camera using the gear setting is active in COMAND Online,
SYS button see the separate COMAND Online operat-
ing instructions.
X Press the W button for longer than
X To show the 360° camera image: engage
2 seconds; see the separate COMAND
reverse gear.
Online operating instructions.
The area behind the vehicle is shown in the
The following appears depending on
COMAND display in split-screen mode:
whether transmission position D or R is
Rvehicle with guide lines
selected:
Rtop view of the vehicle

Z
212 Driving systems

Selecting the split-screen and full = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
screen displays including the exterior mirrors, for current
X To switch between split screen views: steering wheel angle (dynamic)
switch to the line with the vehicle icons by ? Yellow lane marking the course the tyres
sliding ZV the COMAND controller. will take at the current steering wheel
Driving and parking

angle (dynamic)
X Turn cVd the COMAND controller and
select one of the vehicle icons.
X To switch to full screen mode: select
Full screen by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to con-
firm.

Displays in the COMAND display

Important safety notes
! Objects not at ground level may appear to
A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle B Vehicle centre axle (marker assistance)
Rthe drawbar of a trailer
C Red guide line at a distance of approx-
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
imately 0.30 mfrom the rear of the vehicle
Rthe rear section of an HGV D Bumper
Ra slanted post
The guide lines are shown when the trans-
Use the guidelines only for orientation. mission is in position R.
Approach objects no further than the bot-
The distance specifications only apply to
tom-most guideline.
objects that are at ground level.
Top view with image from the reversing
Top view with image from the front cam-
camera
era

: Symbol for the split screen setting with

: Symbol for the split screen setting with
top view and reversing camera image
top view and front camera image
; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 4.0 m from the rear of the vehicle
imately 4.0 m from the front of the vehicle
 Driving systems 213

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width Top view with image from the mirror cam-
including the exterior mirrors, for current eras
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
? Yellow lane marking the course the tyres
will take at the current steering wheel

Driving and parking

angle (dynamic)
A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 1.0 m from the front of the vehicle
B Red guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 0.30 m from the front of the vehi-
cle
Top view and enlarged rear view
: Symbol for the top view and forward-
facing mirror camera setting
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirror (right side of
vehicle)
= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirror (left side of
vehicle)
Top view with trailer view

: Symbol for the split screen setting with

top view and reversing camera image
enlarged
; Red guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 0.30 mfrom the rear of the vehicle
This view assists you in estimating the dis-
tance to the vehicle behind you.
i This setting can also be selected as an
enlarged front view.
: Symbol for the trailer view setting
; Trailer drawbar locating aid
= Red guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 0.30 m from the ball coupling

Z
214 Driving systems

Images displayed with PARKTRONIC ATTENTION ASSIST

display
Important safety notes
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot
always detect fatigue or lapses in concentra-
Driving and parking

tion until too late or not at all. The system is

not a substitute for a well-rested and atten-
tive driver.
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
monotonous journeys such as on motorways
and trunk roads. It is active in the 80 km/h
to 180 km/h range.
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indica-
Example: full-screen view with PARKTRONIC dis-
play tors of fatigue or increasing lapses in con-
: Symbol for the full-screen setting with the
centration on the part of the driver, it sug-
gests taking a break.
reversing camera image
ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of
If the vehicle is equipped with PARKTRONIC fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking
and the function is activated (Y page 200), the following criteria into account:
warning displays ; in the COMAND display
Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering
are also active or light up accordingly.
characteristics
PARKTRONIC appears as follows:
Rjourney-related parameters, e.g. time of
Ras red or yellow brackets around the vehi- day, length of journey
cle symbol in top view in split-screen mode
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
or
restricted, and warnings may be delayed or
Rat the bottom right as red or yellow brack-
not occur at all:
ets around the vehicle symbol in full-screen
Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur-
mode
face is uneven or if there are potholes
i Full-screen mode can also be selected as Rif there is a strong side wind
front view. Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style
with high cornering speeds or high rates of
Stopping the 360° camera display acceleration
As soon as your vehicle exceeds a speed of Rif you are predominantly driving slower
30 km/h with the function activated, the than 80 km/h or faster than 180 km/h
function switches off. The previous display Rif you are currently using COMAND Online
appears on the COMAND display. You can or making a telephone call with COMAND
also switch the display by selecting the & Online
symbol in the display and pressing W the Rif the time has been set incorrectly
COMAND controller to confirm. Rin active driving situations, such as when
you change lanes or change your speed
 Driving systems 215

Warning and display messages in the Speed Limit Assist detects the traffic signs
multifunction display with a camera attached behind the top of the
windscreen.
X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-
board computer (Y page 249).
If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be

Driving and parking

warned no sooner than 20 minutes after your
journey has begun. You then hear an inter-
mittent warning tone twice and the Atten‐
tion Assist: Drowsiness detected mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
X If necessary, take a break.
X Press the a button to confirm the mes-
sage.
: Speed Limit Assist camera
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you
Important safety notes
do not take a break, you will be warned again
after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only Speed Limit Assist is only an aid and does not
happen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects always detect traffic signs specifying the
typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lap- maximum permissible speed. Traffic signs
ses in concentration. always have priority over the Speed Limit
ATTENTION ASSIST is reset and starts Assist display.
assessing your tiredness again when you con- The system may be impaired or may not func-
tinue your journey if: tion if:
Ryou switch off the engine Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow,
Ryou take off your seat belt and open the rain, fog or spray
driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or Rthere is glare, e.g. from the sun or from
to take a break oncoming traffic
The assistance graphic shows the é sym- Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or cov-
bol when ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated ered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity
(Y page 248). of the camera
Rthe traffic signs are covered, for instance
by dirt, snow or trees
Speed Limit Assist Rthe traffic signs are poorly illuminated

General notes Rthere are ambiguous traffic signs, for

instance near roadworks or on multi-lane
Speed Limit Assist shows you detected speed roads
limits in the multifunction display. Data from
the navigation system is also used for this
purpose. If a traffic sign indicating a speed
limit or the end of a speed limit is detected,
it is shown in the multifunction display. If
Speed Limit Assist does not detect any traffic
signs, the speed limit from the digital road
map is taken and shown in the display.

Z
216 Driving systems

Information in the multifunction display Ryou leave or enter a town.

Rthe road type changes (e.g. motorway,
country road).
Ryou have travelled a certain minimum dis-
tance without the traffic sign being repea-
Driving and parking

ted or detected again.

i You can also activate Speed Limit Assist
using COMAND Online. The maximum per-
missible speed is shown in the COMAND
display; see the COMAND Online operating
instructions.
: Speed Limit Assist is available and
switched on
Lane Tracking package
; Maximum permitted speed (example)
= Maximum permitted speed for vehicles General notes
for which the restriction in the additional The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
sign is relevant (example) Spot Assist (Y page 216) and Lane Keeping
? Additional character in fog Assist (Y page 218).
Briefly showing detected traffic signs in
the multifunction display Blind Spot Assist
X Activate the Speed Limit Assist warning General notes
function using the on-board computer
Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system
(Y page 248).
to monitor the areas on both sides of your
A traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the
vehicle. It supports you from speeds of
end of a speed limit : appears in the mul-
30 km/h. A warning display in the exterior
tifunction display for around five seconds
mirrors draws your attention to vehicles
as soon as it is detected. Any other infor-
detected in the monitored area. If you then
mation in the multifunction display is hid-
switch on the corresponding turn signal to
den for this period.
change lane, you will also receive an optical
Permanently showing detected traffic and audible collision warning. For monitoring,
signs in the multifunction display Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in the rear
X Display Speed Limit Assist using the on- bumper.
board computer (Y page 248). For Blind Spot Assist to assist you when driv-
X Display the assistance graphic using the ing, the radar sensor system must be opera-
on-board computer (Y page 248). tional.
A traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the Important safety notes
end of a speed limit appears in the multi-
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to
function display as soon as it is detected.
detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
Traffic sign indicating a speed limit : is gen- attentive driving. Always ensure that there is
erally displayed until: sufficient distance to the side for other road
Ra traffic sign indicating the end of the speed users and obstacles.
limit is detected.
Ryou make a turn.
 Driving systems 217

G WARNING Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to

Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles: 3.0 m behind your vehicle and directly next to
your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.
Rovertaken too closely on the side, placing
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
them in the blind spot area
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may

Driving and parking

Rwhen the difference in the speed of
be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
approach and overtaking is too great driving in the middle of their lane. This may
As a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warn be the case if there are vehicles at the edge
drivers in these situations. There is a risk of of their lane nearest your vehicle.
an accident. Due to the nature of the system:
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-
uation and maintain a safe distance at the side
ing close to crash barriers or similar solid
of the vehicle.
lane borders.
Monitoring range of the sensors Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving

In particular, the detection of obstacles can alongside long vehicles, for example lor-
be impaired in the case of: ries, for a prolonged time.
Rdirt
The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist
on the sensors or the sensors are
are integrated into the sides of the rear
obscured
bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain,
dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors.
snow or spray The sensors must not be covered, for exam-
Rnarrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or bicy- ple by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Fol-
cles lowing a severe impact or in the event of dam-
Rvery wide lanes age to the bumpers, have the function of the
Rnarrow lanes sensors checked at a qualified specialist
Rvehicles not driving in the middle of their
workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise
not work properly.
lane
Rbarriers or other road boundaries Indicator and warning display
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
indicated. approximately 30 km/h. Vehicles in the mon-
itoring range are then not indicated.

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

If Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator
lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yel-

Z
218 Driving systems

low up to a speed of 30 km/h. At speeds See Owner's Manual message appears in

above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp goes out the multifunction display.
and Blind Spot Assist is operational.
i You can deactivate the indicator lamps in
If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring the exterior mirrors.
range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above
To do so, deactivate Blind Spot Assist if:
Driving and parking

30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corre-

Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition lock
sponding side lights up red. This warning
always occurs when a vehicle enters the blind Rthe engine is not running
spot monitoring range from behind or from Rthe electrical connection to the trailer
the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the has been established
warning only occurs if the difference in speed
is less than 12 km/h. Lane Keeping Assist
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
gear is engaged. Blind Spot Assist is then General notes
deactivated. Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
The brightness of the indicator/warning front of your vehicle by means of a cam-
lamps is adjusted automatically according to era :, at the top of the windscreen. Lane
the ambient light. Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the
road and warns you before you leave your
Collision warning lane unintentionally.
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range
of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the
corresponding turn signal, a double warning
tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If
the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles
are indicated by the flashing of red warning
lamp :. There are no further warning tones.
Activating Blind Spot Assist
X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist
(Y page 249) is activated in the on-board
computer. : Active Lane Keeping Assist camera
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
If you select km on the on-board computer in
lock.
the Display unit Speed-/odometer func-
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors
tion (Y page 250), Lane Keeping Assist is
light up red for approximately active starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If the
1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. miles display unit is selected, the assistance
Towing a trailer range begins at 40 mph.
If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have A warning may be given if a front wheel
correctly established the electrical connec- passes over a lane marking. It will warn you
tion. This can be accomplished by checking by means of intermittent vibration in the
the trailer lighting. Blind Spot Assist is then steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
deactivated. The indicator lamp lights up yel- Important safety notes
low in the exterior mirrors and the Blind If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane
Spot Assist currently unavailable Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of
an accident nor override the laws of physics.
 Driving systems 219

Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
road, weather or traffic conditions. Lane small and the lane markings thus cannot be
Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are respon- detected
sible for the distance to the vehicle in front, Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, lanes branch off, cross one another or

Driving and parking

and for staying in the lane. merge
Rthe road is narrow and winding
G WARNING
Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly Rthere are highly variable shade conditions

identify lane markings. on the road

In these cases, Lane Keeping Assist may: Activating Lane Keeping Assist
Rgive an unnecessary warning X Activate Lane Keeping Assist using the on-
Rnot give a warning board computer; to do so, select Stand‐
There is a risk of an accident. ard or Adaptive(Y page 249).
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and
situation and keep in lane, especially if Lane
lane markings are detected, the lines in the
Keeping Assist alerts you.
assistance graphic display (Y page 248)
are shown in green. Lane Keeping Assist is
ready for use.
G WARNING
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not Standard
return the vehicle to the original lane. There
If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
is a risk of an accident.
occurs if:
Always steer, apply the brakes or accelerate Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In
the vehicle yourself, especially if Lane Keep-
this case, the warnings are suppressed for
ing Assist alerts you.
a certain period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehi-
cle in its lane. ABS, BAS or ESP®.
The system may be impaired or may not func- Adaptive
tion if:
When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi- tion occurs if:
cient illumination of the road, or due to Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In
snow, rain, fog or spray this case, the warnings are suppressed for
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, a certain period of time.
the sun or reflection from other vehicles Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
(e.g. if the road surface is wet) ABS, BAS or ESP®.
Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up, dam-
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
aged or covered, for instance by a sticker
Ryou brake hard.
in the vicinity of the camera
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
Rno, or several, unclear lane markings are
present for one lane, e.g. in a construction obstacle or change lane quickly.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
area
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or In order that you are warned only when nec-
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow essary and in good time if you cross the lane
marking, the system recognises certain con-
ditions and warns you accordingly.
Z
220 Driving systems

The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a speed of approximately 30 km/h.
bend. For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist you
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motor- when driving, the radar sensor system must
way. be operational.
Driving and parking

Rthe system recognises solid lane markings. Important safety notes

The warning vibration occurs later if: Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It does
Rthe road has narrow lanes. not detect all traffic situations and road users
Ryou
and is no substitute for attentive driving.
cut the corner on a bend.
Always ensure that there is sufficient dis-
Towing a trailer tance to the side for other road users and
If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have obstacles.
correctly established the electrical connec- G WARNING
tion. This can be accomplished by checking
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to
the trailer lighting.
vehicles:
Rovertaking too closely on the side, placing
Active Driving Assistance package them in the blind spot area
Rif the difference in the speed of approach
General notes and overtaking is too great
The Active Driving Assistance package con- As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-
sists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 188), Active ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit-
Blind Spot Assist (Y page 220) and Active uations. There is a risk of an accident.
Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 222). Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and maintain a safe distance at the side
Active Blind Spot Assist of the vehicle.

General notes Monitoring range of the sensors

Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor G WARNING
system to monitor the area to the sides of
Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all
your vehicle which are behind the driver. A
traffic situations and road users. There is a
warning display in the exterior mirrors draws
risk of an accident.
your attention to vehicles detected in the
monitored area. If you then switch on the cor- Always make sure that there is sufficient dis-
responding turn signal to change lanes, you tance to the side for other traffic or obstacles.
will also receive an optical and audible colli-
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
sion warning. If a risk of side impact is detec-
be impaired in the case of:
ted, corrective braking may help you avoid a
collision. To support the course-correcting Rdirt on the sensors or the sensors are
brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist obscured
also uses the forward-facing radar sensor sys- Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or
tem. The space available in the direction of spray
travel as well as to the side of the vehicle is Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
evaluated before a course-correcting braking indicated.
application is performed.
 Driving systems 221

Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect nar- the bumpers, have the function of the sensors
row vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicy- checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
cles, or may only detect them too late. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work
properly.
Indicator and warning display

Driving and parking

Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at
speeds below approximately 30 km/h. Vehi-
cles in the monitoring range are then not indi-
cated.

Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up

to three metres behind your vehicle and : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp
directly next to your vehicle as shown in the
diagram. For this purpose, Active Blind Spot If Active Blind Spot Assist is switched on,
Assist uses radar sensors in the rear bumper. indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the up yellow up to a speed of 30 km/h. At
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may speeds above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp
be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist is
driving in the middle of their lane. This may operational.
be the case if there are vehicles at the edge If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring
of their lane nearest your vehicle. range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above
Due to the nature of the system: 30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corre-
Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-
sponding side lights up red. This warning
always occurs when a vehicle enters the blind
ing close to crash barriers or similar solid
spot monitoring range from behind or from
lane borders.
the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the
Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving
warning only occurs if the difference in speed
alongside long vehicles, for example lor- is less than 12 km/h.
ries, for a prolonged time.
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
Two Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors gear is engaged. Active Blind Spot Assist is
are integrated into the front and rear bumpers then no longer active.
respectively. An additional radar sensor is
The brightness of the indicator/warning
located behind the cover in the radiator grille.
lamps is adjusted automatically according to
Make sure that the sensors and the areas
the ambient light.
around them are free of dirt, ice or slush. The
rear sensors must not be covered, e.g. by
bicycle racks or overhanging loads. Following
a severe impact or in the event of damage to

Z
222 Driving systems

Visual and acoustic collision warning Either a very slight course-correcting brake
When you switch on the turn signals to application, or none at all, may occur if:
change lanes and a vehicle is detected in the Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash
side monitoring range, you receive a visual barriers, on both sides of your vehicle
and acoustic collision warning. You then hear Ra vehicle approaches too closely on the
Driving and parking

a double warning tone and red warning side

lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
detected vehicles are indicated by the flash-
high cornering speeds
ing of red warning lamp :. There are no fur-
Ryou brake or accelerate decisively
ther warning tones.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
Course-correcting brake application ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake
G WARNING RESP® is deactivated

A course-correcting brake application cannot Rthe Off-road program is activated

always prevent a collision. There is a risk of Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is
an accident. detected
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns Activating Active Blind Spot Assist
you or makes a course-correcting brake appli- X Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist
cation. Always maintain a safe distance at the (Y page 249) is activated in the on-board
sides. computer.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
In very rare cases, the system may make an lock.
inappropriate brake application. An inappro- Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors
priate brake application may be interrupted light up red for approximately
at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.
direction or accelerate.
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a Towing a trailer
side impact in the monitoring range, a course- If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have
correcting brake application is carried out. correctly established the electrical connec-
This is designed to help you avoid a collision. tion. This can be accomplished by checking
The course-correcting brake application is the trailer lighting. Active Blind Spot Assist is
available in the speed range between then deactivated. The indicator lamp lights up
30 km/h and 200 km/h. yellow in the exterior mirrors and the Active
If a course-correcting brake application Blind Spot Assist currently unavail‐
occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the able See Owner's Manual message
exterior mirror and the following is shown in appears in the multifunction display.
the multifunction display, for example:
Active Lane Keeping Assist
General notes
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area
in front of your vehicle by means of cam-
era : mounted at the top of the windscreen.
Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane
Example: vehicles with automatic transmission markings on the road and warns you before
you leave your lane unintentionally. If you do
 Driving systems 223

not react to the warning, a lane-correcting Always pay particular attention to the traffic
application of the brakes can bring the vehicle situation and keep within the lane, especially
back into the original lane. if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter-
minate the intervention in a non-critical driv-
ing situation.

Driving and parking

The system may be impaired or may not func-
tion if:
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-
cient illumination of the road, or due to
snow, rain, fog or spray
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
the sun or reflection from other vehicles
(e.g. if the road surface is wet)
: Active Lane Keeping Assist camera
Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up, dam-
If you select km in the Display unit aged or covered, for instance by a sticker
Speed-/odometer: function on the on-board in the vicinity of the camera
computer(Y page 250), Active Lane Keeping Rno, or several, unclear lane markings are
Assist is activated starting at a speed of present for one lane, e.g. in a construction
60 km/h. If the miles display unit is selected, area
the assistance range begins at 40 mph. Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
Important safety notes covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the small and the lane markings thus cannot be
risk of an accident nor override the laws of detected
physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
account road, weather or traffic conditions. lanes branch off, cross one another or
Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are merge
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in Rthe road is narrow and winding
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good Rthere are highly variable shade conditions
time, and for staying in the lane. on the roadway
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continu- Rno vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane
ously keep your vehicle in its lane. and there are broken lane markings
G WARNING
Warning vibration through the steering
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always wheel
clearly detect lane markings.
A warning may be given if a front wheel
In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist passes over a lane marking. It will warn you
can: by means of intermittent vibration in the
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
make a course-correcting brake application In order that you are warned only when nec-
to the vehicle essary and in good time if you cross the lane
Rneither give a warning nor intervene marking, the system recognises certain con-
There is a risk of an accident. ditions and warns you accordingly.

Z
224 Driving systems

The warning vibration occurs earlier if: sides must be recognised. The brake applica-
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a tion also slightly reduces driving speed.
bend. If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motor- the following appears in the multifunction dis-
way. play:
Driving and parking

Rthe system recognises solid lane markings.

The warning vibration occurs later if:

Rthe road has narrow lanes.
Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
Lane-correcting brake application
G WARNING
A lane-correcting brake application cannot
always bring the vehicle back into the original
lane. There is a risk of an accident.
Example: vehicles with automatic transmission
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns i A further lane-correcting brake applica-
you or makes a lane-correcting brake appli- tion can only occur after your vehicle has
cation. returned to the original lane.
No lane-correcting brake application occurs
G WARNING if:
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or
traffic conditions or road users. In very rare
accelerate.
cases, the system may make an inappropriate
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
brake application, e.g. after intentionally driv-
ing over a solid lane marking. There is a risk Ryou have switched on the turn signals.

of an accident. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as

An inappropriate brake application may be ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind

interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in Spot Assist.
the opposite direction. Always make sure that Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
there is sufficient distance to the side for high cornering speeds or high rates of
other traffic or obstacles. acceleration.
Ron vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the
If you leave your lane under certain circum- electrical connection to the trailer has been
stances, the vehicle will brake briefly on one correctly established.
side. This is intended to help you return the
RESP® is deactivated.
vehicle to the original lane.
Rthe transmission is not in position D.
This function is available in the range between
60 km/h and 200 km/h. Rthe Off-road program is activated.

A lane-correcting brake application can only Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre
be made after driving over a solid, recognis- has been detected and displayed.
able lane marking. Before this, a warning
must have been issued by means of intermit-
tent vibration through the steering wheel. In
addition, a lane with lane markings on both
 Off-road driving systems 225

Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect Towing a trailer

road and traffic conditions. An inappropriate If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have
brake application may be interrupted at any correctly established the electrical connec-
time if: tion. This can be accomplished by checking
Ryou steer slightly in the opposite direction. the trailer lighting.

Driving and parking

Ryou use a turn signal.
Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.
Off-road driving systems
A lane-correcting brake application is inter-
rupted automatically if: 4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive)
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are per-
ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind manently driven. Together with ESP® and
Spot Assist. ETS, it improves the traction of your vehicle
Rlane markings are no longer be detected. whenever a drive wheel spins due to insuffi-
cient grip.
Activating Active Lane Keeping Assist If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC
X Activate Active Lane Keeping Assist using can neither reduce the risk of accident nor
the on-board computer; to do so, select override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot
Standard or Adaptive(Y page 249). take account of road, weather and traffic con-
If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h and ditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are
lane markings are detected, the lines in the responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
assistance graphic display (Y page 248) front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
are shown in green. Lane Keeping Assist is time, and for staying in the lane.
ready for use. If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:
If Standard is selected, no warning vibra- Rwhen pulling away, only depress the accel-
tion occurs if:
erator pedal as far as is necessary.
Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In
Raccelerate less when driving
this case, the warnings are suppressed
for a certain period of time. ! Never tow the vehicle with one axle
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such raised. This may damage the transfer case.
as ABS, BAS or ESP®. Damage of this sort is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz implied warranty. All
When Adaptive is selected, no warning
wheels must remain either on the ground
vibration occurs if:
or be fully raised. Observe the instructions
Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In
for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full
this case, the warnings are suppressed contact with the ground.
for a certain period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum
as ABS, BAS or ESP®. effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow
chains if necessary.
Ryou brake hard.
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid
! When testing the parking brake, operate
an obstacle or change lane quickly. the vehicle only briefly (for a maximum of
ten seconds) on a brake test dynamometer.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
When doing this, turn the key to position
0 or 1 in the ignition. Failure to do this can

Z
226 Off-road driving systems

cause damage to the drive train or the prevailing conditions and when necessary,
brake system. apply the brakes manually.
! A function or performance test should G WARNING
only be carried out on a twin-axle dyna- If the speed driven and the set speed deviate
mometer. Before you operate the vehicle and you activate DSR on a slippery road sur-
Driving and parking

on such a dynamometer, please consult a face, the wheels may lose traction. If the
qualified workshop. You could otherwise wheels lose traction, it will no longer be pos-
damage the drive train or the brake system. sible to steer the vehicle. This increases the
For information about "Driving off-road", see risk of skidding and having an accident.
(Y page 180). Never activate DSR on slippery road surfaces.

For information about driving off-road, see

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) (Y page 180).

Important safety notes Activating/deactivating DSR

i DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) is only
G WARNING
available for vehicles with the Off-Road
Engineering package. If you drive faster than the set speed and acti-
vate DSR, the vehicle will decelerate on down-
DSR is an aid to assist you when driving down- hill gradients. If you do not know the set
hill. It keeps the speed of travel at the speed speed, the vehicle could decelerate unexpect-
selected on the on-board computer. The edly. There is a risk of an accident.
steeper the downhill gradient, the greater the
Decelerate the vehicle to the set speed before
DSR braking effect on the vehicle. When driv-
activating DSR. If you do not know what the
ing on flat stretches of road or on an uphill
stored set speed is, store the desired set
gradient, the DSR braking effect is minimal or
speed again.
non-existent.
DSR controls the vehicle’s speed when it is Activating
activated and the transmission is in position You can only activate DSR when driving at
D, R or N. By accelerating or braking, you can speeds below 30 km/h.
always drive at a higher or a lower speed than
that set on the on-board computer.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, DSR can
neither reduce the risk of accident nor over-
ride the laws of physics. DSR cannot take
account of road, weather and traffic condi-
tions. DSR is only an aid. You are responsible
for the distance to the vehicle in front, for
vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and
for staying in the lane.
You are always responsible for keeping con-
trol of the vehicle and for assessing whether X Press button :.
the downhill gradient can be managed. DSR Indicator lamp ; lights up.
may not always be able to keep to the set
Vehicles with the 4-button multifunction
speed, depending on road surface and tyre
steering wheel: a message appears in the
conditions. Select a set speed suitable for the
 Off-road driving systems 227

left-hand status indicator, e.g. DSR

4 km/h.
Vehicles with the luxury multifunction steer-
ing wheel (12 buttons): the DSR display, for
example, may appear in the multifunction dis-

Driving and parking

play:

X To increase or reduce the set speed in

1 km/h increments: briefly press the
cruise control lever to the pressure point,
If the current vehicle speed is too high, the up : for a higher or down ; for a lower
DSR icon appears in the multifunction dis- set speed.
play. In addition, on vehicles with a multifunc- On vehicles with a 4-button multifunction
tion steering wheel (4 button), the max. steering wheel, the set value appears in the
speed 30 km/hmessage is displayed and in left-hand status indicator. On vehicles with
vehicles with the luxury multifunction steer- a luxury multifunction steering wheel (12
ing wheel (12 button), the Max. speed buttons), the set value appears in the mul-
30 km/h message is displayed. tifunction display.
Deactivating X To increase or reduce the set speed in
X Press button :. 2 km/h increments: briefly press the
Indicator lamp ; goes out. cruise control lever beyond the pressure
point, up : for a higher or down ; for a
DSR symbol appears in the multifunction
lower set speed.
display with the off message.
On vehicles with a 4-button multifunction
DSR switches off automatically if you drive steering wheel, the set value appears in the
faster than 35 km/h. The DSR symbol left-hand status indicator. On vehicles with
appears in the multifunction display with the a luxury multifunction steering wheel (12
Off message. You also hear a warning tone. buttons), the set value appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
Changing the set speed while the vehi-
cle is in motion
When DSR is activated, you can change the Off-road drive program
set speed to a value between 2 km/h and i The off-road drive program is only availa-
18 km/h while the vehicle is in motion. ble on vehicles with the Off-Road Engineer-
ing package.
The off-road drive program assists you in driv-
ing off-road. The engine’s performance char-
acteristics and the gearshifting characteris-
tics of the automatic transmission are adap-
ted for this purpose. ABS, ESP® and ETS pro-
grams especially adapted to off-road driving
are also activated.

Z
228 Towing a trailer

Do not use the off-road drive program on Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do
roads that are snow-covered or icy or if you not simultaneously depress both the brake
have fitted your vehicle with snow chains. pedal and the accelerator pedal while driving.
For information about driving off-road, see
(Y page 180). G WARNING
Driving and parking

You could lose control of the vehicle/trailer

combination if it begins to swerve. The vehi-
cle/trailer combination could even overturn.
There is a risk of an accident.
On no account should you attempt to
straighten out the vehicle/trailer combina-
tion by increasing speed. Decrease your
speed and do not countersteer. Brake if nec-
essary.

G WARNING
X To switch on: press the : button. If the maximum the permissible load for a car-
Indicator lamp ; lights up. rier system is exceeded, the carrier could
On vehicles with a luxury multifunction steer- come loose from the vehicle and endanger
ing wheel (12 buttons): in the multifunction other road users. There is a risk of an accident
display you see the off-road symbol: and injury.
Never exceed the permissible noseweight
when using a carrier.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantly

results in excessive and premature wear to
the brake pads.
If you exceed the maximum permissible nose-
X To switch off: press button :. weight of the trailer drawbar on the ball cou-
pling, the following may become damaged:
Indicator lamp ; goes out. On vehicles
with a luxury multifunction steering wheel Ryour vehicle
(12 buttons), off-road symbol also goes off. Rthe trailer
Rthe ball coupling
Rthe trailer tow hitch
Towing a trailer The vehicle/trailer combination could
Notes on towing a trailer become unstable.
If the noseweight used is lower than the min-
Important safety notes imum permissible noseweight, the vehicle/
trailer combination could also become unsta-
G WARNING
ble.
The braking system can overheat if you leave
your foot on the brake pedal while driving. To avoid hazardous situations:
This increases the braking distance and could Rmake sure to check the noseweight before
even cause the braking system to fail. There each journey.
is a risk of an accident. Ruse a drawbar noseweight as close as pos-
sible to the maximum noseweight.
 Towing a trailer 229

Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible Rdemands more sensitive steering
noseweight. Rhas a larger turning circle
Rdo not use a noseweight lower than the This can impair the vehicle's handling char-
minimum permissible trailer drawbar nose- acteristics. Adapt your style of driving accord-
weight. ingly. Maintain a safe distance. Drive care-

Driving and parking

When using a detachable trailer coupling, fully.
make sure you observe the trailer coupling When towing a trailer, always adjust your
manufacturer's operating instructions. speed to the current road and weather con-
When reversing the vehicle towards the ditions. Do not exceed the maximum permis-
trailer, make sure there is nobody between sible speed for your vehicle/trailer combina-
the trailer and the vehicle. tion.
Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If
you do not couple the trailer to the towing General notes
vehicle correctly, the trailer could become i When towing a trailer, set the tyre pres-
detached.
sure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle
Make sure that the following values are not for a maximum load; see the tyre pressure
exceeded: table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 361).
Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight
i The height of the ball coupling changes
Rthe permissible trailer load with the load of the vehicle. If necessary,
Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing use a trailer with a height-adjustable draw-
vehicle bar.
Rthe maximum permissible gross vehicle
You will find fitting dimensions and loads
weight of both the towing vehicle and the under "Technical data" (Y page 391).
trailer
The applicable permissible values, which Driving tips
must not be exceeded, can be found:
i Observe the notes on ESP® trailer stabi-
Rin the vehicle documents lisation (Y page 73).
Ron the identification plates of the trailer tow
The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/
hitch, the trailer and the vehicle
trailer combinations depends on the type of
If the values differ, the lowest value applies. trailer. Before beginning the journey, check
You will find the values approved by the man- the trailer's documents to see what the max-
ufacturer on the vehicle identification plates imum permitted speed is. Observe the legally
and those for the towing vehicle under "Tech- prescribed maximum speed in the relevant
nical data" (Y page 393). country.
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the max-
characteristics will be different in comparison imum permissible rear axle load is increased
to when driving without a trailer. when towing a trailer. Refer to the "Technical
The vehicle/trailer combination: data" section to find out whether this applies
Ris heavier to your vehicle.
Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradi- If you utilise any of the added maximum rear
ent-climbing capability axle load when towing a trailer, the vehicle/
Rhas an increased braking distance
trailer combination may not exceed a maxi-
mum speed of 100 km/h for reasons con-
Ris affected more by strong crosswinds
cerning the operating permit. This also

Z
230 Towing a trailer

applies in countries in which the permissible i You can use this number to obtain a
maximum speed for vehicle/trailer combina- replacement key from a Mercedes-Benz
tions is above 100 km/h. Service Centre.
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
G WARNING
characteristics will be different in comparison
If the ball coupling is not correctly engaged, it
Driving and parking

to when driving without a trailer and it will

could detach while driving and fall on the road.
consume more fuel.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Use the left-hand gearshift paddle to shift to
Engage the ball coupling as described.
a lower gear on long and steep downhill gra-
dients.
G WARNING
i This also applies if you have activated If the ball coupling is not correctly engaged,
cruise control or SPEEDTRONIC. the trailer can detach. There is a risk of an
This will use the braking effect of the engine, accident.
so less braking will be required to maintain Always engage the ball coupling as described.
vehicle speed. This relieves the load on the
brake system and prevents the brakes from G WARNING
overheating and wearing too quickly. If you If you release the ball coupling or it does not
need additional braking, depress the brake engage correctly when folding in, it will swing
pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. out. Within pivoting range of the ball coupling,
there is an increased risk of an accident and
Driving tips injury.
RMaintain a greater distance from the vehi- Only release the ball coupling if the pivoting
cle in front than when driving without a range is unobstructed. Always make sure that
trailer. the ball coupling engages when folding in.
RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake
The detachable ball coupling is located in the
gently at first to allow the trailer to run on.
stowage well under the luggage compartment
Then, increase the braking force rapidly.
floor (Y page 317).
RThe values given for gradient-climbing
X Open the luggage compartment floor
capabilities from a standstill refer to sea
level. When driving in mountainous areas, (Y page 317).
note that the power output of the engine,
and consequently the vehicle's gradient-
climbing capability, decrease with increas-
ing altitude.
If the trailer swings from side to side:
X Do not accelerate.
X Do not countersteer.
X Brake if necessary.

Fitting the ball coupling Vehicles without the ECO start/stop function

X Make a note of the ball coupling key num-

ber.
 Towing a trailer 231

Driving and parking

Vehicles with the ECO start/stop function X Pull protective cap : down in the direction
X Pull cover : of the ball coupling recess of the arrow, out of the ball coupling recess.
upwards in the direction of the arrow and X Place protective cap : into the ball cou-
remove it. pling recess.

Vehicles without the ECO start/stop function X Pull protective cap ; off the lock in the
handwheel.
X Insert key : into the ignition lock.
The red mark on the handwheel must be
aligned with the green area on the ball cou-
pling (fitting position). If this is not the case:
X Turn key : in the direction of the arrow.
The key is released.

Vehicles with the ECO start/stop function

X Take ball coupling : with the key from ball
coupling stowage compartment ;.

Z
232 Towing a trailer

X Pull handwheel ? away from the ball cou- Coupling up a trailer

pling and turn it clockwise until it engages.
The green area on the ball coupling is G WARNING
aligned with the red mark on the hand- If you uncouple a trailer with an engaged over-
wheel. run brake, you could trap your hand between
Driving and parking

X Insert the ball coupling vertically in the the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. This poses
direction of the arrow into ball coupling a risk of injury.
recess = until it engages. Do not uncouple a trailer with an engaged
Handwheel ? turns during this process. overrun brake.
Green marking A on the handwheel is
X Make sure that the transmission is in posi-
aligned with the green area on ball coupling
tion P.
B.
X Engage the parking brake.
X Position the trailer level behind the vehicle.
X Couple up the trailer.
X Establish the electric connection between
the vehicle and the trailer.
X Check that the trailer lighting system is
working.

Uncoupling a trailer

X To lock, turn key : to the stop in the direc- G WARNING

tion of the arrow. Vehicles with level control:
X Remove key :. If you disconnect the trailer cable, the vehicle
is lowered. This can cause you or others to
X Press protective cap ; onto the lock.
become trapped between the vehicle body
i You can store the key in the ball coupling and tyres, or underneath the vehicle. This
recess in the luggage compartment. poses a risk of injury.
Make sure that no-one is in the immediate
X Attach and engage the cover for the ball
vicinity of the wheel arch or underneath the
coupling recess in the stowage well under
vehicle when disconnecting the trailer cable.
the luggage compartment floor.
! Do not disconnect a trailer with an
engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your
vehicle could be damaged by the rebound-
ing of the overrun brake.
X Make sure that the transmission is in posi-
tion P.
X Engage the parking brake.
X Secure the trailer against rolling away.
X Remove the trailer cable and decouple the
trailer.
X Fold trailer power socket : down.
 Towing a trailer 233

Removing the ball coupling X Replace the cover of the ball coupling
recess and engage it.
X Pull the protective cap off the lock in the
X Fold the trailer power socket upwards.
handwheel.
X Use the key to unlock the lock in the hand-
wheel.

Driving and parking

Trailer power supply
X Hold the ball coupling. Pull the handwheel
away from the ball coupling and turn it When it leaves the factory, your vehicle's
clockwise until it engages. trailer socket is equipped with a permanent
The green area on the ball coupling is power supply and a power supply that is
aligned with the red mark on the hand- switched on via the ignition lock.
wheel. The permanent power supply is supplied via
X Pull the ball coupling downwards to trailer socket pin 9.
remove. The power supply that is switched on via the
X Clean the ball coupling if it is dirty. ignition lock is supplied via trailer socket pin
10.
Information on cleaning and care of the trailer
tow hitch can be found under (Y page 336). ! You can connect accessories with a
power rating of up to 240 W to the perma-
nent power supply and with a power rating
Storing the ball coupling of up to 180 W to the power supply that is
switched on via the ignition lock.
G WARNING
The trailer battery may not be charged from
Never transport an unsecured ball coupling in the power supply.
the interior of the vehicle.
The trailer's permanent power supply is
Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be
switched off in the event of low vehicle supply
injured by the ball coupling being thrown if
voltage and after six hours at the latest.
you:
Rbrake sharply
You can find more information about fitting
the trailer electrics at a qualified specialist
Rchange direction suddenly
workshop.
Rhave an accident
X To switch the connected power supply

X Open the stowage well under the luggage on or off: turn the key in the ignition lock
compartment floor. to position 2 or 0 respectively.
X Remove the cover from the ball coupling
recess.
Trailer with 7-pin connector
X Remove the protective cap from the ball
coupling recess. General notes
X Press the protective cap into the ball cou-
Trailer with 7-pin connector: you can con-
pling recess until it engages. nect to the 13-pin socket on the ball coupling
X Make sure that the protective cap is firmly using an adapter or, if necessary, an adapter
in place. cable. Both can be obtained at a qualified
X Store the ball coupling with the key inser- specialist workshop.
ted in the ball coupling recess.

Z
234 Towing a trailer

Fitting the adapter

! Make sure that there is sufficient cable
play so that the cable cannot become
detached when cornering.
Driving and parking

X Open the socket cover.

X Insert the plug connector with lug : into
groove = on the socket. Turn bayonet con-
nection ; clockwise to the stop.
X Let the cover engage.
X If you are using an adapter cable, secure
the cable to the trailer with cable ties.
 235

Useful information ............................ 236

On-board computer and displays

Important safety notes .................... 236
Displays and operation (4-button
multifunction steering wheel) ......... 236
Displays and operation (12-button
multifunction steering wheel) ......... 239
Display messages ............................. 257
Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................ 297
236 Displays and operation (4-button multifunction steering wheel)

Useful information times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not oper-

On-board computer and displays

ating safely may cause an accident.

i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- For an overview, see the instrument cluster
els, series and optional equipment for your illustration for vehicles with:
vehicle that were available at the time of R4-button multifunction steering wheel
going to press. National variations are pos- (Y page 33)
sible. Note that your vehicle may not be R12-button multifunction steering wheel
equipped with all of the functions descri-
(Y page 35)
bed. This is also the case for systems and
functions relevant to safety.
i Read the information on qualified special- Displays and operation (4-button mul-
ist workshops: (Y page 28). tifunction steering wheel)
Instrument cluster lighting
Important safety notes The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the
displays and the controls in the vehicle inte-
G WARNING rior can be adjusted using the brightness con-
Operating the integrated information systems trol knob.
and communications equipment in the vehicle The brightness control knob is located on the
while driving will distract you from traffic con- bottom left of the instrument cluster
ditions. You could then lose control of the (Y page 35).
vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise
Only operate these devices if road traffic con- or anti-clockwise.
ditions permit. If you are unsure about the If the light switch is set to Ã, T or
surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe L, the brightness is dependant upon
location and make entries only while the vehi- the brightness of the ambient light.
cle is stationary.
i The light sensor in the instrument cluster
G WARNING automatically controls the brightness of
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal- the multifunction display.
functioned, you may not recognise function In daylight, the displays in the instrument
restrictions relevant to safety. The operating cluster are not illuminated.
safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There
is a risk of an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked Coolant temperature gauge
at a qualified specialist workshop immedi- The coolant temperature gauge is in the
ately. instrument cluster on the left-hand side.
Under normal operating conditions and with
You must observe the legal requirements for the specified coolant level, the coolant tem-
the country in which you are currently driving perature may rise to 120 †.
when operating the on-board computer.
At high outside temperatures and when driv-
The on-board computer only shows messages ing uphill, the coolant temperature may rise
or warnings from certain systems in the mul- to the end of the scale.
tifunction display. You should therefore make
sure your vehicle is operating safely at all
 Displays and operation (4-button multifunction steering wheel) 237

Rev counter

On-board computer and displays

The red band in the rev counter indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
! Do not drive in the overrevving range.
Doing so will damage the engine.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature display

You should pay special attention to road con-
ditions when temperatures are around the
freezing point.
The outside temperature display is in the
instrument cluster (Y page 33).
Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
played after a short delay. : Multifunction display
; W Increases the volume
= X Decreases the volume
Operating the on-board computer
? C Scrolls through lists/adjusts val-
The on-board computer is activated as soon ues/confirms display messages
as you turn the key to position 1 in the ignition
A V Selects a menu
lock. You can use the on-board computer to
call up information relating to your vehicle i If you press and hold the V button, the
and to make and adjust settings. standard display appears.
i You can have certain functions set at a i In the Day. driv. lights menu, you
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a can use the W or X button to switch
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. the function on or off. You cannot adjust
Examples: the volume when in the Day. driv.
Rautomatic door locking lights: menu.
Rspeed limit for winter tyres
You can obtain information about this at Multifunction display
any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
To activate the multifunction display:
You can control the multifunction display and
the settings in the on-board computer using Rswitch on the ignition
the buttons on the multifunction steering Rswitch on the lights
wheel. Ropen the driver's door

Z
238 Displays and operation (4-button multifunction steering wheel)

X To reset the trip meter: press and hold

On-board computer and displays

the V button until the standard display

appears.
X Press and hold the C button until the
value has been reset.

Trip computer
X Press the V button on the steering
wheel repeatedly until the trip computer
Values and settings as well as display mes- appears.
sages are shown in multifunction display :.

Menu overview
Operating the on-board computer
(Y page 237).
RStandard display (Y page 238)
: Distance
RTrip computer (Y page 238)
; Average speed
RRange (Y page 238)
= Time
RCurrent fuel consumption
? Average fuel consumption
RDigital speedometer
RMessage memory (Y page 257)
X To reset the trip computer: press and
hold the C button on the steering wheel
RService (Y page 326)
until the values have been reset.
RTyre pressure loss warning system
(Y page 363)
RDaytime driving lights (Y page 238)
Calling up the range
RTime (Y page 239)
X Press the V button on the steering
wheel repeatedly until the approximate
Standard display range appears.
The approximate range which can be covered
depends on the fuel level and your current
driving style. If there is only a small amount
of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows
a vehicle being refuelled C instead of the
range.

X Press and hold the V button on the

Switching the daytime driving lights
steering wheel until the standard display on/off
with trip meter : and total distance
recorder ; is shown. If you have activated the Day. driv.
lights: function and the light switch is in the
 Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) 239

à position, the daytime driving lights are contact with hot gases or other leaking

On-board computer and displays

switched on automatically when the engine is service products. There is a danger of injury.
running. When it is dark, the side lamps and Allow an overheating engine to cool down
the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in
automatically. the engine compartment, leave the bonnet
On vehicles with daytime driving lamps, the closed and notify the fire brigade.
factory setting is on.
If you want to change the setting for the Day. The coolant temperature gauge is in the
driv. lights: function, you have to turn instrument cluster on the left-hand side.
the key in the ignition lock to position 1. Under normal operating conditions and with
X Press the V button on the steering the specified coolant level, the coolant tem-
perature may rise to 120 †.
wheel repeatedly until the Day. driv.
lights: menu appears. At high outside temperatures and when driv-
You will see the selected setting: on or ing uphill, the coolant temperature may rise
off. to the end of the scale.
X Press the W or X button to change
the setting. Rev counter
The red band in the rev counter indicates the
Time/date engine's overrevving range.

i Depending on your vehicle's equipment, ! Do not drive in the overrevving range.

the time can be set using the on-board Doing so will damage the engine.
computer or the audio system/COMAND, The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
see the separate operating instructions. engine when the red band is reached.
X Press the V button on the steering
wheel repeatedly until the "Time/date"
menu appears. Outside temperature display
X To set: use the C button to select the You should pay special attention to road con-
display you want to change: hour, minutes, ditions when temperatures are around the
day, month, year. freezing point.
X Press W or X to set the selected dis- The outside temperature display is in the mul-
play. tifunction display (Y page 241).
X To save: press the C button. Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
The next display is selected. played after a short delay.

Displays and operation (12-button Speedometer with segments

multifunction steering wheel) The segments in the speedometer indicate
which speed range is available.
Coolant temperature gauge
RCruise control activated (Y page 183):
G WARNING The segments light up from the stored
If you open the bonnet while the engine is speed to the maximum speed.
overheating or while there is a fire in the RVariable SPEEDTRONIC activated
engine compartment, you could come into (Y page 185):

Z
240 Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel)

The segments light up from the start of the Left control panel
On-board computer and displays

scale to the selected limit speed.

RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 188): = RCalls up the menu and menu bar
One or two segments in the set speed ;
range light up. 9 Press briefly:
RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:
: RScrolls through lists
The segments between the speed of the RSelects a submenu or function
vehicle in front and the stored speed light
RIn the Audio menu: selects a
up.
stored station, an audio track or
a video scene
Operating the on-board computer RIn the Tel (telephone) menu:
switches to the phone book and
Overview selects a name or telephone
The on-board computer is activated as soon number
as you turn the key to position 1 in the ignition 9 Press and hold:
lock. : RIn the Audio menu: selects the
You can control the multifunction display and
previous/next station or selects
the settings in the on-board computer using
an audio track or a video scene
the buttons on the multifunction steering
using rapid scrolling
wheel.
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:
starts rapid scrolling of the
phone book if it is open
a RConfirms selection/display mes-
sage
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:
switches to the telephone book
and starts dialling the selected
number
RIn the Audio menu: stops the
station search function at the
desired station

Right control panel

~ RRejectsor ends a call

RExits
telephone book/redial
memory
: Multifunction display
6 RMakes or accepts a call
; Switches on LINGUATRONIC; see the sep-
RSwitches to the redial memory
arate operating instructions
= Right control panel
? Left control panel
A Back button
 Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) 241

W RAdjusts the volume A Time

On-board computer and displays

X B Permanent display: outside temperature
or speed (Y page 251)
8 RMute
X To show the menu bar;: press the
= or ; button on the steering wheel.
Back button
Menu bar ; disappears after a few seconds.
% Press briefly: Text field : shows the selected menu or
RBack submenu as well as display messages.
RSwitches off LINGUATRONIC; i You can set the time using the audio sys-
see the separate operating tem or COMAND Online, see the separate
instructions operating instructions.
RHides display messages/calls
Vehicles with manual transmission: the
up the last Trip menu function
used indicators in the lower part of the multifunc-
tion display differ from the display shown
RExits the telephone book/redial
here.
memory
The following messages may appear in the
% Press and hold: multifunction display:
RCalls up the standard display in Z Gearshift recommendation,
the Trip menu manual transmission
(Y page 163) or automatic trans-
mission (Y page 167)
Multifunction display ¯ Cruise control (Y page 183)
Values and settings as well as display mes- È SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 185)
sages are shown in the multifunction display. _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist
(Y page 122)
¤ ECO start/stop function
(Y page 158)
ë HOLD function (Y page 196)
120 km/h! Maximum permissible speed
exceeded (only for certain coun-
tries)

Menu overview
Example: DIRECT SELECT automatic transmission Operating the on-board computer
multifunction display (Y page 240).
: Text field Depending on the equipment fitted in the
; Menu bar vehicle, you can call up the following menus:
= Drive program (Y page 164) RTrip menu (Y page 242)
? Transmission position (Y page 164) RNavi menu (navigation instructions)
(Y page 243)
RAudio menu (Y page 245)

Z
242 Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel)

RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 246) The values in the From start submenu are
On-board computer and displays

RAssist. menu (assistance) calculated from the start of a journey whilst

RService menu (Y page 250) the values in the From reset submenu are
calculated from the last time the submenu
RSettings menu (settings) (Y page 250)
was reset (Y page 243).
The Audio, Navi and Tel menus differ slightly The From start trip computer is automati-
in vehicles with an audio system and in vehi- cally reset if:
cles with COMAND Online. The examples
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
given in this Owner's Manual apply to vehicles
equipped with COMAND Online. than four hours.
R999 hours have been exceeded.
R9,999 kilometres have been exceeded.
Trip menu The From reset trip computer is automati-
cally reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours
Standard display
or 99,999 kilometres.

Displaying the range and current fuel

consumption

X Press and hold the % button on the

steering wheel until the Trip menu with
trip meter : and total distance
recorder ; is shown. X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
Trip computer "From start" or "From X Press the 9 or : button to select the
reset" current fuel consumption and approximate
range.
The approximate range which can be covered
depends on the fuel level and your current
driving style. If there is only a small amount
of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows
a vehicle being refuelled C instead of the
range.
Example: "From start" trip computer
: Distance
ECO display
; Time
= Average speed
? Average fuel consumption
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
From start or From reset. Example: ECO display
 Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) 243

X Press the = or ; button on the steer- You can reset the values of the following func-

On-board computer and displays

ing wheel to select the Trip menu. tions:
X Press the 9 or : button to select Rtrip meter
ECO DISPLAY. Rtrip computer "From start"
If the ignition remains switched off for longer Rtrip computer "From reset"
than four hours, the ECO display will be auto- RECO display
matically reset.
i If you reset the values in the ECO display,
For further information on the ECO display,
the values in the "From start" trip computer
see (Y page 176).
are also reset. If you reset the values in the
"From start" trip computer, the values in
Digital speedometer the ECO display are also reset.

Navigation menu
Displaying navigation instructions
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions. For more
: Gearshift recommendation, manual trans- information, see the separate operating
mission (Y page 163) or automatic trans- instructions.
mission (Y page 167) X Switch on the audio system with Becker®
; Digital speedometer
MAP PILOT or COMAND Online; see the
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- separate operating instructions.
ing wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
X Press the 9 or : button to select the ing wheel to select the Navi menu.
digital speedometer.
Route guidance not active
Resetting values

: Direction of travel
Example: resetting the trip computer "From start" ; Current road
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
function that you wish to reset.
X Press the a button.
X Press the : button to select Yes and
press the a button to confirm.

Z
244 Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel)

Activating route guidance Change of direction announced with a

On-board computer and displays

lane recommendation
No change of direction announced

: Road to which the change of direction

: Distance to the destination leads
; Distance to the next change of direction ; Distance to change of direction and visual
= Current road distance display
? Symbol indicating "follow the road's = New lane during a change of direction
course" ? Lane continues through change of direc-
tion
Change of direction announced without a
A Lane recommendation
lane recommendation
B Change-of-direction symbol
On multilane roads, the system can display
lane recommendation A for the next change
of direction. During the change of direction,
additional lanes may be displayed.
Lane recommendations are only displayed if
the relevant data is available on the digital
: Road to which the change of direction map.
leads
; Distance to change of direction and visual Other status indicators of the naviga-
distance display tion system
= Change-of-direction symbol
RO: you have reached the destination or an
When a change of direction is announced, you intermediate destination.
will see symbol = for the change of direction RNew route... or Calculating route:
and distance graphic ;. This shortens calculating a new route
towards the top of the display as you ROff map or Off road: the vehicle position
approach the point of the announced change
is outside the area of the digital map (off-
of direction.
map position).
RNo route: no route could be calculated to
the selected destination.
 Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) 245

Audio menu Audio player or audio media operation

On-board computer and displays

Selecting a radio station

Example: CD/DVD changer display

: Current track
: Waveband
Audio data from various audio devices or
; Station frequency with memory position
media can be played, depending on the equip-
i Station ; is displayed with the station ment fitted in the vehicle.
frequency or station name. The memory X Switch on the audio system or COMAND
position is only displayed along with sta- Online and select the audio player or
tion ; if this has been stored. medium, see the separate operating
X Switch on the audio system or COMAND instructions.
Online and select Radio (see the separate X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
operating instructions). ing wheel to select the Audio menu.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X To select the next/previous track:
ing wheel to select the Audio menu. briefly press the 9 or : button.
X To select a stored station: briefly press X To select a track from the track list
the 9 or : button. (rapid scrolling): press and hold the
X To select a station from the station
9 or : button until desired track has
list: press and briefly hold the 9 been reached.
or : button. If you press and hold the 9 or : but-
If no station list is received: ton, the rapid scrolling speed is increased.
X To select a station using the station
Not all audio devices or media support this
function.
search: press and briefly hold the 9
or : button. If track information is stored on the audio
device or medium, the multifunction display
i For information on switching wavebands will show the number and name of the track.
and storing stations, see the separate oper- The current track does not appear in audio
ating instructions. AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external
audio source connected).
i DAB radio mode (Digital Audio Broadcast-
ing); see the separate operating instruc-
TV operation
tions.

Z
246 Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel)

i The memory position is only displayed Telephone menu

On-board computer and displays

along with channel : if this has been

stored. Introduction
X Switch on COMAND Online and select TV; G WARNING
see the separate operating instructions. Operating the integrated information systems
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- and communications equipment in the vehicle
ing wheel to select the Audio menu. while driving will distract you from traffic con-
X To select a stored channel: briefly press ditions. You could then lose control of the
the 9 or : button. vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
X To select a channel from the channel Only operate these devices if road traffic con-
list: press and briefly hold the 9 ditions permit. If you are unsure about the
surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe
or : button.
location and make entries only while the vehi-
i Storing a TV channel; see the separate cle is stationary.
operating instructions.
When telephoning, you must observe the
i Depending on the digital TV broadcaster, legal requirements for the country in which
radio stations can also be received. The you are currently driving.
multifunction display shows TV (RADIO). X Switch on your mobile phone and audio
system or COMAND Online, see the sepa-
Video DVD operation rate operating instructions.
X Place a mobile phone in the mobile phone
bracket (Y page 322), or establish a Blue-
tooth® connection with the audio system
or COMAND Online (see the separate oper-
ating instructions).
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Tel menu.
Example: CD/DVD changer display
: Current scene You will see one of the following display mes-
sages in the multifunction display:
X Switch on COMAND Online and select
RPlease enter PIN: the mobile phone has
video DVD; see the separate operating
instructions. been placed in the mobile phone bracket
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
and the PIN has not been entered.
ing wheel to select the Audio menu. When you enter your PIN via the mobile
phone, LINGUATRONIC, the audio system
X To select the next or previous scene: or COMAND Online, the mobile phone
briefly press the 9 or : button. searches for a network.
X To select a scene from the scene list RTelephone ready or the name of the net-
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the work provider: the mobile phone has found
9 or : button until desired scene a network and is ready to receive.
has been reached. RTelephone No service: there is no net-
work available or the mobile phone is
searching for a network.
 Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) 247

i You can obtain further information about X If only one telephone number is stored

On-board computer and displays

suitable mobile phones and connecting for a name: press the 6 or a button
mobile phones via Bluetooth®: to start dialling.
Rfrom any Mercedes Benz Service Centre or
Ron the Internet at: http:// X If there is more than one number for a
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect particular name: press the 6 or a
button to display the numbers.
Accepting a call X Press the 9 or : button to select the
number you want to dial.
If someone calls you when you are in the
X Press the 6 or a button to start dial-
Tel menu, a display message appears in the
multifunction display, for example: ling.
or
X To exit the telephone book: press the
~ or % button.

Redialling
The on-board computer saves the last names
Example: incoming call or numbers dialled in the redial memory.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
X Press the 6 button on the steering
wheel to accept an incoming call. ing wheel to select the Tel menu.
X Press the 6 button to switch to the
You can accept a call even if you are not in
redial memory.
the Tel menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the

Rejecting or ending a call desired name or number.

X Press the 6 or a button to start dial-
X Press the ~ button on the steering
ling.
wheel.
or
You can end or reject a call even if you are not X If you do not want to make a call: press
in the Tel menu. the ~ or % button.
Dialling an entry from the phone book
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Assistance menu
ing wheel to select the Tel menu.
Introduction
X Press the 9, : or a button to
switch to the phone book.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
desired name.
or
X To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold
the 9 or : button for longer than
one second. In the Assist menu, you have the following
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the options:
button or reach the end of the list.
Z
248 Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel)

RShowing the assistance graphic Rthe f symbol when DSR (Y page 226)
On-board computer and displays

(Y page 248) is activated.

RShowing Speed Limit Assist and activat- Rthe è symbol, when the rear window
ing/deactivating its message function wiper (Y page 129) is activated.
(Y page 248)
RActivating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake Speed Limit Assist
(Y page 248)
RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION
Displaying Speed Limit Assist
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ASSIST (Y page 249)
RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist ing wheel to select the Assist menu.
or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 249) X Press the 9 or : button to select

RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping Speed Lim. Asst..

Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist X Press the a button.
(Y page 249) Under certain conditions, detected speed
limits are shown in the multifunction dis-
Showing the assistance graphic play (Y page 215).
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Activating/deactivating the Speed Limit
ing wheel to select the Assist menu. Assist message function
X Press 9 or : to select Assistance X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
graphic. ing wheel to select the Assist menu.
X Press the a button. X Press the 9 or : button to select
The multifunction display shows the DIS- Speed Lim. Asst.
TRONIC PLUS distance display in the assis- X Press the a button.
tance graphic (Y page 193). The multifunction display shows Speed
The assistance graphic can display the status Limit Assist.
of and information from other driving systems X Press the : button.
or driving safety systems. The current selection is displayed.
The assistance graphic shows: X To activate or deactivate: press a.
Rthe é symbol when ATTENTION ASSIST If the Speed Limit Assist message function
(Y page 214) is deactivated. is activated, a detected speed limit is auto-
Rthe lane markings as bright lines when Lane matically displayed for five seconds. Other
Keeping Assist (Y page 218) or Active Lane items in the multifunction display are not
Keeping Assist (Y page 222) is activated. shown during this time.
Rthe Ä symbol when Speed Limit Assist When Speed Limit Assist is operational and
(Y page 215) is operational. the message function is activated, the
assistance graphic shows the Ä sym-
The assistance graphic can also display
bol.
traffic signs that are detected and indicate
speed limits.
Rthe æ symbol when PRE-SAFE® Brake Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®
Brake
(Y page 74) is deactivated.
PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles
with DISTRONIC PLUS.
 Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) 249

X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X Press the a button.

On-board computer and displays

ing wheel to select the Assist menu. The current selection is displayed.
X Press the 9 or : button to select X To activate/deactivate: press the a
PRE-SAFE Brake. button again.
X Press the a button. If the Blind Spot Assist Sensors deac‐
The current selection is displayed. tivated or Act. B. Spot Assist Sen‐
X To activate/deactivate: press the a sors deactivated message appears, the
button again. radar sensor system is deactivated.
When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, the X Switch on the radar sensor system
assistance graphic shows the æ symbol (Y page 254).
in the multifunction display. For further information about Blind Spot
If the PRE-SAFE Brake: Sensors deacti‐ Assist, see (Y page 216).
vated message appears, the radar sensor For further information about Active Blind
system is deactivated. Spot Assist, see (Y page 220).
X Switch on the radar sensor system
(Y page 254). Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
Assist
For more information on PRE-SAFE® Brake,
see (Y page 74). X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Assist menu.
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION X Press the 9 or : button to select
ASSIST Lane Keep. Assist
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X Press the a button.
ing wheel to select the Assist menu. The current selection is displayed.
X Press the 9 or : button to select X Press a to confirm.
Attention Assist. X Press the : or 9 button to set Off,
X Press the a button. Standard or Adaptive.
The current selection is displayed. X Press the a button to save the setting.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a When Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane
button again. Keeping Assist is activated, the multifunc-
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, tion display shows the lane markings as
the é symbol appears in the multifunc- bright lines in the assistance graphic.
tion display in the assistance graphics dis- For further information about Lane Keeping
play. Assist; see (Y page 218).
For further information about ATTENTION For further information about Active Lane
ASSIST, see (Y page 214). Keeping Assist; see (Y page 222).

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot

Assist
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Assist menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Blind Spot Assist.

Z
250 Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel)

Service menu Instrument cluster

On-board computer and displays

Selecting the unit of measurement for dis-

tance
The Display unit Speed-/odometer:
function allows you to choose whether cer-
tain displays appear in kilometres or miles in
the multifunction display.
You can determine whether the multifunction
In the Service menu, you have the following
display shows some messages in miles or kil-
options:
ometres.
RCalling up display messages
(Y page 257) X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
RRestarting the tyre pressure loss warning ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
system (Y page 363) X Press the : or 9 button to select the

RCalling up the service due date Instrument cluster submenu.

(Y page 326) X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Display unit Speed-/odometer: func-
Settings menu tion.
Introduction You will see the selected setting: km or
miles.
X Press the a button to save the setting.

The selected unit of measurement for dis-

tance applies to:
RThe digital speedometer in the Trip menu
RTotal distance recorder and the trip meter
RTrip computer
In the Settings menu, you have the following RCurrent consumption and the range
options:
RThe navigation instructions in the Navi
RChanging the instrument cluster settings
menu
(Y page 250)
RCruise control
RChanging the light settings (Y page 251)
RSPEEDTRONIC
RChanging the vehicle settings
RDISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 253)
RChanging the auxiliary heating settings RASSYST PLUS service interval display

(Y page 254) Switching the additional speedometer

RChanging the convenience settings on/off
(Y page 255) Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this func-
RRestoring the factory settings tion is unavailable.
(Y page 256) Only vehicles with manual transmission have
this function.
The Addit. Speedo [mph] function allows
you to choose whether the status area in the
 Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) 251

multifunction display always shows the speed X Press the = or ; button on the steer-

On-board computer and displays

in mph instead of the outside temperature. ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
You can determine whether the multifunction X Press the : or 9 button to select the
display permanently shows your speed or the Light submenu.
outside temperature. X Press a to confirm.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X Press the : or 9 button to select the
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. Daytime driving lights function.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the If the Daytime driving lights function
Instrument cluster submenu. has been switched on, the cone of light and
X Press a to confirm. the W symbol in the multifunction dis-
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
play are shown in orange.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Addit. Speedo (mph) function.
You will see the selected setting: on or Further information on daytime driving lights
off. (Y page 117).
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Setting the brightness for the display/
Selecting the permanent display function switches
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this func-
tion is unavailable. ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
You can determine whether the multifunction
display permanently shows your speed or the Light submenu.
outside temperature. X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. Brightness Display/Switches: func-
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
tion.
You will see the selected setting.
Instrument cluster submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
brightness to any level from Level 1 to
Permanent display: function.
Level 5 (bright).
You will see the selected setting: outside
X Press the a or % button to save the
temperature or Dig. speedo [mph].
X Press the a button to save the setting.
setting.

i The speed is displayed in mph. Switching the Intelligent Light System

on/off
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
Lights
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
Switching the daytime driving lights on/ X Press the : or 9 button to select the
off Light submenu.
The Daytime driving lights function can X Press a to confirm.
only be switched on with the engine turned
off.

Z
252 Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel)

X Press the : or 9 button to select the You can use this function to switch between
On-board computer and displays

Intell. Light System function. symmetrical and asymmetrical dipped beam

If the Intell. Light System function has (Y page 116).
been switched on, the cone of light and the If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for
L symbol in the multifunction display driving on the right/left, then motorway
are shown in orange. mode and the extended range foglamps are
X Press the a button to save the setting. unavailable.
When you activate Intell. Light System, A qualified specialist workshop can set the
you activate the following functions: dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the
right or left.
RMotorway mode
RActive light function Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/
RCornering light function off
RExtended range foglamps X Press the = or ; button on the steer-

If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
driving on the right/left, the multifunction X Press the : or 9 button to select the

display shows the Intell. Light System: Light submenu.

System inoperative Inactive for X Press a to confirm.
left-side traffic or Intell. Light X Press the : or 9 button to select the
System: System inoperative Inactive Adapt. main beam function.
for right-side traffic display message If the Adapt. main beam function has
instead of the Intell. Light System: been switched on, the cone of light and the
function in the Light submenu. _ symbol in the multifunction display
Further information on the Intelligent Light are shown in orange.
System (Y page 120). X Press the a button to save the setting.

Setting the dipped-beam headlamps for For further information about Adaptive High-
driving on the left/right beam Assist, see (Y page 122).
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
Activating/deactivating the surround
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
lighting and exterior lighting delayed
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
switch-off
Light submenu. X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
X Press a to confirm.
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Dipped beams Setting for: function. Light submenu.
You will see the selected setting: Right- X Press a to confirm.
side traffic or Left-side traffic.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Surround lighting function.
If you change the setting, conversion does
When the Surround lighting function is
not take place until the next time the vehi-
activated, the light cone and the area
cle is stationary.
around the vehicle are displayed in orange
This function is only available on vehicles with in the multifunction display.
the Intelligent Light System. X Press the a button to save the setting.
 Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) 253

Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exte- X Press the = or ; button on the steer-

On-board computer and displays

rior lighting temporarily: ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key to X Press the : or 9 button to select the
position 0 in the ignition lock. Lights submenu.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition X Press a to confirm.
lock. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is Lighting delayed sw.-off function.
deactivated. If the Lighting delayed sw.-off func-
Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is tion has been switched on, the vehicle inte-
reactivated the next time you start the rior is displayed in orange in the multifunc-
engine. tion display.
If you have activated the Surround light‐ X Press the a button to save the setting.
ing function and the light switch is set to
Ã, the following functions are activated Vehicle
when it is dark:
Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting Setting permanent SPEEDTRONIC
remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
with the key. If you start the engine, the ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
surround lighting is switched off and auto- X Press the : or 9 button to select the
matic headlamp mode is activated Vehicle submenu.
(Y page 117).
X Press a to confirm.
Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the
X Press : or 9 to select the Limit
exterior lighting remains lit for
60 seconds after the engine is switched off. speed (winter tyres): function.
If you close all the doors and the tailgate, You will see the current setting.
the exterior lighting goes off after X Press a to confirm.
5 seconds. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust

i Depending on your vehicle's equipment, permanent SPEEDTRONIC in increments of

when the surround lighting and delayed ten (230 km/h to 160 km/h). The Off set-
switch-off exterior lighting are on, the fol- ting switches permanent SPEEDTRONIC
lowing light up: off.
X Press the a button to store the entry.
Rside lamps
Rfoglamps For further information on permanent SPEED-
Rdipped-beam headlamps TRONIC (Y page 187).
Rdaytime driving lights Switching the automatic locking feature
Rsurround lighting in the exterior mirrors on/off
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
Activating/deactivating the interior light-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
ing delayed switch-off
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
If you activate the Lighting delayed sw.-
Vehicle submenu.
off function, the interior lighting remains on
X Press a to confirm.
for 20 seconds after you remove the key from
the ignition lock.

Z
254 Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel)

X Press the : or 9 button to select the The following systems are switched off when
On-board computer and displays

Auto. door locks function. the radar sensor system is deactivated:

When the Auto. door locks function is RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 188)
activated, the vehicle doors are displayed RBAS PLUS (Y page 70)
in orange in the multifunction display.
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 74)
X Press the a button to save the setting.
RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 216)
If you activate the Auto. door locks func- RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 220)
tion, the vehicle is centrally locked above a
speed of around 15 km/h.
Heating
For further information on the automatic lock-
ing feature; see (Y page 88). Auxiliary heating departure time
Activating/deactivating the acoustic Only vehicles with auxiliary heating
locking confirmation (Y page 146) have this function.
If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, In the Heating submenu, you can select a
an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the stored departure time or change a departure
vehicle. time.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
The auxiliary heating timer function calcu-
lates the switch-on time according to the out-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
side temperature so that the vehicle is pre-
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
heated by the departure time. When the
Vehicle submenu. departure time is reached, the auxiliary heat-
X Press a to confirm. ing continues to heat for a further five
X Press the : or 9 button to select the minutes and then switches off. The auxiliary
Acoustic Lock function. heating adopts the THERMATIC or
If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, THERMOTRONIC temperature setting.
the & symbol in the multifunction dis- You can switch off the auxiliary heating by
play lights up orange. using the remote control or the auxiliary heat-
X Press the a button to save the setting. ing button on the centre console.
G DANGER
Activating/deactivating the radar sensor
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or sufficient
system
ventilation is not possible, toxic exhaust
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
fumes can enter the vehicle, especially car-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. bon monoxide. This is the case, e.g. in
X Press the : or 9 button to select the enclosed spaces, or if the vehicle is stuck in
Vehicle submenu. snow. There is a risk of fatal injuries.
X Press a to confirm. You should switch off the auxiliary heating in
X Press the 9 or : button to select enclosed spaces which do not have an extrac-
Radar sensor (See Owner's Man.):. tion system, e.g. a garage. If the vehicle is
stuck in snow and you must leave the auxiliary
You will see the selected setting: on or
heating running, keep the exhaust pipe and
off.
the area around the vehicle clear of snow. To
X Press the a button to save the setting.
guarantee a sufficient supply of fresh air, open
a window on the side of the vehicle away from
the wind.
 Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel) 255

G WARNING X Press the : or 9 button to select A,

On-board computer and displays

When the auxiliary heating is switched on, B or Change C.
parts of the vehicle can become very hot. X Press a to confirm.
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or You can now change the departure time.
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with X Press the = or ; button to select the
hot parts of the exhaust system for extended display to be changed: hours, minutes.
periods. There is a risk of fire. X Press the : or 9 button to set the
When the auxiliary heating is switched on, selected display.
make sure that no flammable material can
X Press the a button to store the entry.
come into contact with hot vehicle compo-
nents.
The yellow indicator lamp on the auxiliary
heating button lights up.
! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila-
tion draws on the vehicle battery. After you Convenience
have heated or ventilated the vehicle a
maximum of two times, drive for a longer Activating/deactivating the EASY-
distance. ENTRY/EXIT feature
i Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly G WARNING
once a month for about ten minutes. When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
Selecting the departure time or deactivat- occupants – particularly children – could
ing a selected departure time become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. ing adjustments, make sure that no one has
X Press the : or 9 button to select the any body parts in the sweep of the steering
Heating submenu. wheel.
X Press a to confirm. If someone is trapped:
You will see the selected setting. Rpress one of the memory function position
X Press a to confirm. buttons, or
X Press the : or 9 button to select Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-

one of the three departure times or Timer ment in the opposite direction to that in
off (no timer active). which the steering wheel is moving.
X Press a to confirm. The adjustment process is stopped.
If a departure time is selected, the yellow
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
indicator lamp lights up on the auxiliary
heating button. ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Changing the departure time Convenience submenu.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X Press a to confirm.
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press the : or 9 button to select the Easy Entry/Exit: function.
Heating submenu. If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activa-
X Press a to confirm. ted, the vehicle steering wheel is displayed
You will see the selected setting. in orange in the multifunction display.
X Press a to confirm. X Press the a button to save the setting.

Z
256 Displays and operation (12-button multifunction steering wheel)

Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT Resetting to factory settings

On-board computer and displays

feature (Y page 109).

X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
Switching belt adjustment on/off ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X Press the : or 9 button to select the
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. Factory settings submenu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press a to confirm.
Convenience submenu. The Reset all settings? message
X Press a to confirm. appears.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the : or 9 button to select

Belt adjustment function. No or Yes.

When the Belt adjustment function is X Press the a button to confirm the selec-
activated, the vehicle seat belt is displayed tion.
in orange in the multifunction display. If you have selected Yes, the multifunction
X Press the a button to save the setting. display shows a confirmation message.
For further information on belt adjustment, For safety reasons, not all functions are reset:
see (Y page 54). the Limit speed (winter tyres): func-
tion in permanent SPEEDTRONIC can only be
Switching the fold in mirrors when lock- set in the Vehicle submenu. If you want to
ing function on/off reset the Daytime driving lights in the
This function is only available on vehicles with Light submenu, you must turn the key to
a memory function (Y page 113). position 1 in the ignition lock.
When you activate the Auto. fold in func-
tion, the exterior mirrors are folded in when
the vehicle is locked. When you unlock the
vehicle and then open a door, the exterior
mirrors fold out again.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Auto. fold in function.
If the Auto. fold in function is activated,
the vehicle's exterior mirror is displayed in
orange in the multifunction display.
X Press the a button to save the setting.

If you have switched the Auto. fold in

function on and you fold the exterior mirrors
in using the button on the door
(Y page 111), they will not fold out automat-
ically. The exterior mirrors can then only be
folded out using the button on the door.
 Display messages 257

Display messages

On-board computer and displays

General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differ
from the symbols in the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in
this Owner's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted apart from some high-
priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been
rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function
(Y page 196) and parking (Y page 174).

Hiding display messages

X Vehicles with a 4-button multifunction steering wheel: press C on the steering
wheel to clear the display message.
The display message is cleared.
X Vehicles with a 12-button multifunction steering wheel: press a or % on the
steering wheel to clear the display message.
The display message is cleared.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority dis-
play messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the mes-
sages have been remedied.

Message memory
Vehicles with a 4-button multifunction steering wheel
The on-board computer saves certain display messages. You can call up these display mes-
sages in the message memory.
X Press the V button on the steering wheel repeatedly until the message memory is
shown.
If there are no display messages, you will see No messages. If there are display messages,
the multifunction display shows, 2 messages, for example.
X Using the C button, scroll through the display messages.

For some display messages, the + symbol appears in the multifunction display. You will
find detailed information about these display messages in the section which follows.

Z
258 Display messages

Vehicles with a 12-button multifunction steering wheel

On-board computer and displays

The on-board computer saves certain display messages. You can call up the display messages
in the message memory.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 messages, for example.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
 Display messages 259

Safety systems (4-button multifunction steering wheel)

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ABS ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
curr. unavail. gram), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, hill start assist and ESP®
trailer stabilisation are temporarily not available.
The adaptive brake lights may also have failed.
In addition, the ä, å and ! warning lamps light up in
the instrument cluster.
Possible causes:
Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete.
Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.
The danger of skidding and having an accident increases.
X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steer-
ing movements at a speed above 20 km/h.
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

If the display message is shown and the ä warning lamp flashes

at the same time, the electronic traction system is deactivated.
Otherwise, the brakes on the drive wheels could overheat.
X Let the brakes cool down until the display message disappears
and the ä warning lamp goes out.
The electronic traction system is active again.

Z
260 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

ABS ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, hill start assist and ESP® trailer sta-
inoperative bilisation are not available due to a malfunction.
The adaptive brake lights may also have failed.
In addition, the ä, å, ! and J warning lamps light
up in the instrument cluster.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.
The danger of skidding and having an accident increases.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

EBD and ABS EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-
inoperative SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabi-
lisation are unavailable due to a malfunction.
The adaptive brake lights may also have failed.
In addition, the ä, å and ! warning lamps light up in
the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.
The danger of skidding and having an accident increases.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

J You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also
sounds.
Release parking X Release the parking brake.
brake
 Display messages 261

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

J With the Hold function activated, you have either:
Ropened the driver's door and released the seat belt or
Brake immediately
Rswitched off the engine or
Ropened the bonnet

A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lock

the vehicle, the tone becomes louder.
You cannot start the engine.
X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress the
brake pedal firmly and hold until the display message disap-
pears.
X Use the folding wheel chock (Y page 369), from the vehicle tool
kit to secure the vehicle against rolling away.
You can restart the engine.

J There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

In addition, the red J warning lamp lights up in the instrument
Check brake fluid
cluster and a warning tone sounds.
level
G WARNING
The braking efficiency may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the error.

# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check brake wear
PRE-SAFE G WARNING
inoperative Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant
safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available.
This poses an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ü If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt

tongue has been inserted into a rear seat belt buckle.
Further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts
(Y page 55).

Z
262 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

ý If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt

tongue has not been inserted in a rear seat belt buckle.
G WARNING
A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or which has not been
engaged in the seat belt buckle correctly, cannot provide the
intended level of protection.
This poses an increased risk of injury.
X If necessary, ask the occupants in the rear to fasten their seat
belts (Y page 54).
Further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts
(Y page 55).

6 There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-
Malfunction -Work‐ ter.
shop-
G WARNING
The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered uninten-
tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
This poses an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

For further information about the Supplemental Restraint System,

see (Y page 45).

6 SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6

warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
FL malfunc. -Work‐
shop- or FR mal‐ G WARNING
func. -Workshop- The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered uninten-
tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
This poses an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6 G WARNING
RL malfunc. Work‐ The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered uninten-
shop- or RR mal‐ tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
func. -Workshop- This poses an increased risk of injury.
SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6
warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages 263

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

6 G WARNING
R.cent.malf. - The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered uninten-
Workshop- tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
This poses an increased risk of injury.
SRS has malfunctioned at the rear centre. The 6 warning lamp
also lights up in the instrument cluster.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Left windowbag mal‐ There is a malfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand window-
function:wkshp or bag.
Right windowbag The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
malfunction:wkshp
G WARNING
The left or right windowbag may either be triggered unintentionally
or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
This poses an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
264 Display messages

Safety systems (12-button multifunction steering wheel)

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-

gram), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill
currently unavail‐ start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily unavail-
able See Owner's able.
Manual
The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may
also have failed.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in
the instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Possible causes:
Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete.
Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking
situation.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.
There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.
X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steer-
ing movements at a speed above 20 km/h.
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and
ESP® trailer stabilisation are not available due to a malfunction.
inoperative See
Owner's Manual The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may
also have failed.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
The self-diagnosis function, for example, may not be complete.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
 Display messages 265

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking
situation.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.
There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.
X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steer-
ing movements at a speed above 20 km/h.
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-

SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabi-
÷ lisation are unavailable due to a malfunction.
inoperative See The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may
Owner's Manual also have failed.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in
the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock, for example, if you brake hard.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking
situation.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.
There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

J You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also
sounds.
Release parking X Release the parking brake.
brake

Z
266 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

J A fault has occurred while the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS

is active.
Brake immediately or
Vehicles with manual transmission: with the HOLD function acti-
vated, you have:
Ropened the driver's door and released the seat belt or
Rswitched off the engine or
Ropened the bonnet

A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lock

the vehicle, the tone becomes louder.
You cannot start the engine.
X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress the
brake pedal firmly and hold until the display message disap-
pears.
X Use the folding wheel chock (Y page 369) from the vehicle tool
kit to secure the vehicle against rolling away.
You can restart the engine.

J There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

In addition, the red J warning lamp lights up in the instrument
Check brake fluid
cluster and a warning tone sounds.
level
G WARNING
The braking efficiency may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the fault.

# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Check brake pad
wear
PRE-SAFE Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant
inoperative See safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available.
Owner's Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
 Display messages 267

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

PRE-SAFE PRE-SAFE® Brake temporarily inoperative. Possible causes:
Functions cur‐ Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
rently limited See Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and in the bumpers are dirty.
Owner's Manual
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-
tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.

Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message
goes out.
PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).
X Clean the sensors in the radiator grille and the bumper
(Y page 336).
X Restart the engine.

PRE-SAFE PRE-SAFE® Brake is inoperative due to a fault. BAS PLUS or the

Functions limited distance warning signal may also have failed.
See Owner's Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ü If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt

tongue has been inserted into a rear seat belt buckle.
Further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts
(Y page 55).

ý If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt

tongue has not been inserted in a rear seat belt buckle.
G WARNING
A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or which has not been
engaged in the seat belt buckle correctly, cannot provide the
intended level of protection.
This poses an increased risk of injury.
X If necessary, ask the occupants in the rear to fasten their seat
belts (Y page 54).
Further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts
(Y page 55).

Z
268 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

6 There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-
Restraint sys. mal‐ ter.
function Consult
workshop G WARNING
The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered uninten-
tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
This poses an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

For further information about the Supplemental Restraint System;

see (Y page 45).

6 SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6

warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Front left malfunc‐
tion Consult work‐ G WARNING
shoporFront right The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered uninten-
malfunction Con‐ tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
sult workshop This poses an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6 G WARNING
Rear left malfunc‐ The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered uninten-
tion Consult work‐ tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
shoporRear right This poses an increased risk of injury.
malfunction Con‐ SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6
sult workshop warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages 269

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

6 G WARNING
Rear centre mal‐ The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered uninten-
function Consult tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
workshop This poses an increased risk of injury.
SRS has malfunctioned at the rear centre. The 6 warning lamp
also lights up in the instrument cluster.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6 There is a malfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand window-

bag.
Left windowbag mal‐ The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
function Consult
workshoporRight G WARNING
windowbag malfunc‐ The left or right windowbag may either be triggered unintentionally
tion Consult work‐ or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
shop
This poses an increased risk of injury.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Lights (4-button multifunction steering wheel)

i Display messages about LEDs:
This display message will only appear if all the LEDs have failed.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

b The left or right-hand cornering light is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Left cornering
(Y page 124).
light or Right cor‐
nering light or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left or right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Left dipped beam
(Y page 124).
or Right dipped
beam or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty.

X Observe the separate operating instructions provided by the
Trailer left tail
trailer manufacturer.
lamp or Trailer
right tail lamp

Z
270 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

b The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty.

X Observe the separate operating instructions provided by the
Trailer left
trailer manufacturer.
indic. or Trailer
right indic.

b The trailer brake lamp is faulty.

X Observe the separate operating instructions provided by the
Trailer brake lamp
trailer manufacturer.

b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Rear left indica‐
(Y page 124).
tor or Rear right
indicator or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Front left indica‐
(Y page 124).
tor or Front right
indicator or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is

faulty.
Left mirror indica‐ X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
tor or Right mir‐
ror indicator

b The third brake lamp is faulty.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Third brake lamp

b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is faulty.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Tail/brake lamp,
left or Tail/brake
lamp, right

b The left or right-hand main-beam headlamp is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Left main
(Y page 124).
beamorRight main
beam or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages 271

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

b The left or right-hand licence plate lamp is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Left licence plate
lamporRight
licence plate lamp

b The left-hand or right-hand front foglamp is faulty.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Left fog lamp or
Right fog lamp

b The rear foglamp is faulty.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Rear foglamp

b The front left or front right parking lamp is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Front left parking
(Y page 124).
lamp or Front
right parking lamp or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The reversing lamp is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Left revers.
(Y page 124).
lamporRight rev‐
ers. lamp or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left-hand or right-hand daytime driving lamp is faulty.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Left daytime driv‐
ing lamporRight
daytime driving
lamp

b The exterior lighting is faulty.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Malfunction
Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown.
X Check the fuses (Y page 354).
X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes
as you do so.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
272 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

b The exterior lighting is faulty.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Malfunction

b The light sensor is faulty.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
AUTO lights inoper‐
ative

b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A
warning tone also sounds.
Switch off lights X Turn the light switch to Ã.

Lights (12-button multifunction steering wheel)

i Display messages about LEDs:
This display message will only appear if all the LEDs have failed.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

b The left or right-hand cornering light is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Left cornering
(Y page 124).
light or Right cor‐
nering light or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left or right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Left dipped beam
(Y page 124).
or Right dipped
beam or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty.

X Observe the separate operating instructions provided by the
Trailer left tail
trailer manufacturer.
lamp or Trailer
right tail lamp

b The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty.

X Observe the separate operating instructions provided by the
Trailer left turn
trailer manufacturer.
signal or Trailer
right turn signal
 Display messages 273

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

b The trailer brake lamp is faulty.
X Observe the separate operating instructions provided by the
Trailer brake lamp
trailer manufacturer.

b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Rear left turn sig‐
(Y page 124).
nal or Rear right
turn signal or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Front left turn
(Y page 124).
signal or Front
right turn signal or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is

faulty.
Left mirror turn X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
signal or Right
mirror turn signal

b The third brake lamp is faulty.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Third brake lamp

b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is faulty.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Left-hand tail
lamp/brake lamp or
Right-hand tail
lamp/brake lamp

b The left or right-hand main-beam headlamp is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Left main
(Y page 124).
beamorRight main
beam or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left or right-hand licence plate lamp is faulty.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Licence plate
lamp,
leftorLicence
plate lamp, right

Z
274 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

b The left-hand or right-hand front foglamp is faulty.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Left fog
lamporRight fog
lamp

b The rear foglamp is faulty.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Rear fog lamp

b The front left or front right parking lamp is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Front left parking
(Y page 124).
lamp or Front
right parking lamp or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left or right-hand reversing lamp is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Left revers. lamp
(Y page 125).
or Right revers.
lamp or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left-hand or right-hand daytime driving lamp is faulty.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Left daytime driv‐
ing lamporRight
daytime driving
lamp

b The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lights remain available

without the Intelligent Light System.
Intell. Light Sys‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
tem inoperative

b The exterior lighting is faulty.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Malfunction See
Owner's Manual Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown.
X Check the fuses (Y page 354).
X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes
as you do so.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages 275

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

b The light sensor is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
AUTO lights inoper‐
ative

b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A
warning tone also sounds.
Switch off lights X Turn the light switch to Ã.

Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.

Assist inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoper-

Assist currently ative. Possible causes:
unavailable See Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.
Owner's Manual Rvisibility
is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X Clean the windscreen.

If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again,

the Adaptive Highbeam Assist available again message is
displayed.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Engine (4-button multifunction steering wheel)

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Coolant The coolant level is too low.
washer fluid X Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes before doing
so (Y page 331).
X If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.

? The fan motor is faulty.

X If the coolant temperature is below 120 † you can continue
driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.

Z
276 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

? The coolant is too hot.

A warning tone also sounds.
Stop vehicle Sw.
eng. Off G WARNING
Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine
is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into
the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which
can occur just by opening the bonnet.
There is a risk of injury.
X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-
fic conditions, and switch off the engine.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).
X Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by frozen slush.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out
and the coolant temperature is below 120 †. The engine may
otherwise be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.
X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †.

# The battery is not being charged.

A warning tone also sounds.
Possible causes:
Rfaulty alternator
Rtorn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics

X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-

fic conditions, and switch off the engine.
X Open the bonnet.
X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.

If the poly-V-belt is torn:

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the poly-V-belt is OK:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages 277

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
A warning tone also sounds.
Checking the
X Check the oil level when next refuelling, at the latest
engine oil level
(Y page 329).
X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 330).
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual.

8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated if the fuel level
Reserve fuel level drops into the reserve range.
X Refuel at the nearest filling station.

C There is very little fuel in the fuel tank.

The auxiliary heating cannot be operated.
X Refuel at the nearest filling station without fail.

¸ Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must
be replaced.
Replace air cleaner X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The
water must be drained off.
Clean the fuel fil‐ X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ter
Top up AdBlue The AdBlue® level has fallen below the reserve range. A warning
-Workshop- tone also sounds.
X Have AdBlue® refilled as soon as possible at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.

Top up AdBlue The AdBlue® level is only sufficient for the indicated distance. A
No start: ..km warning tone also sounds.
X Have AdBlue® refilled as soon as possible at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.

Top up AdBlue The AdBlue® tank is empty. A warning tone also sounds. You can
Engine start not no longer start the engine.
poss. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Check The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also

AdBlue sounds.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
278 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

AdBlue: No start The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also

in ..km sounds.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

AdBlue The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also

Engine start not sounds. You can no longer start the engine.
possible X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Engine (12-button multifunction steering wheel)

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

+ The coolant level is too low.

Top up coolant See ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
Owner's Manual cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
X Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes before doing
so (Y page 331).
X If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.

? The fan motor is faulty.

X If the coolant temperature is below 120 † you can continue
driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.
 Display messages 279

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

? The coolant is too hot.
A warning tone also sounds.
Coolant Stop vehi‐
cle Switch engine G WARNING
off Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine
is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into
the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which
can occur just by opening the bonnet.
There is a risk of injury.
X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-
fic conditions, and switch off the engine.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).
X Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by frozen slush.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out
and the coolant temperature is below 120 †. The engine may
otherwise be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.
X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †.

Z
280 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

# The battery is not being charged.

A warning tone also sounds.
Possible causes:
Rfaulty alternator
Rtorn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics

X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-

fic conditions, and switch off the engine.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).
X Open the bonnet.
X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.

If the poly-V-belt is torn:

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the poly-V-belt is OK:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

A warning tone also sounds.
Check eng. oil
X Check the oil level when next refuelling, at the latest
lev. when next
refuelling (Y page 329).
X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 330).
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated if the fuel level
Reserve fuel level drops into the reserve range.
X Refuel at the nearest filling station.

C There is very little fuel in the fuel tank.

The auxiliary heating cannot be operated.
X Refuel at the nearest filling station without fail.
 Display messages 281

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

¸ Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must
be replaced.
Replace air cleaner X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The
water must be drained off.
Clean the fuel fil‐ X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ter

¯ The AdBlue® level has fallen below the reserve range. A warning
tone also sounds.
Refill AdBlue at
workshop See Own‐
X Have AdBlue® refilled as soon as possible at a qualified spe-
er's Manual cialist workshop.

¯ The AdBlue® level is only sufficient for the indicated distance. A

warning tone also sounds.
Refill AdBlue at
workshop No start
X Have AdBlue® refilled as soon as possible at a qualified spe-
in .. km cialist workshop.

¯ The AdBlue® tank is empty. A warning tone also sounds. You can
no longer start the engine.
Refill AdBlue at
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
workshop Eng.
start not possible

¯ The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also

sounds.
Check AdBlue See
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Owner's Manual

¯ The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also

sounds.
Eng. start not pos‐
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
sible in ..km

¯ The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also

sounds. You can no longer start the engine.
Engine start not
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
possible

Z
282 Display messages

Driving systems (4-button multifunction steering wheel)

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ë The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.

A warning tone also sounds.
Off
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 196).

The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly

depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function
(Y page 196).

Cruise ctrl. / LIM SPEEDTRONIC and cruise control are malfunctioning.

Inoperative A warning tone also sounds.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Limit While depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point
--- km/h (kickdown), SPEEDTRONIC cannot be activated.

Cruise control A condition for activating cruise control has not been met.
¯--- km/h You have tried to store a speed below 30 km/h, for example.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the
speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control
(Y page 183).

120 km/h Only for certain countries: the maximum speed has been excee-
120 km/h ded.
X Drive more slowly.
 Display messages 283

Driving systems (12-button multifunction steering wheel)

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue

or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone
Attention Assist: also sounds.
Take a break! X If necessary, take a break.

During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so that you
get enough rest.

À ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Attention Assist
inoperative

à DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) is deactivated due to a fault.

X Have DSR checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
inoperative
Speed Limit Assist Speed Limit Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
currently unavail‐ Possible causes:
able See Owner's Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.
Manual Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).
X Clean the windscreen.

If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the dis-
play message disappears.
Speed Limit Assist is operational again.

Speed Limit Assist Speed Limit Assist is faulty.

inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ë The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.

A warning tone also sounds.
Off
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 196).

The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly

depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function
(Y page 196).

Z
284 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Radar sensor deac‐ The radar sensor system is deactivated.

tivated See Own‐ X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 254).
er's Manual

Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated
Assist currently and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes:
unavailable See Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.
Owner's Man‐ Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
ualorActive Lane
Keeping Assist cur‐ Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.
rently unavailable Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
See Owner's Manual Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message
goes out.
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational
again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).
X Clean the windscreen.

Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.
Assist inopera‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
tiveorActive Lane
Keeping Assist
inoperative

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inop-
currently unavail‐ erative.
able See Owner's You have established the electrical connection between the trailer
ManualorActive and your vehicle.
Blind Spot Assist X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display mes-
currently unavail‐
sage.
able See Owner's
Manual Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated while
towing a trailer.
 Display messages 285

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inop-
erative. Possible causes:
Rthe sensors are dirty.
Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
range.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-
tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-
rors.
Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message
goes out.
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).
X Clean the sensors (Y page 336).
X Restart the engine.

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is faulty.
inopera‐ The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-
tiveorActive Blind rors.
Spot Assist inoper‐ X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ative

Park Assist cancel‐ The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been
led fastened.
X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the
driver's door closed.

You inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while

steering intervention was active.
X While steering intervention is active, make sure not to touch the
multifunction steering wheel.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.

X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 201).

Z
286 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Park Assist inoper‐ You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking
ative manoeuvres.
Active Parking Assist will become available again after approx-
imately ten minutes (Y page 201).
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Switch off and restart the engine.

If the display message continues to be displayed:

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

PARKTRONIC is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.

switched off The display message disappears automatically.
DISTRONIC PLUS off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 188). If it was
deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been tempo-
available again rarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 188).
DISTRONIC PLUS cur‐ DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes:
rently unavailable Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
See Owner's Manual R
the sensors in the radiator trim and in the bumpers are dirty.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-
tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.

A warning tone also sounds.

Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message
goes out.
DISTRONIC is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).
X Clean the sensors in the radiator grille and the bumper
(Y page 336).
X Restart the engine.
 Display messages 287

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is faulty. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may
inoperative also have failed.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no
inactive longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.

- - - km/h X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 188).

DISTRONIC PLUS and DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC are faulty. A warning tone
SPEEDTRONIC also sounds.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise control and SPEEDTRONIC and cruise control are malfunctioning.

SPEEDTRONIC inop‐ A warning tone also sounds.
erative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Limit While depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point
--- km/h (kickdown), SPEEDTRONIC cannot be activated.

Cruise control A condition for activating cruise control has not been met.
- - - km/h You have tried to store a speed below 30 km/h, for example.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the
speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control
(Y page 183).

120 km/h! Only for certain countries: the maximum speed has been excee-
Maximum speed ded.
exceeded In addition, the multifunction display shows 120 km/h!.
X Drive more slowly.

Z
288 Display messages

Tyres (4-button multifunction steering wheel)

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Check The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant
tyres loss in pressure.
A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
With tyre pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-
lowing hazards:
Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may
greatly impair tyre traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do
so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).
X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tyre (Y page 342).
X Check the tyre pressures and, if necessary, correct the tyre
pressure.
X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the tyre
pressure is correct (Y page 363).

Check tyres The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display mes-
Restart system sage and has not been restarted since.
X Set the correct tyre pressure in all four tyres.
X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 363).

Run Flat Indicator The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty.
inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages 289

Tyres (12-button multifunction steering wheel)

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Tyre pressure The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant
Check tyres loss in pressure.
A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
With tyre pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-
lowing hazards:
Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may
greatly impair tyre traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do
so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).
X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tyre (Y page 342).
X Check the tyre pressures and, if necessary, correct the tyre
pressure.
X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the tyre
pressure is correct (Y page 363).

Run Flat Indicator The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display mes-
then restart Run sage and has not been restarted since.
Flat Indicator X Set the correct tyre pressure in all four tyres.
X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 363).

Run Flat Indicator The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty.
inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Rectify The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre
tyre pressure pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity
(Y page 364).
X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.
X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 366).

Z
290 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Check The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly.
tyres The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
With tyre pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-
lowing hazards:
Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may
greatly impair tyre traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do
so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).
X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tyre (Y page 342).
X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 364).
X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.

Warning The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The
tyre defect wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
If you drive with a flat tyre, there is a risk of the following hazards:
Ra flat tyre affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.
Rcontinued driving with a flat tyre will cause excessive heat build-
up and possibly a fire.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do
so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).
X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tyre (Y page 342).
 Display messages 291

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

Tyre press. monitor Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received
currently unavail‐ from the wheel sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is temporarily
able malfunctioning.
X Drive on.
The tyre pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
cause has been rectified.

Wheel sensor(s) There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or several
missing wheels. The pressure of the affected tyre is not displayed in the
multifunction display.
X Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.

Tyre press. moni‐ The wheels fitted do not have a suitable tyre pressure sensor. The
tor inoperative No tyre pressure monitor is deactivated.
wheel sensors X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.
The tyre pressure monitor is activated automatically after driv-
ing for a few minutes.

Tyre pressure mon‐ The tyre pressure monitor is faulty.

itor X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Inoperative

Vehicle (4-button multifunction steering wheel)

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

To start engine, You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
shift to P or N position R or D.
X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

P You have switched off the engine with the Start/Stop button and
Select Park (P) opened the driver's door.
You wanted to lock the vehicle.
A warning tone also sounds.
or
You have switched off the engine with the Start/Stop button and
opened the driver's door with the transmission in position N.
X Shift the transmission to position P.

Z
292 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

A The tailgate is open.

G WARNING
When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle
interior if the tailgate is open.
There is a risk of poisoning.
X Close the tailgate.

? Vehicles with an anti-theft alarm system: the bonnet is open. A

warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
The open bonnet may then block your view when the vehicle is in
motion.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).
X Close the bonnet.

C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all doors.

Pwr. steering The power steering assistance is faulty.

Malfunction A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
You will need to use more force to steer.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
specialist workshop.
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Top up The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped
washer fluid below the minimum.
X Top up the washer fluid (Y page 332).
 Display messages 293

Vehicle (12-button multifunction steering wheel)

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
To start engine, You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
shift to either P position R or D.
or N X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Risk of rolling You have switched off the engine with the Start/Stop button and
Select Park (P) opened the driver's door.
You wanted to lock the vehicle.
A warning tone also sounds.
or
You have switched off the engine with the Start/Stop button and
opened the driver's door with the transmission in position N.
X Shift the transmission to position P.

A The tailgate is open.

G WARNING
When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle
interior if the tailgate is open.
There is a risk of poisoning.
X Close the tailgate.

? Vehicles with an anti-theft alarm system: the bonnet is open. A

warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
The open bonnet may then block your view when the vehicle is in
motion.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).
X Close the bonnet.

C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all doors.

Z
294 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

& The on-board voltage is too low. The auxiliary heating has switched
itself off or cannot be switched on (Y page 146).
inoperative Bat‐ X Drive for a longer distance.
tery low
The battery is being charged. The auxiliary heating is operational
again as soon as the on-board electrical system voltage is suf-
ficient.

& There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating cannot
be switched on (Y page 146).
inoperative Refuel X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
vehicle

& The auxiliary heating has a temporary malfunction or is faulty.

X When the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled
inoperative See
down, make up to four attempts to switch on the auxiliary heat-
Owner's Manual
ing, waiting several minutes between each attempt
(Y page 146).
X If the auxiliary heating does not switch on, consult a qualified
specialist workshop.

Ð The power steering assistance is faulty.

A warning tone also sounds.
Power steering mal‐
function See Own‐ G WARNING
er's Manual You will need to use more force to steer.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
specialist workshop.
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Telephone No Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/

service receiver range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol
appears in the multifunction display.

¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped
below the minimum.
Top up washer fluid X
Top up the washer fluid (Y page 332).
 Display messages 295

Key (4-button multifunction steering wheel)

On-board computer and displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Key does not You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock.
belong to vehicle X Use the correct key.

+ The key needs to be replaced.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
You need a new key

+ The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged.

X Change the batteries (Y page 83).
Change battery
Key not detected The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.
(Red display message) A warning tone also sounds.
If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle
centrally or start the engine.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).
X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.

The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running

because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).
X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary.

Key not detected The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.

(White display mes- X Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS-GO functions
sage) in the vehicle.
If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:
X Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS-GO functions
in the vehicle.
X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary.

+ The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during
locking.
Key still in vehi‐ X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle.
cle

Z
296 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

+ KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warn-

ing tone also sounds.
Insert key X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired
position.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Close doors At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.
to lock veh. X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.

Key (12-button multifunction steering wheel)

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

 You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock.

X Use the correct key.
Key does not
belong to vehicle

 The key needs to be replaced.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Replace key

 The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged.

X Change the batteries (Y page 83).
Change key batter‐
ies

 The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.

A warning tone also sounds.
Key not detected
(red display message) If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle
centrally or start the engine.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174)
(Y page 174).
X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.

The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running

because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves.
A warning tone also sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).
X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary.
 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 297

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

 The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.
X Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS-GO functions
Key not detected
in the vehicle.
(white display mes-
sage) If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:
X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary.

 The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during
locking.
Key still in vehi‐ X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle.
cle

 The KEYLESS-GO key is not continually detected.

KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warn-
Remove starting ing tone also sounds.
button, then
X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired
insert key
position.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

 At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.
Close doors to
lock vehicle

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Seat belts

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ü The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger
Only for certain coun- to fasten their seat belts.
tries: the red seat belt X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 54).
warning lamp lights up
for six seconds after
the engine starts.
ü The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
Only for certain coun- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 54).
tries: the red seat belt The warning tone ceases.
warning lamp lights up
after the engine starts.
In addition, a warning
tone sounds for up to
six seconds.

Z
298 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

ü The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt.

The red seat belt warn- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 54).
ing lamp lights up after The warning lamp goes out.
the engine starts, as
soon as the driver's or There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
the front-passenger X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
door is closed. them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out.
ü The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt. At the
The red seat belt warn- same time, the car is being driven faster than 25 km/h or has been
ing lamp flashes and an briefly driven faster than 25 km/h.
intermittent audible X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 54).
warning sounds. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. At the same time,

the car is being driven faster than 25 km/h or has been briefly
driven faster than 25 km/h.
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.
 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 299

Safety systems

On-board computer and displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
J There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
The red brake system G WARNING
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is run- The braking efficiency may be impaired.
ning. A warning tone There is a risk of an accident.
also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).
X Do not top up the brake fluid. Topping up will not rectify the
fault.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
! ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) has been deactivated due to a fault.
The yellow ABS warning For this reason, BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Electronic
lamp is lit while the Stability Program), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD func-
engine is running. tion, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer
stabilisation are also deactivated, for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.
The danger of skidding and having an accident increases.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other
systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic trans-
mission, will not be available.

Z
300 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

! ABS is temporarily unavailable. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®,

The yellow ABS warning EBD (electronic brake force distribution), PRE-SAFE®,
lamp is lit while the PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive
engine is running. brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisation, for example, are also
deactivated.
Possible causes:
Rself-diagnosisis not yet complete.
Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steer-
ing movements at a speed above 20 km/h.
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 301

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

! EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, ABS, BAS,
The yellow ABS warning BAS PLUS, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD func-
lamp is lit while the tion, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer
engine is running. A stabilisation, for example, are not available either.
warning tone also ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
sounds.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.
The danger of skidding and having an accident increases.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

J÷å! ABS and ESP® are not available due to a fault. Therefore, BAS, BAS
The red brake warning PLUS, EBD, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill
lamp, the yellow ESP® start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisa-
and ESP® OFF warning tion, for example, are not available either.
lamps and the yellow ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
ABS warning lamp are
lit while the engine is G WARNING
running. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.
The danger of skidding and having an accident increases.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
302 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

÷ä ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of

The yellow ESP® warn- skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
ing lamp flashes while Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
the vehicle is in motion. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when
pulling away.
X Accelerate more gently while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.

Exceptions: (Y page 71)

å ESP® is deactivated.
The yellow ESP® OFF G WARNING
warning lamp is lit while
® ®
the engine is running. If ESP is switched off, ESP is unable to stabilise the vehicle.
The danger of skidding and having an accident increases.
X Reactivate ESP®.
Exceptions: (Y page 71)
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP® cannot be activated:

X Drive on carefully.
X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

÷äå ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD
The yellow ESP® and function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer
ESP® OFF warning stabilisation are not available due to a malfunction.
lamps are lit while the ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
engine is running.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.
The danger of skidding and having an accident increases.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 303

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

÷å ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and
The yellow ESP® and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily unavailable.
ESP® OFF warning The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may
lamps are lit while the also have failed.
engine is running. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.
The danger of skidding and having an accident increases.
X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steer-
ing movements at a speed above 20 km/h.
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6 There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

The red SRS warning tem).
lamp is lit while the G WARNING
engine is running.
The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered uninten-
tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
This poses an increased risk of injury.
X Drive on carefully.
X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop immedi-
ately.
For further information about the Supplemental Restraint System,
see (Y page 45).

Z
304 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Engine
On-board computer and displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

; There may be a fault, for example:
The yellow engine diag- Rin the engine management
nostics warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system
lights up while the Rin the exhaust system
engine is running.
Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with petrol engines)
Rin the fuel system

The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may
be running in emergency mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified
specialist workshop.

Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry
(Y page 173).
X Start the engine three to four times after refuelling.
If the yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp goes out, emer-
gency running mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be
checked.
8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
The yellow reserve fuel Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated if the fuel level
warning lamp lights up drops into the reserve range.
while the engine is run- X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
ning.
? The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is
The red coolant warn- faulty.
ing lamp lights up while The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a
the engine is running risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
and the coolant tem- X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-
perature gauge is at the fic conditions, and switch off the engine. Do not continue driving
start of the scale. under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 305

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

? The coolant level is too low.
The red coolant warn- If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator
ing lamp comes on may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be mal-
while the engine is run- functioning.
ning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled
sufficiently.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-
fic conditions, and switch off the engine.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).
X Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by frozen slush.
X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant (Y page 331).
Observe the warning notes as you do so.
X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine
cooling system checked.
X If the coolant temperature is below 120 † you can continue
driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.
? The coolant temperature has exceeded 120 †. The airflow to the
The red coolant warn- engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too
ing lamp comes on low.
while the engine is run- G WARNING
ning. A warning tone
also sounds. The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine
is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into
the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which
can occur just by opening the bonnet.
There is a risk of injury.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-
fic conditions, and switch off the engine.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).
X Wait until the engine has cooled down.

Z
306 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

On-board computer and displays

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by frozen slush.
X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant (Y page 331).
Observe the warning notes as you do so.
X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine
cooling system checked.
X If the coolant temperature is below 120 † you can continue
driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.

Driving systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

· G WARNING
The red distance warn- The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed
ing lamp lights up while selected.
the vehicle is in motion.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Increase the distance.

· G WARNING
The red distance warn- You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line
ing lamp lights up while of travel at too high a speed.
the vehicle is in motion.
There is a risk of an accident.
A warning tone also
sounds. X Be prepared to brake immediately.
X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to
brake or take evasive action.
More information about DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 188) and
PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 74).
 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 307

Tyres

On-board computer and displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
h The tyre pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at
The yellow tyre pres- least one of the tyres.
sure monitor warning G WARNING
lamp (pressure loss/
malfunction) is lit. With tyre pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-
lowing hazards:
Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may
greatly impair tyre traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do
so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174).
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tyre (Y page 342).
X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 364).
X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.

h The tyre pressure monitor is faulty.

The yellow tyre pres- G WARNING
sure monitor warning
lamp (pressure loss/ The system is possibly unable to recognise or register low tyre
malfunction) flashes for pressure.
approximately one There is a risk of an accident.
minute and then X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
remains lit. display.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z
308
 309

Useful information ............................ 310

Loading guidelines ............................ 310
Stowage areas .................................. 310
Features ............................................. 319

Stowing and features

310 Stowage areas

Useful information or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle

(including occupants).
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Rthe luggage compartment is the preferred
els, series and optional equipment for your place to carry objects.
vehicle that were available at the time of Rposition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-
going to press. National variations are pos- sible and as low down in the load compart-
sible. Note that your vehicle may not be ment as possible.
equipped with all of the functions descri- Rthe load must not protrude above the upper
bed. This is also the case for systems and edge of the seat backrests.
Stowing and features

functions relevant to safety. Ralways place the load against the rear or
i Read the information on qualified special- front seat backrests. Make sure that the
ist workshops: (Y page 28). seat backrests are securely locked into
place.
Ralways place the load behind unoccupied
Loading guidelines seats if possible.
Ruse the lashing eyelets and the luggage
G WARNING nets to transport loads and luggage.
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or Ronly use lashing eyelets and fastening com-
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip ponents that are suitable for the weight and
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle size of the load.
occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially Rhook in the safety net when carrying a load,
when braking or abruptly changing directions. if available.
Always store objects so that they cannot be Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong and
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or wear-resistant lashing material. Pad sharp
loads against slipping or tipping before the edges for protection.
journey.
i Load restraints are available at any quali-
G WARNING fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust Benz Service Centre.
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
is open when the engine is running, particu-
larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes Stowage areas
could enter the passenger compartment. Stowage spaces
There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the tail- Important safety notes
gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
G WARNING
The handling characteristics of a laden vehi- If you do not correctly store objects in the
cle are dependent on the distribution of the vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung
load within the vehicle. For this reason, you around, thus striking vehicle occupants.
should observe the following notes when There is a risk of injury, especially when brak-
transporting a load: ing or abruptly changing directions.
Rwhen transporting a load, never exceed the
maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
 Stowage areas 311

RAlways store objects so that they cannot be X To lock: insert the emergency key element
flung around in these or in similar situa- into the lock and turn it 90° clockwise to
tions. position 2.
RAlways make sure that objects do not pro- X To unlock: insert the emergency key ele-
trude from stowage compartments, lug- ment into the lock and turn it 90° anti-
gage nets or stowage nets. clockwise to position 1.
RClose lockable stowage compartments
i The glove compartment can be ventilated
while driving.
(Y page 151).
RStow and secure objects that are heavy,

Stowing and features

hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too Stowage compartment in the centre con-
large in the luggage compartment. sole

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 310).

Front stowage compartments

Glove compartment

X To open: slide cover : in the direction of

the arrow.

Stowage compartment/telephone com-

partment under the armrest

X To open: pull handle : and open glove

compartment flap ;.
X To close: fold glove compartment flap ;
upwards until it engages.
The glove compartment can only be locked
and unlocked using the emergency key ele-
ment.

X To open: press left-hand button ; or right-

hand button :.
The stowage compartment opens.
i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a
USB port and an AUX-IN jack or a Media
Interface are installed in the stowage com-
partment. A Media Interface is a universal
interface for portable audio equipment, e.g.
Z
312 Stowage areas

for an iPod® or MP3 player (see the sepa- Rear stowage compartments
rate Audio or COMAND Online operating
instructions). Stowage compartment in the rear com-
partment
Before using these connections, you must
remove the mobile phone bracket (see the
separate installation instructions) and fold
up the preinstalled mobile phone holder
(Y page 323).
Stowage compartment under the front
Stowing and features

seats
G WARNING
If you exceed the maximum permitted load of
the stowage compartment, the cover is
unable to restrain the objects. Objects may
be thrown out of the stowage compartment X To open: fold down seat armrest ;.
and hit vehicle occupants as a result. There is X Fold cover : of the armrest upwards.
a risk of injury, particularly in the event of
sudden braking or a sudden change in direc-
tion. Stowage net
Always observe the maximum load of the
Stowage nets are located in the front-
stowage compartment. Stow and secure
passenger footwell and on the left-hand side
heavy objects in the luggage compartment.
in the luggage compartment.
The maximum permissible load of the stow- Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 310)
age compartment is 1.5 kg. and the safety notes regarding stowage
spaces (Y page 310).

Enlarging the luggage compartment

Important safety notes
G WARNING
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold for-
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
X To open: pull handle : up and fold RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be
cover ; forwards. pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench
seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The
seat belt cannot protect as intended and
could result in additional injury.
RObjects or loads in the boot/luggage com-
partment cannot be restrained by the seat
backrest.
This poses an increased risk of injury.
 Stowage areas 313

Before every trip, make sure that the seat Folding the rear seat backrest back
backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat
are engaged before every trip.

! Before folding the rear seat backrest for-

wards, make sure that the head restraints
are pushed in (lowest detent). Otherwise,
the front seats, the armrests and the Rear
Seat Entertainment System could be dam-
aged.

Stowing and features

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 310).
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backr-
ests can be folded forwards separately to : Backrest
increase the luggage compartment capacity. ; Lock verification indicator
= Backrest release handle
Folding the rear seat backrest forward X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
forward if necessary.
! Make sure that the seat belt does not
become trapped when folding the rear seat
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-
aged.
X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages.
Red lock status indicator ; is no longer
visible.
X Adjust the head restraints if necessary
X Fully insert the backrest head restraints (Y page 105).
(Y page 105). X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary.

forward if necessary.
X Pull left-hand or right-hand release han-
dle ; of the seat backrest forwards. Securing a load
Corresponding seat backrest : is Lashing eyelets
released.
X Fold backrest : forwards. G WARNING
The Top Tether anchorages cannot secure a
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
load. If you secure a load with the Top Tether
back if necessary.
anchorages, the Top Tether anchorages could
be pulled out during braking, abrupt changes
in direction or in the event of an accident. The
load could slip, tip over or be flung around and
thereby collide with vehicle occupants. There
is a risk of injury.
Only use the lashing eyelets when securing a
load.

Z
314 Stowage areas

Observe the following notes on securing Bag hook

loads:
G WARNING
RObserve the loading guidelines
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects
(Y page 310).
or items of luggage. Objects or items of lug-
RSecure the load using the lashing eyelets.
gage could be flung around and thereby hit
RDistribute the load on the lashing eyelets vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly
evenly. changing directions. There is a risk of injury.
RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.
a load, as these are only intended as an Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
Stowing and features

anti-slip protection for light loads. objects on the bag hooks.

RDo not route lashing materials across sharp
edges or corners. ! The bag hook can bear a maximum load
RPad sharp edges for protection. of 5 kg. Do not use it to secure a load.
There are four lashing eyelets in the luggage There is one bag hook on the left side wall in
compartment and two in the rear-compart- the luggage compartment and there are two
ment footwells. hooks on the right and left of the lower D-pillar
trim.

: Lashing eyelets in the load compartment

Luggage compartment cover

Important safety notes
G WARNING
On its own, the luggage compartment cover
cannot secure or restrain heavy objects,
items of luggage and heavy loads. You could
be hit by an unsecured load during sudden
changes in direction, braking or in the event
: Lashing eyelets in the rear-compartment of an accident. There is an increased risk of
footwell injury or even fatal injury.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
using lashing material, even if you are using
the luggage compartment cover.
 Stowage areas 315

! When loading the vehicle, make sure that Fitting/removing the luggage compart-
you do not stack the load in the luggage ment cover
compartment higher than the lower edge of
the side windows. Do not place heavy
objects on top of the luggage compartment
cover.
The luggage compartment cover is located
behind the rear bench seat backrest.
i You can fold up the solid section of the

Stowing and features

luggage compartment cover approximately
45° to facilitate loading the luggage com-
partment.
X To remove: make sure that luggage com-
Extending and retracting the luggage
partment cover : is rolled up.
compartment cover
X Press handle ; on the right underside to
the left.
X Remove luggage compartment cover :.

X To fit: attach luggage compartment

cover : to the opening on the left-hand
side.
X Press handle ; to the left.
X Allow luggage compartment cover : to
engage in the appropriate recess.

X To extend: pull luggage compartment

cover : back and clip it into the retainers Safety net
on the left and right.
Important safety notes
X To retract: unhook luggage compartment
cover : from the retainers on the left and G WARNING
right and guide it forwards by the grab han- On its own, the safety net cannot secure or
dle until it is fully retracted. restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and
heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured
load during sudden changes in direction,
braking or in the event of an accident. There
is an increased risk of injury or even fatal
injury.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
using lashing material, even if you are using
the safety net.

It is important to use a safety net if you load

the vehicle with small objects above the seat

Z
316 Stowage areas

backrests. For safety reasons, always use a Attaching the safety net
safety net when transporting a load.

Preparing the safety net

The safety net can be used in two different
positions (behind the B-pillar or the C-pillar).
Stowing and features

Safety net installed behind the C-pillar

X Insert guide rod ; into retainer : in the
direction of the arrow.
X Slide guide rod ; forwards into
retainer : in the direction of the arrow.
RThe brackets behind B-pillar : are
required for the luggage compartment Tightening the safety net
enlargement (Y page 312).
The corresponding lashing eyelets to
tighten the net are located in the footwell
of the rear bench seat (Y page 313).
RThe brackets behind C-pillar ; are
required for the luggage compartment
behind the rear bench seat.
The corresponding lashing eyelets to ten-
sion the net are located in the luggage com-
partment (Y page 313).
The safety net is located in the loading tray in
the stowage well under the luggage compart- Seat belt reel holder behind the front seats
ment floor (Y page 317). X Insert belt hook : into lashing eyelet ;
X Open both Velcro fasteners and remove the in the direction of the arrow.
safety net. X Pull tensioning strap = by the loose end in
X Unroll and unfold the safety net. the direction of the arrow until the safety
The upper and lower guide rods must net is tight.
engage audibly. X After driving a short distance, check the
tension of the safety net and retighten it if
necessary.
 Stowage areas 317

Releasing the safety net Coat hooks on the tailgate

Stowing and features

Seat belt reel holder behind the front seats : Coat hook
X Pull belt adjuster : upwards in the direc-
tion of the arrow to reduce the tension on
the tensioning strap. Stowage well underneath the luggage
X Unhook belt hook ; from lashing eyelet
compartment floor
=. G WARNING
If you drive when the luggage compartment
Detaching and storing the safety net floor is open, objects could be flung around,
thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk
X Detach guide rod ; from bracket :
of injury, especially when braking or abruptly
(Y page 316). changing directions.
X Press the red button on the upper and lower
Always close the luggage compartment floor
guide rods. before a journey.
X Fold the safety net and roll it up. To prevent
noise, roll the belt adjuster and belt hook The safety net, the ball coupling, the collaps-
into the safety net. ible spare wheel, etc. are stowed beneath the
X Put the safety net in the loading tray in the luggage compartment floor.
stowage well under the luggage compart-
ment floor.

X Pull both Velcro fasteners ; through slots

= in loading tray : and fasten the safety
net.

Z
318 Stowage areas

X To open: open the tailgate. X Fold the luggage compartment floor down.
X Holding the ribbing, press handle : down- X Press the luggage compartment floor down
wards ;. until it engages.
Handle : folds upwards.
X Swing the luggage compartment floor
upwards using handle : until it rests Roof carrier
against the luggage compartment cover. Important safety notes
G WARNING
Stowing and features

When a load is transported on the roof, the

vehicle's centre of gravity rises and the han-
dling changes. If you exceed the maximum
roof load, the handling as well as steering and
braking characteristics are severely affected.
There is a risk of an accident.
Always observe the maximum roof load and
adapt your driving style.

X Release hook = from the bracket on the ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
underside of the luggage compartment only use roof carriers that have been tested
floor. and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
This helps to prevent damage to the vehi-
cle.
Position the load on the roof carrier in such
a way that the vehicle will not sustain dam-
age even when it is in motion.
Ensure that, depending on the vehicle's
equipment, you can raise the panorama
sliding sunroof fully and open the tailgate
fully when the roof carrier is fitted.
The maximum roof load is 75 kg.
An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof
X Engage hook = into rain trough ?. load may become detached from the vehicle.
You must therefore ensure that you observe
i Stowage compartments A and B can be the roof carrier manufacturer's installation
used to stow small, light and flat objects. instructions.
! Before you close the tailgate, unhook the
hook from the rain trough and fold the lug- Attaching the roof carrier
gage compartment floor down. X Secure the roof carrier to the roof rails.
X To close: unhook hook = from rain X Observe the manufacturer's installation
trough ?. instructions.
X Fasten hook = to the bracket on the
underside of the luggage compartment
floor.
 Features 319

Features X Fold the cover of the rear seat armrest back

down again if necessary.
Cup holders X To close: lift the cover of the rear seat arm-

Important safety notes rest.

Swing cup holder ; back until it engages.
! Only use the cup holders for containers of
the right size and which have lids. The
drinks could otherwise spill. Sun visors
Cup holder in the front centre console Overview

Stowing and features

: Cup holders : Mirror light
; Bracket
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest = Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
! Do not sit on or support your body weight ? Vanity mirror
on the rear seat armrest when it is folded A Mirror cover
down, as you could otherwise damage it.
! Close the cup holder before folding the Vanity mirror in the sun visor
rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor
holder could be damaged. is clipped into retainer ; and mirror cover
A has been folded up.

Glare from the side

X Fold down the sun visor.
X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;.
X Swing the sun visor to the side.

Ashtray
X Fold down the rear seat armrest. Front ashtray
X To open: raise the rear seat armrest cover.
! The stowage space under the ashtray is
X Press release catch :.
not heat resistant. Before placing lit ciga-
Cup holder ; folds out forwards. rettes in the ashtray, make sure that the

Z
320 Features

ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the X To refit: press ashtray = into the holder
stowage space could be damaged. until engages.
X Close the lid of ashtray =.
Vehicles with manual transmission
X To close: pull cover : back.

Rear-compartment ashtray
Stowing and features

i You can remove the ashtray insert and

use the resulting compartment for stow-
age.
X To open: slide cover : forwards until it X To open: pull cover ; out by its top edge.
engages. X To remove the insert: press release but-
X To remove the insert: hold insert = by ton = and lift the insert up and out.
the ribbing at the sides and lift it up ; and X To fit the insert: fit insert : from above
out. into the holder and press down into the
X To refit the insert: press insert = into the holder until it engages.
holder until it engages.
X To close: briefly press cover : at the
front. Cigarette lighter
The cover moves back. G WARNING
Vehicles with automatic transmission You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
lighter.
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:
Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls
Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
There is a risk of fire and injury.
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is
out of reach of children. Never leave children
unattended in the vehicle.
X To open: slide cover : forwards.
X To remove: open the cover of ashtray =. Your attention must always be focused on the
X Hold ashtray = at the sides and lift it traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette
up ; and out. lighter when road and traffic conditions per-
mit.
 Features 321

Vehicles with manual transmission 12 V sockets

General notes
The sockets can be used for accessories with
a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accesso-
ries include such items as bulbs or chargers
for mobile phones.
If you use the sockets for long periods when
the engine is switched off, the battery may

Stowing and features

discharge.
X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition
lock (Y page 155).
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 155). i An emergency cut-off ensures that the on-
X To open: slide cover : forwards until it board voltage does not drop too low. If the
engages. on-board voltage is too low, the power to
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
the sockets is automatically cut. This
ensures that there is sufficient power to
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automati-
start the engine.
cally when the heating element is red-hot.
X To close: briefly press cover : at the
Socket in the front centre console
front.
The cover moves back. Vehicles with manual transmission

Vehicles with automatic transmission

X To open: slide cover : forwards until it

engages.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition X Lift up the cover of socket ;.
lock (Y page 155). X To close: briefly press cover : at the
X To open: slide cover : forwards. front.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;. The cover retracts.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automati-
cally when the heating element is red-hot.
X To close: pull cover : back.

Z
322 Features

Vehicles with automatic transmission cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There
is a risk of an accident.
Use this device only when the vehicle is sta-
tionary.

i You must observe the legal requirements

for the country in which you are currently
driving when operating mobile communi-
cations equipment in the vehicle.
Stowing and features

If it is permitted by law to operate commu-

nications equipment while the vehicle is in
motion, you may only do so if the traffic sit-
X To open: slide cover : forwards. uation permits. You may otherwise be dis-
X Lift up the cover of socket ;. tracted from the traffic conditions, cause
X To close: pull cover : back.
an accident and injure yourself and others.
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
may cause damage to your health and to the
Socket in the rear-compartment centre
health of others. The use of an exterior aerial
console
takes into consideration the scientific discus-
A socket is fitted in the centre console in the sion surrounding the possible health risk
rear compartment in vehicles with an ashtray posed by electromagnetic fields.
and a cigarette lighter. Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of an
approved exterior aerial. This ensures:
Roptimal mobile phone reception quality in
the vehicle.
Rmutual interference between the vehicle
electronics and mobile phones is mini-
mised.
An exterior aerial has the following advan-
tages:
Rit conducts the electromagnetic fields gen-
erated by a wireless device to the exterior.
X Pull cover ; out by its top edge. Rthe field strength in the vehicle interior is
X Lift up the cover of socket :. lower than in a vehicle that does not have
an exterior aerial.
Information on retrofitting two-way radios
Mobile phone and mobile phones (RF transmitters)
(Y page 380).
Important safety notes
General notes
G WARNING
Operating mobile communications equip- There are various mobile phone brackets that
ment while driving distracts you from paying may be fitted in your vehicle; in some cases,
attention to traffic conditions. This could also these are country-specific.
 Features 323

You can connect a Bluetooth®-capable Mobile phone bracket in the stowage

mobile phone with Audio 20 or COMAND compartment
Online via the Bluetooth® interface. This also
applies if your vehicle is equipped with con-
venience telephony.
More information on suitable mobile phones,
mobile phone brackets and on connecting
Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones with
Audio 20 or COMAND Online can be obtained:

Stowing and features

Rat your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
Ron the Internet at http://www.mercedes-
benz.com/connect
i The functions and services available when You can fold the pre-installed bracket up to
you use the phone depend on your mobile improve access to the stowage space
phone model and service provider. beneath it. Depending on the vehicle's equip-
ment, a USB connection and an AUX-IN con-
Using a mobile phone nection/Media Interface are fitted in the
stowage compartment.
If the mobile phone is inserted in the mobile
X To fold the bracket up: press button :.
phone bracket, the mobile phone will be
charged and connected with the exterior aer- X To fold the bracket down: press the
ial. bracket down and allow it to engage.
X Open the telephone compartment
(Y page 311).
X Place the mobile phone bracket into the Floormat on the driver's side
pre-installed fitting (see the separate G WARNING
installation instructions for the mobile
Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict
phone fitting).
the clearance around the pedals or block a
X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile
depressed pedal. This jeopardises the oper-
phone bracket (see the separate installa- ating and road safety of the vehicle. There is
tion instructions for the mobile phone fit- a risk of an accident.
ting).
Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that
they do not get into the driver's footwell.
Operating the mobile phone Always fit the floormats securely and as pre-
You can operate the telephone using the scribed in order to ensure that there is always
6 and ~ buttons on the luxury multi- sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use
function steering wheel. You can operate loose floormats and do not place several floor-
other mobile phone functions via the on- mats on top of one another.
board computer (Y page 246).
When you remove the key from the ignition
lock, the mobile phone is disconnected from
the hands-free system. Active calls will first
be transferred to the mobile phone directly.

Z
324
Stowing and features Features

X Slide the seat backwards.

X To fit: lay the floormat in the footwell.
X Press studs : onto retainers ;.
X To remove: pull the floormat away from
retainers ;.
X Remove the floormats.

Retrofitted anti-glare film

Retrofitted anti-glare film on the inside of the
windows can interfere with radio/mobile
telephone reception. This is particularly the
case for conductive or metallic-coated films.
You can obtain information about anti-glare
film from a qualified specialist workshop.
 325

Useful information ............................ 326

Service ............................................... 326
Engine compartment ........................ 328
Care .................................................... 332

Maintenance and care

326 Service

Useful information If you notify a qualified specialist workshop of

this display, you will receive a statement on
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- the associated costs.
els, series and optional equipment for your The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
vehicle that were available at the time of does not take into account any periods of
going to press. National variations are pos- time during which the battery is disconnec-
sible. Note that your vehicle may not be ted.
equipped with all of the functions descri- Maintaining the time-dependent service
bed. This is also the case for systems and schedule:
functions relevant to safety.
X Note down the service due date displayed
i Read the information on qualified special- in the multifunction display before discon-
Maintenance and care

ist workshops: (Y page 28). necting the battery.

or
X After reconnecting the battery, subtract
Service
the battery disconnection periods from the
ASSYST PLUS service date shown on the display.

Service messages
Hiding a service message
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display X 4-button multifunction steering wheel:
informs you of the next service due date.
press the C button.
Information on the type of service and service
X 12-button multifunction steering
intervals (see separate Service Booklet).
wheel: press the % or a button.
You can obtain further information from a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Displaying service messages
i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
does not show any information on the X Switch the ignition on.
engine oil level. Observe the notes on the
4-button multifunction steering wheel
engine oil level (Y page 329).
X Use the V button to select the
The multifunction display shows a service Service menu.
message for a few seconds, e.g.: The service due date appears in the multi-
RService A in .. days function display.
RService A due
RService A overdue by ... days
12-button multifunction steering wheel
X Press the = or ; button to select the
Depending on the operating conditions of the
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until Service menu.
the next service due date is displayed. X Press the 9 or : button to select the

The letter indicates which service is due. A ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by
stands for a minor service and B for a major pressing the a button.
service. A number or another letter may be The service due date appears in the multi-
displayed after the letter. This figure indicates function display.
any necessary additional maintenance work
to be performed.
 Service 327

Information about Service for use when you are abroad are to be found
in the "Mercedes-Benz Service24h" section
Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service inter- of the Service Booklet.
val display
! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-
play has been inadvertently reset, this set- AdBlue® service display
ting can be corrected at a qualified special-
i For BlueTEC vehicles only.
ist workshop.
Have service work carried out as described To function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gas
in the Service Booklet. This may otherwise aftertreatment must be operated with the
lead to increased wear and damage to the reducing agent AdBlue®. AdBlue® is topped
major assemblies or the vehicle. up as part of the service. Under normal oper-

Maintenance and care

ating conditions, a full tank of AdBlue® should
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
last until the next service due date.
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset the
ASSYST PLUS service interval display after Depending on how and where the vehicle is
the service work has been carried out. You used, there may be an increase in the
can also obtain further information on main- AdBlue® consumption, resulting in the next
tenance work, for example. service due date being brought forward.
Certain display messages show that
Special service requirements AdBlue® must be topped up, e.g.:
The prescribed service interval is based on Refill AdBlue at workshop See Own‐
normal operation of the vehicle. Service work er's Manual
will need to be performed more often if the
vehicle is operated under arduous conditions Refill AdBlue at workshop No start
or increased loads, for example: in .. km
A warning signal also sounds.
Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi-
ate stops You can no longer start the engine when the
Rif
AdBlue® supply has been used up.
the vehicle is primarily used to travel
short distances R4-button multifunction steering wheel
Rfor frequent operation in mountainous ter- (Y page 277)
rain or on poor road surfaces R12-button multifunction steering wheel

Rif the engine is often left idling for long peri- (Y page 281)
ods ! Have the AdBlue® tank topped up at a
In these or similar operating conditions, have qualified specialist workshop only. The
the air filter, engine oil and oil filter, for exam- vehicle may otherwise be damaged or
ple, changed more frequently. The tyres must soiled.
be checked more frequently if the vehicle is Before taking a trip with your vehicle outside
operated under increased loads. Further
Europe, have the AdBlue® supply checked at
information can be obtained at a qualified
a qualified specialist workshop. If necessary,
specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
have AdBlue® topped up. Before a longer stay
Service Centre.
outside of Europe, consult a qualified special-
Driving abroad ist workshop.
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network Observe the notes on AdBlue®(Y page 386).
is also available in other countries. The You can obtain further information about
Service Hotline's current telephone numbers BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment and
328 Engine compartment

AdBlue® from any Mercedes-Benz Service If you need to access the engine compart-
Centre. ment:
Rswitch off the ignition
Rnever enter the danger area of moving com-
Engine compartment
ponents, e.g. the rotation area of the fan
Bonnet Rkeep items of clothing away from moving
parts
Important safety notes
G WARNING G WARNING
An unlocked bonnet may open while driving The ignition system and the fuel injection sys-
and block your view. There is a risk of an acci- tem operate with a high voltage. If you touch
Maintenance and care

dent. the live components, you could receive an

Never unlock the bonnet while driving. electric shock. There is a danger of injury.
Never touch components of the ignition sys-
G WARNING tem or the fuel injection system when the
When being opened and closed, the bonnet ignition is switched on.
may suddenly fall into the closed position.
There is a risk of injury to persons in the range Opening the bonnet
of movement of the bonnet.
G WARNING
Open and close the bonnet only when nobody
is in the range of movement. Certain components in the engine compart-
ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
G WARNING radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
There is a risk of injury when accessing the
If you open the bonnet while the engine is
engine compartment.
overheating or while there is a fire in the
engine compartment, you could come into As far as possible, allow the engine to cool
contact with hot gases or other leaking down and only touch the following compo-
service products. There is a danger of injury. nents.
Allow an overheating engine to cool down
G WARNING
before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in
the engine compartment, leave the bonnet When the bonnet is open, and the windscreen
closed and notify the fire brigade. wipers are set in motion, you can be injured
by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
G WARNING Always switch off the windscreen wipers and
There are parts in the engine compartment the ignition before opening the bonnet.
that move. Certain components may continue
! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
to run even if the ignition is switched off or
not folded away from the windscreen. Oth-
may suddenly start again, e.g. the radiator
erwise, you could damage the windscreen
fan. There is a danger of injury.
wipers or the bonnet.
X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
switched off.
 Engine compartment 329

tem to display inaccurate values. Some of

these values are legally required and must
always be correct.

Engine oil
General notes on oil level
Depending on your driving style, the vehicle
consumes up to 0.8 l of oil per 1,000 km. The
oil consumption may be higher than this when
X Pull release lever : on the bonnet. the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at

Maintenance and care

The bonnet is released. high engine speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may
be installed at a different location.
When checking the oil level:
Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.
Rthe engine should be switched off for
approximately five minutes if the engine is
at normal operating temperature.
Rif the engine is not at normal operating
temperature, e.g. if the engine was only
started briefly, wait about 30 minutes
X Reach into the gap, pull bonnet catch han- before carrying out the measurement.
dle ; up and lift the bonnet.
Checking the oil level using the oil dip-
If you lift the bonnet by approximately
stick
40 cm, the bonnet is opened and held open
automatically by the gas-filled strut. G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
Closing the bonnet ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
X Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
height of approximately 20 cm. There is a risk of injury when accessing the
engine compartment.
X Check that the bonnet has engaged prop-
erly. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool
If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is not down and only touch the following compo-
properly engaged. Open it again and close nents.
it with a little more force.

Radiator
Vehicles with a diesel engine: do not cover
the radiator. Do not use thermal mats, insect
protection covers or anything similar. Doing
so can cause the Onboard Diagnostics Sys-

Z
330 Engine compartment

There is a risk of injury when accessing the

engine compartment.
As far as possible, allow the engine to cool
down and only touch the following compo-
nents.

G WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot com-
ponents in the engine compartment, it may
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Example: vehicles with a petrol engine Make sure that engine oil does not spill out
Maintenance and care

over the filler neck. Allow the engine to cool

down and thoroughly clean the components
that have come into contact with engine oil
before you start the engine.

H Environmental note
When topping up the oil, take care not to spill
any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is
harmful to the environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters that

Example: vehicles with a diesel engine have been approved for vehicles with a
X Park the vehicle on a level surface. service system. You can obtain a list of the
engine oils and oil filters tested and
To check the oil level with the engine at
approved in accordance with the
normal operating temperature, switch the
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
engine off and wait for approximately five
Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service
minutes.
Centre.
X Pull oil dipstick : out of the oil dipstick
Damage to the engine or exhaust system is
tube. caused by the following:
X Wipe off oil dipstick :.
Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have
X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide
not been specifically approved for the
tube to the stop, and take it out again. service system
If the level is between MIN mark = and Rchanging the engine oil and oil filter after
MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. missing the change interval required by
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark the service system
= or below, top up with 1.0 l of engine oil. Rusing engine oil additives

! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level is

Adding engine oil above the "max" mark on the dipstick, too
G WARNING much oil has been added. This can lead to
damage to the engine or the catalytic con-
Certain components in the engine compart-
verter. Have excess oil siphoned off.
ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
 Engine compartment 331

be scalded by hot coolant spraying out when

opening the cap. There is a danger of injury.
Allow the engine to cool before opening the
cap. Wear gloves and protective eyewear
when opening. Slowly turn the cap half a turn
to allow pressure to escape.

Only check the coolant level if the vehicle is

on a level surface and the engine has cooled
down.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
Example: engine oil filler cap

Maintenance and care

lock (Y page 155).
X Turn cap : anti-clockwise and remove it.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
X Top up the engine oil. Start/Stop button (Y page 155) twice.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark
X Check the coolant temperature display in
on the oil dipstick, top up with 1.0 l of
the instrument cluster.
engine oil.
The coolant temperature must be below
X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn
70 †.
clockwise.
Make sure that the cap locks securely into
place.
X Check the oil level again with the oil dip-
stick (Y page 329).
For further information on engine oil; see
(Y page 387).

Checking and adding other service

products
X Slowly turn cap : half a turn anti-clock-
Checking the coolant level
wise and allow excess pressure to escape.
G WARNING X Turn cap : further anti-clockwise and
Certain components in the engine compart- remove it.
ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the If the coolant is at the level of marker bar
radiator and parts of the exhaust system. = in the filler neck when cold, there is
There is a risk of injury when accessing the enough coolant in coolant expansion
engine compartment. tank ;.
As far as possible, allow the engine to cool If the coolant level is approximately
down and only touch the following compo- 1.5 cm above marker bar = in the filler
nents. neck when warm, there is enough coolant
in coolant expansion tank ;.
G WARNING
The engine cooling system is under pressure,
particularly if the engine is warm. You could

Z
332 Care

X If necessary, top up with coolant that has The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the
been tested and approved by Mercedes- windscreen washer system and the headlamp
Benz. cleaning system.
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far If the washer fluid level drops below the rec-
as it will go. ommended minimum of 1 litre, a message
appears in the multifunction display prompt-
For further information on coolant, see
ing you to top up the washer fluid
(Y page 388).
(Y page 292) (vehicles with 4-button multi-
function steering wheel) or (Y page 294)
Topping up the windscreen washer sys-
(vehicles with 12-button multifunction steer-
tem/headlamp cleaning system
ing wheel).
Maintenance and care

G WARNING Further information on windscreen washer

Certain components in the engine compart- fluid/antifreeze (Y page 389).
ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
There is a risk of injury when accessing the Care
engine compartment. General Notes
As far as possible, allow the engine to cool
down and only touch the following compo- ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any
nents. of the following:
Rdry, rough or hard cloths
G WARNING Rabrasive cleaning agents
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly Rsolvents
flammable. If it comes into contact with hot Rcleaning agents containing solvents
engine components or the exhaust system it
could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Do not scrub.
Make sure that no windscreen washer con- Do not touch the surfaces or protective
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck. films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice
scraper. You could otherwise scratch or
damage the surfaces and protective film.
H Environmental note
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
cloths in an environmentally responsible man-
ner.

! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended

period straight after cleaning it, particularly
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
X Top up with the premixed washer fluid. should drive for a few minutes after clean-
X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the
until it engages. brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The
vehicle can then be parked up.
 Care 333

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for blades. This will prevent smears and reduce
retaining the quality in the long term. wiping noises caused by residue on the wind-
Use care products and cleaning agents rec- screen.
ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Washing by hand
In some countries, washing by hand is only
Care of the exterior allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
Automatic car wash Observe the legal requirements for each indi-
vidual country.
G WARNING X Do not use hot water and do not wash the
Braking efficiency is reduced after the vehicle vehicle in direct sunlight.

Maintenance and care

has been washed. There is a risk of an acci- X Use a soft sponge to clean.
dent.
X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
After washing the vehicle, brake carefully shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
while paying attention to the traffic conditions
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a
in order to restore full braking efficiency.
gentle jet of water.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function X Do not point the water jet directly towards
is activated, the vehicle brakes automati- the air inlet.
cally in certain situations. To prevent dam- X Use plenty of water and rinse out the
age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC sponge frequently.
PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow- X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
ing or other similar situations: thoroughly with a chamois.
Rwhen towing the vehicle X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the
Rin the car wash paintwork.
! Make sure that the automatic transmis- When using the vehicle in winter, remove all
sion is in position N when washing your traces of road salt deposits carefully and as
vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehi- soon as possible.
cle could be damaged if the transmission is
in another position. High-pressure cleaning equipment
! Make sure that: G WARNING
Rthe side windows and sliding sunroof are The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grind-
closed completely. ers) can cause damage not visible from the
Rthe blower for the ventilation/heating is outside to tyres or chassis components. Com-
switched off (OFF button is depressed). ponents damaged in this way can unexpect-
Rthe windscreen wiper switch is at posi- edly fail. There is a risk of an accident.
tion 0. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circu-
The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. lar-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have dam-
aged tyres or chassis components replaced
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car immediately.
wash from the very start.
Wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehi- ! Always maintain a distance of at least
cle in an automatic car wash. 30 cm between the vehicle and the high-
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off pressure cleaner nozzle. Information about
wax from the windscreen and the wiper

Z
334 Care

the correct distance is available from the X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse
equipment manufacturer. off the treated areas afterwards.
Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,
around when cleaning your vehicle. oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently
Do not aim directly at any of the following: with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or
Rtyres
lighter fluid.
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc.
X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
Relectrical components
Rbattery ! Do not affix:
Rconnectors Rstickers
Maintenance and care

Rlights Rfilms
Rseals Rmagnetic plates or similar items
Rtrim elements to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
Rventilation slots damage the paintwork.
Damaged seals or electrical components
can lead to leaks or failures. Care and treatment of matt paintwork
If your vehicle has a clear matt finish, observe
Cleaning the wheels the following instructions in order to avoid
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products damage to the paintwork due to incorrect
to remove brake dust. This could damage care.
wheel bolts and brake components. These notes also apply to light-alloy wheels
with a clear matt finish.
! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended
period straight after cleaning it, particularly ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel wheels. Polishing makes the paintwork
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause shiny.
increased corrosion of the brake discs and ! The following may cause the paint to
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you become shiny and thus reduce the matt
should drive for a few minutes after clean- effect:
ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the
RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable mate-
brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The
vehicle can then be parked up. rials.
RFrequent use of car washes.
Cleaning the paintwork RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol-
by corrosion and damage caused by inade- ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.
quate care cannot always be completely wax. These products are only suitable for
repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe- high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles
cialist workshop. with matt finish leads to considerable sur-
X Remove impurities immediately, where face damage (shiny, spotted areas).
possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. Always have paintwork repairs carried out
X Soak insect remains with insect remover at a qualified specialist workshop.
and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax
treatment under any circumstances.
 Care 335

i The vehicle should preferably be washed blades, you could become trapped. There is a
by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo danger of injury.
and plenty of water. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and
i Use only insect remover and car shampoo the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or
from the range of recommended and wiper blades.
approved Mercedes-Benz care products.
! Only fold the windscreen wipers away
Cleaning the windows from the windscreen when vertical. Other-
wise, you will damage the bonnet.
G WARNING ! Do not pull on the wiper blade. Otherwise,
If the windscreen wipers are set in motion the wiper blade could be damaged.

Maintenance and care

when cleaning the windscreen or wiper
blades, you could become trapped. There is a ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and
danger of injury. do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the
graphite coating could be damaged. This
Always switch off the windscreen wipers and
could cause wiper noise.
the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or
wiper blades. ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windscreen could be damaged if
! Only fold the windscreen wipers away the wiper arm hits against it suddenly.
from the windscreen when vertical. Other-
X Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-
wise, you will damage the bonnet.
screen.
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, X Clean the wiper blades carefully using a
solvents or cleaning agents containing sol- damp cloth.
vents to clean the inside of the windows. X Fold the windscreen wipers back again
Do not touch the insides of the windows before switching on the ignition.
with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or
ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging
the windows. Cleaning the exterior lighting
! Clean the water drainage channels of the ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
windscreen and the rear window at regular cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning
and pollen may under certain circumstan- cloths could scratch or damage the plastic
ces prevent water from draining away. This lenses of the exterior lighting.
can lead to corrosion damage and damage X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior
to electronic components. lighting using a wet sponge and a mild
X Clean the inside and outside of the win- cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car
dows with a damp cloth and a cleaning shampoo. Or clean the exterior lighting
agent that is recommended and approved with cleaning cloths.
by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the mirror turn signal
Cleaning the wiper blades ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
G WARNING
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning
If the windscreen wipers are set in motion
cloths could scratch or damage the plastic
when cleaning the windscreen or wiper
lenses of the mirror turn signals.

Z
336 Care

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn

signals using a wet sponge and a mild
cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car
shampoo. Cleaning cloths may be used as
well.

Cleaning the sensors

! If you clean the sensors with a high-pres-
sure cleaner, make sure that you keep a
distance of at least 30 cm between the
vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner noz- X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean
Maintenance and care

zle. Information about the correct distance camera lens :.

is available from the equipment manufac-
turer.
Cleaning the exhaust tail pipes
! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-
based cleaning agents such as sanitary
cleansers or wheel cleaners.
Impurities combined with the effects of road
grit and corrosive environmental factors may
cause flash rust to form on the surface. You
can restore the original shine of the exhaust
tail pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in
winter and after washing.
X Clean the exhaust tail pipes with a chrome
care product tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the trailer tow hitch

X Clean sensors : of the driving systems H Environmental note
with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Dispose of oily and greasy cloths in an envi-
ronmentally-responsible manner.
Cleaning the reversing camera
! Do not clean the ball coupling with a high-
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area pressure cleaner. Do not use solvents.
around the reversing camera with a high-
pressure cleaner. ! Observe the note on care provided by the
trailer manufacturer.
The ball coupling must be cleaned if it
becomes dirty or corroded.
X Remove rust on the ball of the ball coupling,
e.g. with a wire brush.
X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or
a brush.
 Care 337

X Before cleaning the display, make sure that

it is switched off and has cooled down.
X Clean the display surface using a commer-
cially available microfibre cloth and TFT/
LCD display cleaner.
X Dry the display surface using a dry micro-
fibre cloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

: Ball coupling G WARNING

Maintenance and care

; Locking balls
Care products and cleaning agents containing
solvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to
= Guide pin become porous. This could result in plastic
? Guide faces parts breaking away when the airbags are
A Release lever deployed. There is a danger of injury.
B Handwheel Do not use care products and cleaning agents
containing solvents to clean the cockpit.
X Lightly oil or grease positions : to B and
the ball coupling recess of the vehicle after ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa-
cleaning. ces:
X Treat the lock in handwheel B with an
Rstickers
acid-free and resin-free oil. Rfilms
X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is
Rscented oil bottles or similar items
working properly.
You could otherwise damage the plastic.
i You can also have the maintenance work
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent
on the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch
or sunscreen to come in contact with the
carried out by a qualified specialist work-
plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality
shop.
look of the surfaces.
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free
Interior care cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
Cleaning the display products recommended and approved by
! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol- Mercedes-Benz.
lowing: The surface may change colour tempora-
Ralcohol-based
rily. Wait until the surface is dry again.
thinner or petrol
Rabrasive cleaning agents
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or
Rcommercially-available household clean-
selector lever
ing agents
These may damage the display surface. Do X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
not put pressure on the display surface leather care agents that have been recom-
when cleaning. This could lead to irrepara- mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
ble damage to the display.

Z
338 Care

Cleaning wooden trim and trim ele- Benz. You can obtain these from a quali-
ments fied specialist workshop.
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents Seat covers from other materials
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol- ! Observe the following when cleaning:
ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of
RClean artificial leather covers with a cloth
damaging the surface.
moistened with a solution containing
X Wipe the wooden trim and trim elements 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid).
with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfi- RClean cloth covers with a microfibre
bre cloth.
cloth moistened with a solution contain-
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
ing 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid).
products recommended and approved by
Maintenance and care

Rub carefully, and always wipe entire

Mercedes-Benz. seat sections to avoid leaving visible
lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards.
Cleaning the seat covers Cleaning results depend on the type of
dirt and how long it has been there.
General notes RClean Alcantara® covers with a damp
! Do not use microfibre cloths to clean gen- cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire
uine leather, artificial leather or seat sections to avoid leaving visible
Alcantara® covers. If used often, these can lines.
damage the cover.
i Note that regular care is essential to Cleaning the seat belts
make sure that the appearance and com-
G WARNING
fort of the covers are retained over time.
Seat belts may be severely weakened if
Genuine leather seat covers bleached or coloured. This may lead to the
Leather is a natural product. seat belts, for example, tearing or failing in an
It has natural surface properties, e.g.: accident. There is an increased risk of injury,
possibly even fatal.
Runevenness in structure
Never bleach or colour seat belts.
Rmarks caused by growth and injury
Rsubtle colour differences ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical
These are characteristics of leather and not cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts
material faults. at temperatures above 80 † or in direct
sunlight.
! To retain the natural appearance of the
leather, observe the following cleaning X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu-
instructions: tion.
RClean genuine leather covers carefully
with a damp cloth and then wipe the cov- Cleaning the roof lining and carpets
ers down with a dry cloth. X Roof lining: if it is very dirty, use a soft
RMake sure that the leather does not brush or a cleaning agent recommended
become soaked. It may otherwise and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
become rough and cracked.
X Carpets: use the carpet and textile clean-
ROnly use leather care agents that have
ing agents recommended and approved by
been tested and approved by Mercedes- Mercedes-Benz.
 339

Useful information ............................ 340

Where will I find...? ........................... 340
Flat tyre ............................................. 342
Battery (vehicle) ................................ 345
Jump-starting .................................... 349
Towing and tow-starting .................. 351
Electrical fuses ................................. 354

Breakdown assistance
340 Where will I find...?

Useful information Setting up the warning triangle

i This Owner's Manual describes all mod-

els, series and optional equipment for your
vehicle that were available at the time of
going to press. National variations are pos-
sible. Note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all of the functions descri-
bed. This is also the case for systems and
functions relevant to safety.
i Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops: (Y page 28).
X Fold feet = down and out to the side.
Breakdown assistance

X Fold side reflectors ; upwards to form a

Where will I find...? triangle and lock them at the top using
press stud :.
Warning triangle
Removing the warning triangle
X Open the tailgate.
First-aid kit
X Open the tailgate.

X Turn rotary knob :90° in the direction of

the arrow and fold down the side trim panel. X Remove first-aid kit : from the stowage
net.
i Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit
at least once a year. Replace the contents
if necessary, and replace any missing
items.

Fire extinguisher
The fire extinguisher is located underneath
the front of the driver's seat.
X Remove warning triangle ;.
 Where will I find...? 341

X Pull tab : upwards. Example: vehicle without the ECO start/stop func-
tion
X Remove fire extinguisher ;.
X Remove stowage tray : in the direction of

Breakdown assistance
i Have the fire extinguisher refilled after the arrow (vehicle without the ECO start/
each use and checked every one or two stop function).
years. It may otherwise fail in an emer- X Remove cover ; in the direction of the
gency. arrow.
Observe the legal requirements for each
X Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: lift up the
individual country.
luggage compartment floor (Y page 317).
X Remove stowage tray : (vehicle without

Vehicle tool kit ECO start/stop function) and cover ;.

The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stow- X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 342).
age well under the luggage compartment
floor.
i Apart from some country-specific var-
iants, vehicles are not equipped with tyre-
changing tools. Some tools for changing a
wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more
information on which tools are required to
perform a wheel change on your vehicle,
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Necessary tyre-changing tools can include,
for example: = Folding wheel chock
RJack
? Wheel wrench
RWheel chock A Towing eye
RWheel wrench
B Jack
RRatchet ring spanner
C Fuse allocation chart
RCentring pin
D One pair of gloves
X To remove the luggage compartment E Ratchet ring spanner
stowage tray/cover: lift up the luggage
F Tyre inflation compressor
compartment floor (Y page 317).
G Tyre sealant filler bottle (behind the left-
hand side trim panel)
342 Flat tyre

X Vehicles with a collapsible emergency X If possible, bring the front wheels into the
spare wheel: lift up the luggage compart- straight-ahead position.
ment floor (Y page 317). X Switch off the engine.
X Remove stowage tray : (vehicle without
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove
ECO start/stop function) and cover ;. the key from the ignition lock.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the
driver's do or.
The on-board electronics have status 0,
which is the same as the key having been
removed.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
(Y page 155).
Breakdown assistance

X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.

Make sure that they are not endangered as
= Wheel wrench they do so.
? Towing eye X Make sure that no one is near the danger

A Jack area while a wheel is being changed. Any-

one who is not directly assisting in the
B Fuse allocation chart
wheel change should, for example, stand
C Wheel bolts behind the barrier.
D One pair of gloves X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf-
E Ratchet ring spanner fic conditions when doing so.
F Tyre inflation compressor X Close the driver's door.

G Valve extractor X Place the warning triangle (Y page 340) a

H Folding wheel chock suitable distance away. Observe legal

requirements.

Flat tyre
TIREFIT kit
Preparing the vehicle
Important safety notes
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
Ra
TIREFIT is a tyre sealant.
TIREFIT kit (Y page 341)
Ran emergency spare wheel (only for certain
You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up
to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre tread.
countries) (Y page 374)
You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures
Information on changing/fitting a wheel down to Ò20 †.
(Y page 367).
X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible
from traffic on solid, non-slippery and level
ground.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 174).
 Flat tyre 343

G WARNING Using the TIREFIT kit

In the following situations, the tyre sealant is
unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-
tance, as it is unable to seal the tyre properly:
Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre
larger than those mentioned above.
Rthe wheel rim is damaged.
Ryou have driven at very low tyre pressures
or on a flat tyre.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not drive any further. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop. TIREFIT sticker, 2-part
Do not remove any foreign objects which

Breakdown assistance
X
G WARNING have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or
The tyre sealant is harmful and causes irrita- nails.
tion. It must not come into contact with your X Remove the tyre sealant bottle, the accom-
skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not panying "max. 80 km/h" sticker and the
inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tyre sealant away tyre inflation compressor from the stowage
from children. There is a risk of injury. well underneath the boot floor
If you come into contact with the tyre sealant, (Y page 341).
observe the following: X Affix part : of the sticker within the driv-
RRinse off the tyre sealant from your skin er's field of vision.
immediately with water. X Affix part ; of the sticker near the valve
RIf the tyre sealant comes into contact with on the wheel with the defective tyre.
your eyes, immediately rinse them thor-
oughly with clean water.
RIf tyre sealant is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
and seek medical attention immediately.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with tyre sealant.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.

! Do not operate the tyre inflation com- X Pull plug ? with the cable and hose A out
pressor for longer than eight minutes at a of the housing.
time without a break. It may otherwise
X Screw hose A onto flange B of tyre seal-
overheat.
ant bottle :.
The tyre inflation compressor can be oper-
X Place tyre sealant bottle : head down-
ated again once it has cooled down.
wards into recess ; of the tyre inflation
compressor.

Z
344 Flat tyre

Tyre pressure not reached

If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
not been achieved after five minutes:
X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of
the faulty tyre.
X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse
approximately 10 m.
X Pump up the tyre again.

X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty After a maximum of five minutes the tyre
tyre. pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/
26 psi).
X Screw filler hose D onto valve C.
Breakdown assistance

X Insert plug ? into the cigarette lighter G WARNING

socket (Y page 320) or into a 12 V socket If the required tyre pressure is not reached
(Y page 321) in your vehicle. after the specified time, the tyre is too badly
X Turn the key to position 1(Y page 155) in damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the
the ignition lock. tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre
X Press on/off switch = on the tyre inflation
pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
compressor to I.
acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
The tyre inflation compressor is switched
on. The tyre is inflated. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
i First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre.
The pressure can briefly rise to approx-
imately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Tyre pressure reached
Do not switch off the tyre inflation com- X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.
pressor during this phase. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of
X Let the tyre inflation compressor run for the faulty tyre.
five minutes. The tyre should then have
! After use, excess tyre sealant may run out
attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa
of the filler hose. This could cause stains.
(1.8 bar/26 psi).
Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has bag that contained the TIREFIT kit.
been attained after five minutes, see
(Y page 344). X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre infla-
tion compressor and the warning triangle.
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
X Pull away immediately.
not been attained after five minutes, see
(Y page 344).
G WARNING
i If the tyre sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant
It can then be removed like a layer of film. impairs the driving characteristics and is not
If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of
have it cleaned as soon as possible with accident.
perchloroethylene. You should therefore adapt your driving style
accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed
 Battery (vehicle) 345

the specified maximum speed with a tyre that X To reduce the tyre pressure: depress
has been repaired using tyre sealant. pressure release button E next to pres-
sure gauge F.
The maximum speed for a tyre sealed with
tyre sealant is 80 km/h. The "max. 80 km/h" X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre infla-
sticker must be affixed to the instrument clus- tion compressor and the warning triangle.
ter within the driver's field of vision. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist

X Stop after driving for approximately ten

workshop and have the tyre changed there.
X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced as
minutes and check the tyre pressure with
the tyre inflation compressor. soon as possible at a qualified specialist
The tyre pressure must now be at least workshop.
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
H Environmental note
G WARNING Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposed of

Breakdown assistance
If the required tyre pressure is not reached professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist
after driving for a short period, the tyre is too workshop.
badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot
repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres
X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every
and a tyre pressure that is too low can signif-
four years at a qualified specialist work-
icantly impair the vehicle's braking and driv-
shop.
ing characteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
Battery (vehicle)
Important safety notes
i In your vehicle, you will find a sticker with
the Mercedes-Benz Service24h telephone Work on the battery, e.g. removing or fitting,
number, e.g. on the B-pillar on the driver's requires specialist knowledge and the use of
side. special tools. Therefore, always have work on
the battery carried out at a qualified specialist
X Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least workshop.
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi) (see the fuel filler
flap for values). G WARNING
X To increase the tyre pressure: switch on Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
the tyre inflation compressor. may lead to a malfunction, e.g. a short circuit.
This, in turn, may restrict the functions of the
safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting sys-
tem, ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) or
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper-
ating safety of your vehicle may then be com-
promised. You could then lose control of the
vehicle, e.g.:
Rwhen braking
Rwhen making sudden steering movements
and/or travelling at an inappropriate
speed.
There is a risk of an accident.

Z
346 Battery (vehicle)

In the event of a short circuit or similar situa- RMake sure that the positive terminal of a
tion, inform a qualified specialist workshop connected battery does not come into con-
immediately. Do not drive any further. You tact with vehicle parts.
should have all work involving the battery car- RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat-
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. tery.
RIt is important that you observe the descri-
For further information about ABS
bed order of the battery terminals when
(Y page 69) and ESP®(Y page 71).
connecting and disconnecting a battery.
G WARNING RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation battery poles with identical polarity are
of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo- connected.
sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an RIt is particularly important to observe the
explosion. described order when connecting and dis-
Breakdown assistance

Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle connecting the jump leads.
body to remove any existing electrostatic RNever connect or disconnect the battery
build-up. terminals while the engine is running.

The highly flammable gas mixture is created G WARNING

while the battery is charging and when jump-
During charging and jump-starting, explosive
starting.
gases can escape from the battery. There is a
Always make sure that neither you nor the risk of an explosion.
battery is electrostatically charged. Electro-
Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating
static charge is created, for example:
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
Rby wearing synthetic fibre clothing ventilation while charging and jump-starting.
Rdue to friction between clothing and the Do not lean over a battery.
seat
Rwhen you pull or push the battery across H Environmental note
carpet or other synthetic materials Batteries contain pollutants.
Rwhen you rub the battery with a cloth It is illegal to dispose of them
with the household rubbish.
G WARNING They must be collected sep-
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. arately and disposed of in an
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. environmentally responsible
Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean recycling system.
over the battery. Keep children away from Dispose of batteries in an
batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with environmentally responsible
water and seek medical attention. manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
G WARNING cialist workshop or to a col-
During the charging process, a battery produ- lection point for used batter-
ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or ies.
sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can
ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. ! Have the battery checked regularly at a
qualified specialist workshop.
 Battery (vehicle) 347

Observe the service intervals in the Service Wear eye protection.

Booklet or contact a qualified specialist
workshop for more information.
! You should have all work involving the Keep children away.
battery carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop. In the exceptional case that it is
necessary for you to disconnect the battery
yourself, make sure that: Observe this Owner's Manual.
Ryou switch off the engine and remove the
key. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,
ensure that the ignition is switched off. In order for the battery to achieve the maxi-
Check that all the indicator lamps in the mum possible service life, it must always be
instrument cluster are off. Otherwise, sufficiently charged.
electronic components, such as the

Breakdown assistance
Have the battery charge checked more fre-
alternator, may be damaged. quently if you use the vehicle mainly for short
Ryou first remove the negative terminal trips or if you leave it standing idle for a
clamp and then the positive terminal lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist
clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle
Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic sys- parked up for a long period of time.
tem may be damaged. Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may
Rin vehicles with automatic transmission, discharge over time if you do not use the
the transmission is locked in position P vehicle. In such cases, have the battery dis-
after disconnecting the battery. The vehi- connected at a qualified specialist workshop.
cle is secured against rolling away. You You can also charge the battery with a
can then no longer move the vehicle. charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
The battery and the cover of the positive For more information, please contact a quali-
terminal clamp must be fitted securely dur- fied specialist workshop.
ing operation. i When you park the vehicle, remove the
Comply with safety precautions and take pro- key if you do not require any electrical con-
tective measures when handling batteries. sumers. The vehicle will then use very little
WARNING energy, thus conserving battery power.
i If the power supply has been interrupted,
e.g. if the battery was discharged, you will
Fire, naked flames and smoking have to:
are prohibited when handling the Rset the clock; see the separate operating
battery. Avoid creating sparks. instructions.
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con- Vehicles with Audio 20 and 4-button mul-
tact with the skin, eyes or clothing. tifunction steering wheel; see "Clock/
Wear suitable protective clothing, Date" (Y page 239).
in particular gloves, an apron and Rreset the panorama sliding sunroof
a face mask. (Y page 100)
Immediately rinse acid splashes Rreset the function for automatically fold-
off with clean water. Consult a doc- ing the exterior mirrors in/out by folding
tor if necessary. the mirrors out once (Y page 111)

Z
348 Battery (vehicle)

Charging the battery X Read the battery charger's operating

instructions before charging the battery.
G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive
gases can escape from the battery. There is a
risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation while charging and jump-starting.
Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
Breakdown assistance

Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean

over the battery. Keep children away from
batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with
water and seek medical attention.

G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at tempera-
tures below freezing point. When jump-start-
ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases
can escape from the battery. There is a risk of
an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
charging it or jump-starting.

! Only charge the installed battery with a

battery charger which has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. These battery
chargers allow the battery to be charged
while still installed in the vehicle.
! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
! Only charge the battery using the jump-
start connection point.
The jump-starting connection point is in the
engine compartment (Y page 349).
X Open the bonnet.
X Connect the battery charger to the positive
terminal and earth point in the same order
as when connecting the donor battery in
the jump-starting procedure
(Y page 349).
 Jump-starting 349

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a
positive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and
seek medical attention.

G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.

Breakdown assistance
Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jump leads.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNING
Non-combusted fuel can collect in the exhaust system and ignite. There is a risk of fire. Avoid
repeated and lengthy starting attempts.

! Vehicles with a petrol engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise,
the non-combusted fuel may damage the catalytic converter.
Do not use a rapid charging device to start the vehicle. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,
the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jump
leads. Observe the following points:
RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
RVehicles with a petrol engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust
system are cold.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
RJump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.

Z
350 Jump-starting

ROnly use jump leads that have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected
for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
Rthe jump leads are not damaged.
Rbare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the
jump leads are connected to the battery.
Rthe jump leads cannot come into contact with parts such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running.
X Firmly depress the parking brake.
X Manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and shift to neutral.
Breakdown assistance

X Automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmission to position P.

X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window heating, lighting etc.
X Open the bonnet.

Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-
starting device.
X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.
X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B
using the jump lead. beginning with your own battery.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to earth point A of your vehicle using
the jump lead, connecting the jump lead to donor battery B first.
X Start the engine.
 Towing and tow-starting 351

X Before disconnecting the jump leads, let the engines run for several minutes.
X First, remove the jump leads from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from pos-
itive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle
first.
X Close cover : of positive clamp ; after removing the jump leads.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jump-starting cables and further information regarding jump starting can be obtained at
any qualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function

Breakdown assistance
is activated, the vehicle brakes automati-
Important safety notes cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-
Observe the legal requirements for the rele- age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC
vant countries when towing and tow-starting. PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-
ing or other similar situations:
G WARNING Rwhen towing the vehicle
If the steering wheel lock is engaged, the vehi-
Rin the car wash
cle can no longer be steered. There is a risk
of an accident. ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum
Always switch on the ignition when towing of 50km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must
with a tow rope or a towing bar. not be exceeded.
For towing distances over 50 km, the entire
G WARNING vehicle must be lifted up and transported.
If the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow- ! Only secure the tow rope or towing bar to
started is greater than the permissible gross
the towing eyes. The vehicle may otherwise
weight of your vehicle:
be damaged.
Rthe towing eye could detach itself
! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery
Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could over-
purposes as this could damage the vehicle.
turn. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.
There is a risk of an accident.
! Pull away smoothly when towing away or
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,
tow-starting a vehicle. If the tractive power
its weight should not be greater than the per-
is too high, the vehicles could be damaged.
missible gross weight of your vehicle.
! On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the
Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle key instead of the Start/Stop button. Turn
weight rating can be found on the vehicle the key to position 2 in the ignition lock and
identification plate (Y page 382). shift the automatic transmission to N.
Then, turn the key back to 0 and leave it in
the ignition lock.
It is better to have the vehicle transported
than to have it towed.

Z
352 Towing and tow-starting

When towing a vehicle with an automatic

transmission, the transmission must be in
position N.
The battery must be connected and charged.
Otherwise, you:
Rcannot turn the key in the ignition lock to
position 2
Rcannot shift the transmission to position
N on vehicles with automatic transmission
i Deactivate the automatic locking feature
(Y page 88). You could otherwise be locked
out when pushing or towing the vehicle.
Deactivate tow-away protection
Breakdown assistance

(Y page 76) before the vehicle is towed.

Vehicles without the AMG Sports package
Fitting/removing the towing eye
Fitting the towing eye
G WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe may be extremely hot.
There is a risk of burning when removing the
rear cover.
Do not touch the exhaust tail pipe. Use
extreme caution when removing the rear
cover.
Vehicles with the AMG Sports package
Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch: if you intend X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the
to use the vehicle for towing, fit the ball cou- direction of the arrow.
pling and connect the towbar to it
Rear bumpers on vehicles with the AMG
(Y page 230).
Sports package: insert your finger into the
X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle
round cutout of cover : and pull the cover
tool kit (Y page 341). out of the bumper.
The brackets for the screw-in towing eyes are X Remove cover : from the opening.
located in the bumpers. They are under the
covers at the front and at the rear on vehicles X Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the
without a trailer coupling. On vehicles with a stop and tighten it.
trailer coupling, the bracket is at the front
under the cover. Removing the towing eye
X Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it.
X Attach cover : to the bumper and press
until it engages.
X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.
 Towing and tow-starting 353

Towing the vehicle with the rear axle X Vehicles with manual transmission:
raised depress the clutch pedal fully and shift to
neutral.
Only possible on vehicles without
or
4MATIC.
X Vehicles with automatic transmission:
When towing your vehicle with the rear axle
shift the automatic transmission to posi-
raised, it is important that you observe the
tion N.
safety instructions (Y page 351).
X Release the brake pedal.
! The ignition must be switched off if you X Release the parking brake.
are towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised. Intervention by ESP® could other-
wise damage the brake system.
Transporting the vehicle
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
The towing eyes or trailer tow hitch can be

Breakdown assistance
(Y page 120).
used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or trans-
X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position
porter if you wish to transport it.
0 and remove the key from the ignition
X Vehicles with manual transmission:
lock.
X When leaving the vehicle, take the key or
depress the clutch pedal fully and shift to
neutral.
the KEYLESS-GO key with you.
X Vehicles with automatic transmission:
turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
Towing the vehicle with both axles on
X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-
the ground
tion N.
It is important that you observe the safety
instructions when towing away your vehicle As soon as the vehicle is loaded:
(Y page 351). X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps applying the parking brake.
(Y page 120). X Vehicles with manual transmission:
i When towing with the hazard warning depress the clutch pedal fully and engage
lamps switched on, use the combination first or reverse gear.
switch as usual to signal a change of direc- X Vehicles with automatic transmission:
tion. In this case, only the turn signals for shift the automatic transmission to posi-
the desired direction flash. When you reset tion P.
the combination switch, the hazard warn- X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position
ing lamps start flashing again. 0 and remove the key from the ignition
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
lock. X Secure the vehicle.
X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
! You may only secure the vehicle by the
brake pedal and keep it depressed.
wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
axle or steering components. Otherwise,
the vehicle could be damaged.

Z
354 Electrical fuses

Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ! Vehicles with automatic transmission

must not be tow-started. The transmission
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed may otherwise be damaged.
with the front or rear axle raised; otherwise,
the transmission may be damaged. You can find information on "Jump-starting"
under (Y page 349).
If the vehicle has transmission damage or
Before tow-starting the following conditions
damage to the front or rear axle, have it trans-
must be fulfilled:
ported on a transporter or trailer.
Rthe battery is connected.
In the event of damage to the electrical
system Rthe engine has cooled down.
If the battery is defective, the automatic Rthe exhaust system has cooled down.
transmission will be locked in position P. To X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
shift the automatic transmission to position (Y page 120).
N, you must provide power to the vehicle's
Breakdown assistance

X Fit the towing eye (Y page 352).

electrical system in the same way as when
X Secure the rigid towing bar or the towing
jump-starting (Y page 349).
rope.
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
or trailer.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
Recovering a vehicle that has become X Depress the clutch pedal fully, engage sec-
stuck ond gear and keep the clutch pedal fully
depressed.
! When recovering a trapped vehicle, do not
X Release the brake pedal.
jerk the vehicle or pull it at an angle. If the
tractive power is too high, the vehicles X Tow-start the vehicle.

could be damaged. X Release the clutch pedal slowly; do not

If the drive wheels get trapped on loose or depress the accelerator pedal while doing
muddy ground, recover the vehicle with the so.
utmost care, especially so if the vehicle is X When the engine starts, immediately

laden. depress the clutch pedal fully and shift to

Never attempt to recover a vehicle with a neutral.
trailer attached. X Stop at a suitable place, paying attention to

Pull out the vehicle backwards, if possible, road and traffic conditions.
using the tracks it made when it became X Depress the parking brake.

stuck. X Remove the rigid towing bar or towing rope.

X Remove the towing eye (Y page 352).
X Switch off the hazard warning lamps.
Tow-starting (emergency engine
starting)
When tow-starting, it is important that you Electrical fuses
observe the safety notes (Y page 351) and the
legal requirements in each respective coun- Important safety notes
try. G WARNING
If you manipulate, bridge or replace a faulty
fuse with a fuse of a higher amperage, the
 Electrical fuses 355

electric cables could be overloaded. This may side of the vehicle, when viewed in the
result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident direction of travel
and injury. The fuse allocation chart is located in the
Always replace faulty fuses with specified new vehicle tool kit in the stowage compartment
fuses of the correct amperage. under the luggage compartment floor
(Y page 341).
! Only use fuses that have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which
have the correct fuse rating for the system Dashboard fuse box
concerned. Otherwise, components or sys- ! Do not use a pointed object such as a
tems could be damaged.
screwdriver to open the cover in the dash-
The fuses in your vehicle serve to disconnect board. You could damage the dashboard or
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo- the cover.
nents on the circuit and their functions will

Breakdown assistance
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fail.
fuse box when the cover is open.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
the same rating, which you can recognise by ! When closing the cover, make sure that it
the colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratings is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
are listed in the fuse allocation chart. seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the the operation of the fuses.
cause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.

Before replacing a fuse

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 174).
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
lock and remove it (Y page 155). X To open: pull out cover : slightly at the
or bottom in the direction of arrow =.
X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure X Pull cover : outwards in the direction of
the ignition is switched off (Y page 155). arrow ; and remove it.
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster X To close: clip in cover : on the front of
must be off.
the dashboard.
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
X Fold cover : inwards until it engages.
Rfuse box on the driver's side of the dash-
board
Rfuse box in the engine compartment on the
left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed
in the direction of travel
Rfuse box in the stowage well under the lug-
gage compartment floor on the right-hand

Z
356 Electrical fuses

Fuse box in the engine compartment Fuse box in the luggage compartment
G WARNING ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
When the bonnet is open, and the windscreen fuse box when the cover is open.
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured ! When closing the cover, make sure that it
by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
Always switch off the windscreen wipers and seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
the ignition before opening the bonnet. the operation of the fuses.
X Open the tailgate.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
Breakdown assistance

the operation of the fuses.

X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
switched off.
X Open the bonnet.

X To open: lift up luggage compartment

floor ;(Y page 317).
X Remove stowage compartment :.
X Open cover = of fuse box downwards.

X Remove any existing moisture from the

fuse box using a dry cloth.
X To open: take lines ; from the guides.
X Open clamps :.
X Remove the fuse box cover forwards.

X To close: check whether the rubber seal is

lying correctly in the cover.
X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box
into the retainer.
X Fold down cover and close clamps :.
X Secure lines ; in the guides.

X Close the bonnet.

 357

Useful information ............................ 358

Important safety notes .................... 358
Operation ........................................... 359
Winter operation ............................... 360
Tyre pressure .................................... 361
Changing a wheel ............................. 367
Fitting a wheel .................................. 368
Wheel and tyre combinations .......... 372
Emergency spare wheel ................... 374

Wheels and tyres

358 Important safety notes

Useful information Tyres with run-flat characteristics:

Rpay attention to the information and warn-
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- ing notices on MOExtended tyres (tyres
els, series and optional equipment for your with run-flat characteristics).
vehicle that were available at the time of
going to press. National variations are pos- Accessories that are not approved for your
sible. Note that your vehicle may not be vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or that are not
equipped with all of the functions descri- being used correctly can impair operating
bed. This is also the case for systems and safety.
functions relevant to safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved
i Read the information on qualified special- accessories, visit a qualified specialist work-
ist workshops: (Y page 28). shop and enquire about:
Rsuitability
Rlegal stipulations
Important safety notes Rfactory recommendations
Information on the dimensions and types of
G WARNING
wheels and tyres for your vehicle can be
If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are used, found in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" sec-
Wheels and tyres

the wheel brakes or suspension components tion (Y page 372).

may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-
Information on air pressure for the tyres on
dent.
your vehicle can be found:
Always replace wheels and tyres with those
Ron the tyre pressure label on the fuel filler
that fulfil the specifications of the original
part. flap
Rin the "Tyre pressure" section
When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the
correct: Modification work on the brake system and
Rdesignation
wheels is not permitted, nor is the use of
spacer plates or brake dust shields. This inva-
Rtype
lidates the general operating permit for the
When replacing tyres, make sure to fit the vehicle.
correct: Modification work on the brake system and
Rdesignation wheels is not permitted. The use of wheel
Rmanufacturer spacers or brake dust shields is not permit-
Rtype ted. This invalidates the general operating
permit for the vehicle.
G WARNING i Further information on wheels and tyres
A flat tyre severely impairs the driving, steer- can be obtained at any qualified specialist
ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle. workshop.
There is a risk of accident.
Tyres without run-flat characteristics:
Rdo not drive with a flat tyre.
Rimmediately replace the flat tyre with your
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 Operation 359

Operation cause a loss of tyre pressure. Pay particular

attention to damage such as:
Information on driving - cuts in the tyres
RCheck the tyre pressures when the vehicle - punctures
is heavily laden and, if necessary, adjust. - tears in the tyres
RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations,
- bulges on tyres
noises and unusual handling characteris- - deformation or severe corrosion on
tics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indi-
wheels
cate that the wheels or tyres are damaged.
RRegularly check the tyre tread depth and
If you suspect that a tyre is defective,
reduce your speed immediately. Stop the the condition of the tread across the whole
vehicle as soon as possible to check the width of the tyre (Y page 359). If neces-
wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyre sary, turn the front wheels to full lock in
damage could also be causing the unusual order to inspect the inner side of the tyre
handling characteristics. If you find no surface.
signs of damage, have the tyres and wheels RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protect

checked at a qualified specialist workshop. the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that fit anything onto the valve other than the
the tyres do not get deformed by the kerb standard valve cap or other valve caps

Wheels and tyres

or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehi-
over kerbs, speed humps or similar eleva- cle. Do not fit any other valve caps or sys-
tions, try to do so at an obtuse angle. Oth- tems, e.g. tyre pressure monitoring sys-
erwise, the tyres, particularly the sidewalls, tems.
can get damaged. RRegularly check the pressure of all the tyres
including the emergency spare wheel or the
spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips,
Regular checking of wheels and tyres and correct the pressure as necessary
(Y page 361).
G WARNING Observe the notes on the emergency spare
Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pres- wheel (Y page 374).
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control The service life of tyres depends on various
of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. factors, including the following:
Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage
RDriving style
and replace any damaged tyres immediately.
RTyre pressure
RRegularly check the wheels and tyres of RMileage
your vehicle for damage at least once a
month, as well as after driving off-road or
on rough roads. Damaged wheels can Important safety notes on the tyre
tread
G WARNING
Insufficient tyre tread will reduce tyre trac-
tion. The tyre is no longer able to dissipate
water. This means that on wet road surfaces,
the risk of aquaplaning increases, in particular

Z
360 Winter operation

where speed is not adapted to suit the driving Driving with summer tyres
conditions. There is a risk of accident.
At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres
If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, tyres lose elasticity and therefore traction and
may exhibit different levels of wear at differ- braking power. Change the tyres on your vehi-
ent locations on the tyre tread. Thus, you cle to M+S tyres. Using summer tyres at very
should regularly check the tread depth and cold temperatures could cause tears to form,
the condition of the tread across the entire thereby damaging the tyres permanently.
width of all tyres. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility
Minimum tyre tread depth for: for this type of damage.
Rsummer tyres: 3 mm
RM+S tyres: 4 mm
M+S tyres
For safety reasons, replace the tyres before
the legally prescribed limit for the minimum G WARNING
tyre tread depth is reached.. M+S tyres with a tyre tread depth of less than
4 mm are not suitable for use in winter as they
do not provide sufficient traction. There is a
Selecting, fitting and replacing tyres risk of accident.
ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than
Wheels and tyres

and make. 4 mm must be replaced.

ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the
At temperatures below +7 †, use winter tyres
wheels. or all-season tyres. Both types of tyre are
RAfter fitting new tyres, run them in at mod- identified by the M+S marking.
erate speeds for the first 100 km, as they Only winter tyres bearing the i snowflake
only reach their full performance after this symbol in addition to the M+S marking pro-
distance. vide the best possible grip in wintry road con-
RDo not drive with tyres which have too little
ditions. Only these tyres will allow driving
tread depth, as this significantly reduces safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to
the traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). function optimally in winter. These tyres have
RReplace the tyres after six years at the lat- been developed specifically for driving in
est, regardless of wear. snow.
Observe the notes on the emergency spare Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread
wheel (Y page 374). on all wheels to maintain safe handling char-
acteristics.
Always observe the maximum permissible
Winter operation speed specified for the M+S tyres you have
Points to remember fitted.
If you fit M+S tyres that have a lower maxi-
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified mum permissible speed than that of the vehi-
specialist workshop at the onset of winter. cle, affix an appropriate warning sign in the
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" driver's field of vision. This can be obtained
section (Y page 367). at a qualified specialist workshop.
Under these circumstances, you should also
restrict the maximum speed of the vehicle
using permanent SPEEDTRONIC so that it
 Tyre pressure 361

does not exceed the maximum permissible Rlocal regulations may restrict the use of
speed for the M+S tyres(Y page 187). snow chains. Observe the appropriate reg-
If you have fitted M+S tyres: ulations if you wish to fit snow chains.
Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible
X Check the tyre pressures (Y page 361).
speed of 50 km/h.
X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning sys-
tem (Y page 363). i You may wish to deactivate
For more information on driving with the ESP®(Y page 71) when pulling away with
emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 374). snow chains fitted. This way you can allow
the wheels to spin in a controlled manner,
achieving an increased driving force (cut-
Snow chains ting action).
For more information on driving with the
G WARNING emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 374).
If you have fitted snow chains to the front
wheels, they may scrape against the vehicle
body or chassis components. This could Tyre pressure
cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres.
There is a risk of an accident. Tyre pressure specifications

Wheels and tyres

To avoid hazardous situations: G WARNING
Rnever fit snow chains on the front wheels Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the
Rfit snow chains to the rear wheels in pairs. following risks:
Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load
! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you wish and vehicle speed increase.
to fit snow chains to steel wheels, make Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or
sure that you remove the respective
unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre
wheels' hubcaps first. The hubcaps may
traction.
otherwise be damaged.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.
mends that you only use snow chains that
There is a risk of an accident.
have been specially approved for your vehicle
by Mercedes-Benz, or that are of a corre- Observe the recommended tyre pressure and
sponding standard of quality. check the tyre pressure of all the tyres includ-
ing the spare wheel:
If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear
the following points in mind: Rat least every two weeks
Rsnow Rwhen the load changes
chains cannot be fitted to all wheel-
tyre combinations. Permissible wheel-tyre Rbefore embarking on a longer journey
combinations (Y page 372). Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. off-
Ronly use snow chains when the road sur- road driving
face is completely snow-covered. Remove If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.
the snow chains as soon as possible when
you come to a road that is not snow-cov- You will find a table of tyre pressures for var-
ered. ious operating conditions on the inside of
your vehicle's fuel filler flap.
Operation with an emergency spare
wheel: (Y page 372).

Z
362 Tyre pressure

Operation with a trailer: the applicable G WARNING

value for the rear tyres is the maximum tyre If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the
pressure value stated in the table inside the wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Tyre
fuel filler flap. pressure that is too low may result in a tyre
The table inside the fuel filler flap may state blow-out. There is a risk of accident.
tyre pressures for different load conditions. RCheck the tyre for foreign objects.
These are defined in the table as different RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the
numbers of passengers and amounts of lug-
valve is leaking.
gage. The actual number of seats may vary;
for more information, please refer to the vehi- If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-
cle's registration documents. tact a qualified specialist workshop.
The tyre pressures specified on the fuel filler If possible, only correct tyre pressures when
flap apply to all tyres approved for this vehi- the tyres are cold.
cle, if not stated otherwise.
The tyres are cold:
Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tyres
out of direct sunlight for at least three
hours and
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further
Wheels and tyres

than 1.6 km
Depending on the ambient temperature, the
speed at which you are driving and the load
on the tyres, the tyre temperature and thus
the tyre pressure change by approximately
10 kPa per 10 † (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this
If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the into account when checking the pressure of
following tyre pressure information is only warm tyres and only correct it if it is too low
valid for that tyre size. for the current operating conditions.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or
tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre too low can:
does not permit any reliable conclusion about Rshorten the service life of the tyres
the tyre pressure. You can also check the tyre Rcause increased tyre damage
pressure using the on-board computer.
Rhave a negative effect on handling charac-
G WARNING teristics and thus the driving safety (e.g.
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tyre aquaplaning)
valves, the tyre valves may be overloaded and i The tyre pressure values given for low
malfunction, which can cause tyre pressure
loads are minimum values which offer you
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tyre pres-
good ride comfort characteristics.
sure monitors keep the tyre valve open. This
can also result in tyre pressure loss. There is However, you can also use the values given
a risk of accident. for higher loads. These are permissible and
will not adversely affect the running of the
Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps
vehicle.
specifically provided by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle onto the tyre valve.
 Tyre pressure 363

The values on the tyre pressure information Observe the notes on the recommended tyre
label (fuel filler flap) for the vehicle in "parti- pressure (Y page 361).
ally laden" and "fully laden" conditions apply The tyre pressure loss warning does not
when driving at maximum speed. Despite the replace the need to regularly check the tyre
values stated on the tyre pressure informa- pressures. An even loss of pressure on sev-
tion label, for the vehicle with "partially eral tyres at the same time cannot be detec-
laden up to 210 km/h" status, the values ted by the tyre pressure loss warning system.
can be reduced as follows, without a reduc- The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn
tion in safety: you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
RÒ30 kPa (Ò0.3 bar/Ò4 psi) for all models tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the
This does not apply to vehicles towing a event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the
trailer. vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
abrupt steering manoeuvres.
This improves the ride comfort of your vehi-
cle; however, the fuel consumption may The function of the tyre pressure loss warning
increase slightly. system is limited or delayed if:
Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle's
H Environmental note
tyres.
Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least
Rroad conditions are wintry.
every 14 days.

Wheels and tyres

Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cor-

Tyre pressure loss warning system nering at high speeds or driving with high
rates of acceleration).
General notes Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer.

While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pres- Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the
sure loss warning system monitors the set vehicle or on the roof).
tyre pressure using the rotational speed of
the wheels. This enables the system to detect Restarting the tyre pressure loss warn-
significant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speed ing system
of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of
Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system
a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning
if you have:
message will appear in the multifunction dis-
play. Rchanged the tyre pressure
You can recognise the tyre pressure loss Rchanged the wheels or tyres
warning by the Run Flat Indicator Rfitted new wheels or tyres
active Restart with OK message which X Before restarting, consult the table of tyre
appears in the Service menu of the multi- pressures on the inside of the fuel filler flap
function display. Information on the message to ensure that the tyre pressure in all four
display can be found in the "Restarting the tyres is set correctly for the respective
tyre pressure loss warning system" section operating conditions.
(Y page 363).
The tyre pressure loss warning system can
only give reliable warnings if you have set
Important safety notes the correct tyre pressure. If an incorrect
The tyre pressure warning system does not
warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure.

Z
364 Tyre pressure

tyre pressure is set, these incorrect values If you wish to confirm the restart:
will be monitored. X Press the a button.
X Observe the notes in the section on tyre
The Tyre pressure now OK? message
pressures (Y page 361). appears in the multifunction display.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Restarting using the 4-button multifunc-
tion steering wheel Yes.
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in X Press the a button.

the ignition lock. The Run Flat Indicator restarted

X Press the V button to select Tyre
message appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
pressure Menu: R.
After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure
X Press the C button.
loss warning system will monitor the set
The RFI active Restart: R message
tyre pressures of all four tyres.
appears in the multifunction display.
X Press the C button. or
The Tyre press. OK? message appears in If you wish to cancel the restart:
the multifunction display. X Press the % button.
If you wish to confirm the restart: or
Wheels and tyres

X Press the W button. X If the Tyre pressure now OK? message

The Run Flat Indicator restarted appears, use the 9 or : button to
message appears in the multifunction dis- select Cancel.
play. X Press the a button.
After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure The tyre pressure values stored at the last
loss warning system will monitor the set restart will continue to be monitored.
tyre pressures of all four tyres.
or
Tyre pressure monitor
If you wish to cancel the restart:
X Press the X button. General notes
The tyre pressure values stored at the last If a tyre pressure monitor system is fitted, the
restart will continue to be monitored. vehicle's wheels have sensors fitted that
monitor the tyre pressures in all four tyres.
Restarting using the 12-button multifunc- The tyre pressure monitor warns you if the
tion steering wheel pressure drops in one or more of the tyres.
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in The tyre pressure monitor only functions if
the ignition lock. the corresponding sensors are fitted to all
X Press the = or ; button to select the wheels.
Service menu. Information on tyre pressures is shown in the
X Press the 9 or : button to select multifunction display. After a few minutes of
Tyre pressure. driving, the current tyre pressure of each tyre
X Press the a button. is shown in the Service menu of the multi-
function display.
The Run Flat Indicator active
Restart with OK message appears in the
multifunction display.
 Tyre pressure 365

nificantly too low. The tyre pressure moni-

tor is not malfunctioning.
Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a
minute and then remains lit constantly, the
tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
i In addition to the warning lamp, a mes-
Example: current tyre pressure display sage appears in the multifunction display.
For further information on displaying this Further information can be found on:
message, refer to the "Checking the tyre pres- RVehicles with a 4-button multifunction
sure electronically" section (Y page 365). steering wheel: (Y page 288).
RVehicles with a 12-button multifunction
Important safety notes steering wheel: (Y page 289).
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre If the tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning,
pressure to the recommended cold tyre pres- it may take more than ten minutes for the tyre
sure suitable for the operating situation pressure warning lamp to inform you of the
(Y page 361). Note that the correct tyre pres- malfunction by flashing for approximately one
sure for the current operating situation must minute and then remaining lit. When the fault
first be taught-in to the tyre pressure monitor. has been rectified, the tyre pressure warning

Wheels and tyres

If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the lamp goes out after you have driven for a few
warning threshold for the warning message is minutes.
aligned to the reference values taught-in. The tyre pressure values indicated by the on-
Restart the tyre pressure monitor after board computer may differ from those meas-
adjusting to the cold tyre pressure ured at a filling station using a pressure
(Y page 366). The current pressures are gauge. The tyre pressures shown by the on-
saved as new reference values. This will board computer refer to those measured at
ensure that a warning message will only sea level. At high altitudes, the tyre pressure
appear if the tyre pressure drops significantly. values indicated by a pressure gauge are
The tyre pressure monitor does not warn you higher than those shown by the on-board
of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Observe computer. In this case, do not reduce the tyre
the notes on the recommended tyre pressure pressures.
(Y page 361). The operation of the tyre pressure monitor
The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn can be affected by interference from radio
you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the transmitting equipment (e.g. radio head-
tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the phones, two-way radios) that may be being
event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the operated in or near the vehicle.
vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
sudden steering movements. Checking the tyre pressure electroni-
The tyre pressure monitor has a yellow warn- cally
ing lamp in the instrument cluster for indicat- X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
ing a pressure loss or malfunction. Depending the ignition lock (Y page 155).
on how the warning lamp flashes or lights up,
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
a tyre pressure that is too low or a malfunc-
tion in the tyre pressure monitor is indicated: ing wheel to select the Service menu.
Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the
tyre pressure on one or more tyres is sig-

Z
366 Tyre pressure

X Press the 9 or : button to select in one or more tyres has dropped signifi-
Tyre pressure. cantly and the tyres must be checked.
X Press the a button. RIf the Tyre malfunction appears in the

The current tyre pressure for each wheel multifunction display, the tyre pressure in
will be displayed in the multifunction dis- one or more tyres has dropped suddenly
play. and the tyres must be checked.
If the vehicle has been parked for over Observe the instructions and safety notes in
20 minutes, the Tyre pressures will be the display messages in the "Tyres" section
displayed after a few minutes of (Y page 289).
driving message appears. i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are
After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure interchanged, the tyre pressures may be
monitor automatically recognises new displayed for the wrong positions for a
wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear short time. This is rectified after a few
allocation of the tyre pressure values to the minutes of driving and the tyre pressures
individual wheels is not possible, the Tyre are displayed for the correct positions.
pressure monitor active display mes-
sage is shown instead of the tyre pressure Restarting the tyre pressure monitor
display. The tyre pressures are already being
When you restart the tyre pressure monitor,
monitored.
Wheels and tyres

all existing warning messages are deleted and

i If a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses
is fitted, for a few minutes the system may the currently set tyre pressures as the refer-
continue to show the tyre pressure of the ence values for monitoring. In most cases, the
wheel that has been removed. If this tyre pressure monitor will automatically
occurs, the value displayed for the position detect the new reference values after you
where the spare wheel/emergency spare have changed the tyre pressure. However,
wheel is fitted is not the same as the spare you can also define reference values man-
wheel/emergency spare wheel's current ually as described here. The tyre pressure
tyre pressure. monitor then monitors the new tyre pressure
values.
Warning messages of the tyre pressure i You will find an overview of the menus on
monitor
(Y page 241).
If the tyre pressure monitor detects a pres- X Use the table on the inside of the fuel filler
sure loss in one or more tyres, a warning mes- flap to ensure that the tyre pressure is set
sage is shown in the multifunction display and correctly in all four tyres for the current
the yellow tyre pressure monitor warning light operating conditions.
comes on.
Also observe the notes in the section on
RIf the Please correct tyre pressure tyre pressures (Y page 361).
message appears in the multifunction dis- X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
play, the tyre pressure in at least one tyre the ignition lock.
is too low and must be corrected at the next
opportunity. X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
RIf the Check tyre(s) message appears in ing wheel to select the Service menu.
the multifunction display, the tyre pressure X Press the 9 or : button to select
Tyre pressure.
 Changing a wheel 367

X Press the a button. Country Radio type approval number

The multifunction display shows the cur-
rent tyre pressure for the individual tyres or Morocco MR5526 ANRT 2010/
the Tyre pressures will be dis‐ 27/04/2010
played after a few minutes of driv‐ MR6706 ANRT 2011/
ing message. 17/11/2011
X Press the : button.
Philip- ESD-1105558C
The Use current pressures as new pines
reference values message appears in
the multifunction display. Serbia И 011 12
If you wish to confirm the restart: Singa- Compliance with IDA Standard
X Press the a button. pore N0140-09
The Tyre press. monitor restarted South TA-2008/1068
message appears in the multifunction dis- Africa TA-2011/1370
play.
After you have driven for a few minutes, the
system checks whether the current tyre Changing a wheel
pressures are within the specified range.

Wheels and tyres

The new tyre pressures are then accepted Flat tyre
as reference values and monitored.
You can find information on what to do in the
If you wish to cancel the restart: event of flat tyre in the "Flat tyre" section
X Press the % button. (Y page 342).
The tyre pressure values stored at the last Vehicles with an emergency spare
restart will continue to be monitored. wheel: in the event of a flat tyre, the emer-
gency spare wheel is fitted according to the
description under "Fitting a wheel"
Radio type approval for the tyre pres-
(Y page 368).
sure monitor
In certain countries, a radio type approval for
the tyre pressure monitor may be required. Interchanging the wheels
The radio type approval number for the tyre
pressure monitor can be found online at: G WARNING
http://www.mercedes-benz.de/ Interchanging the front and rear wheels may
betriebsanleitung. severely impair the driving characteristics if
the wheels or tyres have different dimensions.
Country Radio type approval number The wheel brakes or suspension components
Brazil 1489-10-4415 may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-
dent.
Model: MRXMERCTX1
Interchange front and rear wheels only if the
Dubai TRA, Registered NO: wheels and tyres are of the same dimensions.
0016161/08
TRA, Registered NO Interchanging the front and rear wheels of
ER0076990/11 differing dimensions can render the general
operating permit invalid.
Dealer-NO: DA0047074/10
Observe the instructions and safety notes in
the "Fitting a wheel" section (Y page 368).
Z
368 Fitting a wheel

The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres Fitting a wheel
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Interchange the wheels before a clear wear Preparing the vehicle
pattern has formed on the tyres. Front tyres X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
typically wear more on the shoulders and the level ground.
rear tyres in the centre. X Apply the parking brake.
On vehicles that have the same size front and X Move the front wheels to the straight-
rear wheels, you can interchange the wheels
ahead position.
every 5,000 to 10,000 km depending on the
X Vehicles with manual transmission:
degree of tyre wear. Ensure the direction of
rotation is maintained. depress the clutch pedal fully and engage
first or reverse gear.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
X Vehicles with automatic transmission:
the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel
is interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and, move the selector lever to P.
if necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss X Switch off the engine.
warning system. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove
the key from the ignition lock.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the
Direction of rotation
driver's do or.
Wheels and tyres

Tyres with a specified direction of rotation The on-board electronics have status 0,
have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk which is the same as the key having been
of aquaplaning. You will only gain these ben- removed.
efits if the correct direction of rotation is X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
observed. Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates (Y page 155).
its correct direction of rotation. X If a trailer is coupled to the vehicle, uncou-
ple it.
X If included in the vehicle equipment,
Storing wheels remove the tyre-change tool kit from the
Store wheels in a cool, dry and preferably vehicle.
dark place if they are not being used. Protect X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
the tyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel. away.
i Apart from some country-specific var-
Cleaning the wheels iants, vehicles are not equipped with tyre-
changing tools. Some tools for changing a
G WARNING wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more
The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grind- information on which tools are required to
ers) can cause damage not visible from the perform a wheel change on your vehicle,
outside to tyres or chassis components. Com- consult a qualified specialist workshop.
ponents damaged in this way can unexpect-
Necessary wheel-changing tools can
edly fail. There is a risk of an accident.
include, for example:
Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circu-
RJack
lar-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have dam-
aged tyres or chassis components replaced RWheel chock
immediately.
 Fitting a wheel 369

RWheel wrench
RCentring pin

Securing the vehicle against rolling

away

Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients

X On light downhill gradients: place
chocks or other suitable items in front of
the wheels of the front and rear axle.

If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, Raising the vehicle

it can be found in the tyre-change tool kit G WARNING

Wheels and tyres

(Y page 341).
If you do not position the jack correctly at the
The folding wheel chock is an additional appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
securing measure to prevent the vehicle from jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
rolling away, for example when changing a There is a risk of injury.
wheel.
Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-
X Fold both plates upwards :. ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack
X Fold out lower plate ;. must be positioned vertically, directly under
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the jacking point of the vehicle.
the openings in base plate =.
The following must be observed when raising
the vehicle:
Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-
specific jack that has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. If the jack is
used incorrectly, it could tip over while the
vehicle is raised.
Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold
the vehicle for a short time while a wheel
is being changed. It is not suited for per-
forming maintenance work under the vehi-
Securing the vehicle on level ground cle.
Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and
X On level ground: place chocks or other
downhill slopes.
suitable items under the front and rear of
Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from
the wheel that is diagonally opposite the
wheel you wish to change. rolling away by applying the parking brake
and positioning wheel chocks. Never

Z
370 Fitting a wheel

release the parking brake while the vehicle X Using wheel wrench :, loosen the bolts on
is raised. the wheel you wish to change by about one
Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a pletely.
large, load-bearing underlay must be used.
On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay
must be used, e.g. rubber mats.
Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar
objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the
jack will not be able to achieve its load-
bearing capacity due to the restricted
height.
Rmake sure that the distance between the
underside of the tyres and the ground does
not exceed 3 cm.
Rnever place your hands or feet under the The jacking points are located just behind the
raised vehicle. front wheel arches and just in front of the rear
Rnever lie under the raised vehicle. wheel arches (arrows).
X Take the ratchet ring spanner out of the
Wheels and tyres

Rnever start the engine when the vehicle is

raised. vehicle tool kit and place it on the hexagon
Rnever open or close a door or the tailgate nut of the jack so that the letters AUF are
when the vehicle is raised. visible.
Rmake sure that no persons are present in
the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

X Position jack = at jacking point ;.

 Fitting a wheel 371

X Turn ratchet ring spanner ? until jack = approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the
sits completely on jacking point ; and the respective wheel.
base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
X Turn ratchet ring spanner ? until the tyre
is raised a maximum of 3 cm from the
ground.

Removing a wheel
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
The threads of the wheel bolts and wheel
hubs could otherwise be damaged when
the bolts are tightened. : Wheel bolts for all wheels supplied by the
X Unscrew the wheel bolts. factory
; Wheel bolts for the "Minispare" emer-
X Remove the wheel.
gency spare wheel
! Always use wheel bolts ; to fit the col-
Fitting a new wheel lapsible emergency spare wheel. Using

Wheels and tyres

other wheel bolts to fit the collapsible
G WARNING emergency spare wheel could damage the
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged brake system.
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
Be sure to use the original-length wheel bolts
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
when refitting the original wheel after it has
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
been repaired.
accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event
of damage to the threads, contact a qualified
specialist workshop immediately. Have the
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNING
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact
when the vehicle is on the ground. surfaces.
X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub and
Always pay attention to the instructions and
safety notices in "Changing a wheel" push it on.
(Y page 367). X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin-

Only use wheel bolts that have been designed ger-tight.

for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea- X Inflate the collapsible emergency spare
sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you wheel (Y page 375).
only use wheel bolts which have been Only then lower the vehicle.

Z
372 Wheel and tyre combinations

Lowering the vehicle Observe the recommended tyre pressure

(Y page 361).
G WARNING
For further information on stowing the col-
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts lapsible emergency spare wheel, see
and bolts are not tightened to the specified (Y page 376).
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
Have the tightening torque immediately
checked at a qualified specialist workshop Wheel and tyre combinations
after a wheel is changed.
General notes
! Inflate the collapsible emergency spare ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-
wheel using the tyre inflation compressor
ommends that you only use tyres and
before lowering the vehicle. The wheel rim
wheels which have been approved by
could otherwise be damaged.
Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi-
cle.
These are specially adapted to the control
systems, such as ABS or ESP® and are
marked as follows:
Wheels and tyres

RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original

RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tyres featuring run-flat characteristics)
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
tain AMG tyres)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyres
X Place the ratchet ring spanner onto the may only be used on wheels that have been
hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
AB are visible.
Only use tyres, wheels or accessories tes-
X Turn the ratchet ring spanner until the vehi-
ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer-
cle is once again standing firmly on the tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle
ground. noise emissions or fuel consumption, may
X Place the jack to one side. otherwise be adversely affected. In addi-
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross- tion, when driving with a load, tyre dimen-
wise pattern in the sequence indicated sion variations could cause the tyres to
(: to A). The tightening torque must be come into contact with the bodywork and
150 Nm. axle components. This could result in dam-
age to the tyres or the vehicle.
X Turn the jack back to its initial position and Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for
store it together with the rest of the tyre- damage resulting from the use of tyres,
change tool kit in the luggage compart- wheels or accessories other than those tes-
ment. ted and approved.
X Transport the faulty wheel in the luggage
Further information about wheels, tyres
compartment. and approved combinations can be
X Check the air pressure of the newly fitted obtained from any qualified specialist
wheel and adjust accordingly. workshop.
 Wheel and tyre combinations 373

! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor i Not all wheel/tyre combinations can be
recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since fitted at the factory in all countries.
previous damage cannot always be detec-
ted on retreaded tyres. As a result,
Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle
safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do not
fit used tyres if you have no information
about their previous usage.
! Large wheels: the lower the section width
for a certain wheel size, the lower the ride
comfort is on poor road surfaces. Roll com-
fort and suspension comfort are reduced
and the risk of damage to the wheels and
tyres as a result of driving over obstacles
increases.
i You will find a table of tyre pressures on
the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap.
For further information on tyre pressure,

Wheels and tyres

see (Y page 361). Check tyre pressures
regularly and only when the tyres are cold.
i Notes on the vehicle equipment – always
fit the vehicle:
Rwith tyres of the same size on a given axle
(left/right)
Rwith the same type of tyres at a given
time (summer tyres, winter tyres,
MOExtended tyres)
i Overview of abbreviations used in the fol-
lowing tyre tables:
RBA: both axles
RFA: front axle
RRA: rear axle

In the following table, the wheel/tyre combi-

nations are allocated to the vehicle models
through variants, e.g. V1, V2 etc.:

V1 GLK 200 CDI, GLK 220 BlueTEC

4MATIC, GLK 220 CDI, GLK 220 CDI
4MATIC, GLK 250 4MATIC, GLK 250
BlueTEC 4MATIC, GLK 300 4MATIC,
GLK 350 4MATIC, GLK 350 CDI
4MATIC

Z
374 Emergency spare wheel

Tyres

Summer tyres Light-alloy wheels V1

BA 235/60 R 17 102 V 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47.5 #
FA 235/50 R 19 99 V 7.5 J x 19 H2 ET 47 #
RA 255/45 R 19 100 V11 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52
FA 235/45 R 20 100 W XL 8.0 J x 20 H2 ET 45 #
RA 255/40 R 20 101 W XL11 9.0 J x 20 H2 ET 57

All-weather tyres Light-alloy wheels V1

BA 235/60 R 17 102 V M+S 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47.5 #
FA 235/60 R 17 102 V M+S 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47.5 #
RA 255/55 R 17 104 V M+S11 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 57
BA 235/50 R 19 99 V M+S 7.5 J x 19 H2 ET 47 #
Wheels and tyres

All-terrain tyres Light-alloy wheels V1

BA 235/60 R 17 102 H M+S 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47.5 #

Winter tyres Light-alloy wheels V1

BA 235/60 R 17 102 H M+Si 7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 47.5 #

BA 235/50 R 19 99 H M+Si 7.5 J x 19 H2 ET 47 #

Emergency spare wheel To prevent hazardous situations:

RAdapt your driving style accordingly and
Important safety notes
drive carefully.
G WARNING RNever fit more than one spare wheel/emer-
The wheel/tyre dimensions and the tyre type gency spare wheel if the dimesions are dif-
of the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel ferent to those of the wheel being replaced.
and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Fit- ROnly use a spare wheel/emergency spare
ting a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel wheel briefly if the dimesions are different
may severely impair the driving characteris- to those of the wheel being replaced.
tics. There is a risk of accident. RDo not switch off ESP®.
RHave the spare wheel/emergency spare
wheel in question replaced at the nearest
qualified specialist workshop. Make sure

11 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
 Emergency spare wheel 375

that the wheel/tyre dimensions and tyre

type are correct.

When using an emergency spare wheel or

spare wheel of a different size, you must not
exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h.
Snow chains must not be fitted to emergency
spare wheels.

General notes
Example: vehicle without the ECO start/stop func-
You should regularly check the pressure of all tion
your tyres, including the emergency spare X Remove stowage tray : (vehicle without
wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and cor- the ECO start/stop function)
rect the pressure as necessary (Y page 361). (Y page 341).
The applicable value is found on the wheel or X Turn retaining screw ; anti-clockwise and
under "Technical data" (Y page 372).
remove it.
i If you are driving with the emergency X Remove collapsible emergency spare

Wheels and tyres

spare wheel fitted, the tyre pressure loss wheel =.
warning system cannot function reliably.
X Take the wheel bolts for the collapsible
Only restart the tyre pressure loss warning
emergency spare wheel from the vehicle
system when the defective wheel has been
tool kit.
replaced with a new wheel.
For further information on changing a wheel
An emergency spare wheel may also be fitted
and fitting the spare wheel, see
against the direction of rotation. Observe the
(Y page 342).
time restriction on use as well as the speed
limitation specified on the emergency spare
wheel. Inflating the collapsible emergency
spare wheel
Replace the tyres after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear. This also applies to the ! Inflate the collapsible emergency spare
emergency spare wheel. wheel using the tyre inflation compressor
before lowering the vehicle. The wheel rim
could otherwise be damaged.
Collapsible emergency spare wheel
Removing the collapsible emergency
spare wheel
The collapsible emergency spare wheel can
be found in the stowage well under the lug-
gage compartment floor.
X Lift the luggage compartment floor up
(Y page 317).

Z
376 Emergency spare wheel

X Pull connector ? and the air hose out of X Screw the valve cap onto the collapsible
the housing. emergency spare wheel valve again.
X Remove the cap from the valve on the col- X Stow plug ? and the air hose in the lower
lapsible emergency spare wheel. section of the blower housing.
X Screw union nut : on the air hose onto the X Stow the tyre inflation compressor in the
valve. vehicle.
X Make sure on/off switch A of the tyre
inflation compressor is set to 0. Stowing a used collapsible emergency
X Insert connector ? into the cigarette spare wheel
lighter socket (Y page 320) or into a 12 V Take the following steps to stow a used col-
socket (Y page 321) in your vehicle. lapsible emergency spare wheel. Otherwise,
X Make sure that the key is in position the collapsible emergency spare wheel will
1(Y page 155)in the ignition lock. not fit in the spare wheel well. Mercedes-Benz
X Press on/off switch A on the tyre inflation recommends that you have this work carried
compressor to I. out at a qualified specialist workshop.
The tyre inflation compressor is switched ! Only place the collapsible emergency
on. The tyre is inflated. The tyre pressure is spare wheel in the vehicle when it is dry.
shown on pressure gauge =. Otherwise, moisture may get into the vehi-
Wheels and tyres

cle.
! Do not operate the tyre inflation com-
pressor for longer than eight minutes at a X Remove the valve extractor from the vehi-
time without a break. It may otherwise cle tool kit.
overheat. X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve.

The tyre inflation compressor can be oper- X Unscrew the valve insert from the valve and
ated again once it has cooled down. release the air.
X Pump the tyre to the specified tyre pres- i Fully deflating the tyre may take a few
sure. minutes.
The specified tyre pressure is printed on X Screw the valve insert back into the valve.
the yellow label of the emergency spare X Screw the valve cap back on.
wheel. X Place the valve extractor back into the vehi-
X When the specified tyre pressure has been cle tool kit.
reached, press on/off switch A on the X Stow the collapsible emergency spare
electric air pump to 0. wheel in the emergency spare wheel well
The tyre inflation compressor is switched under the luggage compartment and fasten
off. in place.
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
lock.
X If the tyre pressure is higher than the speci-
fied pressure, press button of pressure
release valve ; until the correct tyre pres-
sure has been reached.
X Unscrew union nut : on the air hose from
the valve.
 Emergency spare wheel 377

Technical data

Collapsible emergency spare wheel12

Tyres Wheels V1
185/75 – 17 98 P 6.0 B x 17 H2 ET 25 #
Tyre pressure: 280 kPa (2.8 bar/41 psi)

Depending on the country, the engine and the wheels fitted, your vehicle may be equipped
with TIREFIT or a collapsible emergency spare wheel.
i The specified tyre pressure is printed in yellow on the emergency spare wheel.

Wheels and tyres

12 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

Z
378
 379

Useful information ............................ 380

Information on technical data ......... 380
Vehicle electronics ........................... 380
Identification plates ......................... 382
Service products and capacities ..... 382
Vehicle data ...................................... 390
Vehicle data for off-road driving ..... 391
Trailer tow hitch ................................ 391

Technical data
380 Vehicle electronics

Useful information Retrofitting two-way radios and

mobile phones (RF transmitters)
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod-
els, series and optional equipment for your G WARNING
vehicle that were available at the time of If RF transmitters are tampered with or not
going to press. National variations are pos- properly retrofitted, the electromagnetic radi-
sible. Note that your vehicle may not be ation they emit can interfere with the vehicle
equipped with all of the functions descri- electronics. This may jeopardise the opera-
bed. This is also the case for systems and tional safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of
functions relevant to safety. an accident.
You should have all work on electrical and
i Read the information on qualified special-
electronic components carried out at a quali-
ist workshops: (Y page 28).
fied specialist workshop.

G WARNING
Information on technical data
If you use the RF transmitter in the vehicle in
General notes an improper way, its electromagnetic radia-
tion can disrupt vehicle electronics, e.g. if:
You can find current technical data on the
Internet at: Rthe RF transmitter is not connected to an
http://www.mercedes-benz.com exterior aerial
Rthe exterior aerial is fitted incorrectly or is
i The technical data was determined in
not a low-reflection aerial
accordance with EU Directives. All data
Technical data

applies to the vehicle's standard equip- This can jeopardise the operating safety of the
ment. The data may therefore differ for vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
vehicles with optional equipment. You can Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at
obtain further information from a a qualified specialist workshop. When oper-
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ating in the vehicle, always connect the RF
transmitter to the low-reflection exterior aer-
ial.
Vehicle electronics
! The operating permit may be invalidated
Tampering with the engine electron- if the instructions for installation and use of
ics RF transmitters are not observed.
! Only have work carried out on the engine In particular, the following conditions must
electronics and its associated parts, such be complied with:
as control units, sensors and connector Ronly approved wavebands may be used.
leads, at a qualified specialist workshop. Robserve the maximum permissible out-
Vehicle components may otherwise wear put in these wavebands.
more quickly and the vehicle's operating
Ronly approved aerial positions may be
permit may be invalidated.
used.
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
may cause damage to your health and to the
health of others. The use of an exterior aerial
takes into consideration the scientific discus-
 Vehicle electronics 381

sion surrounding the possible health risk The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at
posed by electromagnetic fields. the base of the aerial must not exceed the
Observe the notes on operating mobile following values:
phones (Y page 322).
Waveband Maximum
The following aerial positions may be used for transmission
the correct installation of RF transmitters: output
Short wave 100 W
3 - 54 MHz
4 m waveband 30 W
68 - 87.5 MHz
2 m waveband 50 W
144 - 174 MHz
Trunked radio/Tetra 35 W
380 - 460 MHz
Approved aerial positions
: Front roof area 70 cm waveband 35 W
; Rear roof area 400 - 460 MHz
= Rear wing GSM/DCS/PCS 10 W
i On vehicles with panorama sliding sun- 850/900/1800/1900

Technical data
roof, fitting an aerial to the front or rear roof UMTS/LTE 10 W
area is not permitted.
On the rear wing, it is recommended that
The following can be used in the vehicle with-
you position the aerial on the side of the
out restrictions:
vehicle closest to the centre of the road.
RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis-
Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609
sion output of up to 100 mW
(Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for fitting
RMobile phones (GSM/DCS/PCS/UMTS/
aftermarket radio frequency transmitting
equipment") when retrofitting RF (radio fre- LTE)
quency) transmitters. Comply with the legal There are no restrictions when positioning the
requirements for add-on parts. aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the fol-
If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio lowing wavebands:
equipment, use the power supply or aerial RTrunked
radio/Tetra
connections intended for use with the basic R70cm waveband
wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's RGSM/DCS/PCS
additional instructions when installing.
RUMTS/LTE
Deviations with respect to wavebands, maxi-
mum transmission outputs or aerial positions
must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Z
382 Service products and capacities

Identification plates ble to your vehicle on the vehicle's identi-

fication plate.
Vehicle identification plate with vehi-
cle identification number (VIN)
VIN

X Open the front right-hand door.

You will see vehicle identification plate :. X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rear-
most position.
X Fold floor covering : upwards.
You will see VIN ;.
The VIN can also be found on the vehicle
identification plate (Y page 382).
Technical data

Engine number
The engine number is stamped onto the
crankcase. You can obtain further informa-
Example: vehicle identification plate tion from any qualified specialist workshop.
: Vehicle identification plate
; Vehicle manufacturer (Daimler AG)
Service products and capacities
= EU type approval number (only for certain
countries) Important safety notes
? VIN
G WARNING
A Maximum permissible gross vehicle
Service product can be poisonous and haz-
weight (kg)
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
B Maximum permissible mass of vehicle/
trailer combination (kg) Observe the instructions on the respective
original container when using, storing and dis-
C Maximum permissible front axle load (kg)
posing off service products. Always store
D Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg) service products in the sealed original con-
E Paint code tainer. Always keep service products out of
the reach of children.
i The data shown on the identification plate
is example data. This data is different for
every vehicle and can deviate from the data
shown here. You can find the data applica-
 Service products and capacities 383

H Environmental note You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating

Dispose of service products in an environ- sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
mentally-responsible manner. and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
refuelling.
Service products include the following:
RFuels (e.g. petrol, diesel) G WARNING
RExhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g. Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is a danger of injury.
AdBlue®
RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact
with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel
RCoolant
vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of chil-
RBrake fluid dren.
RWindscreen washer fluid If you or others come into contact with fuel,
RClimate control system refrigerant observe the following:
When handling, storing and disposing of any RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin
service products, please observe the relevant with water and soap immediately.
regulations. RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor-
Components and service products must be oughly with clean water immediately. Seek
matched. Mercedes-Benz recommends that immediate medical attention.
you use products tested and approved by RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medi-
Mercedes-Benz. They are listed in this cal attention. Do not induce vomiting.
Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manual in the appro-
RChange any clothing that has come into

Technical data
priate section.
contact with fuel immediately.
You can identify service products approved
by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip-
tions on the container: Tank capacity
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary,
RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) depending on the vehicle equipment.
Other designations or recommendations indi- Model Total capa-
cate a level of quality or a specification in city
accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g.
MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been GLK 250 4MATIC 66.0 l
approved by Mercedes-Benz. GLK 300 4MATIC
Further information can be obtained from any GLK 350 4MATIC
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or on the GLK 350 CDI 4MATIC
Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
All other models 59 l
or
Fuel 66.0 l
Important safety notes
Model Of which
G WARNING reserve fuel
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- All models Approx.
sion. 8.0 l

Z
384 Service products and capacities

Petrol (EN 228, E DIN 51626-1) ther information from any Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
Fuel grade
Usually you will find information about the
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the
petrol engine. Do not switch on the ignition label on the petrol pump, ask the filling sta-
if you accidentally refuel with the wrong tion staff.
fuel. Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel sys-
tem. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.
could result in damage to the fuel system Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10
and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist fuel. You can refuel your vehicle using E10
workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel fuel.
lines drained completely. i As a temporary measure, if the recom-
! Only refuel using premium-grade unlea- mended fuel is not available, you may also
ded petrol with at least 95 ROZ/85 MOZ, use unleaded petrol with an octane rating
that conforms to European standard of 91 RON/82 MON. This may reduce
EN 228 or E DIN 51626–1 or an equivalent engine performance and increase fuel con-
specification. sumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and
Fuel of this specification can contain up to sudden acceleration. Never refuel using
10 % ethanol. fuel with a lower RON/MON.
Fuel that does not conform to EN 228 or i In some countries, the available petrol
E DIN 51626–1 can lead to increased wear may not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This
and damage the engine and exhaust sys- fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant
tem. odours, especially on short journeys. As
Technical data

soon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content

! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat-
< 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odours
ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead to
are reduced.
engine failure.
Information on refuelling (Y page 170).
! Do not use the following:
RE85 (petrol with 85% ethanol) GLK 350 4MATIC
RE100 (100% ethanol) ! Only refuel using premium-grade sulphur-
RM15 (petrol with 15% methanol)
free unleaded petrol with at least 95 RON/
85 MON that conforms to European stand-
RM30 (petrol with 30% methanol)
ard EN 228 or an equivalent specification.
RM85 (petrol with 85% methanol)
You could otherwise impair engine output
RM100 (100% methanol) or damage the emission control system.
RPetrol with additives containing metal
i In some countries, the available petrol
RDiesel
may not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom- fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant
mended for your vehicle. Do not use addi- odours, especially on short journeys. As
tives. This can otherwise lead to engine soon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content
damage. This does not include cleaning < 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odours
additives for the removal and prevention of are reduced.
residue build-up. Petrol must only be mixed
with additives recommended by Mercedes-
Benz; see "Additives". You can obtain fur-
 Service products and capacities 385

Additives Rbio-diesel

! Operating the engine with fuel additives Rvegetable oil

added later can lead to engine failure. Do Rpetrol
not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does Rparaffin
not include additives for the removal and Rkerosene
prevention of residue build-up. Petrol must
only be mixed with additives recommended Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and
by Mercedes-Benz. Observe the instruc- do not use any special additives. This can
tions for use in the product description. otherwise lead to engine damage. This
More information about recommended does not include flow improver additives.
additives can be obtained from any For further information, see "Flow improv-
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ers".
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use ! Vehicles with a diesel particle filter: in
fuel brands that have additives. countries outside the EU, only refuel with
The quality of the fuel available in some coun- low-sulphur Euro diesel with a sulphur con-
tries may not be sufficient. Residue could tent under 50 ppm; otherwise the emission
build up as a result. In such cases, and in control system could be damaged.
consultation with a Mercedes-Benz Service ! Vehicles without a diesel particle fil-
Centre, the petrol may be mixed with the ter: in countries where only diesel fuel with
cleaning additive recommended by a high sulphur content is available, you will
Mercedes-Benz (part no. A000989254512). need to carry out your vehicle's oil change
You must observe the notes and mixing ratios at shorter intervals. More information
specified on the container. about the interval for oil change can be

Technical data
obtained from any qualified specialist
Diesel (EN 590) workshop.
Fuel grade Usually you will find information about the
fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the
G WARNING label on the petrol pump, ask the filling sta-
If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash tion staff.
point of this fuel mixture is lower than that of Information on refuelling (Y page 170).
pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running,
components in the exhaust system may over- Low outside temperatures
heat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire. In winter months, diesel fuel with an improved
Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol to cold flow quality is available. In Europe, the
diesel fuel. EN 590 standard defines various climate-
dependent temperature categories. Malfunc-
! When refuelling, only use diesel fuel that tions can be avoided by refuelling with diesel
conforms to the European standard EN 590 fuel that corresponds to the climatic specifi-
or is of equivalent quality. Fuel that does cations outlined in EN 590. At unusually low
not conform to EN 590 can lead to outside temperatures, it is possible that the
increased wear as well as damage to the flow characteristics of the diesel fuel could be
engine and exhaust system. insufficient. Accordingly, diesel fuel from
! Do not use the following: warmer areas may not be suitable for opera-
tion in colder climatic conditions.
Rmarine diesel
Rheating oil

Z
386 Service products and capacities

i Further information on country-specific AdBlue®

fuel properties can be obtained from oil
companies, e.g. at filling stations. Important safety notes
Comply with the important safety notes for
Fuel consumption information service products when handling
H Environmental note AdBlue®(Y page 382).
CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scien- AdBlue® is a water-soluble fluid for the
tists believe to be principally responsible for exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines.
global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your It is:
vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to Rnon-toxic
fuel consumption and therefore depend on: Rcolourless and odourless
Refficient use of the fuel by the engine Rnon-flammable
Rdriving style If you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts
Rother non-technical factors, such as envi- of ammonia vapour may be released.
ronmental influences, road conditions or Ammonia vapours have a pungent odour and
traffic flow are particularly irritating to the skin, to
You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emis- mucous membranes and to the eyes. You may
sions by driving carefully and having it serv- experience a burning sensation in your eyes,
iced regularly. nose and throat. You may also experience
coughing and watery eyes.
The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in Do not inhale any ammonia vapours that may
the following situations:
Technical data

be released. Only fill the AdBlue® tank in well-

Rat very low outside temperatures ventilated areas.
Rin urban traffic
Ron short journeys Low outside temperatures
Rin mountainous terrain AdBlue® freezes at a temperature of approx-
Rwhen towing a trailer imately -11 †. The vehicle is delivered from
the factory equipped with an AdBlue® pre-
i Only for certain countries: you can find
heating system. Winter operation can thus be
the current consumption and emission val- guaranteed even at temperatures below
ues of your vehicle in the COC documents -11 †.
(EU CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These
documents are delivered with your vehicle.
Additives
The consumption figures were in each case
based on the currently applicable version: ! Only use AdBlue® in accordance with ISO
Rfor vehicles that comply with standards 22241. Do not use additives with AdBlue®
up to and including the EURO 4 standard, and do not dilute AdBlue® with water. This
in accordance with EU Directive may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas after-
80/1268/EEC treatment system.
Rfor vehicles that comply with or exceed
the EURO 5 standard, in accordance with
Regulation (EC) No. 715/2007
Deviations from these values may occur
under normal operating conditions.
 Service products and capacities 387

Purity Benz recommends that you have the oil

change carried out at a qualified specialist
! Impurities in AdBlue® (e.g. due to other
workshop. Mercedes-Benz approval is indica-
service products, cleaning agents or dust) ted on the oil container by the inscription "MB
lead to: Approval" and the corresponding designa-
Rincreased emission values tion, e.g. MB Approval 229.51.
Rdamage to the catalytic converter You can call up an overview of approved
Rengine damage engine oils on the Internet at
Rmalfunctions in the BlueTEC® exhaust http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com by enter-
gas aftertreatment system ing the designation, e.g. 229.5.
The table shows which engine oils have been
Assuring the purity of AdBlue® is particularly approved for your vehicle.
important with respect to avoiding malfunc-
Petrol engines: in certain countries, differ-
tions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreat-
ent engine oils can be used, provided that the
ment system.
maintenance intervals are reduced. For more
If AdBlue® is pumped out of the AdBlue® tank, information, please contact a qualified spe-
e.g. during repair work, do not use this fluid cialist workshop.
to refill the tank. The purity of the fluid can no
longer be guaranteed. Petrol engines MB Approval
GLK 350 4MATIC 229.3, 229.5
Capacities
All other models 229.5
Model Total capacity

Technical data
GLK 220 BlueTEC 27.5 l Diesel engines with MB Approval
4MATIC diesel particle filter
GLK 250 BlueTEC
4MATIC GLK 200 CDI 228.51,
GLK 220 BlueTEC 229.31, 229.51
4MATIC
Engine oil GLK 220 CDI
GLK 220 CDI 4MATIC
General notes
GLK 250 BlueTEC
When handling engine oil, observe the impor- 4MATIC
tant safety notes on service products GLK 350 CDI 4MATIC
(Y page 382).
The quality of the engine oil is decisive for the i If the engine oils listed in the table are not
function and service life of an engine. After available, you may add the following engine
extensive tests, Mercedes-Benz approves oils until the next oil change:
engine oils that correspond to the current
Rvehicles with a petrol engine: MB
technical standard.
Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz approved Approval 229.1, 229.3 or ACEA A3
Rdiesel engines: MB Approval 229.1,
engine oils may be used in Mercedes-Benz
engines. 229.3, 229.5 or ACEA C3
Further information on tested and approved This must only be added once and the
engine oils can be obtained from any amount must not be greater than 1.0 l.
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Mercedes-
Z
388 Service products and capacities

Capacities changes using an approved engine oil with the

appropriate SAE classification.
The following values refer to an oil change
including the oil filter.
Model Replacement Brake fluid
amount
G WARNING
GLK 200 5.7 l The brake fluid continuously absorbs mois-
GLK 250 ture from the air. This results in the boiling
GLK 250 4MATIC point of the brake fluid lowering. If the boiling
point of the brake fluid is too low, vapour
GLK 300 4MATIC 7.0 l pockets may form when the brakes are sub-
GLK 350 CDI 4MATIC jected to a heavy load. This would impair brak-
8.0 l
ing efficiency. There is a risk of an accident.
All other models 6.5 l Have the brake fluid renewed at the prescri-
bed intervals.
Additives
When handling brake fluid, observe the
! Do not use any additives with the engine important safety notes on service products
oil. This could damage the engine. (Y page 382).
The brake fluid change intervals can be found
Engine oil viscosity in the Service Booklet.
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-
Technical data

Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.

Information about approved brake fluid can
be obtained at any qualified specialist work-
shop or on the Internet at:
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at
a qualified specialist workshop and the
replacement confirmed in the Service
Booklet.
Viscosity describes the flow characteristics
of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity
rating, it flows slowly; the lower the viscosity, Coolant
the faster it flows. Important safety notes
Engine oil selection is based on the respective
outside temperatures and in accordance with G WARNING
the SAE classification (viscosity). The table If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-
shows you which SAE classifications are to be ponents in the engine compartment, it may
used. The low-temperature properties of ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
engine oils can be significantly impaired dur- Let the engine cool down before you top up
ing operation due to, for example, ageing or the antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is
soot and fuel accretion. It is therefore not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly
strongly recommended to observe regular oil clean the antifreeze from components before
starting the engine.
 Service products and capacities 389

! Only add coolant that has been premixed Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/
with the desired antifreeze protection. You corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accord-
could otherwise damage the engine. ance with MB Specifications for Service Prod-
Further information on coolants can be ucts 310.1.
found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil-
for Service Products, MB Specifications for led with a coolant mixture that ensures
Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the Inter- adequate antifreeze and corrosion protec-
net at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. tion.
Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.
i The coolant is checked at every mainte-
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, nance interval at a qualified specialist
even in countries where high temperatures workshop.
prevail.
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
sufficiently protected from corrosion and Windscreen washer system and head-
overheating. lamp cleaning system
i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a Important safety notes
qualified specialist workshop and the
replacement confirmed in the Service G WARNING
Booklet. Windscreen washer concentrate is highly
Comply with the important safety precautions flammable. If it comes into contact with hot
for service products when handling coolant engine components or the exhaust system it
(Y page 382). could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.

Technical data
The coolant is a mixture of water and anti- Make sure that no windscreen washer con-
freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It is responsible centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
for the following:
! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for
Ranti-corrosion protection plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or
Rantifreeze protection MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid
Rraising the boiling point could damage the plastic lenses of the
If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in headlamps.
the correct concentration, the boiling point of ! Do not use distilled or de-ionised water in
the coolant during operation will be approx- the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the
imately 130 †. level sensor may be damaged.
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-
! Only the washer fluids SummerFit and
tion in the engine cooling system should:
WinterFit can be mixed. Otherwise, the
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine spraying nozzles could become blocked.
cooling system against freezing down to
When handling washer fluid, observe the
approximately -37 †.
important safety notes on service products
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection
(Y page 382).
down to -45 †). Heat will otherwise not be
dissipated as effectively.
If the vehicle has lost coolant, top it up with
equal amounts of water and antifreeze/cor-
rosion inhibitor.

Z
390 Vehicle data

At temperatures above freezing: These documents are delivered with your

X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture vehicle.
of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-
merFit.
Dimensions and weights
X Mix 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts
water.
At temperatures below freezing:
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Winter-
Fit.
Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temper-
ature.
RDown to Ò10 †: mix 1 part MB WinterFit to
2 parts water.
RDown to Ò20 †: mix 1 part MB WinterFit to
Model : Open- ;
1 part water. ing height Maximum
RDown to Ò29 †: mix 2 parts MB WinterFit
headroom
to 1 part water.
All models 2067 mm 1935 mm
i Add washer fluid concentrate, e.g. MB
SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer
Technical data

fluid all year round. Missing values were not available at the time
of going to print.

All models
Vehicle data
Vehicle length 4536 mm
General notes
Please note that for the specified vehicle Vehicle width including 2016 mm
data: exterior mirrors
Rthe heights specified may vary as a result Vehicle width excluding 1840 mm
of: exterior mirrors
- tyres
Vehicle height 1669 mm
- load
Wheelbase 2755 mm
- condition of the suspension
- optional equipment Maximum roof load 75 kg
Roptional equipment reduces the maximum
payload. Ground
Rvehicle-specific weight information can be clearance
found on the vehicle identification plate
(Y page 382). Models with a petrol 182 mm
Ronly for certain countries: you can find vehi- engine
cle-specific vehicle data in the COC docu- Models with a diesel 177 mm
ments (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). engine
 Trailer tow hitch 391

Vehicle data for off-road driving For further information about approach/
departure angles, see (Y page 182).
Fording depth
! The water depth must not exceed 30 cm.
Note that the possible fording depth is less Maximum gradient-climbing capabil-
in flowing water. ity
Note that the vehicle's gradient-climbing
capability depends on the off-road conditions
and the road surface conditions.
The maximum gradient climbing capability is
70%.
i If the load on the front axle is reduced
when pulling away on a steep uphill slope,
the front wheels have a tendency to spin.
4ETS recognises this and brakes the
wheels accordingly. The rear wheel torque
is increased and it is easier to pull away.
Fording depth : must not exceed 30 cm
when the vehicle is loaded and ready to drive. For further information about the maximum
Loaded and ready to drive means: a full tank, gradient climbing ability, see (Y page 183).
all fluids topped up and the driver is in the
vehicle.
Trailer tow hitch

Technical data
For more information about off-road fording,
see (Y page 178). Mounting dimensions
! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
Approach/departure angle changes to the cooling system may be nec-
essary, depending on the vehicle type.
If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
observe the anchorage points on the chas-
sis frame.

Front approach/departure angle : is a max-

imum of 22.8° and rear approach/departure
angle ; is a maximum of 24.6° when the
vehicle is loaded and ready to drive.
Loaded and ready to drive means: a full tank,
all fluids topped up and the driver is in the
vehicle.

Z
392 Trailer tow hitch

Example: anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch

: Anchorage points
; Overhang dimension
= Rear axle centre line
Technical data

For trailer tow hitches fitted at the factory, the

overhang dimension including protective cov-
ering is 1,058 mm.
 Trailer tow hitch 393

Trailer loads
! Use a drawbar noseweight as close as possible to the maximum permissible noseweight.
Do not use a noseweight of less than 50kg, otherwise the trailer may come loose.
Note that the payload and the rear axle load are reduced by the actual payload.

All models
Permissible trailer load, unbraked 750 kg
Maximum drawbar noseweight13 100 kg
Permissible rear axle load when towing a trailer 1410 kg

Permissible trailer load, braked (at a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12%

from a standstill).

Manual transmission Automatic transmission

GLK 250 4MATIC – 2400 kg
GLK 300 4MATIC – 2400 kg
GLK 350 4MATIC – 2400 kg
GLK 200 CDI 2000 kg 2400 kg

Technical data
GLK 220 BlueTEC 4MATIC – 2400 kg
GLK 220 CDI 2000 kg 2400 kg
GLK 220 CDI 4MATIC – 2400 kg
GLK 250 BlueTEC 4MATIC – 2400 kg
GLK 350 CDI 4MATIC – 2500 kg

The actual noseweight may not be higher than the value which is given. The value can be found
on the trailer tow hitch or trailer identification plates. The lowest weight applies.
You can attach carrier systems, e.g. bicycle racks or load-bearing implements, on the ball
coupling. The maximum noseweight of 75 kg applies when using carrier systems on the ball
coupling.

13 The drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load.

Z
394
395
396
Symbols Publication details
In this manual, you will find the following sym- Internet
bols:
G WARNING Further information about Mercedes-Benz
vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
Warning notes make you aware dangers
on the following websites:
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others. http://www.mercedes-benz.com
http://www.daimler.com
H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or Editorial office
disposal.
You are welcome to forward any queries or
! Notes on material damage alert you to suggestions you may have regarding this
dangers that could lead to damage to your Owner's Manual to the technical documenta-
vehicle. tion team at the following address:
Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,
i These symbols indicate useful instruc-
70546 Stuttgart, Germany
tions or further information that could be ©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated
helpful to you.
or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
X This symbol designates an instruc- without written permission from Daimler AG.
tion you must follow.
X Several consecutive symbols indi-
cate an instruction with several Vehicle manufacturer
steps.
(Y page) This symbol tells you where you Daimler AG
can find further information on a Mercedesstraße 137
topic. 70327 Stuttgart
YY This symbol indicates a warning or Germany
an instruction that is continued on
the next page.
Display This text indicates a message on
the multifunction/COMAND dis-
play.
Parts of the software in the vehicle are pro-
tected by copyright © 2005
The FreeType Project
http://www.freetype.org. All rights
reserved.

As at 31.10.2012
 GLK-Class
Owner's Manual

É2045844283Z102ZËÍ
2045844283Z102
GLK-Class

Order no. 65150801 02 Part no. 2045844283Z102 Edition ÄJ 2013-Ka